=== 201.01 Emergency Response Updated 10-2016 ===
EMERGENCY RESPONSE
Page 1 of 4
201.01
Rev. 10/16
CHAPTER II

OPERATIONS

SUBJECT 1

Responses

TOPIC 1

Emergency Response

A.

PURPOSE
This Procedure provides guidelines for responses to emergency situations.

B.

POLICY
1.

All emergency responses shall be made without delay. The Officer is
responsible for the prompt response of all members. Lights and sirens
shall be used at all times.

2.

Non-emergency responses shall be made without delay, however lights
and sirens should not be used.

C.

3.

Companies shall respond as dispatched. Any response made outside of
normal dispatch procedure must be justified in writing.

4.

Any time equipment falls from an apparatus; the apparatus shall
immediately stop and retrieve the equipment.

EMERGENCY RESPONSES (Reference Section 703.09 Dispatch ProceduresApparatus Responses by Incident Type).
1.

Structure Fires- (One-Alarm and Extra Alarm Responses)

2.

Still Alarms – The basic reduced fire response of a fire emergency that is
deemed minor upon receipt of the initial call. The incident will be
upgraded to a full one-alarm assignment upon arrival at the scene of a
Fire Company reporting a “working’ fire, the Incident Commander
determines it is necessary, or due to multiple reports and/or additional
information confirming a fire.

3.

Fire Alarm Drops – A reduced fire response caused by the activation of a
fire alarm, pull station, general alarm or smoke detector. The incident will
be upgraded to a full one-alarm assignment upon arrival at the scene of a

EMERGENCY RESPONSE
Page 2 of 4
201.01
Rev. 10/16
Fire Company reporting a “working’ fire, the Incident Commander
determines it is necessary, or due to multiple reports and/or additional
information confirming a fire.
4.

EMS Incidents

5.

Special Operations Incidents- (Bomb, Hazardous Material, River
Emergencies, Entrapments, Collapse, Signal 500, Bio Hazard, Etc.)

6.

Specials- (Stuck Elevators, Vehicle Struck a Building, Fumes, Fire
Reported Out, Etc.)

7.

Vehicle Fires

8.

Single Resource Dispatches- (Outdoor Fires, Lock In / Out, Minor Gas
Spills, CO Alarms, Salvage, Wires, Water Leaks, Etc.)

9.

Mutual Aid Responses
NOTE: All fire dispatches to structures, One-Alarms, Still Alarms, and
Fire Alarms, Reference Section 203.01 Structure Fires, for procedures
and responsibilities at these incidents.

D.

NON-EMERGENCY RESPONSES
NOTE: Respond to these dispatches without lights and sirens.
1.

Advancing to Another Company’s Quarters
a. When advanced to another Company's quarters, the Company so
advanced, shall respond to all alarms assigned to the Company to
which they have been advanced, but shall retain their own
Company designation.
Example:

Truck 29 is advanced to Truck 18's quarters for a fire in Mt.
Washington. Trucks 18, Truck 31 & RAT 23 were on the
first alarm. After arriving in Truck 18’s first alarm running
area, District 4 transmits the second alarm; Truck 29 would
be dispatched on the second alarm rather than Truck 3 as
indicated by the CAD Computer prior to the “move-up”.

Note: Once recommended for advancement (move-up), the Company
advanced, in this case Truck 29, replaces the Company they

EMERGENCY RESPONSE
Page 3 of 4
201.01
Rev. 10/16
are advancing to, Truck 18, in the CAD Computer.
b. While en-route to an advance assignment (move-up), the Officer shall
notify the Fire Alarm Dispatcher when the Company is in the first
alarm running area of the Company to which they are advancing.
c. If dispatched to an emergency incident while advancing, respond
appropriately and without delay.
2.

Hydrant Runs
a. Hydrant Struck Dispatch- Complete a F-57 Hydrant report on all
damaged hydrants and notify police.
b. Hydrant Leaking- Shut off hydrant, if unable to, notify Water Works.
Complete a F-57 if necessary. Note: If there is a traffic cone on
top of the hydrant, Water Works may be working on the system.
Confirm with Water Works through Dispatch before shutting off.

3.

High Risk -Police Stand-by
Report to nearest firehouse as directed by the appropriate District
Chief or Fire Alarm Dispatcher.

E.

DISCOVERING A FIRE OR OTHER EMERGENCY WHILE EN-ROUTE TO
AN EMERGENCY
1.

Fire Company Discovering a Fire or Emergency
a. If a structure fire is discovered en-route to another emergency, the
Officer shall notify the Fire Alarm Dispatcher and take appropriate
action at the scene of the discovered structure fire.
b. The Fire Alarm Dispatcher shall dispatch a Company to fill in for the
Company (from the original dispatch), plus dispatch the OneAlarm complement for the fire discovered en route.
c. If an emergency other than a structure fire is discovered en route to
another emergency, the Officer shall evaluate the situation, take
appropriate action, and notify the Fire Alarm Dispatcher.

EMERGENCY RESPONSE
Page 4 of 4
201.01
Rev. 10/16

2.

EMS or Other Vehicle Discovering An Emergency
If an emergency is discovered en-route to another emergency, the member
in charge shall evaluate the situation, take appropriate action, and notify
the Fire Alarm Dispatcher.

F.

Equipment Falling From Apparatus or Vehicles En-Route
Whenever equipment, including personal protective clothing, falls off an
apparatus or vehicle en route to an emergency or returning, the apparatus or other
vehicle shall immediately be stopped and the equipment recovered.


=== 201.02 Persons Riding on Fire Apparatus ===
PERSONS RIDING ON FIRE APPARATUS
201.02
Page 1 of 4
Rev. 3/15

CHAPTER II OPERATIONS
SUBJECT 1 Responses
TOPIC 2
Persons Riding on Fire Apparatus
A.

PURPOSE
1. The Ride-along Policy of the Cincinnati Fire Department (CFD) is designed to
promote mutual understanding between the community and the CFD. The Department
wishes to lead in this endeavor by allowing for professional development with other
public service providers; providing assistance in the fulfillment of various educational
requirements; ensuring security for our stations, personnel and the public; and
providing a means for the CFD to make more informational contact with the public.
2. To provide for the safety of citizens through verification of riders backgrounds.
3. To enhance safety by requiring all passengers on fire apparatus to be seated and belted
at all times when the vehicle is in motion. Riding while standing or riding on back
steps is specifically prohibited.
4. To enhance safety by requiring caution to be used when disembarking the apparatus
and assuring clearance before apparatus movement.

B.

POLICY
1. All Personnel that are not sworn uniformed members of the Cincinnati Fire
Department must obtain the permission of the Fire Chief to ride fire apparatus,
through the Operations Division. Only the Fire Chief may grant exceptions to any of
the ride-along guidelines; such as Box 13 members, Members of Council and other
City Employees.

.
2.

All Personnel when riding apparatus will comply with the following provisions of the
NFPA 1500 Standard on Fire Department Occupational Safety and Health Program:

3. All Personnel will use extreme caution when disembarking the apparatus.

PERSONS RIDING ON FIRE APPARATUS
201.02
Page 2 of 4
Rev. 3/15

C.

RIDE-ALONG PROCEDURE
1.
Ride-along candidates shall fill out an Application Form 22 to ride with CFD. A
blank application is available on the “all CFD drive” in the “ride-along” folder. The
application will include general and background information, along with the purpose
of the ride-along. The completed application must be notarized with a raised notary
seal and presented to a District Chief for review and approval by an Assistant Chief
and the Fire Chief or his Designee prior to the ride -along. Along with the application,
the applicant must also present a copy of a recent (less than 1 week old) criminal
background check on a Police Department letterhead and police signature.
2.
Once approved, the candidate shall report to the Operations Division to sign a release
of liability waiver and Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA)
Security/ Confidentiality Agreement. A copy of the completed application, waiver,
and a digital picture of the individual will be placed on the “all CFD drive”, “ridealong” folder.
3.
Riders approved by Fire Administration, shall coordinate with the Operations (OPS)
Division to schedule the ride-along. OPS shall make every effort to accommodate a
ride-along without compromising the safety and efficiency of CFD operations.
4.
Fire Companies shall be limited to no more than one ride-along at a time.
5.
Riders shall be limited to one ride-along per application unless otherwise approved by
the Operations Division.
6.
Times shall be limited to 1000 to 2200 unless otherwise approved by the Fire Chief.
7.
Riders must be at least 18 years of age.
8.
Riders shall show photo identification to the Company Officer when arriving at the
scheduled ride-along. The Officer must also verify the individual’s application,
waiver and picture on the “all CFD drive” in the “ride-along” folder prior to allowing
them to board the apparatus.
9.
Fire Officers shall review the ride-along policy with all riders upon their arrival at the
Station.
10.
Rider’s name and other information shall be entered into the Company Desk Diary.
11.
Acceptable ride-along clothing shall be, clean pants/slacks, clean shirt/blouse, clean
shoes/boots, and a clean jacket without non-service related patches.
12.
Riders shall remain outside all hazard zones as directed by the Officer In-charge.
13.
Riders may not discuss confidential information or incident information with
bystanders or the media.
14.
Company Officers have the authority to terminate a ride-along at any time, at the
Officer’s discretion, for safety violations, inappropriate behavior or actions.
15.
CFD shall terminate all ride-alongs when the national terrorist threat level reaches or
exceeds ORANGE.

PERSONS RIDING ON FIRE APPARATUS
201.02
Page 3 of 4
Rev. 3/15

D.

ENSURING ALL PERSONS ARE SECURED
1.
Whenever apparatus moves, it is the responsibility of the Company Officer or
person in charge to ensure all members are seated and belted.
2.
Each member will raise their hand after the seat belt has been fastened and will
keep it raised until the apparatus moves forward for the Officer’s inspection.
3.
Prior to any apparatus movement, the Officer will make visual contact with every
member riding on the apparatus to see that each member has their arm raised.
4.
Apparatus drivers will not move apparatus until receiving the OK from the
Officer.
5.
The Officer will not give the driver permission to move the apparatus until all
members have verified their seat belts have been fastened.
6.
On emergency responses that require turn out gear, members will don all personal
protective equipment minus the SCBA prior to sitting and belting.
7.
On non-emergency responses and responses that do not require personal
protective equipment, the personal protective equipment will be properly stowed
on board prior to sitting and belting.
8.
When the Company receives dispatch while in an “available on radio” status for
emergency response that requires personal protective equipment, members
SHALL wait until apparatus is completely stopped to don their personal protective
equipment at the scene. The Officer may stop the apparatus at dispatch and have
all members don their personal protective equipment. Apparatus will not move
until after all members are seated and belted.
9.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES WILL THE OFFICER ALLOW ANY
MEMBER TO DON PERSONAL PROTECTIVE FIRE EQUIPMENT WHILE
THE APPARATUS IS MOVING. Standing while riding shall be specifically
prohibited. All persons riding on fire apparatus shall be seated in approved riding
positions and shall be secured to the vehicle by seat belts at any time the vehicle is
in motion.
10.
RIDING ON TAILSTEPS, SIDESTEPS, RUNNING BOARDS, OR IN ANY
OTHER EXPOSED POSITION SHALL BE SPECIFICALLY PROHIBITED.

PERSONS RIDING ON FIRE APPARATUS
201.02
Page 4 of 4
Rev. 3/15

E.

DISEMBARKING THE APPARATUS
1.
2.

3.

4.

All personnel should use extreme when disembarking the apparatus, no attempt
should be made to disembark until the vehicle is completely stopped.
Personnel getting off the apparatus should be aware of the condition of the ground
where they intend to step. Many injuries are associated with twisted ankles and
knees from stepping in a hole or on the curb when disembarking the apparatus.
Personnel should assure themselves and equipment is clear of the apparatus in
case of movement. Only after this assurance, are personnel to close the apparatus
door.
Drivers are not to move the apparatus until all doors are shut, assuring that
personnel are clear of the apparatus.


=== 201.04 PUCO Notification ===
PUCO Notification
Section 201.04
Rev.8/08
Page 1 of 4
Chapter
Subject
Topic 4

II
Operations
1
Responses
Notification of PUCO of Hazmat Incidents

Subject
A. The Public Utilities Commission of Ohio (PUCO) is responsible for regulating the
transportation of hazardous materials and hazardous waste in Ohio. Their authority
covers all ground transportation by highway or rail, and also the regulation of
facilities which ship, receive, or transfer hazardous materials.
B. The Cincinnati Fire Department has a Memorandum of Understanding (MOU) with
PUCO. This MOU outlines when notifications will be made to PUCO
Purpose
A. To promote the safe transportation of hazardous materials within Ohio and to foster
cooperation between the PUCO and local emergency response agencies.
Policy
A. The Cincinnati Fire Division has agreed to notify PUCO for incidents involving the
transportation of hazardous materials or at a facility engaged in the transportation of
hazardous materials.
B PUCO should be immediately notified in the following circumstances by calling the
Incident Report Line: 800-642-3443 or 614-644-5479
1. Any fire, spill, or release of hazardous cargo while in transportation or at a
facility which ships, receives, or transfers hazardous materials.
2. Vehicle accidents involving transportation of hazardous materials.
3. Any time the incident commander needs PUCO assistance or advice regarding
an active incident.
C. Company level officers should request response of a District Fire Chief if notification
of the PUCO is needed.
D. During normal business hours the PUCO may be contacted by calling 614-466-0351.
This line should be used for non-emergency situations.
1. When a discrepancy is noted in the marking or identification of vehicle or
contents to include placards, labels, stencils, or shipping papers (not related to
active incident).
2. Conditions noted during routine fire inspections which may violate hazardous
material regulations should be referred through the ESS Bureau who will make
contact with PUCO if necessary.
3. Questions regarding state and federal hazardous materials regulations should be
relayed through channels to the ESS Bureau.
Attached to this Procedure is a copy of the MOU and an information sheet provided by the
PUCO. All fire companies and staff are to add the “Hazard Incident Report Line” telephone
numbers from the information sheet to their emergency contact telephone lists. Outside of
normal hours and other times that this line is not staffed your call will be answered by a
voicemail system. This system will automatically page a PUCO representative who will return
your call, so be prepared to give a short description of the incident and a return telephone
number.

PUCO Notification
Section 201.04
Rev.8/08
Page 2 of 4
For Use Only By State and Local Emergency Service and Law Enforcement Agencies

PUCO
Hazmat Incident
Report Line
24 Hours
800-642-3443
or
614-644-5479
Please Contact The PUCO Hazmat Incident Report Line Immediately In The Event Of The
Following:








Traffic accidents or incidents involving trucks transporting hazmat
Derailments or incidents involving trains transporting hazmat
Hazmat spills or incidents at trucking company terminals or rail road yards
Transportation related spills or incidents at companies that ship hazmat
Abandoned or illegally parked trucks or trailers carrying hazmat
Spills or incidents involving hazardous waste transport (highway or rail)
Accidents or incidents where the investigating officer requests PUCO assistance
Your Call Will Be Returned and PUCO Will Respond Based On The Situation and the
Availability Of Staff
Call The PUCO Hazmat Division During Regular Business Hours @ 614-466-0351 For:







Complaints about hazmat trucking companies, drivers, or equipment
Questions about state and federal hazardous materials transport regulations
PUCO Hazmat Training Grants
Hazmat highway routing
Hazardous materials or hazardous waste transporter permits

PUCO Notification
Section 201.04
Rev.8/08
Page 3 of 4

MEMORANDUM OF UNDERSTANDING
BETWEEN
THE CINCINNATI FIRE DIVISION
AND
THE PUBLIC UTILITIES COMMISSION OF OHIO

This agreement is made and entered into by and between the Cincinnati Fire Division and the
Public Utilities Commission of Ohio in order to promote the safe transportation of hazardous
materials and the effective enforcement of the Hazardous Materials Regulations, as adopted by
the Public Utilities Commission of Ohio.
1.

The Cincinnati Fire Division and the Public Utilities Commission of Ohio (PUCO) agree
to establish a joint inspection program to inspect vehicles transporting hazardous
materials into or through the City of Cincinnati and facilities involved in the
transportation, offering for transportation, loading, unloading or storage incidental to
transportation of hazardous materials for compliance with state and local hazardous
materials routing restrictions, the Hazardous Materials Regulations and the Federal Motor
Carrier Safety Rules.

2.

The Cincinnati Fire Division agrees to provide timely notification to the PUCO regarding
an incident or accident involving the transportation of hazardous materials within the
jurisdiction of the Cincinnati Fire Division. This notification shall take place whenever
the Cincinnati Fire Division responds to an incident or accident involving hazardous
material on the public highways or to a facility engaged in the transportation, offering for
transportation, loading, unloading or storage incidental to transportation of hazardous
materials.

3.

The PUCO will provide to the Cincinnati Fire Division a telephone number for
immediate notification to the PUCO of any incident or accident involving the
transportation of hazardous materials within the jurisdiction of the Cincinnati Fire
Division.

4.

The PUCO agrees to share with the Cincinnati Fire Division investigative reports from
any incident or accident involving the transportation of hazardous materials within the
jurisdiction of the Cincinnati Fire Division.

PUCO Notification
Section 201.04
Rev.8/08
Page 4 of 4

5.

1
The Cincinnati Fire Division agrees to provide the Commission with referrals consistent
with standard operating procedure of the Cincinnati Fire Division whenever the
Cincinnati Fire Division has reason to believe that it has observed a violation of the
Hazardous Materials Regulations during routine inspections conducted by the Cincinnati
Fire Division of facilities involved in the transportation, offering for transportation,
loading, unloading or storage incidental to transportation of hazardous materials.

6.

The PUCO agrees to investigate any referrals of potential violations discovered by the
Cincinnati Fire Division during routine inspections of facilities involved in the
transportation, offering for transportation, loading, unloading or storage incidental to
transportation of hazardous materials and to share with the Cincinnati Fire Division any
investigative reports resulting from referrals.

7.

The PUCO agrees to give due consideration to hazardous materials grant requests from
the Cincinnati Fire Division to provide funds necessary to implement this agreement,
including but not limited to funds for the training of Cincinnati Fire Division personnel in
the Hazardous Materials Regulations and funds for hazardous materials emergency
response training.

This agreement shall become effective when executed by both parties and shall remain in effect
unless terminated by either party by giving notice in writing.

2


=== 202.01 Incident Command System Update 10-14 Completed ===
INCIDENT COMMAND SYSTEM
202.01
Page 1 of 24
CHAPTER II Operations

Rev. 10/14

SUBJECT 2 Command System
TOPIC 1
A.

PURPOSE
1.

B.

C.

To describe the Incident Command System organization and components.

POLICY
1.

The Incident Command System, as described in this chapter, shall be used at the
scene of ALL EMERGENCY OPERATIONS.

2.

The Incident Commander shall use system components to build an organizational
structure capable of controlling and coordinating incident activities.

3.

The span of control for any supervisor at an emergency scene should be three (3)
to seven (7) subordinates, with a span of control of five (5) being the norm.

OBJECTIVE
1.

D.

Incident Command System

To provide a Command system capable of commanding any number of Fire
Companies or other emergency response units operating at an emergency incident.

SAFETY
1.

Unit accountability, as provided by the Incident Command System, affords a
measure of safety.

2.

The Safety Officer position within the Command Staff shall be filled at the scene
of all one-alarm or greater fires, hazardous material responses, river emergencies,
entrapments and technical rescues.

3.

A Safety Officer shall be appointed at any other time the incident presents a high
degree of hazard to operating personnel or deemed necessary by the Incident
Commander.

INCIDENT COMMAND SYSTEM
202.01
Page 2 of 24
E.

MODULAR ORGANIZATION
1.

F.

Rev. 10/14

The Incident Command System organizational structure develops in a modular
fashion based upon the type, and size incident. The organization's staff builds,
from the top down, with responsibility placed initially on the Incident
Commander. As the need exist, four separate Sections can be developed; each
with several subordinate units which may be established. The specific
organization structure established for any given incident will be based upon
management needs of the incident. If one individual can simultaneously manage
all major functional areas, no further organization is required. If one or more of
the areas require independent management, an individual is named to be
responsible for that area.

MANAGEABLE SPAN OF CONTROL
1.

Safety factors, as well as, sound management planning will both influence and
dictate span-of-control considerations. In general, within the Incident Command
System, the span-of-control of any individual with emergency management
responsibility should range from three (3) to seven (7), with a span-of-control of
five (5) being established as a general rule of thumb. Of course, there will always
be exceptions, but these exceptions will usually occur at the task level. For
example, at a Hazardous Materials incident there may be a need to evacuate a
densely populated area, many police or fire personnel could work under a single
supervisor systematically notifying residents of the danger. But even here, setting
up areas of responsibilities and subdividing would be preferred.

2.

The kind of incident, the nature of the task, hazard and safety factors, and
distances between elements will influence span-of-control considerations. An
important consideration in span-of-control is to anticipate change and prepare for
it. This is especially true during rapid buildup of the organization when good
management is made difficult because of too many reporting elements.

INCIDENT COMMAND SYSTEM
202.01
Page 3 of 24
G.

ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE

Rev. 10/14

1.

The Incident Command System has five major functional areas, which are further
subdivided by subordinate units working for Section Chiefs.

2.

The Command system is organized, as illustrated below:

Incident Command System

Incident
Commander

Operations

3.

H.

Planning

Logistics

Finance

Because of it’s modular structure, the Incident Command System is equally
applicable to small incidents, normal operations, and large scale emergencies.

INCIDENT COMMANDER
1.

The person in overall command of the incident is called the Incident Commander.

2.

The Incident Commander establishes incident strategy and develops a plan of
action to meet the strategy.

3.

Other functional areas are established based on incident requirements. If the
Incident Commander does not assign someone to the various functions on the
Incident Command System Organizational Chart, the Incident Commander is
responsible for the unassigned functions.

4.

The highest ranking fire officer on the scene will assume the duties of Incident
Commander, except that Company Officers have the option of assuming
Command from another Company Officer of lower rank, or deferring command
transfer until a Chief Officer arrives.

INCIDENT COMMAND SYSTEM
202.01
Page 4 of 24
Rev. 10/14
5.

I.

The radio designation for the Incident Commander is "Command". All
communications to the fire alarm dispatcher shall be channeled through the
Incident Commander (Command), unless their urgency dictates otherwise. All
communications to the Fire Alarm Dispatcher made by members other than the
incident Commander must be pre-authorized by Command, or justified due to
imminent hazards.

ESTABLISHING COMMAND
1.

The Incident Commander is designated as "Command" whether manned by the
Fire Chief, or a Fire Fighter assigned as an acting officer.

2.

The term Command identifies:
The Incident Commander
The Command Post
The Command Function
The term "Command' eliminates confusion during Command transfers. Operating
units may not remember who assumed Command, but they must recognize the
importance of orders being issued by "Command" and the need to communicate
"Through channels" to "Command".

3.

Three command modes are identified for use by Company Officers arriving at the
scene prior to a Chief Officer:
NOTHING SHOWING MODE
This is a Mobile Command Mode. The Company Officer is in Command, while
investigating the situation. Command is maintained via the portable radio on a
fireground channel. The apparatus location is considered the temporary command
post.
FAST ATTACK MODE
This too is a Mobile Command Mode. The Company Officer is in Command,
while taking action with company members to stabilize the incident. Command is
maintained via the portable radio on a fireground channel. The apparatus location
is considered the temporary command post.

INCIDENT COMMAND SYSTEM
202.01
Page 5 of 24
COMMAND MODE

Rev. 10/14

The Command Mode requires a stationary Command Post, usually on the exterior.
This mode is used by Company Officers in situations of large proportions, during
unusually hazardous operations. The Command Mode must be established by
stating the assigned company, position of the command post, and the word
"Command".
Regardless of the mode of operation, there must ALWAYS be someone in
"Command".
The three "Command Modes" apply only to Company level operations.
Command Officers (Chief Officers) DO NOT have a "Mobile Command" option.
Chief Officers must assume the "Command Mode" utilizing a stationary
Command Post whenever a situation requires a one alarm or greater response to
handle the incident.
Command mode "Command" is established by giving the Unit designation,
location of the command post, and the word "Command". This transmission will
be made on the Command Fireground Channel:
For example: "District 1"
"Main Street"
"Command"
This communication establishes that District 1 is in Command, and the Command
Post is located on Main Street. If the Command Post is established within a
building, the building name or address will be substituted for the street name.
For Example: "District 1"
"Westin Lobby"
"Command"
Establishing Command inside the Westin Hotel lobby.
Command must be established, but not necessarily communicated to Dispatch and
on-scene units when a less than full one alarm response is needed to resolve the
incident.

INCIDENT COMMAND SYSTEM
202.01
Page 6 of 24
Rev. 10/14
As higher-ranking Chief Officers arrive, they will assign previous Incident
Commanders and other Chief Officers to positions that may be mobile.
4.

There are two important considerations when placing the Command Post:
a.

Place the first due in District Chief car as close to the building as possible
without interfering with apparatus placement. This will aid in the ability
to maximize the use of the SCBA monitoring computer.

b.

Ideally, the position chosen will offer a view of two sides of the building.

The first consideration of parking out of the way of apparatus placement, MUST
ALWAYS be observed. The second consideration of placement, where two sides
of the building can be viewed is USUALLY good practice. There is a distinct
advantage in being able to see the effects of tactical decisions. However, there are
times when seeing the scene, overwhelms the Incident Commander, causing the
Commander to focus on the visible, while failing to deal with the not so visible.
Generally speaking the larger and more complex the situation, the farther away the
Command Post should be. Isolation from the distractions of the scene can be an
important factor in developing good action plans.
J.

TRANSFERRING COMMAND
1.

"A good basic Command transfer rule for Company Officers is:
"If you can't improve the quality of Command, don't transfer it."

2.

The Incident Command System allows flexibility in the area of Command
Transfer with the following options available to later arriving Chief Officers:
The higher ranking Officer CAN assume the position of:
a.

Incident Commander allowing a lower ranking officer to continue as
Operations Section Chief.

b.

Incident Commander and Operations Section Chief, returning the
Company Officer to the Company. The lower ranking Chief Officer or
Company Officer can also be assigned as a Division or Group
Commander.

INCIDENT COMMAND SYSTEM
202.01
Page 7 of 24
Rev. 10/14

3.

K.

c.

Incident Commander/Operations Section Chief, assigning the previous
Commander to the Planning Section, thereby utilizing their knowledge of
what has already happened.

d.

Incident Commander, assigning another member as Operations Section
Chief, and the previous commander to another Section, Logistics or
Finance.

The Fire Chief or higher ranking Chief Officer cannot permit a lower ranking
Officer to retain Command while they are on the scene. The highest ranking on
scene Officer is responsible for the outcome, whether or not Command was
assumed. The separation of the Incident Commander and Operations Section
allows this Chief Officer to retain ultimate authority, while lower ranking officers
coordinate and control operating forces.

COMMAND STAFF
1.

Three Command Staff positions are identified for use in the Incident Command
System organization, as illustrated below:
Incident Command System

Incident
Commander
Safety

Liaison

Public Information

Operations

Planning

Logistics

Finance

Command Staff positions are established to assume responsibility for key activities that
are not a part of the line organization. Command Staff positions can be organized where
all Command Staff positions report directly to the Incident Commander; or they can
function under a Command Staff Officer, where all Command Staff positions report to
the Command Staff Officer who, in turn, reports to the Incident Commander. This
consolidation under a Command Staff Officer is done, only under the most challenging
situations, to reduce the number of people reporting to the Incident Commander.

INCIDENT COMMAND SYSTEM
202.01
Page 8 of 24
2.

INFORMATION OFFICER

Rev. 10/14

The Information Officer's function is to develop accurate and complete
information regarding incident cause, size, current situation, resources committed,
and other matters of general interest. The Information Officer will normally be
the point of contact for the media, and other agencies which desire information
directly from the incident. The Information Officer will usually be located at a
safe stationary position, in or near the command post. Most communication with
"Command" will be face to face.
3.

SAFETY OFFICER
The Safety Officer's function at the incident is to assess hazardous and unsafe
situations and advise the Incident Commander of such conditions. This Officer
develops measures to assure the safest possible conditions for operating units.
The Safety Officer has emergency authority to stop and/or prevent unsafe acts.
The Safety Officer should establish control zones, collapse zones and no-entry
zones. The Safety Officer should monitor all radio transmissions and stay alert to
transmission barriers that could result in missed, unclear, or incomplete
communication. The Safety Officer function is mobile, acting as a consultant to
Division, Group, or Branch commanders, but reporting to the Incident
Commander. The Safety Officer should make sure that incident scene rehab is
established. He should monitor for the need for Critical Incident Stress
intervention management and notify the Incident Commander if needed. The
Safety Officer shall ensure that the RAT Team is available and ready for
deployment. The Safety Officer is responsible for the post extinguishment air
monitoring and structural integrity.

4.

LIAISON OFFICER
The Liaison Officer's function is to be a point of contact for representatives from
assisting agencies. Representatives from assisting agencies are coordinated
through the Liaison Officer. Agency representatives assigned to an incident
should have authority to speak on all matters for their agency.

L.

UNIFIED COMMAND STRUCTURE
1.

The need for a Unified Command is brought about because:
a.

Incidents have no regard for jurisdictional boundaries. Wildland fires,
floods, tornados, earthquakes, etc., usually involve several jurisdictions
and agencies.

b.

Individual agency responsibility and authority is normally legally confined
to a single jurisdiction.

INCIDENT COMMAND SYSTEM
202.01
Page 9 of 24
Rev. 10/14
2.

3.

The concept of Unified Command simply means that all agencies who have a
jurisdictional responsibility at a multi-jurisdictional incident, contribute to the
process of:
a.

Determining overall incident objectives.

b.

Selection of Strategies.

c.

Ensuring that joint planning for tactical activities will be accomplished.

d.

Ensuring that integrated tactical operations are conducted.

e.

Making maximum use of all assigned resources.

The proper selection of participants to work within a Unified Command structure
will depend upon:
a.

The location of the incident, the political jurisdictions involved.

b.

The kind of incident, which functional agencies of the jurisdictions are
required.

4.

A Unified Command structure could consist of a key responsible official from
each jurisdiction in a multi-jurisdictional situation or it could consist of several
functional departments within a single political jurisdiction.

5.

Common objectives and strategies on major multi-jurisdictional incidents should
be written. These objectives and strategies then guide development of the action
plan.
UNDER A UNIFIED COMMAND STRUCTURE, THE IMPLEMENTATION
OF THE ACTION PLAN WILL BE DONE UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A
SINGLE INDIVIDUAL ---- THE OPERATIONS SECTION COMMANDER.
The Operations Chief will normally be from the agency that has the greatest
jurisdictional involvement. Designation of the Operations Chief must be agreed
upon by all agencies having jurisdictional and functional responsibilities at the
incident.

INCIDENT COMMAND SYSTEM
202.01
Page 10 of 24
Rev. 10/14
NOTE:
This idea of Unified Command seems to violate the principle of one highly visible
commander. On closer examination it becomes obvious that there is still one commander
(Operations Chief) handling all tactical operations. The Unified Command Structure
does appreciate the need for a central command, but recognizes the problems associated
with multi-agency and/or multi-jurisdictional incidents.
M.

N.

OPERATIONS SECTION COMMANDER
1.

When the Incident Commander assigns the Operations Section to another
member, that member is responsible for the direct management of all incident
tactical activities. Tactical operations at the incident include all activities which
are directed toward reduction of the immediate hazard, establishing situation
control, and restoration of normal operations.

2.

If the Incident Commander does not assign another individual to the position of
Operations Section Commander, the Incident Commander is responsible for
management of incident tactical activities.

3.

When the operations section is assigned as a separate section, the radio
designation for the Operations Section Commander shall be "Operations".

OPERATIONS SECTION - SUBORDINATE UNITS
1.

COMPREHENSIVE RESOURCE MANAGEMENT
Resources may be managed in three different ways, depending on the needs of the
incident. This management of resources has a pronounced effect on the number
of units that can be properly managed.
Single Resources
Single resources are individual units, Engine Company, Ladder Company, Medic
Unit, Heavy Rescue Squad, Bulldozer, Helicopter, etc. A Single Resource is the
equipment, plus the required individuals to properly utilize the equipment.

INCIDENT COMMAND SYSTEM
202.01
Page 11 of 24
Rev. 10/14
Task Force
A Task Force is any combination of resources which can be temporarily
assembled for a specific mission. All resource elements within a Task Force must
have common communications and a member in charge. Task Forces should be
established to meet specific tactical needs, but demobilized as single resources.
The most common Task Force used by the Cincinnati Fire Division consist of 2
Engine Companies, and a Ladder Company.
Strike Teams
Strike Teams are a set number of resources of the same kind and type, which have
an established minimum number of personnel. Strike Teams must always have a
member in charge, and will have common communications among resource
elements.
The Cincinnati Fire Department recognizes the following Strike Teams:
Engine Co. Strike Team

3 Engine Companies

EMS Strike Team

3 Medic Units

The use of Strike Teams and Task Forces is encouraged, wherever possible, to
maximize the use of resources, reduce the management control of a large number
of single resources, and reduce the communications load. Manning is assumed to
be four (4) or more fire fighters per Company.
2.

DIVISIONS AND GROUPS
Divisions and Groups are established during an incident when the number of
resources (Single, Task Forces, and Strike Teams) exceeds the span-of-control of
the Operations Section Commander.
Divisions are normally established to divide an incident into geographical areas of
operation.
Groups are normally established to divide the incident into functional areas of
operation.

INCIDENT COMMAND SYSTEM
202.01
Page 12 of 24
Rev. 10/14
The use of the two terms is not essential, but can be a useful management tool
when dividing the incident.
Incident Command System

Incident
Commander
Safety

Liaison

Public Information

Operations

Planning

Staging

Div. A

Div. B

Div. C

Div. D

Res. & Evac
Group

Logistics

Finance

INCIDENT COMMAND SYSTEM
202.01
Page 13 of 24

Rev. 10/14
3.

BRANCHES
Branches may be established during an incident for the following reasons:


When the number of Divisions/Groups exceed the recommended
span-of-control for the Operations Chief.



Reorganization into branches reduces the span-of-control to within
acceptable limits in a large scale operation.

When this happens, the Operations Chief should designate a Branch Structure,
and allocate divisions/groups to the Branches, as shown below:

Incident Command System

Incident
Commander
Safety

Liaison

Public Information

Operations

Planning

Logistics

Finance

Staging

North West
Branch

Div. B

Div. A

Roof
Division

South East
Branch

Res. & Evac
Group

Div. C

Div. D

Salvage
Group

Ventilation
Group

INCIDENT COMMAND SYSTEM
202.01
Page 14 of 24
Rev. 10/14


The second reason for forming branches is when the nature of the incident
calls for a functional Branch Structure. For example, a Hazardous
Materials evacuation may require substantial Police assistance. In this
case, a Functional Branch may be established for the Police, but under the
direction of the Operations Section Commander. A Hazardous Materials
incident with multiple injuries may involve a large scale medical effort
making the establishment of a Medical Branch a valuable option.

Incident Command System

Incident
Commander

Safety

Liaison

Public Information

Operations

Planning

Logistics

Finance

Staging

North West
Branch

Div. B

Div. A

Roof
Division

South East
Branch

Res. & Evac
Group

Div. C

Div. D

Salvage
Group

Medical
Branch

Ventilation
Group

Triage

Treatment

Police Branch

Evac

Traffic

INCIDENT COMMAND SYSTEM
202.01
Page 15 of 24
Rev. 10/14
4.

STAGING
Staging is usually subordinate to the Operations Section, but could be assigned to
the Logistics Section. More information regarding staging is contained in Section
202.03.

O.

P.

PLANNING SECTION CHIEF
1.

When the Incident Commander assigns the Planning Section to another member,
that member is responsible for the collection, evaluation and dissemination of
tactical information about the incident. This section maintains information on the
current status, and attempts to forecast what is about to happen in the situation.
The status of resources assigned to the incident is tracked through the Planning
Section. This Section is also responsible for the preparation and documentation of
action plans. The Planning Section has four primary units, and may have a
number of technical specialists to assist in evaluating the situation, and forecasting
requirements for additional resources.

2.

If the Incident Commander does not assign another individual to the position of
Planning Section Chief, the Incident Commander is responsible for planning
activities.

3.

When the Planning Section is assigned as a separate section, the radio designation
for the Planning Section Chief is "Planning". During most incidents, the Planning
Section Chief will be located in the Command Post, and will seldom
communicate via the radio.

PLANNING SECTION - SUBORDINATE UNITS
1.

RESOURCES UNIT
The Resources Unit (Restat) has the responsibility of maintaining the current
status of all resources. A status keeping system will be developed showing the
current location of all assigned resources, as well as their current status.

2.

SITUATION UNIT
The Situation Unit (Sitstat) is responsible for collecting, processing, and
organizing situation information; preparing situation summaries, and developing
projections, and forecasts of future events, related to the incident. The Situation
Unit will prepare maps and intelligence information for use in the Action Plan.
This Unit may also require expertise in the form of technical specialist.

INCIDENT COMMAND SYSTEM
202.01
Page 16 of 24
3.

DOCUMENTATION UNIT
The Documentation Unit is responsible for maintaining accurate and complete
incident files for legal, analytical, and historical purposes. The Documentation
Unit is maintained within the Planning Section, primarily because the unit has a
major responsibility toward the preparation of the Incident Action Plan, as well as
maintaining files on many records, which are developed as part of the overall
Command Post and planning function.

4.

DEMOBILIZATION UNIT
The Demobilization Unit develops a plan for releasing resources from the scene.
In large scale incidents this can be a critical function, returning scarce resources to
under protected areas. Even at the scene of multiple alarm fires, the releasing of
units in reverse order of response is not always the best practice. It may be
possible to bring fresh crews to the scene, returning exhausted crews on other
apparatus parked in staging.

Incident Command System

Incident
Commander
Safety

Liaison

Public Information

Operations

Planning

Staging

North West
Branch

Resources Unit
(Restat)
South East
Branch

Situation Unit
(Sitstat)

Logistics

Documentation Unit

Finance

Technical
Specialist

INCIDENT COMMAND SYSTEM
202.01
Page 17 of 24
Q.

R.

LOGISTICS SECTION CHIEF

Rev. 10/14

1.

When the Incident Commander assigns the Logistics Section to another member,
that member is responsible for the direct management of all incident support
needs. The Logistics Section orders resources from off-site locations. The
Logistics Section is more complicated during long term incidents where basic
human needs must also be met.

2.

If the Incident Commander does not assign another individual to the position of
Logistics Section Chief, the Incident Commander is responsible for the
procurement of needed off site materials.

3.

When the Logistics Section is assigned as a separate section, the radio designation
for the Logistics Section Chief is "Logistics". During most incidents, the
Logistics Section Chief will be located in the command post, and will seldom
communicate via the radio.

LOGISTICS SECTION - SUBORDINATE UNITS
1.

SUPPLY UNIT
The Supply Unit is responsible for ordering, receiving, and processing of all
resources requested by the Logistics Section Chief.

2.

COMMUNICATIONS UNIT
The Communications Unit in the Incident Command System has a major
responsibility for effective communications planning, due to the potential
multi-agency use of the Incident Command System. This is especially important
in determining required radio nets, establishing interagency frequencies, and
ensuring that maximum use is made of all assigned communications capabilities.
At large scale incidents requiring the institution of a Communications Unit, this
unit will establish a communications plan; manage communications equipment, in
addition to installing, procuring and maintaining the actual equipment. At
incidents where the formal Communications Unit is not established, pre-planned
resources will be used. All communications at the incident should be in PLAIN
ENGLISH. No codes should be used, and all communications should be confined
to essential messages.

INCIDENT COMMAND SYSTEM
202.01
Page 18 of 24
Rev. 10/14
Communications at the incident scene can include:
Fire Ground Talk Groups; within each talk group there are 16 channels that can be
utilized.
Command Channel


This channel should link: Incident Command, key staff members, Section
Chiefs, Branches, Divisions and Groups.

Tactical Channels


There may be several tactical channels. They may be established around
agencies, departments, geographical areas, or even specific functions.

Support Channels


Used to handle resource status changes and other non-tactical or
Command functions. (i.e.- Staging Channel)

Radios are the most common communications tool for emergency operations, but other
communications methods offer advantages, and should be considered during long term or
communications intensive situations. In addition to radios, the following means of
communication can be used at the scene:


face to face



messengers



telephones



public address systems



built in emergency communication systems

The best form of communications is face-to-face conversation, but running an entire
incident scene on face-to-face communications would be virtually impossible.
3. OTHER LOGISTICS UNITS
Some other units that may be established at the incident are:


Medical (for treatment of incident personnel)



Rehabilitation (Rehab)



Food



Facilities (sanitation, sleeping, etc.)



Maintenance (maintenance and refueling of equipment)

INCIDENT COMMAND SYSTEM
202.01
Page 19 of 24
Rev. 10/14
S.

FINANCE SECTION
1.

When the Incident Commander assigns the Finance Section to another member,
that member is responsible for providing financial services (renting or leasing
equipment, etc.).

2.

If the Incident Commander does not assign another individual to the position of
Finance Section Chief, the Incident Commander is responsible for management of
incident financial activities.

3.

The Finance Section will not be allocated radios, and therefore, does not have a
radio designation.

4.

This Section is seldom implemented. Many times, financial needs are handled
sufficiently by the Documentation Unit of the Planning Section.

5.

Possible Units under the Finance Section include:


Time Unit



Procurement Unit



Compensation/Claims Unit



Cost Unit

INCIDENT COMMAND SYSTEM
202.01
Page 20 of 24
Rev. 10/14
6.

Below is an organizational chart showing the Logistics and Finance Section.
Incident Command System

Incident
Commander
Safety

Liaison

Public Information

Operations

Planning

Logistics

Staging
Branch

Resources Unit
(Restat)

Communications
Unit

Time Unit

Branch or Group

Situation Unit
(Sitstat)

Ground Support
Unit

Cost Unit

Branch or Group

Documentation Unit

Supply
Unit

Procurement Unit

Technical
Specialist

Medical Unit

Compensation
Claims Unit

Demobilization
Unit

Facilities Unit

Food Unit

Finance

INCIDENT COMMAND SYSTEM
202.01
Page 21 of 24
T.

TECHNICAL SPECIALIST
1.

Rev. 10/14

Technical Specialist may be called upon, depending on the needs of the incident.
Their place on the organizational chart is usually within the Planning Section, but
they may function as part of another Planning Section Unit (e.g. a meteorologist
could be made part of the Situation Unit) or, Technical Specialist can become a
Unit of their own, reporting directly to the Planning Section Chief.
On occasion, a Technical Specialist could be assigned to another Section (e.g. a
chemist assigned to the Operations Section to give advice as to chemical reaction
or neutralization). If the need for a Technical Specialist's expertise is of short
duration, that person should be assigned to the Situation Unit. If the expertise
requires several persons and/or will be required for an extended period, it may be
advisable to establish a separate unit under the Planning Section.

2.

The incident will dictate the need for Technical Specialists. Below is a list of
some of the specialists that may be needed at an incident:


Chemist



Meteorologist



Physician



Health Physicist



Toxic Substance Specialist



Environmental Engineer



Structural Engineer

INCIDENT COMMAND SYSTEM
202.01
Page 22 of 24
Rev. 10/14
3. Below is an Incident organization chart showing the placement of various technical
specialists, within different sections.

Incident Command System

Incident
Commander

Safety

Liaison

Public Information

Operations

Planning

Environmental
Engineer

Logistics

Resources Unit
(Restat)
Situation Unit
(Sitstat)

Staging
Branch
Branch or Group

Documentation Unit

Branch or Group

Technical
Specialist
Health Physicist

Physician

Chemist

Demobilization
Unit

Finance

INCIDENT COMMAND SYSTEM
202.01
Page 23 of 24
Rev. 10/14

U.

EXTENDING THE INCIDENT COMMAND SYSTEM ORGANIZATION
1.

An Incident can be divided into separate incidents if the organization can not
fulfill incident span-of-control needs. This dividing usually involves a
geographical boundary, whether natural or political. The use of Branches,
Division, and Task Forces/Strike Teams should meet regional needs.
However, wildland fires, hazardous materials incidents, and natural disasters can
extend into many communities, resulting in the utilization of resources from
several communities, state, and federal agencies. In such cases, an Area
Command Authority (ACA) can be established dividing the incident into multiple
incidents. The Unified Command Structure will most likely be in effect in such
situations. If a Unified Command determines that the incident should be divided
into separate incidents, the following should be accomplished:
a.

An Area Command Authority (ACA) should be established. The existing
Unified Command members may continue as jurisdictional liaison
representatives to the Area Command Authority (ACA).

b.

A decision would be reached by the unified command on how best to
divide the incident. This could be done in several ways, depending on
terrain, political boundaries, current Branch Structure, etc.

c.

Incident Commanders, Command and General Staff would be selected for
each incident.

d.

Supporting organizations, facilities, locations, etc., would be designated.

e.

An appropriate time would be designated for establishing the separate
incidents with individual names.

f.

The Area Command Authority would be responsible to ensure that
jurisdictional objectives are being met through the respective incident
action plans, and that necessary procedures are established and functioning
to ensure inter-incident coordination on all matters.

INCIDENT COMMAND SYSTEM
202.01
Page 24 of 24

Rev. 10/14
2.

Below is an organization chart showing an Area Command Authority.

Area Command Authority
Area Command Authority

Incident Commander

Operations

Planning

Logistics

Finance

Incident Commander

Operations

Planning

Logistics

Finance

Incident Commander

Operations

Planning

Logistics

Finance

Incident Commander

Operations

Planning

Logistics

Finance


=== 202.02 Pre Planning ===
PRE-PLANNING
202.02
Page 1 of 10
CHAPTER II Operations
SUBJECT 2

Command

TOPIC

Pre-Planning

A.

2

Rev. 6/89

OBJECTIVE
To establish a standard pre-planning format for the Cincinnati Fire Division, including a
written outline and drawing using symbols.
To establish a formal policy requiring pre-plans for structures or groups of structures that
present special problems and/or a high degree of hazard to occupants or firefighters.

B.

POLICY
Pre-plans are required for buildings equipped with Fire Suppression Systems, high rise
buildings (as defined by the Cincinnati Fire Prevention Code), industrial complex or any
high hazard building.
Pre-plans shall include all important information specific to the building or complex, but
shall not address items covered under other topics in this manual. Establishing Standard
Operating Procedures is the first step in the situation evaluation (size-up). Pre-planning
is step two. Pre-plans should be a natural extension of Standard Operating Procedures.
For example, there is a written procedure for operations conducted in buildings protected
by sprinkler systems. These standard procedures should not be repeated in the pre-fire
plan, but any deviations from normal operations should be delineated. An important
feature of a good pre-plan is it's utility as a field use document. There is a tendency to
repeat SOP items unnecessarily and to include minor details. A pre-plan that is much
more than two double-spaced typewritten pages in outline form, plus drawing/drawings
tends to be useless.

PRE-PLANNING
202.02
Page 2 of 10
C.

SIZE-UP

Rev. 10/88

Size-up includes eight main categories or factors including:
1.

BUILDING

2.

FIRE

3.

OCCUPANCY

4.

LIFE HAZARD

5.

ARRANGEMENT

6.

RESOURCES

7.

ACTION

8.

SPECIAL CIRCUMSTANCES

Under these eight main categories, are many subcategories. Given the compressed time
element at the scene of an emergency, it is virtually impossible to consider all of the
contributing factors, evaluate their importance, and finally devise a plan of attack. Close
examination of these factors reveals that many factors are less important than others.
Their consideration can be delayed. Further examination of the Fireground Factors
reveals that many questions can be answered through pre-planning. Having well
established procedures and pre-plans allows on-scene units to begin operations without
specific orders, giving the Incident Commander time to adequately size-up the situation
and develop a plan of action, concentrating on factors that can be changed.

PRE-PLANNING
202.02
Page 3 of 10
D.

WRITTEN OUTLINE INFORMATION

Rev. 6/89

The written outline section of the pre-plan shall include the following information, as a
minimum:
1.

Building Address

2.

Building Name including occupancy type

3.

Owner and/or Occupants name, address and telephone number

4.

Emergency Contact Person's name, address and telephone number (for gaining
access when building is secured)
Also list alternate names

5.

Type of Alarm System and the Alarm Company
State whether the alarm company responds or not, including the method of
contacting them for a response
How to reset alarms

6.

Annunciator panel information, including details of command center use, where
so equipped

7.

Emergency Access and Ventilation (windows, lock boxes, etc.) (built in
ventilation) (See Emergency Ventilation in "G")

8.

Fire Suppression System Information
Type of System
Area/areas protected
How to reset the system and alarm
How to start the fire pump and general information as to type, G.P.M. etc.

9.

Construction type (use categories from NFIRS book)

10.

Structural Problems, including fire extension probability

PRE-PLANNING
202.02
Page 4 of 10
D. Written Outline Information (continued)

Rev. 10/88

11.

Special Life Hazards (large numbers of people or occupants in special need of
assistance)

12.

Special content hazards (fire load)

13.

Special exposure problems (closely built structures, nearby properties presenting
a special hazard)

14.

Worst case scenario, required fire flow (see required fire flow in "F")

15.

Apparatus placement, including any staging area for first alarm companies

16.

Hazardous Materials locator lists

17.

Remarks - special information not otherwise categorized.

Do not address categories that are not applicable, for example, do not state "NO
SPRINKLER SYSTEM". If the details of a sprinkler system are not mentioned it is
assumed that the structure is not protected by sprinklers.
E.

BUILDING DRAWINGS
As a minimum, building drawings shall include:
1.

A plan view of building/buildings, including dimensions of length, width and
height. If the building is a multi-storied structure, a floor plan of each floor
whose layout is significantly different shall be added to the drawing section of the
pre-plan.

2.

All interior fire walls shall be indicated with a solid line, showing the location of
fire doors and other fire wall openings.

PRE-PLANNING
202.02
Page 5 of 10
3.

Elevator locations displayed as follows:

Rev. 10/88

If the elevator serves
all floors including basement and sub-basements, floor numbers and/or letters are not necessary.
If the elevator does not serve the entire structure, then floor designation numbers and letters
shall be placed next to the elevator location symbol, as shown.
4.

Stairways and Fire Escapes shall be indicated as below:

If a stairway serves all floors including basement and sub-basements, floor
numbers and/or letters are not necessary. If the stairway does not serve the entire
structure, then floor designation numbers and letters shall be placed next to the
stairway location symbol. Likewise, a fire escape that does not serve all floors
above ground level shall indicate the floors served.
5.

Gas and electric shut-off locations shall be indicated, using the following
symbols:
G

Gas Shut Off

E

Electric Shut Off

PRE-PLANNING
202.02
Page 6 of 10
Rev. 10/88
6.

Alarm System
indicated using

Annunciator Panel locations shall be
the following symbol:

7.

Sprinkler fire department connections (intakes) shall be designated using the
following symbol:

v
Note: This symbol is also used to identify a combination sprinkler and standpipe system
8.

Sprinkler risers shall be designated as follows:

z
9.

Sprinkler valves shall be indicated as follows with letter designations representing
the type of valve:
PIV = Post Indicator Valve
OS&Y = Outside Stem and Yolk
Any other type of valve shall be indicated in the outline portion of the
pre-plan

OS&Y

PRE-PLANNING
202.02
Page 7 of 10
Rev. 10/88
10.

Standpipe fire department connections (intakes) shall be designated using the
following symbol:

11.

Standpipe risers shall be indicated using the following symbol:

{
12.

Standpipe valves are to be represented by the following symbol:

13.

Fire Pumps shall be placed on the drawing using the following symbol:

Instructions for starting the fire
pump and general information as to
type, GPM, etc. shall be included in the outline portion of the pre-plan.

PRE-PLANNING
202.02
Page 8 of 10
Rev. 10/88
14.

Nearest fire hydrants, by type and G.P.M., as shown below:
1275 GPM

Hydrant Flow = 1275 G.P.M.
Any hydrants on the owners private property shall be shown. In addition, at least
the two closest public fire hydrants to the property will be shown.
15.

Hazardous Materials locations shall be indicated as shown: The number placed in
the center of the diamond corresponds to the locator list. A diamond with a "2"
would indicate that this is hazardous location #2 for the property in question.
Locator list should be attached so responding units can determine what is stored
in the various hazardous materials locations.

PRE-PLANNING
202.02
Page 9 of 10
F.

CALCULATED FIRE FLOW

Rev. 6/89

1.

Fire flows will be determined for each major area (area divided by fire walls or
floors) within a structure. The purpose of the fire flow in determining the
maximum G.P.M. necessary to extinguish an entire area, is to allow the Incident
Commander to develop a plan of action that can successfully combat a given fire.

2.

The action plan and strategy should apply enough G.P.M. during offensive fire
control operations to extinguish the area actually on fire.
For example: If an area calculated as needing 1000 G.P.M. had 50% of the area
involved in fire, the Incident Commander would need to apply 500
G.P.M. to extinguish the fire. Any area requiring less than 100
G.P.M. does not require a fire flow listing.

3.

The preferred fire flow formula is a commodity specific flow as established by the
National Fire Protection Association or Factory Mutual. If sufficient information
is not available to use these formulas simply use the formula:
Area divided by 3

4.

G.

Fire flows are rough calculations that must be applied as approximations. It may
be possible to extinguish many different areas one at a time, by going from area to
area. The Area divided by 3 formula tends to be a high estimate and should be
understood as such.

EMERGENCY VENTILATION
1.

When buildings are equipped with emergency vents, it should be noted on the
pre-plan under "Emergency Access and Ventilation".

2.

Many industrial buildings have manual or automatic vent systems, usually in the
form of roof vents. These vents should be noted as to location, with a brief
explanation of how they operate and location of controls.

PRE-PLANNING
202.02
Page 10 of 10
G.

Emergency Ventilation (continued)
3.

H.

I.

Rev. 6/89

In high rise buildings, there may be vent openings above the stairways. New high
rise buildings may have windows or panels provided for emergency ventilation.
Buildings equipped with emergency ventilation panels or windows will have 2" x
8" signs on the inside with ½" red letters identifying the window or panel and
stating whether the window is:
A.

Manually Operated

B.

Remotely Operated

C.

To be broken stating "Tempered Glass"

FAMILIARIZATION
1.

Members responding to properties on the first alarm will be familiar with the
general building features and shall be thoroughly familiar with the pre-fire plan
file kept on each apparatus.

2.

District Chiefs shall discuss pre-plan information with officers and members who
normally respond to pre-planned properties.

3.

The Company responsible for inspecting a building or complex where a pre-plan
is required shall keep pre-plan information updated and distribute copies of the
pre-plan to companies and districts responding on the first and second alarms, and
to the Supervisor of Fire Equipment Maintenance. Districts will coordinate and
facilitate the distribution of pre-plans.

FILING OF PRE-PLANS
1.

Each company shall file a copy of all pre-planned buildings in their first alarm
running district. This file should be kept in three ring binders on apparatus and
staff cars, readily accessible to the responding officer. Districts shall file a copy
of all pre-planned buildings in their first and second alarm running district.

2.

Company Commanders are responsible for the accuracy and completeness of
pre-plan files.

3.

The Supervisor of Fire Equipment Maintenance shall maintain a file of all
pre-plans on the "Command Van".


=== 202.04 Fire Investigation Rev 7-05 ===
FIRE INVESTIGATION
202.04
Page 1 of 5
Rev. 7/05
CHAPTER II Operations
SUBJECT 2 Command
TOPIC 4

A.

Fire Investigation

SCOPE
Standard operations for use at all fire incidents. Examples of fire incidents: Incident
Commander deem necessary to determine a cause, a fire fatality, suspicious fire, or
injury, and for any incendiary fire.

B.

PRIORITIES
Priorities will be protection of the fire scene and preservation of physical evidence, once
rescue and fire control are achieved.
To treat scene as a crime scene until it has been proven otherwise.

C.

D.

SAFETY
1.

Fire Investigators shall wear protective equipment as deemed appropriate by the
Incident Commander.

2.

The Incident Commander will determine if the building is structurally safe before
permitting anyone to enter for investigation purposes. The atmosphere shall be
checked with air monitoring equipment to make sure it is safe to enter.

3.

The Incident Commander will assure that the area involved is well lighted.

INVESTIGATION
The Incident Commander shall attempt to determine the cause of the fire after fire control
activities, and before taking salvage and overhaul actions, which could hinder the
investigation.
Fire scene overhaul shall keep to a minimum until the fire investigator has time to
survey the area involved.
Incident Commander shall interview witnesses, and occupants, then relay this written
information to the Fire Investigator when called, time permitting.

D.

INVESTIGATION (continued)

FIRE INVESTIGATION
202.04
Page 2 of 5
Rev. 7/05
The Incident Commander upon completion of the incident shall fill out and forward to
the Fire Investigation Unit, an Incident Commander Statement form located on the Sdrive in the Fire Investigation folder.
The Incident Commander shall assign personnel to protect the integrity of the fire scene
and maintain custody awaiting arrival of the investigator. Fire personnel shall post all
entrances of the fire scene.
The Fire Department has authority to close the scene, even to the owner.
Do not allow unauthorized persons to enter area. This includes the owner, any
building occupants, maintenance workers and Red Cross etc. Check with on scene Fire
Investigator if someone needs to enter the building, before allowing them enter. If the
Fire Investigator gives permission for that person to enter, a fire personnel must escort
them the entire time they are in the structure.
Prevent fire personnel from unnecessarily disturbing fire area, and avoid walking on or
dragging hose lines through evidence.
All fire personnel shall stay out of fire area unless Fire Investigator requires your
assistance. If the fire is still smoldering, post a fire watch to prevent spread.
When a fire occurs outdoors or in a junk auto, at times other than normal office hours, the
fire investigator may be notified by phone, e-mail, and their actions noted on the 902F
under remarks. Fire investigators can be requested to go to a fire ground channel at all
times when questionable situations occur.
All personnel shall cooperate with the Fire Investigators.
Upon completion of the incident all first alarm companies shall fill out and forward to the
Fire Investigation unit, a Company Statement form located on the S-drive in the Fire
Investigation folder. Each member of the company shall fill out this form individually
(one for each member of the company).
Evidence to be collected in an investigation is subject to laws of search and seizure, and
if unlawfully seized, cannot be used in court. For this reason, the Fire Investigator must
maintain custody of the Incident Scene.
The fire scene is the investigators laboratory necessitating completion of these
procedures:

D.

•

Collection of witness information and statements

•

A careful and thorough search of fire area

•

Photograph everything, in place

INVESTIGATION (continued)

FIRE INVESTIGATION
202.04
Page 3 of 5
Rev. 7/05

E.

F.

•

Diagram carefully

•

Collect and preserve evidence

RESPONSE
1.

A Fire Investigator shall be dispatched to a 3 alarm or greater fire incidents.

2.

A Fire Investigator shall be called to the scene anytime there is a fire fatality and
serious injuries related to the fire incident..

3.

A Fire Investigator shall be called to the scene when a person has been burned
and the cause is not accidental (Examples- attempted suicide by fire, person
deliberately burned, and children playing with fire which burn another
child.)

4.

The Incident Commander is responsible to conduct a preliminary
investigation of the incident prior to requesting a fire investigator respond.

5.

A Fire Investigator may be assigned to make other fire investigations as
authorized by the Fire Chief.

6.

When simultaneous incidents occur after hours, and the incidents require
investigators. The on-call investigator will contact the fire companies
requesting the investigator to survey the facts of the incidents. The on-call
investigator will articulate these facts to the on-call duty chief. Who will
approve or disapprove additional investigators.

JUVENILE FIRESETTERS
1.

A cooperative program between the Cincinnati Fire Division and the Hamilton
County Children’s Mental Health Services is available to counsel juvenile
firesetters.

2.

Candidates for the program can possibly come one or more of the following
sources:

3.

a.

Referrals from Districts and Companies

b.

Fire Investigators Reports

c.

Request from the public

d.

Juvenile Court

e.

Schools

Juvenile firesetters are described as being between the ages of 2 and 8 depending
on the facts of the incident.

FIRE INVESTIGATION
202.04
Page 4 of 5
Rev. 7/05

202.04 JUVENILE FIRESETTERS (continued)
Accidental fires caused by juveniles between the ages 2 and 8 shall be considered
to be children with matches, lighter, etc. Juveniles involved in these fire shall be
referred to the Juvenile Firesetters Program. If the officer in charge has a
question on the referral, or needs some guidance, they shall contact their District
Chief for assistance, or the on-call investigator via radio.
Avoid making statements or promises to parents or others that may jeopardize
referral or prosecution when situation warrants.
Pursuant to Chapter 1251 of the Cincinnati Municipal Code, a civil offense
citation can be issued to the parent, custodian or guardian that allows a juvenile
under the age of twelve to have access to a fire starting apparatus (lighter,
matches etc.). District Chiefs, Fire Investigators and the Juvenile Firesetter
Coordinator can issue this citation.
4.

Referrals to the Juvenile Firestters Program shall be made by e-mail or F-47 to the
Juvenile Firesetter Coordinator.
A referral to the Juvenile Firestter Program shall include the following
information:
•

Date of fire, dispatch time, address of fire and incident number

•

Juvenile’s name, DOB, age, race, home address, school and current grade

•

Parent’s/Guardian’s name, home address, relocation address if applicable,
and phone numbers (home, work, cell, or relative where they can be
contacted)

•

Brief description of the incident

Referral can also be made for non-fire incidents. Examples of these types of
incidents include the following;
•

Parents that come to the firehouse asking for help for their child who has a
problem with fire setting

•

During a school inspection and a school official approaches you about a
child who is having a problem with fire setting

Contact the Juvenile Firesetter Coordinator for guidance with this situation, or if
you have a question about the referral.

FIRE INVESTIGATION
202.04
Page 5 of 5
Rev. 7/05

202.04 JUVENILE FIRESETTERS (continued)
5.

Juvenile’s names shall not be included on the 902 F fire report. Fire reports are
public record, and available to the general public when requested. Juvenile
authorities insist that the name of juveniles remain confidential.


=== 202.05  Rehabilitation EMS Standby Updated 10-14 Completed ===
REHABILITATION/EMS Stand-by
202.05
1 of 9
10/14
CHAPTER

II

Operations

SUBJECT

2

Command

TOPIC

5

Rehabilitation/EMS Stand-by

A.

PURPOSE
1.

B.

To establish a procedure to be used for the rehabilitation of members at
emergency scenes.

POLICY
1.

The Incident Commander should establish a formal Rehabilitation Area
(Rehab) during the following situations:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

When a fire has reached the first 20-minute mark and there is still
active fire.
For 2 alarm or greater fires or any other incidents of long duration.
Incidents involving extended physical labor (labor intensive), such as
hazardous materials responses or multiple casualty incidents.
Abnormally hot or cold weather. Rehab should be implemented
anytime a heat emergency or heat alert is declared.
The Incident Commander may implement Rehab any other time it is
deemed appropriate

2.

The Incident Safety Officer shall ensure that Rehab is established as indicated
above.

3.

Members reporting on the scene of all incidents will operate in one of the
following three modes:
a.
b.
c.

Operating at the incident in a Sector or Group with their Company
In the Rehab sector being medically evaluated and refreshed
In Staging, before or after rehabilitation, standing by to be deployed at
the incident or placed back in service.

Operating outside the Incident Command System or self assigning without
the knowledge of the Incident Commander will be a serious safety violation.

REHABILITATION/EMS Stand-by
202.05
2 of 9
10/14

C.

OBJECTIVES
1.

To prevent heat exhaustion, heat stroke, frost bite, and other climate related
injuries

2.

To ensure fire fighters are physically capable of safely performing tasks at
emergency scenes.

3.

To prevent fatigue related injuries caused by overworked and exhausted fire
fighters.

D.

SAFETY
1.

Fatigued members are more injury prone, and many injuries are the direct
result of exposure to temperature extremes. The Rehabilitation process is a
measure taken to reduce injuries during incidents of long duration and
extremes in the working environment.

2.

The Incident Commander shall evaluate the circumstances at each incident
and shall, early in the incident, make adequate provisions for the appropriate
rest, rehabilitation, and medical treatment of all members working at the
incident scene.
These provisions shall include:
a. ALS stand-by team (MEDIC UNIT) for immediate triage and treatment
of fire fighters and victims. A Medic Unit will be initially dispatched on
all one-alarm responses and once there is confirmation of a working fire, a
second Medic Unit will be dispatched.. (Duties of the EMS stand-by team
are located in Section E.)
b. An ALS Supervisor (ALS-32, ALS-34, or ALS-35) will be dispatched on
all one-alarm responses. The ALS Supervisor will set up, manage and be
in charge of the Rehab Sector.
c. Consider the use of Salvation Army, American Red Cross, or other
agencies for food and fluid replenishment
d. Consider the use of facilities and vehicles for relief from extreme climatic
conditions or other environmental factors present at the incident. (Metro
Bus or near-by public structure)

REHABILITATION/EMS Stand-by
202.05
3 of 9
10/14
E.

EMS Stand-By at Fires and Other Labor Intensive Incidents
1.

PURPOSE
To ensure ALS medical treatment personnel are on the scene and properly
equipped for the health and safety of fire fighters.
The primary purpose of the ALS resource is the immediate triage and
treatment of injured and ill fire fighters (long falls, burns, cardiac arrest,
chest pain, etc.) with the additional function to triage and treat, severely
injured or ill victims of the incident.

2.

EMS ASSIGNMENT
a. An ALS Supervisor and a Medic Unit will be dispatched to all working
fires and other labor-intensive incidents (hazardous materials, cave-in,
confined space and other technical rescue incidents) for the primary
purpose of standing by to immediately treat injured or ill fire fighters.
b. The ALS Supervisor and Medic Unit will report to the Incident
Commander with the appropriate equipment in a “stand-by” mode ready to
assist an injured or ill fire fighter. (i.e. defibrillator, oxygen, bag-valve
mask, etc)
c. In the event the Incident Commander utilizes one of the Medic Units to
treat a fire fighter or victim they should be immediately replaced by
another Medic Unit.
d. Medic Unit personnel shall be outside the fire zone in the Fire Perimeter
Area. In the event of a high rise incident or large complex where the
Medic Unit is required to stage in a forward location, the Medic Unit
personnel shall wear the level of PPE required for that area.
e. Medic Unit personnel shall be immediately available to the Incident
Commander in the event a fire fighter needs medical attention. Rescue
Unit personnel shall not perform fire-fighting functions (stretching lines,
breaking windows, etc.), which may divert them from their primary
function.

REHABILITATION/EMS Stand-by
202.05
4 of 9
10/14
f. In the event of a high-rise incident the Medic Unit stand-by team may be
co-located with Interior Staging. This advanced location will require
Medic Unit personnel to have access to full protective equipment prior to
entering the fire building.
g. In the event of a MAY DAY the Medic Unit shall be assigned to the
rescue effort and report to a location in proximity to the exit of the injured
fire fighter. The Medic Unit will operate under the command of the RAT
Chief at this time. Medic Unit personnel shall monitor the RAT radio
channel during the rescue effort. The Rescue Unit will not be utilized for
any other function during a MAY DAY incident.
h. The Medic Unit may be utilized for rehabilitation functions if the incident
has deescalated and fire fighters are no longer working in potentially
hazardous conditions.

F.

REHAB ASSIGNMENTS TO THE INCIDENT
1.

When a Rehabilitation Sector is established the following resources will be
assigned initially:
a. An ALS Supervisor (ALS- 32, 34 or 35)– Rehab Sector Officer
b. On large or extensive incidents a Rehab Sector Chief will be assigned.
c. For extended operations, the Medical Director should be notified.
Note: An ALS Supervisor is unavailable, Dispatch should so advise the
Incident Commander to determine if an additional Medic Unit should be
dispatched to manage the rehab sector.

2.

If additional resources are needed, depending on the size of the incident or
other circumstances, the Rehabilitation Sector Officer shall request additional
resources through the Incident Commander.

3.

Resources that can be utilized:
a.
b.
c.
d.

Paramedic Engine Company(s)
Additional Medic Unit(s)
Transit Bus for shelter
Salvation Army or American Red Cross for fluid and food replenishment.

G.

REHABILITATION/EMS Stand-by
202.05
5 of 9
10/14
PLACEMENT IN THE INCIDENT COMMAND SYSTEM ORGANIZATION
1.

The Rehabilitation Sector is usually placed under the Operations Section;
however, it may be place under the Logistics Section.

2.

When Companies are sent to Rehab the Accountability Officer at the
Command Post must be notified so their passports can be placed under the
Rehab Section. After Companies are rehabilitated the Rehab Officer will
advise Accountability that the Companies are now in Staging ready for
reassignment to the incident.

3.

When Incident positions are being phased out, or Companies are to be
assigned after Rehabilitation, they are under the direct control of the
Rehabilitation Sector Officer. The Rehabilitation Sector Officer will
determine the time spent in Rehabilitation. The Rehabilitation Sector Officer
will be in constant communication with Command and the Accountability
Officer.

4.

Companies shall not self-assign from Rehab or leave Rehab without the
knowledge and approval of the Rehab Sector Officer.

H. LOCATION
1.

Rehabilitation must be located in a safe area appropriate for the environmental
conditions and the Incident Commander and the Accountability Officer must
know the location.

2.

The Rehabilitation Area must be located outside the immediate Fire Zone, but
in reasonable proximity to the Command Post where the Incident Commander
can get rehabilitated companies quickly redeployed back into the emergency
scene. The location shall be in an area that does not expose companies to
extreme environments or motor exhaust and can provide ample rest, limit
stress, and reduce distractions from the incident scene.

Fire

N P
O P
E

Fire
Zone

N P
O P
E

(Full PPE Required)

Perimeter

Rehab
Location

REHABILITATION/EMS Stand-by
202.05
6 of 9
10/14

3.

Fire in multi-story buildings may require the establishment of an interior
Staging area; in these cases the rehabilitation area may be co-located with
interior staging.

4.

In a Hazardous Materials Emergency the rehab area must not be located in the
Red or Yellow Zones. Rehab should only be located in the Green Zone.

5.

Consideration should be given to provide access for emergency medical
personnel and vehicles.

I. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
1.

Climatic or environmental conditions that indicate the need to establish a
rehabilitation section includes a heat index above 95 degrees F (heat alert or
heat emergency) or a wind chill index below 20 degrees F.

2.

A crucial factor in the prevention of heat stress injury is the intake of water
and electrolytes during periods of intense physical activity. During periods of
intense physical activity personnel should drink at least 1 quart of water or
electrolyte replenishment beverage while in the Rehabilitation Sector.

3.

Members in Rehab should not use caffeine and carbonated beverages because
they interfere with the body’s normal water conservation mechanism.
Company officers shall ensure these items are not the primary fluids
consumed during rehabilitation.

4.

Members should not be taken from a high temperature environment and
immediately placed in a low temperature environment because the body’s
cooling mechanism may shut down.

J. DETERMINING REST PERIODS
1.

The Incident Commander is ultimately responsible for assigning personnel to
the Rehabilitation Sector. The Incident Commander must ensure that adequate
personnel are on the incident scene for relief so operations can continue while
personnel rest and rehabilitate. The Rehab Officer will ensure appropriate
rehabilitation procedures are followed and will communicate any resource
requests to the Incident Commander.

2.

Forty-five minutes of working time, in full-protective gear, is generally an
acceptable level of work prior to mandatory rehabilitation.

REHABILITATION/EMS Stand-by
202.05
7 of 9
10/14
3.

Rest periods should last until normalization of vital signs.

4.

Rest periods are dependent upon the present working environment and
medical evaluation by the Rehab medical personnel. If an ALS Supervisor is
not on the scene; the member in charge of the ALS Engine Company or Medic
Unit managing rehab will determine appropriate rest periods.

K. MEDICAL EVALUATION DURING REHABILITATION

1.

When arriving at the Rehabilitation Sector, members shall remove all
protective clothing practical for the circumstances and have their vital signs
monitored while resting and receiving fluid replenishment.

2.

The following criteria is used in the evaluation of Fire Department personnel
to determine release from Rehabilitation or if there is a need to transport for
further evaluation:
a. The following vital sign parameters and assessment factors shall be used
to release members from the Rehabilitation Sector:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Systolic Blood Pressure less than 160mmHg
Diastolic Blood Pressure less than 100mmHg
Pulse rate less than 120
Respiratory rate less than 24
Temperature below 102o

b. Medical treatment and transportation to the hospital is required if an
altered mental status is discovered during the rehabilitation process.
c. Screening body temperatures should be assessed by tympanic thermometer
upon arrival in Rehab. If the body temperature is at or above 102 degrees
F reassessment of body temperature should be performed after passive
body cooling (removal of gear, fanning, cool water or mist application) If
body temperature continues to remain above 102 or increases above 103,
then further medical evaluation and transport are required.
d. Anytime personnel experiencing signs and symptoms of serious medical
conditions (chest pain, shortness of breath, heat or cold exposure, etc) or
have vital signs that are outside normal limits for any reason should be
treated and transported for evaluation.

REHABILITATION/EMS Stand-by
202.05
8 of 9
10/14
L. TRANSPORTATION OF FIRE FIGHTERS TO THE HOSPITAL
1.

If immediate treatment or transport is needed then the on-scene Medic Unit
will transport. The Incident Commander will immediately request the
dispatch of another Medic Unit as stand-by.

2.

Members with major trauma, severe burns, or cardiac arrest shall be
transported to an appropriate facility. In outlaying areas of the city Air Care
may be utilized.

3.

Members requiring transportation for evaluation, illnesses, or minor injuries
should be transported to an appropriate medical facility as determined by the
on-scene medical personnel or as requested by the member.

4.

No member shall be permitted to be released from the scene without being
evaluated and meeting acceptable levels of the parameters in Section J.

M. INDIVIDUAL RESPONSIBILITIES
1.

During all operations, members are encouraged to drink water or an
electrolyte drink replenishment mix throughout the work-day.

2.

During incidents or training exercises, all members shall advise their
supervisor when they believe their level of fatigue or exposure to the heat or
cold environment is approaching a point that could affect them, their crew, or
the operation in which they are involved.

3.

Each member shall monitor other members during all incidents for signs of
fatigue, illness, or injuries.

4.

The Officer shall be held responsible for monitoring the personnel assigned to
them. The Officer shall ensure that adequate steps are taken to provide for the
members safety and health.

5.

Company Officers shall ensure that the water coolers on their Companies are
full and replenished with water and/or ice at the beginning of every shift.

N. DOCUMENTATION

1.

REHABILITATION/EMS Stand-by
202.05
9 of 9
10/14
The “Time In” and “Time Out” of the crews entering the rehabilitation sector
shall be documented.

2.

All medical findings shall be documented as described in Section K of this
procedure.

3.

If medical treatment is required, then the appropriate medical run reports shall
be completed on the fire fighter.

4.

The Incident Commander or ALS Supervisor shall complete injury Reports
and Workers Compensation paperwork if medical treatment and transportation
is required.

5.

All documentation forms shall be filled out by the ALS Supervisor and
submitted to the Risk Management District Chief.


=== 202.06 Fire Zones Perimeter Updated 10-14 Completed ===
FIRE ZONES / PERIMETER
202.06
Page 1 of 2
Rev. 10/14
CHAPTER II OPERATIONS
SUBJECT 2 COMMAND
TOPIC 6
A.

PURPOSE
1.

B.

C.

Fire Zones and Fire Perimeters are set up to control the incident scene, much as
red and yellow zones are used at Hazardous Materials Incidents.

OBJECTIVES
1.

To maintain a safe perimeter around an incident scene

2.

Keep non-response personnel away from the danger area

SAFETY
1.

D.

FIRE ZONES/PERIMETER

Areas are established for various functions using this system. These areas are
used by the Safety Officer and Incident Commander to exclude all personnel
(Exclusion Zone), personnel in inappropriate levels of protective clothing (fire
zone), and non-response personnel (Fire Perimeter). Keeping people out of areas
is a method used to enhance safety at the incident scene.

FIRE PERIMETER
1.

The Fire Perimeter is a wide area around the incident scene maintained by the
Cincinnati Police Department.
This is a limited access area for emergency response personnel only. Media and
agency representatives are allowed within the Fire Perimeter with the permission
of the Incident Commander.
The Cincinnati Police Department has agreed to establish a Staging area for
non-emergency response personnel, and EMS units from other agencies near the
outer edge of the Fire Perimeter. This area will be referred to as "Police Staging".

FIRE ZONES / PERIMETER
202.06
Page 2 of 2
Rev. 10/14
E.

FIRE ZONE
1.

The Fire Zone is the area immediately around the incident where an established
level of protective clothing is required.
In a fire situation the Fire Zone could be the area inside the structure and a small
area around the building where there is a potential for falling debris in an
offensive operation.
During defensive operations a wide area around the building/buildings is
established where full protective clothing is required.

2.

F.

Whenever necessary the Safety Officer or Incident Commander will have yellow
barrier tape stretched around the Fire Zone.

EXCLUSION ZONE
1.

No one is to enter an Exclusion Zone.

2.

Where structural collapse is imminent, an exclusion zone shall be established,
keeping all members out of the area.

3.

Partially collapsed or destroyed portions of the interior of a fire building can also
be established as exclusion zones.

4.

Whenever possible, exclusion zones will be marked with red barrier tape.


=== 202.07 Accountability 8-14-19 ===
PROCEDURES MANUAL
SUBJECT: Accountability
NUMBER:

APPROVED:

202.07
FIRE CHIEF

TYPE: Emergency Operations

EFFECTIVE DATE: 8/2019

Page 1 of 10

REVISED DATE: 8/2019

202.07 Accountability
A. Purpose
1. To provide a system for rapid resource accountability at an emergency
incident.
2. This system shall provide for the rapid accounting of all personnel on the
scene.
3. To account for the location and function of all Companies on the scene of
an emergency
4. To proactively manage crews “on air” during an incident through
continuous tracking of personnel accountability and SCBA monitoring
B. System Components
1. Company Passport – Each Fire Company, Medic Unit and Staff vehicle
will be assigned a Unit Identification Passport. This Passport consists of a
plastic card engraved with the Company number or unit designation on the
top. Passports will be color coded as to unit type. (Engines – Red, Trucks
– Black, Etc.) The Truck Company and Heavy Rescue Passports are
divided into two (2) groups; “A’ & “B”. The Passport will have Velcro
attached to receive the company member’s nametags. Each member will
be assigned name tags to be kept on the underside of the fire helmet for
accountability purposes. At the beginning of every shift the firefighter will
present a name tag to the officer to be placed on the company passport.
The Passport shall be attached with Velcro to the Officer’s side dashboard
so as to be in plain view of someone standing on the ground at the
officer’s door.
2. Helmet Identifiers - Helmet identifiers with the assigned Fire Company
are placed on the front of each helmet on each tour of duty. This is a
visual accountability system, particularly for the Incident Commander.
Note: The District Fire Chiefs do not have helmet identifiers.
3. Company Accountability Tags – These are a single tag that identify each
fire company in the Cincinnati Fire Department. They are found in a

ACCOUNTABILITY
SECTION 202.07
8/19
Page 2 of 10

clipboard in the rear of each District vehicle. The Accountability Officer
will use these tags to begin accountability on the Accountability Board
prior to collecting the Company Passports.
4. Accountability Board – Each District vehicle will carry an Accountability
board to assemble the passports at an emergency scene. The accountability
board will consist of a dry-erase board with velcro attached to receive the
Company passport. The Accountability board will have an area next to the
passport to track the location of the Company within the emergency scene.
5. SCBA Air Monitoring System – With this computer, the Accountability
Officer will have the ability to monitor SCBA air levels, PASS device
activations, and will have the ability to contact members PASS devices for
emergencies, including orders to “evacuate or retreat” at the request of the
Incident Commander.
6. Tactron Incident Management Board – The tactron board is a
magnetic/dry-erase board used to show physical positions of companies in
relation to the incident site-plan. Each fire Company and Staff Officer has
a corresponding magnet located inside the tactron board. When possible,
The Accountability Officer will deploy the tactron board upon request of
the Incident Commander and draw a site plan (building sketch) of the
incident and place the Companies in their respective locations. The tactron
board is an effective tool for the Incident Commander to use for strategy
purposes.
7. Incident Command Tactical Worksheet – Each District shall carry a
supply of Incident Tactical Command Worksheets. There are two (2)
separate IC Tactical Command Worksheets, a structural firefighting sheet
and high rise fire sheet. Additional sheets can be found on the “S” drive
under the Operations Folder. The Incident Commander is required to
utilize a Tactical Worksheet.
8. PAR – Personnel Accountability Report.
9. Accountability Aide – The FAO or Firefighter on Safety Engine assigned
to Accountability. The Accountability Aide reports directly to the
Accountability Officer.
C. Policy
1. Firefighter Accountability: In order to account for members working
at the scene of an emergency the following procedures will be followed:

ACCOUNTABILITY
SECTION 202.07
8/19
Page 3 of 10

a. It is the responsibility of the Company Officer to ensure that the
company passport is accurate at all times and only contains the
names of those members actually riding on the apparatus. Any
time a member’s status on the apparatus changes, the Passport must
be updated.
b. It is the responsibility of all members that their helmet identifier is
accurate for the company that they are assigned for the current tour
of duty. It is the Company Officer’s responsibility to ensure that
members assigned to their company have accurate helmet
identifiers on their helmets each tour of duty.
c. The Officer and one other member from the SAFETY ENGINE
will be assigned to Accountability. The Safety Engine Officer’s
radio designation is now “Accountability” throughout the incident
or until relieved of their duties by another Officer.
d. The Officer’s primary responsibility is the accuracy of the
Accountability Board. This process begins at the dispatch of the
incident. The Officer while enroute should note which companies
were dispatched on the incident.
e. The Accountability Officer shall utilize the headset in the rear of
the District vehicle and attach to his/her radio to monitor all
communications on the assigned FG talk group.
f. On arrival, the “Accountability” Officer and his/her aide (FAO /
FF) should report to the rear of the first due in District vehicle.
Accountability should start with using the company accountability
tags in the rear of the District vehicle.
g. The Accountability Officer shall determine the location of all
Companies assigned to the incident and document the location on
the Accountability board. This may require the Accountability
Officer to initiate a radio transmission to make this determination
.Example:
“Accountability to Engine 23 – Location” “Engine
23 – 1st floor rear”
The Accountability board shall be located adjacent to the Incident
Commander. The Incident Commander shall make every attempt
to locate the Command Post at the rear of the District vehicle.
NOTE: The Incident Commander should attempt to park the
District vehicle in a manner to visual two (2) sides of the building.

ACCOUNTABILITY
SECTION 202.07
8/19
Page 4 of 10

The Accountability Officer should also note all “Benchmark”
transmissions. (Refer to Proc. 203.01-D).
h. The Firefighter / FAO assigned to Accountability shall make sure
the SCBA Monitoring Computer is being set up in the rear of the
Command vehicle and monitor all firefighters that enter the
building using the MSA SCBA monitoring software. He / she then
assists the Accountability Officer with any other duties as directed.
i. All Company Officers shall notify Command/Accountability of
location changes on the fire ground.
Example: “Engine 23 floor 1 moving to floor 2 to check for fire
extension” Command – “Okay Engine 23 moving to floor 2”
Command Officers shall ensure that the Accountability Officer
receives the location change. To assist the Accountability Officer
with the location of Companies, all Companies shall begin all
transmissions with their Company ID and location prior to
transmitting their message.
EXAMPLE:“Engine 1, floor 2 Charlie side to Command, we need
a second line in here”.
These location reports shall be used at all locations on the fire
ground including Rehab and Staging. Companies should use
“Alpha”, “Bravo”, “Charlie” and “Delta” to describe the sides of
the building instead of the letters “A”, “B”, “C”, and “D”.
CHARLIE
B
R
A
V
O

D
E
L
T
A
ALPHA

j. The Safety Officer (SO-2) shall ensure that Accountability is being
performed at all incidents were members are entering a hazardous
zone. On arrival, the Safety Officer shall give the Accountability
Officer a list of all fire companies that were dispatched on the
incident.

ACCOUNTABILITY
SECTION 202.07
8/19
Page 5 of 10

k. The second Medic Unit shall collect the first-alarm company
passports and deliver them to the Accountability Officer. If the
second Medic Unit is unable to perform this task, then it is the
responsibility of the Accountability Officer to request someone
else to collect them.
l. Companies responding on additional alarms shall report to
Command with the Passport for assignment. Upon receiving
orders, the company officer shall notify Accountability of the
assignment location and deliver the company Passport to the
Accountability Officer.
m. In cases where there is a recall or mutual aid assistance, a
Passport shall be completed by the Officer in-charge of the unit
and presented to the Incident Commander or the accountability
officer if assigned before entering the hazard zone. Spare Passports
will be available with the accountability board. The Passport will
contain the names of all members assigned to the recalled or
mutual aid unit.
n. Incident Commanders are responsible for on scene Accountability
on every emergency run. Command shall assure that an
Accountability Officer/Sector has been established early on in
large scale or hazardous incidents. Incidents requiring a Safety
Engine include:
i. One-Alarm Dispatch.
ii. Mutual aid given or requested.
iii. Hazardous materials incidents.
iv. Natural Disasters
v. Mass Casualty Incidents
vi. Technical Rescue Situations
Note: Command may appoint a Staff Officer to assume the
accountability duties from the initial Accountability
Officer.
o. The Incident Commander shall utilize the appropriate Incident
Command Tactical Worksheet on all incidents where firefighters
are working in a hazardous zone. This worksheet is an aid to the

ACCOUNTABILITY
SECTION 202.07
8/19
Page 6 of 10

Incident Commander in tracking the whereabouts of all companies
operating on the scene and the tasks they are performing or have
completed.
p. Upon request of the Incident Commander, the Accountability
Officer shall set up the Tactron Incident Management Board.
q. Whenever additional Fireground Radio Channels are requested and
utilized, an additional firefighter or Officer shall be assigned to
Accountability to monitor this channel. This is only necessary if
Fire Companies utilizing the fire ground channel are operating in a
high hazard environment.
r. During a “Mayday”, an Aide will be assigned to the RAT Group
Supervisor to assist with accountability of all personnel involve in
the Mayday and the rescue efforts.
2. Personnel Accountability Report (PAR):
A Personnel Accountability Report (PAR) will be utilized to account for
members working at the scene of a hazardous incident. A PAR report is a
roll call of all members working at the scene and their location.
a. For the Company Officer, a PAR is a confirmation that members
assigned to his/her crew are visually accounted for.
b. For the Sector Officer, a PAR is an accounting for all crew
members of all companies assigned to his/her sector.
c. Reports of PAR’s should be conducted face-to-face within the
Company or within the Sector whenever possible.
d. The Incident Commander or Operations Sector only shall institute
a PAR report, except that a Sector may institute a PAR of units
under his/her command if the Sector is operating on its own radio
channel. If a sector PAR is requested, the Incident Commander
or Operations must be notified before and after the PAR is
initiated. The Incident Commander may direct the Accountability
Officer to conduct the Personnel Accountability Report (PAR) on
his behalf.
e. The PAR report is different from a location request in that the
Accountability Officer may not self initiate a PAR. The request by
the Accountability Officer for a location report does not require a
PAR response. EXAMPLE:

ACCOUNTABILITY
SECTION 202.07
8/19
Page 7 of 10

“Reading Road Command to all companies - standby for a
PAR”
“Accountability to all companies standby for a PAR”
Command

“Command to Engine 2"

Engine 2

“Engine 2 1st floor, PAR OK”

Command

“Command to Engine 9"

Engine 9

“Engine 9 2nd floor, PAR OK”

Command

“Command to Ladder 2"

Ladder 2

“Ladder 2A 1st floor, PAR OK”
“Ladder 2B roof, PAR OK”

Command

“Command to Ladder 32"

Ladder 32

“Ladder 32A 2nd floor, PAR OK”
“Ladder 32B outside Bravo side, PAR OK”

Command

“ Command to District 3"

District 3

“District 3 outside Charlie side, PAR OK”

Command
“End PAR report, all members accounted for
- resume normal radio traffic
f. During a PAR report, all units should refrain from using that
channel unless the message is urgent or emergency in nature.
g. A PAR report should be initiated for the following situations:
i. Any report of a missing or trapped firefighter. (MAYDAY)
ii. Any change from an offensive to defensive operation.
iii. Any sudden or unexpected event (explosion, backdraft,
collapse, etc.)
iv. When the fire is reported under control.
v. Anytime Command/Operations determines there is a need.

ACCOUNTABILITY
SECTION 202.07
8/19
Page 8 of 10

h. Negative or No Response to Location or Personal
Accountability Report (PAR)
i. When the Accountability Officer requests a location or a
PAR and receives no response from the Company, a second
attempt to contact the Company will be made. The second
attempt will be made within one minute of the initial
attempt to contact the company.
ii. After the second attempt to contact the Company and no
response is received, the Incident Commander shall be
notified immediately that a Company is not responding to
the request for location.
iii. The Incident Commander shall then make a general
announcement that a specific Company is missing and
request any Company knowing the location of said
Company to report the location to Command.
iv. EXAMPLE:
1. “All units stand by – All units on the fire ground we
have no contact with Ladder 1. Any Company
knowing the location of Ladder 1 identify”.
2. If the Company is not located following this
announcement a Mayday shall be declared and the
Mayday procedures followed as outlined in
Operations Manual 202.08 and 202.09.
3. If the Incident Commander attempts to contact a
Company and does not receive a response, the
Incident Commander shall follow the same
procedures as outlined for the Accountability
Officer.
i. When a Company exits the building, the Officer shall give a PAR
report with company location. For example, “Truck 1A is out of
the building with a PAR on the “Charlie” side. This is extremely
important when changing from an offensive to a defensive
strategy. This will limit the amount of radio traffic when
accountability initiates a PAR.

ACCOUNTABILITY
SECTION 202.07
8/19
Page 9 of 10

3. SCBA Air Monitoring System
a. The SCBA Air Monitoring system shall be initiated and utilized at
all incidents attended by the Accountability Staff where firefighters
are utilizing SCBA in Immediately Dangerous to Life and Health
(IDLH) environments. The system will be placed in service and
monitored by the Accountability Aide as soon as possible after the
arrival of the first District Chief.
b. On-Scene Procedures (Refer to Drill Manual Section 1 Topic 15
(MSA SCBA Air Monitoring)
c. Critical Events:
i. Thermal Alarm Activation: This is a definite
emergency situation that will require immediate and
quick action by the Incident Commander. The thermal
alarm on the SCBA has activated, which means that the
interior temperature in the vicinity of the firefighter(s)
has rapidly increased to a life threatening condition. This
alarm is indicated by an audible sound, pop up box on
screen and thermal alarm indicator beside the
individual(s) SCBA in the Statistics area of the telemetry
system. The Incident Commander shall be notified by the
Accountability Officer that this has occurred and the
Incident Commander shall contact the Company to
confirm their safety.
ii. PASS Alarm: This could be either motion, low pressure
or manually activated. In all cases there will be a pop up
box on screen as well as a man down indicator above the
individual(s) SCBA in the Statistics area of the telemetry
system. If it is a manual alarm, there is an audible sound.
As most motion or low pressure alarms are not
emergencies, it is important that individual(s) be allowed
adequate time to become aware of their alarm and clear
their alarm before intervention by the Incident
Commander. If it is a manual alarm, this is usually a
deliberate act, and that individual or team (crew) should
be contacted immediately to determine if intervention is
necessary. A manual alarm is a definite emergency
situation that will require immediate and quick action
by the Incident Commander.

ACCOUNTABILITY
SECTION 202.07
8/19
Page 10 of 10

iii. Low Battery: This will result in reduced telemetry to the
base station with a likelihood of potential loss of
telemetry. This is indicated by an audible sound, pop up
box on screen, and a battery icon beside the individual
SCBA in the Statistics area of the telemetry system. It is
recommended that when the battery indicator on the
SCBA Control Module reads one bar - Replace the
batteries.
iv. Lost Radio Link: This will require contact by the Incident
Commander to ensure radio communications are intact and
the company does not require any intervention. The lost
radio link is indicated by an audible alarm, pop up box and
crossed lines over the telemetry symbol of the individual(s)
SCBA in the statistics area of the telemetry system. In loss
of telemetry situations, it may be necessary to utilize the
“dummy” firefighters.
Note: The primary task of the Accountability Officer is to
maintain the accuracy of the Accountability Board. The
SCBA Monitoring Computer is a tool to be monitored by
the Accountability Officer’s Aid (the second person
assigned to Accountability from the Safety Engine) with
the assistance of the Accountability Officer.
d. Important Notes:
i. The SCBA Air Monitoring System will only monitor
SCBA that have been pressurized
ii. Each Company in the system is limited to 6 firefighters
iii. Once a SCBA has logged onto a base station, that SCBA
cannot be monitored by another base station until the
SCBA has been fully shut down and then re-pressurized.
iv. Building construction features involving heavy concrete
and steel will inhibit telemetry between the SCBA and
the Base Station.
v. At the beginning of every shift the Truck Company housed
with the District Chief will ensure connectivity of the
Laptop computer to the Base Station and ensure the “PC
Link” light on the base station is RED (Not active).


=== 203.01 Structure Fire Operations ===
PROCEDURES MANUAL
SUBJECT: Structure Fire Operations
NUMBER:

APPROVED:

203.01
FIRE CHIEF

TYPE: Emergency Operations

EFFECTIVE DATE: 12/2020

Page 1 of 2

REVISED DATE: 12/2020

203.01 Emergency Operations at Structure Fires
A.

Scope
To establish standard operating guidelines to be used at all structure fires unless
specifically addressed in another topic. These are only guidelines and conditions
at the incidents may warrant the Incident Commander to make decisions that
deviate from these guidelines.

B.

Priorities
1. Life Safety (Rescue)
2. Fire Control
3. Property Conservation

C.

Structure Fire Procedure Sub-Sections
1. 203.01.01 Structure Fire Operations – Safety Considerations
2. 203.01.02 Structure Fire Operations – Pre-Planning
3. 203.01.03 Structure Fire Operations – Size-Up
4. 203.01.04 Structure Fire Operations – Radio Reports and Communications
5. 203.01.05 Structure Fire Operations – Incident Command and Command
Transfer
6. 203.01.06 Structure Fire Operations – Strategy and Risk Management
7. 203.01.07 Structure Fire Operations – Fireground Benchmarks
8. 203.01.08 Structure Fire Operations – Search and Rescue
9. 203.01.09 Structure Fire Operations - Ventilation

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS
SECTION 203.01
12/20
Page 2 of 2

10. 203.01.10 Structure Fire Operations – Fire Company Response and
Actions
11. 203.01.11 Structure Fire Operations – Apparatus Placement
Considerations
12. 203.01.12 Structure Fire Operations - Staging
13. 203.01.13 Structure Fire Operations - Notifications
14. 203.01.14 RAT
15. 203.01.15 Mayday and Emergency Declaration
16. 203.01.16 Changing Strategy from Defensive to Offensive Operations
17. 203.01.17 Structure Fire Operations - Personal Decontamination
18. 203.01.18 Structure Fire Operations – Chimney and Flue Fires
19. 203.01.20 High-Rise Operations


=== 203.01.01 Structure Fire Operations -  Safety Considerations ===
PROCEDURES MANUAL
SUBJECT: Structure Fire Operations – Safety Considerations
NUMBER:
APPROVED:
203.01.01

FIRE CHIEF

TYPE: Structure Fire Operations

EFFECTIVE DATE: 12/2020

Page 1 of 3

REVISED DATE: 12/2020

203.01.01 Structure Fire Operations - Safety Considerations
A. Purpose
To address safety considerations during structure fire operations.
B. Full protective clothing including SCBA, shall be worn at the scene of all structure
fires until the Incident Commander directs otherwise.
Note: Personnel raising ladders, working outside the building, or other external
activities, are not mandated to use respiratory protective equipment as long as they
are in a clear atmosphere.
C. Members responding to working fires, or multiple alarm fires, will be wearing full
protective equipment, including SCBA when reporting to the Incident
Commander.
D. All units will work under the direction of "Command", no free-lancing.
1. Companies shall function as part of a team working on their assignment
as a cohesive unit.
2. All Companies should be supervised by a Company Officer and the
Company Officer is responsible for the accountability and cohesiveness
of the unit.
3. All Companies should leave the IDLH together. No Company Officer
should send one member on a remote task or out of a building by
themselves. In the event this occurs due to the inability to leave as a unit
due to fire control efforts or no relief, then:
a. Officer must communicate to Command (“Engine 2, FF Smith
leaving the building due to _____”
b. The firefighter leaving must verbally notify that he/she is clear of
the building.
c. If the firefighter is going to rejoin his Company, Command shall
notify the Company Officer and he/she must verify this firefighter
makes it back to the working area.
4. If an immediate evacuation of the structure by operating units becomes
necessary, an emergency message calling for retreat will be transmitted

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS - SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
SECTION 203.01.01
12/20
Page 2 of 3

on all radio channels in use at the scene (Fire ground and Dispatch).
a. Reference 203.01.04 – F. Structure Fire Operations – Radio
Reports and Communications.
b. Upon hearing this retreat message and/or signal, members shall
immediately leave the structure and reassemble outside the fire
perimeter.
c. The MSA SCBA Monitoring System evacuation signal shall be
activated by the Accountability Officer.
i. This system will send a message to all activated ICM’s on
the fire ground to evacuate the structure.
ii. All members shall acknowledge this message via the ICM
on the SCBA.
d. Company Officers shall account for all members and report a PAR
to Accountability or to their assigned Division Supervisor upon
exiting the building.
e. A PAR shall then be completed by the Accountability Officer for
all companies that have not self-reported a PAR upon evacuation.
5. Critical Events or Dangerous Conditions
a. All members operating at structure fire scenes should be aware of
dangerous situations that may occur during a fire.
b. Any member who witnesses signs of these events or conditions
shall notify their supervisor immediately. Supervisors shall
notify Command and take appropriate action to protect persons.
c. Transmissions involving critical events would fall under
“Emergency” communications. (Reference Section 203.01.15
Mayday & Emergency Declaration).
6. Two In and Two Out
a. Fire fighters will not enter an Immediately Dangerous to Life
(IDLH) atmosphere unless.
i. At least two fire fighters, using a buddy system, enter an
IDLH atmosphere and remain in visual and voice contact
with one another at all times.
ii. At least two fire fighters are located outside as initial backup and the conditions for entry into an IDLH atmosphere
listed below are met.
b. Nothing in this procedure is meant to prohibit fire fighters from
performing emergency, LIFE SAVING RESCUE activities before
an entire team has assembled.
i. When victims’ lives are at stake, we will take a higher risk
to save lives.

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS - SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
SECTION 203.01.01
12/20
Page 3 of 3

ii. We will NOT take extreme risks for property.
iii. This exemption is for true life saving situations ONLY.
c. In order to ensure safe operations, these procedures may require an
initial delay prior to entry especially for outlaying companies. The
first fire company on the scene in this situation should use this time
to prepare for a safe and efficient interior attack into an IDLH
atmosphere.
d. Members shall never make an interior attack on a fire beyond the
incipient stage without at least 2 fire fighters dressed in full PPE
with SCBA on the scene as BACKUP
7. Companies should use discipline not to overcrowd stairways, hallways and
fire areas in the event rapid egress is needed.
a. This is particularly important when committing resources into
upper floors of residential buildings via narrow stairways.
b. Officer of Second Due Engine is responsible to keep the stairway
clear. The 2nd Engine Officer is in charge of the stairs,
regardless of rank and will maintain a clear path of ingress
and egress.
c. Personnel shouldn’t stage on the stairway, either be up or down.
d. Don’t block the means of egress.
e. Company Officers must exercise discipline to ensure means of
egress and fire areas aren’t overcrowded with firefighters.
8. Exclusion Zones, Fire Zones and Fire Perimeters will be established as
necessary (Refer to Section 202.06 Fire Zones/ Perimeters).


=== 203.01.02 Structure Fire Operations - Pre-Planning ===
PROCEDURES MANUAL
SUBJECT: Structure Fire Operations – Pre-Planning
NUMBER:
APPROVED:
203.01.02
FIRE CHIEF

TYPE: Structure Fire Operations

EFFECTIVE DATE: 12/2020

Page 1 of 1

REVISED DATE: 12/2020

203.01.02 Structure Fire Operations – Pre-Planning
A. Purpose
To identify major problems in structures and prescribe what is needed to meet
them if an incident occurs, without going too deeply into step by step actions.
B. Pre-plans are developed prior to an incident occurring.
C. (Reference Operations Section 202.02 Pre-Planning)


=== 203.01.03 Structure Fire Operations - Size-Up ===
PROCEDURES MANUAL
SUBJECT: Structure Fire Operations - Size-Up
NUMBER:
APPROVED:
203.01.03
FIRE CHIEF

TYPE: Structure Fire Operations

EFFECTIVE DATE: 12/2020

Page 1 of 2

REVISED DATE: 12/2020

203.01.03 Size- Up
A. Definitions
1. Size-Up - The process of gathering and analyzing information that will
influence decisions that Company Officers and Staff Officers make and
the actions that fire fighters will take.
2. Initial Radio Report (I.R.R.) – The information that will be relayed over
the radio by the initial arriving Officer usually a Fire Company Officer
that will be assuming Command of the incident. This occurs early on in an
incident.
3. Follow-Up Radio Report – The information that will be relayed over the
radio after a 360 is complete. This report describes the problem, the
incident action plan, the strategy to be taken and resource determination.
B. Purpose
To provide a consistent approach for reporting initial and subsequent size-up radio
reports.
C. The initial size-up should begin when an alarm is received and continue while
enroute. These critical factors are usually not relayed over the radio and should
begin prior to arrival. This should include but not be limited to the following
information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Dispatch information of the incident.
Pre-plans and pertinent information for the reported address.
Premise History Information for the reported address.
Weather and Wind conditions.
Water Supply
Time of Day / possible life hazard

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS - SIZE-UP
SECTION 203.01.03
12/20
Page 2 of 2

D. The following Size-Up information shall be included in the first arriving Officer’s
initial and follow-up radio reports:
1. Building Size Commensurate to Occupancy
a. Small
b. Regular (Average)
c. Large
d. Mega
2. Building Height (1 story, 2A, approximately 15 stories, etc…)
3. Occupancy Type
a. Dwelling
b. Multi-Dwelling
c. Mixed Occupancy
d. Church, McDonalds, Family Dollar, Home Depot, etc…
e. Strip Mall
f. Commercial/Industrial
g. High Rise – Office or Residential
4. Problem
a. Nothing Showing – Investigating
b. Smoke Showing (could be just a light haze or food on stove, not
necessarily a working fire).
c. Working Fire (Significant smoke or fire showing)
d. Defensive Fire Conditions
Note: Avoid using words like “heavy and medium” when
describing fire and smoke conditions. These words are very
subjective.
5. Location of Problem: Floor
Example; “Smoke showing from Alpha and Charlie” or “Fire showing
from two windows second floor Bravo side with a Bravo side exposure.”
6. Life Safety and Hazard concerns.
7. Basement Report following 360 (view of four sides of the building)
8. Additional Pertinent Information
9. Reference 203.01.04 Structure Fire Operations – Radio Reports and
Communications for Initial Radio Report and Follow-Up Report
Procedure,


=== 203.01.04 Structure Fire Operations -Radio Reports and Communications ===
PROCEDURES MANUAL
SUBJECT: Structure Fire Operations – Radio Reports and Communications
NUMBER:
APPROVED:
203.01.04
FIRE CHIEF

TYPE: Structure Fire Operations

EFFECTIVE DATE: 12/2020

Page 1 of 5

REVISED DATE: 12/2020

203.01.04 Structure Fire Operations – Radio Reports and Communications
A. Purpose
1. This topic is intended to establish a procedure for the role of Dispatch in
communications on the fireground. Dispatch will monitor all radio traffic
on the fireground for structure fires. Communications obtained from the
radio traffic will be entered into the run information and displayed on the
PMDC. Important or critical information as specified in this procedure will
be acknowledged and repeated over the fireground channel by Dispatch.
2. To demonstrate what information is contained in the Initial Radio Report
and the Follow-Up Report.
B. Initial Radio Report (IRR)
1. The first arriving company on scene will provide an Initial Radio Report
(IRR) to all incoming units on the fireground channel. This report can be
made from the officer’s seat or upon exiting the apparatus.
2. The Initial Radio report will contain the following critical fireground
factors:
a. Announce Company’s arrival on the scene.
b. Building Area / Description
i. Building Size (Small, Regular, Large, Mega)
ii. Building Height
iii. Occupancy – dwelling, multi-dwelling, commercial,
church, McDonalds, etc.
c. Problem Description
i. Nothing Showing
ii. Smoke Showing
iii. Working Fire
iv. Defensive Fire Conditions
d. Location of Problem – basement / floor number and side (Alpha,
Bravo, Charlie, Delta)
e. Resources needed
i. Can Handle
ii. Hold Assignment

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS – RADIO REPORTS & COMMUNICATIONS
SECTION 203.01.04
12/20
Page 2 of 5

iii. Upgrade – extra companies or alarm
f. Establish Command
3. Radio Traffic Example:
-Fire Company: “Engine 20 on scene of a large 2 story multi dwelling,
with a working fire on the 2nd floor Alpha side. Engine 20 will be
Hamilton Command”.
-Dispatch: “OK – Engine 20 is on scene reporting a working fire on the
2nd floor Alpha side of a large two-story multi-dwelling, Engine 20 will
be Hamilton Command.”
C. Follow-Up Radio Report
1. The Follow-Up Radio Report will made by the first arriving Company
Officer (Initial Incident Commander), unless the first due Chief Officer
arrives on the scene and states that he/she will perform it.
2. This report contains the following information:
a. Results of 360 survey – completed or not completed
b. Height from the “Charlie” side if different from the Initial Radio
Report (I.R.R.)
c. Basement Type
i. Look Out
ii. Walk Out
iii. Walk Up
iv. Block Windows
v. No Basement
d. Incident Action Plan (IAP) – tasks.
i. Hose stretch and location
ii. Primary search, etc.
e. Life Safety Hazards Location and Needs
f. Strategy – Offensive or Defensive
3. Radio Traffic Examples:
a. Example #1:
Incident Commander: “Hamilton Command, 360 Complete, there
is a walk-out basement, no change in grade on Charlie side, Engine
1 will be stretching a line through alpha, we will be in the offensive
strategy.”
Dispatch: “OK Hamilton Command on the follow-up report.”
b. Example #2:
Incident Commander: “Hamilton Command follow-up report,
unable to access Charlie due to building size, we are investigating
“possible food on the stove”, all other companies Level 1 stage.”
Dispatch: “OK Hamilton Command on the follow-up report.”

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS – RADIO REPORTS & COMMUNICATIONS
SECTION 203.01.04
12/20
Page 3 of 5

D. Status Update Reports - Are reports made at any time when the Incident
Commander determines it is needed to give an update of conditions or actions that
have been performed at the incident. This can also occur when a Company
completes a task and needs to be reassigned.
E. Critical Updates
1. Report of Persons Trapped, other items related to life safety. When
Dispatch receives updates from callers, Dispatch shall relay that
information over the fireground channel to notify all units either
responding or working on scene. This critical radio traffic will be
acknowledged by the responding first due Company, Chief Officer or the
Incident Commander. If not acknowledged it shall be repeated by
Dispatch.
2. Radio Traffic Example:
-Dispatch: “Companies responding to Hamilton Ave we are receiving
reports of people trapped on the second floor unable to exit due to fire in
the hallway”.
-District Chief: “District 3 clear on the report of occupants trapped on 2nd
floor”.
F. Time Lapse Updates
1. Dispatch will give Time Lapse Updates to the Incident Commander (IC)
every ten (10) minutes. The first-time lapse update will occur ten (10)
minutes after the first fire company arrives on the scene.
2. Time lapse updates shall affect strategy decisions by providing updates to
the Incident Commander about the amount of time that the fire has been
burning and the affect the current strategy has on stabilizing the incident.
The first ten (10) min mark will typically be approximately 14 minutes
from when the call was received, noting that the fire started prior to that.
When a fire has been burning that long it will begin to impact the
structural stability of the structure, especially if it is made of lightweight
construction and/or trusses. The IC shall consider this while evaluating
the current strategy.
3. The ten (10) minute mark time lapse updates will also provide the IC with
an understanding of the working time for companies using an SCBA.
Companies can be expected to get about 15-20 minutes of working time
out of their SCBA. The IC should be anticipating this and be prepared to
replace working crews with new companies at this point. The 10-minute
updates from Dispatch will assist the IC in the management of the
incident.

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS – RADIO REPORTS & COMMUNICATIONS
SECTION 203.01.04
12/20
Page 4 of 5

4. Radio Traffic Example:
-Dispatch: “Dispatch to Hamilton Command this is your second (2nd) ten
(10) minute mark.”
-Command: “Hamilton Command OK.”
G. Command Transfer
1. Procedure for transferring Command from the Initial Incident Commander
to the first arriving Chief Officer -Reference 203.01.05 Structure Fire
Operations- Incident Command and Command Transfer
2. When Command is transferred from the initial working IC to a later
arriving Chief Officer, this information will be transmitted over the
fireground channel and repeated by Dispatch. This ensures that all
companies working on the fireground are aware that Command has been
transferred and a stationary Command Post has been established.
3. Radio Traffic Example:
-District Chief: “District 3 to Dispatch; District 3 will be taking
Command on Hamilton Ave. Companies will remain in the offensive
strategy”.
-Dispatch: “Clear, District 3 will be Hamilton Command remaining in the
offensive strategy”.
H. Emergency and Mayday Declarations (Reference 203.01.15 Mayday and
Emergency Declaration)
1. Extra Alarms: When the IC requests an extra alarm from Dispatch, that
information shall be repeated over the fireground channel. This will
confirm that the request was received. For example:
-Command: “Hamilton Command Emergency, dispatch the 2nd alarm”.
-Dispatch: “That’s clear Command the 2nd-Alarm is in”.
2. Emergency Tones: Dispatch has the ability to transmit an emergency tone
over the fireground channel to alert on scene personnel of an “Emergency”
situation. This tone will only be transmitted at the request of the Incident
Commander, and should be used for the following reasons:
a. Evacuation of the building
b. Any situation where there is imminent danger to life
3. Note: Not all “Emergency” declarations will result in the use of the
emergency tone. For example, a request for an extra alarm does not
receive an emergency tone.
4. Radio Traffic Examples:
a. -Command: “Main St Command to Dispatch Emergency, give me
the emergency tone”.
-Dispatch – “Clear” -then gives the tone.

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS – RADIO REPORTS & COMMUNICATIONS
SECTION 203.01.04
12/20
Page 5 of 5

-Command: “Main St. Command to all companies we are
changing to a Defensive Strategy, Retreat, Retreat, Retreat, give a
PAR and location, upon exiting the building”.
b. -Command: “Command to all companies Emergency, there is a
hole in the floor on the second floor, Charlie side, stay off the
second floor.” (No Emergency Tone)
I. EMS Branch Communications
1. The ALS supervisor shall communicate to the incident commander on the
fireground channel.
2. EMS communication between the ALS supervisor and the fire ground
medic units shall be conducted on the treatment channel.
3. The ALS Supervisor shall carry 2 radios and monitor the fireground
channel and the “Treatment” Channel in the same fireground zone.
EXAMPLE: Fireground is “Command B” or “B-2” the ALS shall also
monitor the “Treatment” Channel in Zone B or “B-9”.
4. Each medic unit shall monitor the fireground channel and the “Treatment”
Channel in the same fireground zone. One member of the medic unit shall
monitor the fireground channel “Command B” or “B-2” and the other
member of the medic unit shall monitor the “Treatment” Channel in the
same fireground zone.


=== 203.01.05 Structure Fire Operations - Incident Command and Command Transfer ===
PROCEDURES MANUAL
SUBJECT: Structure Fire Operations – Incident Command & Command Transfer
NUMBER:
APPROVED:
203.01.05
FIRE CHIEF

TYPE: Structure Fire Operations

EFFECTIVE DATE: 12/2020

Page 1 of 3

REVISED DATE: 12/2020

203.01.05 Structure Fire Operations – Incident Command and Command Transfer
A. Definitions
1. Command Transfer Report - The process of moving the responsibility
for Incident Command from one (1) Incident Commander to another.
2. CAN - A report that relays the Conditions encountered, the Actions being
performed and the Needs of a fire company or chief officer.
B. Purpose
To establish a guideline for Incident Command and Command Transfer at
structure fires.
C. Incident Command (Reference Operations Section 202.01 Incident Command
System)
1. Command needs to be established and verbalized on the radio for all
incidents that have two (2) or more units responding. “Command” shall be
stated over the radio.
2. For structure fires, the first arriving Company Officer will be considered
in Fast Attack Mode/Mobile Command.
3. In rare cases the first arriving Company Officer may need to establish a
stationary Command Post outside the building, only on the direction of the
responding Chief Officer. The Company Officer will then assign another
member of the company or later arriving company the task(s) of the initial
arriving company.
D. Command Transfer
1. Upon arrival (not before) of the first arriving Chief Officer, Command will
be transferred to an Incident Commander at a stationary Command Post if
the incident has not yet been stabilized.
2. The initial Incident Commander will only transfer Command to a Chief
Officer at a stationary Command Post.

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS - INCIDENT COMMAND AND COMMAND TRANSFER
SECTION 203.01.05
12/20
Page 2 of 3

3. The first arriving Chief Officers shall only operate from a stationary
Command post and not in fast attack mode.
4. When transferring Command, members shall use the following guidelines.
a. First arriving Chief Officer announces on the scene.
b. Confirmation of deployment and assignments of operating
Companies from the initial Incident Commander.
c. Request a CAN (Conditions, Actions, and Needs) Report from
Current Incident Commander (first arriving Company - Fast Attack
Mode IC or IC #1). This will usually occur by radio. During this
report the following additional information needs to be relayed:
i. General Situation Status that includes incident conditions
(fire location and extent, hazmat spill or release, number of
patients, etc).
ii. Evaluate the Incident Action Plan and completion of any
tactical objectives.
iii. Safety considerations if any.
d. Re-evaluate the Strategy
e. Announce the transfer of Command and strategy over the
Fireground. For Example;
- First Arriving Chief Officer: “District 1 to Command, I
understand you are on the first floor with Truck 3 and
Engine 5 is on the second floor. If that is correct, give me a
CAN.”
- Command: “Command to District 1, that is correct. We
have water on the fire on the first floor and have no needs.”
- First Arriving Chief Officer: “District 1 clear, I will
take it from here.”
- “District 1 to Dispatch, I will be assuming Main Street
Command and companies will remain in the offensive
strategy”
-Dispatch; “Clear, District 1 will be Main St. Command
remaining in the offensive strategy.”
E. When a higher-ranking Chief Officer arrives on the scene, transfer of Command
does not have to occur once a stationary Command Post has been established.
The higher-ranking Chief Officer can be become the Senior Adviser to the
Incident Commander however is still ultimately responsible for the entire incident.
The higher-ranking Chief Officer may assume Command should they deem it
necessary.
F. Incident Demobilization and Critique Process
1. Prior to releasing Fire Companies from an incident, the Incident
Commander shall have all officers report to the Command Post.

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS - INCIDENT COMMAND AND COMMAND TRANSFER
SECTION 203.01.05
12/20
Page 3 of 3

2. The Incident Commander shall have a brief proactive critique of the
incident to discuss any positive or negative actions that may have occurred
during the incident.
a. Incident Commander shall request input during this critique from
the officers that were on the scene.
b. The primary purpose of this critique is to increase efficiency and
safety at future incidents.
3. The Incident Commander will develop, discuss, and initiate a
demobilization plan to release resources with the officers.


=== 203.01.06 Structure Fire Operations - Strategy and Risk Management ===
PROCEDURES MANUAL
SUBJECT: Structure Fire Operations – Strategy and Risk Management
NUMBER:
APPROVED:
203.01.06
FIRE CHIEF

TYPE: Structure Fire Operations

EFFECTIVE DATE: 12/2020

Page 1 of 7

REVISED DATE: 12/2020

203.01.06 Structure Fire Operations – Strategy and Risk Management
A. Purpose
To outline guidelines for the fire ground strategy to be employed and the
management of the risks involved at structure fires.
B. Strategy
1. Fire ground operations will fall in one of two strategies, OFFENSIVE OR
DEFENSIVE.
2. The two strategies are based on a standard Risk Management Plan that is
to be employed at ALL structure fires.
C. Risk Management
1. WE MAY RISK OUR LIVES A LOT TO PROTECT SAVABLE LIVES.
2. WE MAY RISK OUR LIVES A LITTLE TO PROTECT SAVABLE
PROPERTY.
3. WE WILL NOT RISK OUR LIVES AT ALL TO SAVE WHAT IS
ALREADY LOST.
D. Plan of Action
1. Considering the level of risk, the Incident Commander will choose the
proper strategy to be used at the fire scene. The strategy can change with
conditions or because certain benchmarks (i.e. ALL CLEAR) are obtained.
The strategic mode will be based on:
a. The building (type of construction, condition, age, etc)
b. Structural integrity of the building (contents vs. structural
involvement)
c. The fire load (what type of fuel is burning and what's left to burn)
d. The fire and/or smoke conditions (extent, location, etc.)
e. The rescue profile (savable occupants/survivability profile)

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS - STRATEGY AND RISK MANAGEMENT
SECTION 203.01.06
12/20
Page 2 of 7

f. Treat all buildings as if made from light-weight construction until
proven otherwise.
2. The Incident Commander is responsible for determining the appropriate
fire ground strategy.
a. The proper strategy will be determined based on the following:
i. Avoiding simultaneous OFFENSIVE and DEFENSIVE
strategies in the same fire area.
ii. This occurs by first committing personnel to interior
positions, then operating master streams from exterior
positions. Interior crews are then in danger of injury or
death. Darkening down a fire from the exterior while
companies are in a protected area away from the fire area is
acceptable; however only occurs through the direct order of
Command.
iii. Matching the appropriate strategy to the fire conditions of
the structure, and minimizing risk to fire fighters.
b. The Incident Commander needs to ensure that all personnel are
operating within the determined strategy.
c. By controlling the fire ground strategy, the Incident Commander is
providing overall incident scene safety.
3. Managing fire ground strategy must start with the arrival of the first unit
and be constantly monitored and evaluated throughout the entire incident.
a. The initial Incident Commander (usually a Company Officer) will
include the fire ground strategy in the follow-up radio report.
b. As Command is transferred to later arriving officers, these officers
assuming Command must evaluate the fire ground strategy based
on the Risk Management Plan.
4. Fire ground strategy provides a starting point for fire ground operations.
Once the strategy is announced, all fire fighters know whether to operate
on the interior or exterior of the building. The fire ground strategy cannot
be a mystery to anyone, everyone operating on the fire ground must be
operating in the same strategic mode; Offensive or Defensive.
E. Offensive Strategy
1. Within the framework of the Risk Management Plan, the structure must
first be determined to be safe to enter.
2. Once determined safe, an Offensive Fire Attack is centered on RESCUE /
Fire Attack.

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS - STRATEGY AND RISK MANAGEMENT
SECTION 203.01.06
12/20
Page 3 of 7

3. When safe to do so, the Cincinnati Fire Department will initiate offensive
operations at the scene of structure fires.
4. The following are guidelines for offensive fire attacks:
a. Ensure a RAT team is on the scene or one is responding.
b. Ensure a Safety Engine is on the scene or one is responding.
c. Initial attack efforts must be directed toward supporting a primary
search and the first attack line must go between the victims and the
fire to protect avenues of rescue and escape.
d. Determine fire conditions and extent before starting fire operations
(as far as possible).
e. Attack the fire from the interior of the building; however, an
aggressive interior attack can begin with a stream operating from
the exterior of the building prior to attack lines entering. This is
called “Quick Water”. This should only occur when:
i. Presented with a large volume of fire that needs darkened
down before entering.
ii. Fire at entry point (front door) extending outwards and
involving porch, siding or other materials.
iii. Delayed entry due to access or forcible entry issues.
f. Command must consider the most critical direction and avenues of
fire extension, plus its speed, particularly as they affect:
i. Rescue activities
ii. Level of risk to fire fighters
iii. Confinement efforts
iv. Exposure protection
g. Confining the fire is the number one priority; everything else gets
better when “water is put on the fire”.
5. Command must allocate personnel and resources based upon this firespread evaluation.
6. Command must not lose sight of the very simple and basic fire ground
reality that at some point fire fighters must engage and fight the fire.
a. Command must structure whatever operations are required to PUT
WATER ON THE FIRE.
NOTE: It may take the first two Engine Companies working
together on the first line to accomplish this task.
b. The rescue/fire control-extension/exposure problem is solved in
the majority of cases by a fast, strong, well-placed attack.
c. Command must establish an attack plan that overpowers the fire
with ACTUAL water application, either from offensive or
defensive positions.
7. Command must consider the 7 sides of the fire: front, rear, both-sides, top,
bottom, and interior. Fires cannot be considered under control until all 7
sides are addressed. Failure to do so frequently results in fire extension.

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS - STRATEGY AND RISK MANAGEMENT
SECTION 203.01.06
12/20
Page 4 of 7

8. Where the fire involves concealed spaces (attics, ceiling areas,
construction voids, etc.), it becomes paramount that Companies open up
and operate fire streams into such areas.
a. Early identification and response to concealed space fires will save
the building.
b. Officers who hesitate to open up because they don't want to beat
up the building may lose the entire structure.
9. Ventilation is a major support item that must be carefully addressed during
fire attack.
a. Ventilation must be well coordinated with the fire attack line.
b. Communication must occur between the ventilation crew and the
fire attack line to ensure water is ready to be flowed on the fire
prior to the ventilation occurring.
c. Do not break windows, doors or vent the roof until a hose line is in
place and operational.
d. Ventilation openings should only be made in the fire area.
e. Ventilation that is not coordinated and occurs too early will cause
increase in fire intensity and fire spread. This also decreases the
time prior to flashover.
f. Controlling the doors is also a method of controlling the fire flow
path and decreasing fire intensity.
i. Doors to the fire area should remain controlled or closed
until a hose line is in place, this includes the entrance door.
ii. Once the hose is advancing, control of the entry door isn’t a
great concern.
iii. Companies that locate a fire should isolate the fire by
controlling the door to the fire area.
iv. Doors to rooms adjacent to the fire area should remain
closed.
10. Command must get ahead of the fire. Command must make critical
decisions that relate to cutoff points and develop a fire control strategy.
a. It takes a certain amount of time to get water to a location, and the
fire continues to burn while the attack is being set up (REFLEX
TIME)
b. Command must consider where the fire will be when attack efforts
are ready to actually go into operation; if misjudged, the fire may
burn past the attack/cutoff position before resources and personnel
are in position.
c. Don't play "catch up" with a fire that is burning through a building.
Project your set-up time, write off property and get ahead of the
fire. Set up adequately ahead of the fire, and then overpower it.

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS - STRATEGY AND RISK MANAGEMENT
SECTION 203.01.06
12/20
Page 5 of 7

11. WRITE-OFF PROPERTY THAT IS ALREADY LOST and go on to
protect exposed property based on the most dangerous direction of fire
spread. Do not continue to operate in positions that are essentially lost.
12. Marginal Conditions
a. Command must balance and integrate attack size and position with
fire conditions, risk and resources.
b. Many times offensive/defensive conditions are clear cut and
Command can quickly determine the appropriate strategy. In other
cases, the situation is MARGINAL and Command must initiate an
offensive interior attack, while setting up defensive positions on
the exterior.
c. THE ONLY REASON TO OPERATE IN MARGINAL
SITUATIONS IS RESCUE.
13. The effect of the interior attack must be constantly evaluated, and the
attack abandoned if necessary. Strategy changes can develop almost
instantly or can take considerable time. Command must match the strategy
with the conditions. The Incident Commander controls overall incident
scene safety by determining the proper strategy to be used.
14. If the Incident Commander doesn't change strategies from offensive to
defensive until the building is disassembling itself due to structural
damage, Command is late in strategy determination.
a. Often times when the building gets to make those decisions, fire
fighters become traumatized (physically and/or emotionally).
b. THE INCIDENT COMMANDER DETERMINES THE
STRATEGY, THE BUILDING SHOULDN'T.
15. Command should abandon marginal attacks when:
a. A primary all clear is obtained and the situation is still marginal.
b. The roof is unsafe or untenable. Especially working fires in large
unsupported attics, bowstring truss or lightweight trussed attic
spaces.
c. Interior forces encounter heavy heat and cannot locate the fire or
cannot make any progress on the fire.
d. Heavy smoke is being forced from the building under pressure and
is increasing.
16. Command needs to constantly evaluate conditions while operating in
marginal situations. This requires frequent and detailed reports from
Division/Group Supervisors.
17. It is imperative that Command assign a Roof Division as early as possible
during marginal situations for rapid evaluation of roof conditions.
a. Roof evaluation should occur from an aerial ladder or adjacent
building.
b. In these situations, Command should strongly consider not
committing crews to the interior of a structure unless he/she

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS - STRATEGY AND RISK MANAGEMENT
SECTION 203.01.06
12/20
Page 6 of 7

receives a report from the Roof Division that the roof of the
structure is safe to operate on and under.
c. It is better to go from an offensive to a defensive strategy too soon
rather than too late.
18. “Fire under control” means the forward progress of the fire has been
stopped and the remaining fire can be extinguished with the on-scene
resources; it does not mean the fire is completely out. When the fire is
brought under control, Command will notify Dispatch utilizing the
standard radio report of "FIRE UNDER CONTROL." Dispatch will record
the time of this report. Command must initiate a PAR report from all on
scene resources.
F. Defensive Strategy
1. The decision to operate in a defensive strategy indicates that the offensive
attack strategy, or the potential for one, has been abandoned for reasons of
personnel safety, and the involved structure has been conceded as lost (the
Incident Commander made a conscious decision to write the structure off).
2. The announcement of a change to a defensive strategy will be made as
Emergency Traffic (Reference Section 203.01.15 Mayday & Emergency
Declaration)
(Example: “Emergency all Companies at (address) retreat, retreat,
retreat we are going defensive”)
3. All personnel will withdraw from the structure AND MAINTAIN A
SAFE DISTANCE FROM THE BUILDING outside the collapse zone
which is at least 1 ½ times the distance of the highest point of the building.
Note: In brick or ordinary buildings, consider a larger collapse zone due
to secondary spread of block and brick once it strikes the ground.
4. Officers will account for their crews and advise Command/Division/Group
Supervisor on the status of their crew (PAR). Division/Group Supervisors
will notify Command of the status of the crews assigned to their
Division/Group.
5. A PAR (Personnel Accountability Report) shall be obtained after any
switch from offensive to defensive strategy.
6. Interior lines will be withdrawn and repositioned when changing to a
defensive strategy.
a. Crews should retreat with their hose lines if safe to do so.
b. If retreat is being delayed because of hose lines, and it's unsafe to
stay in the building, hose lines should be abandoned.
7. All exposures, both immediate and anticipated, must be identified and
protected. The first priority in defensive operations is personnel safety; the
second is exposure protection.

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS - STRATEGY AND RISK MANAGEMENT
SECTION 203.01.06
12/20
Page 7 of 7

8. The next priority may be to knock down the main body of fire. This may
assist in protection of exposures but does not replace it as a higher priority.
9. Master streams are generally the most effective tactic to be employed in
defensive operations. For tactical purposes, a standard master stream flow
of greater than 750 GPM should be the guideline. Adjustments may be
made upward or downward from this figure but it is very significant in the
initial deployment of master streams.
10. Exposures
a. Control with 2-1/2” or Master Stream
b. Protect exposures in the following order:
i. Greatest life hazard first.
ii. Greatest value.
iii. Most severe exposure
c. When the exposure is severe and water is limited, the most
effective tactic is to apply water directly to the exposed building
and alternate between the exposure and fire building until another
fire line is in service on the exposure.
d. Once exposure protection is established, attention may be directed
to knocking down the main body of fire and thermal-column
cooling.
11. Fire under control means the forward progress of the fire has been stopped
and the remaining fire can be extinguished with the on-scene resources; it
does not mean the fire is completely out. When the fire is brought under
control, Command will notify dispatch utilizing the standard radio report
of "FIRE UNDER CONTROL." Dispatch will record the time of this
report. Command must initiate a PAR report from all on scene resources.
12. If defensive operations are conducted from the onset of the incident,
Command will notify Dispatch that there will not be a primary search
completed for the affected structure(s).
13. CHANGING FROM DEFENSIVE TO OFFENSIVE STRATEGY
(Reference Section 203.01.16 – Changing from Defensive to Offensive
Strategy)


=== 203.01.07 Structure Fire Operations - Fireground Benchmarks ===
PROCEDURES MANUAL
SUBJECT: Structure Fire Operations – Fireground Benchmarks
NUMBER:
APPROVED:
203.01.07
FIRE CHIEF

TYPE: Structure Fire Operations

EFFECTIVE DATE: 12/2020

Page 1 of 2

REVISED DATE: 12/2020

203.01.07 Structure Fire Operations – Fireground Benchmarks
A. Purpose
To establish a procedure that throughout an incident, officers and Incident
Commanders should announce tactical benchmarks to track the completion of
important tasks.
B. Structure Fire Benchmarks
1. On Scene
a. Every Company arriving on the scene shall announce “on scene”
on the fire ground channel. This will ensure those operating
remotely know other Companies are on scene and ready to operate.
(example: “Engine 1 on scene”)
2. 360 Complete and then state the Status of Fire In the Basement
a. “Engine 1 – 360 Complete- No Fire in the Basement” or
b. “Engine 1 360 Complete – Smoke or Fire from the Basement”
c. A 360 means that you have viewed all four (4) sides of the
building, not necessarily walked a complete circle around the
building.
3. Identify if Building is built with Lightweight / Truss Construction
4. Water on the Fire
a. Announced by the first engine applying water to the fire (example:
“Engine 1 putting water on the fire”)
5. Primary Search – All Clear
a. Announced for each area where a primary search is completed (fire
area, fire floor, floor above, etc). (example: “Ladder 1 – primary
search all clear on fire floor”)
b. Also announced by the Incident Commander on status updates.
6. Fire Under Control
a. Announced by the Engine Co. officer when the fire is under
control
b. Also announced by the Incident Commander on status updates.

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS - FIREGROUND BENCHMARKS
SECTION 203.01.07
12/20
Page 2 of 2

7. Secondary Search – All Clear
a. Announced by companies performing these tasks
b. Also announced by the Incident Commander on status updates.
8. Roof Report
a. At the request of the Incident Commander
b. Usually given from the aerial ladder by a Ladder Company “B”
Team
c. To determine the stability of the roof and sides of a building.
d. To report heavy loads on the roof.
e. To report visible fire stops seen from the roof.
9. Fire Out
Announced by the Incident Commander during status updates
10. PAR
Requested each time the fire is under control and as indicated in
Accountability Procedures (Reference Operations Procedure 202.07 Fire
Fighter Accountability).
11. All Clear – Remove SCBA
Announced on the fire ground channel by the Incident Commander when it
is safe to remove SCBA after air monitoring is completed by the Safety
Officer or his designee.


=== 203.01.08 Structure Fire Operations - Search and Rescue ===
PROCEDURES MANUAL
SUBJECT: Structure Fire Operations – Search and Rescue
NUMBER:
APPROVED:
203.01.08
FIRE CHIEF

TYPE: Structure Fire Operations

EFFECTIVE DATE: 12/2020

Page 1 of 4

REVISED DATE: 12/2020

203.01.08 Structure Fire Operations – Search and Rescue
A. Purpose
To establish guidelines for search and rescue operations at structure fires.
B. Rescue
1. Initial efforts must be directed toward supporting rescue efforts and
hose lines must be placed in a manner to:
a. Control interior access
b. Confine the fire
c. Protect avenues of escape, until the primary search is complete.
d. For residences, usually the best location of the first fire line is
through the front door, protecting the primary access to the
building and the stairs if present are usually in this vicinity.
2. Hose line placement becomes a critical factor in rescue operations and
all operating companies must realize that the operation is in a rescue
mode.
a. Immediate rescue attempts by the first due Engine Company
without simultaneous stretching of a fire line should only be
attempted in the most extreme circumstances. Engines have to
put water on the fire.
b. Factors to consider for an immediate rescue:
i. Occupants endangered in immediate vicinity of the fire.
ii. Number of persons trapped.
iii. Occupants threatening to jump.
iv. Means of egress cut off by fire.
v. Ability to reach the occupants with ground ladders on
the Engine Company.
vi. Anticipated arrival time of the first due Ladder
Company.
c. When faced with endangered occupants, the Officer can:
i. Position a fire line between the occupants and the fire.
ii. Ventilate to draw fire, heat and smoke away from the

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS - SEARCH AND RESCUE
SECTION 203.01.08
12/20
Page 2 of 4

3.

4.
5.

6.

occupants.
iii. Give verbal instructions on what to do and provide
reassurance.
iv. Close doors to limit spread of smoke and fire.
v. Ensure all responding Companies are aware of the
location of endangered occupants.
Normal means of interior access should be used to remove victims
whenever possible.
a. For first, second and third floor removal, ground ladders are
usually quicker and safer than aerial ladders.
Note: Firefighters must assist occupants down ladders.
b. Aerial ladders will have to be used on upper floors within
reach.
Unconscious victims will be difficult to remove via an aerial ladder. If
possible, if removal is necessary via a ladder – select a ground ladder.
Persons remote of the fire or in areas without excessive smoke
conditions, should be sheltered in place. People presenting at windows
or balconies should be instructed they are “OK” and to keep their door
closed, close patio door and await assistance from the fire department.
If in doubt, remove the occupant. If they are ambulatory, the internal
means of removal is the best option provided it is clear.
The most urgent reason for calling additional alarms is life safety.

C. Search
1. A primary search will be conducted at all structural fires, where it is
possible to enter.
a. Primary search means that Companies have quickly gone through
all affected areas and verified the removal and/or safety of all
occupants.
b. Time is the critical factor in the primary search process.
2. Danger to occupants is most acute on the fire floor, the floor immediately
above the fire, the stairways, the top floor, and then intermediate floors, in
that order.
a. In High-Rise Fires, smoke may not always rise to the top of the
structure. (Reference to Section 203.01.20 High Rise Fires)
b. All Stairways should be searched while ascending to the top floor.
3. If met with fire at the main entrance of a residential building, and persons
are suspected to be trapped based on size-up, the inside ladder team will
not wait to advance in behind the fire line.
4. The inside team will seek another means of access to rooms not yet
involved in fire.

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS - SEARCH AND RESCUE
SECTION 203.01.08
12/20
Page 3 of 4

5. This deviation from standard procedures shall be communicated to
Command including entry point and intended location.
6. VEIS may be the best alternative to reach the upper floor of a residential
building.
7. Time of day play a critical role in search priorities.
a. During sleeping hours, a heavy emphasis must be placed on
bedroom search.
b. Limited time shall be spent in Living Rooms, Dining Rooms,
Kitchens and Utility Areas.
c. Consideration should be given to first floor bedrooms (if any).
d. When search of the first floor is complete, search teams shall make
a rapid advance to the upper floors to search via the interior stairs
or via ladders (Reference VEIS procedures in Drill Manual).
8. Search Assignments
a. First Engine Officer will search the room or fire area once the fire
is knocked down
b. First Truck Company
i. “A” Team: The first Truck Company “A” team will search
the fire area, unless victims are present or reported
elsewhere, and then they will focus on that location,
notifying Command as indicated above of variance.
ii. “B” Team: If there are victims present at windows needing
rescue or reported occupants in spaces above the fire, the
“B” team will work with the “A” team and deploy ladders
to that area and search/remove occupants.
iii. In large multiple dwellings, the Officer may elect to take all
members interior to assist with search. This action must be
communicated to Command.
c. Second Truck Company
i. “A” Team: If first due Truck Company is searching fire
area/floor, search floor above. If first due truck is rescuing
occupants or conducting VEIS, search fire area/floor.
ii. “B” Team: If first due Truck “B” team is performing
ventilation, place ground ladders to perform VEIS. If first
due Truck “B” team is involved in rescue functions,
prepare for ventilation.
d. Heavy Rescue Company
i. Search areas not searched by first and second Truck
Companies. In private dwellings, it might be necessary to
stage or perform VEIS if needed.
ii. In large multiple dwellings, immediately clear the “Attack”
stairwell and then the “Rescue” stairwell of occupants by

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS - SEARCH AND RESCUE
SECTION 203.01.08
12/20
Page 4 of 4

searching from the fire floor to the top of the stairwell for
victims.
9. Secondary search will be part of lengthy fire control activities and means
that Companies thoroughly search the interior of the fire area after initial
fire control and ventilation activities have been completed.
10. Secondary search should preferably be conducted by different Companies
than those involved in primary search activities. Thoroughness, rather than
time, is the critical factor in secondary search.
11. Companies assigned to search operations shall report their progress to
Command. All clear benchmarks shall be announced as indicated in
Section D of this procedure. Example: “Truck 20, primary search all
clear on fire floor” and “Truck 21, primary search all clear on floor
above”.
12. All areas of the building must be searched when a fire is present. Even
though visible smoke may not have spread to other areas, dangerous gases
from the fire may have rendered the occupant(s) unconscious. This is
especially important in multiple dwellings on the floors above the fire as
these gases can accumulate by spreading in utility or pipe chases, garbage
shafts, open windows, stairwells or other voids.
a. Depending on fire size and extent, it may be advisable to conduct
this search as a secondary search with keys; rather than forcing
doors to individual units.
b. If smoke is present in hallways – forcible entry is authorized into
apartments. Force doors in a manner in which they can be
controlled. Once entering the apartment to search shut the door to
limit smoke damage.
13. When it becomes necessary to evacuate an entire building or area, the
chalk marking system will be utilized to identify areas searched.
a. Every member shall carry a piece of dry chalk in their turnout coat
pocket.
b. When an entire apartment or other area has been searched, an "X"
will be placed on the door or the wall next to the door at eye level.
c. Once an entire floor has been searched an "X" will be placed on
doors leading from stairways to the floor, and on the wall opposite
elevators.
d. If chalk won’t write on the surface, announce the search is
complete to Command by specific area.
14. When sheltering-in-place, notify Command of the apartment number and the
number of people sheltered-in-place. For example, (Truck 3, four (4) adults are
sheltered-in-place in apartment 32 on the third floor”.


=== 203.01.09 Structure Fire Operations - Ventilation ===
PROCEDURES MANUAL
SUBJECT: Structure Fire Operations – Ventilation
NUMBER:
APPROVED:
203.01.09
FIRE CHIEF

TYPE: Structure Fire Operations

EFFECTIVE DATE: 12/2020

Page 1 of 2

REVISED DATE: 12/2020

203.01.09 Structure Fire Operations – Ventilation
A. Purpose
To establish guidelines for the appropriate placement and timing of ventilating a
structure at a working fire.
B. Ventilation must be closely coordinated with fire attack. The ventilation crew
shall communicate with the fire attack line prior to venting the structure to
assure the line is in position.
C. Ventilation Hazards
1. Provides a flow path for fire spread.
2. Improper ventilation can cause an increase in fire spread and intensity.
D. Vent Vertically at the Roof
1. Where appropriate (directly above the fire) and only when the fire attack
line is in position to put water on the fire
2. When to Vent the Roof:
a. Private Dwelling when the fire is on the upper floor or involving
the attic space.
b. Multi-Dwelling when the fire is on the top floor.
c. Multi-Dwelling when smoke is in the stairwell and stairwell
needs vented.
d. Multi-Dwelling when fire is in the attic space.
E. Vent Horizontally:
1. When appropriate and only when the fire attack line is in position to put
water on the fire.
2. When to vent Horizontally
a. Private Dwelling when the fire is on a lower floor and venting a
window will release heat and smoke from the fire room.
b. Multi-Dwelling when the fire is in any location other than the top
floor.

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS - VENTILATION
SECTION 203.01.09
12/20
Page 2 of 2

c. Multi-Dwelling when the fire is limited to one compartment,
bedroom or apartment.

F. Basement Ventilation
When holes for ventilation are made in a floor, they should be cut near a window,
if possible, so that the smoke can exit through the window.
G. Positive Pressure Ventilation
1. Start at the direction of Command.
2. Void spaces where there is potential for fire extension, shall be opened up
prior to beginning positive pressure ventilation.
3. Large churches or commercial buildings consider requesting the Regional
Ventilation Unit from Point Pleasant, KY Fire Department.


=== 203.01.10 Structure Fire Operations -Company Response and  Actions ===
PROCEDURES MANUAL
SUBJECT: Structure Fire Operations – Fire Company Response and Actions
NUMBER:
APPROVED:
203.01.10
FIRE CHIEF

203.01.10

TYPE: Structure Fire Operations

EFFECTIVE DATE: 12/2020

Page 1 of 18

REVISED DATE: 12/2020

Structure Fire Operations – Response and Company Actions
A. Purpose
To outline guidelines for Fire Company actions and operations at structure fires.
These are only guidelines and no one (1) fire is the same and conditions can
dictate the Incident Commander and fire companies to deviate from these
guidelines if conditions warrant.
B. Response (Reference to Section 703 Dispatch Procedures- 703 E. Apparatus
Responses by Incident Type - STRUCT)
C. Engine Company Operations
1. Water Supply
a. A source of water supply shall be secured by the first two (2)
due-in Engine Companies unless the pre-plan preempts this
requirement. The goal is to provide a primary and secondary
uninterrupted water supply.
b. Third (3rd) Engine to Level 1 Stage at next closest hydrant and only
secure water supply at the direction of Command.
c. The water supply should be a 5" supply line, or soft suction.
d. When laying a supply line, do not lay a line or position the Engine
Company to block access by the Ladder Company. Preferably lay
hose to one side of the street or access road.
i. On narrow or dead-end streets where access will be limited,
Engine Companies should consider utilizing a reverse lay
(Crossfire) to a hydrant past the address to allow
unimpeded access for the first arriving Ladder Company.
ii. It is the responsibility of each Engine Company to provide
its own uninterrupted, adequate supply of water
iii. In the event a supply source or line cannot be secured, the
Officer of the Engine Company must notify Command
immediately. Later arriving Companies may need to relay
water to this Engine Company.

FIRE COMPANY RESPONSE AND ACTIONS
SECTION 203.01.10
12/20
Page 2 of 18

e. For each supply hose lay over 1000 feet an Engine Company shall
be placed to boost pressure and relay water to the initial attack
Engine Company. An Engine Company should be placed every
1000 feet for supply line stretches over 1000 feet.
f. For Defensive or Large GPM operations, FAO’s should ensure the
5” supply is coming directly into the side intake to provide
maximum GPM flow into the fire pump and avoid any friction loss
from the front intake piping.
2. Engine Company Tactics
a. Locate the fire
i. Identify the location and extent of the fire.
ii. Refer to dispatch information from caller (apartment #,
floor, etc)
iii. Solicit information from bystanders or fleeing occupants.
Ask where the fire is and the best way to get to it.
iv. Listen to radio traffic from other Companies (ie: Ladder
Company who gets into building ahead of the Engine
Company).
v. Sometimes smells can assist in locating fire:
1. Wood – residence, apartment space
2. Food on the stove – apartment or kitchen
3. Fuel oil – basement or boiler
4. Rubbish – hallways, stairways, breezeways,
compactor shafts or rooms, shafts
5. Electrical – overhead lights, outlets, electric
appliances
vi. Look up stairwells and down hallways for evidence of
smoke.
vii. If you smell smoke and are uncertain of the location, press
on doors to apartments if they are locked and you should
see smoke emit from the jamb.
viii.
Once the location of the fire is determined, notify
all Companies and announce the best route to get water on
the fire.
b. Confine or Control the Fire
i. Line placement between the fire and unburned areas.
ii. Anticipate fire spread via voids, pipe chases, utility areas,
openings and concealed spaces.
iii. Control ventilation and door openings to limit fire spread
c. Extinguish the Fire
i. Put water on the fire. All efforts must focus on getting the
first line into service.

FIRE COMPANY RESPONSE AND ACTIONS
SECTION 203.01.10
12/20
Page 3 of 18

ii. After water is on the fire, check for extension and open up
to ensure extinguishment.
d. Hidden Fire
i. Early recognition of, and response to, concealed-space fires
can save the structure.
ii. Companies should always check hidden areas for evidence
of fire.
iii. Open up examination holes and use TIC for examination.
iv. Failure to open up may cause loss of the structure, rekindle
or injury.
3. Attack Line Choice
a. The 1-3/4 inch attack line can be used for most fires (i.e., one or
two rooms in a residential fire, multi-families, compartmentalized
areas)
b. The Company officer should order 2-1/2 inch attack lines for a
larger volume of fire. If an offensive attack is being undertaken in
a residential occupancy, then a 1-3/4” fire line is an appropriate
choice due the compartmentalization of the structure, small room
size and to increase speed and mobility.
c. A 2-1/2 fire line shall be used for the following:
i. For all fires in Commercial, Industrial, Retail, Auto Repair
Shops, Churches or High Rise Occupancies.
ii. Advanced fire situations where quick knock down is
necessary to limit fire spread.
iii. Massive fire extending to attic space of multiple dwelling.
i. Obvious defensive operations. Use the largest tip possible
for defensive operations (1-1/4” or 1-3/8”).
iv. Exposure protection.
v. Standpipe Operations
4. Line Placement
a. Rapid and appropriate placement of the first attack line will often
dictate the success of the overall operation.
i. The unburned portion represents where the fire is going and
should establish the framework for fire control operations.
ii. Initial efforts should focus on getting at least one line in
operation as quickly as possible. Sometimes this requires
the first two (2) engine companies to work together to
accomplish this task.
iii. This may require placing a stream from the exterior into the
building prior to entering or while the interior attack lines
are being deployed if there is heavy fire or delayed entry
due to access issue.

FIRE COMPANY RESPONSE AND ACTIONS
SECTION 203.01.10
12/20
Page 4 of 18

b.

c.

d.

e.

f.

iv. Determine fire location and extent of fire to determine the
most advantageous entry point to begin operations.
Companies must remember that the interior stairs are the most
important means of egress to protect. The stairs allow for Ladder
Company personnel to rapidly get above a fire and allows for
easier removal of occupants.
FIRST FIRE LINE
i. Between fire and victims via the primary means of egress
(front door in single family, stairwell doors in garden
apartments and multiple family units).
ii. Exceptions which require direct water application outside
of the normal means:
1. When fire is exiting overhead of a victim at a
window, balcony or fire escape.
2. Major fire requiring quick knockdown (such as an
attached garage fire).
3. When there is a severe exposure, then apply water
between the fire and the most severe exposure.
SECOND FIRE LINE
i. Back-up first line in the event of failure of the first line by
providing additional GPM in the event the first line can’t
control the fire.
ii. Position to control exposures in the event the first line
didn’t control exposures initially.
iii. Position on interior if the first engine chooses to protect
exposures, protect trapped occupants.
iv. Floor above if not needed for back up because the 1st line is
controlling the fire. ENSURE SECOND LINE IS
SUFFICIENT TO REACH THE FLOOR ABOVE.
v. Fire line choice must be the same size or larger than the
first line.
THIRD FIRE LINE
i. As directed by Command.
ii. Cover secondary means of egress.
iii. Protect trapped occupants above the fire, on fire escapes or
in any type of danger.
iv. Exposure control, line deployment into exposed buildings
v. Vertical extension to floors above or other areas if
necessary
Other Considerations
i. Do Not operate hose lines in opposition to each other.
ii. Sometimes companies cannot make it to a fire area due to a
wind driven fire or massive fire conditions; consider a

FIRE COMPANY RESPONSE AND ACTIONS
SECTION 203.01.10
12/20
Page 5 of 18

coordinated quick knockdown ordered and coordinated by
Command from the exterior. Companies on the interior
should withdrawal to a safe location in a stairwell or the
floor below before initiated.
iii. TEAMING OF ENGINE COMPANIES
1. NOTE: First two Engine Companies shall always
work to put the first line into service.
2. Cohesiveness is important, work as a team to ensure
successful placement of the first line.
iv. In single family and other tight or narrow stairs – the
SECOND DUE OFFICER – controls the stairs to limit
overcrowding.
v. Do not operate fire streams into smoke unless you are
encountering extreme levels of heat or suspect unseen
rollover or black fire, which will lead to a flashover, or
rapid-fire spread event.
1. It’s always better to cool the environment than be
overcome with rapid-fire progression. If in doubt –
open up fully and flow until it cools.
2. Use a TIC to monitor heat and roll over conditions.
g. Master Streams
i. Engine Mounted Master Streams offer very large GPM
flows (500 to 1,000 GPM), quick operation, reach and
penetration. A solid bore tip offers greater reach,
penetration, with a more intact stream than a variable
stream nozzle that is set on straight stream.
ii. Utilize the largest smooth bore tip sizes possible on master
stream devices while accounting for reach. If reach is a
concern, smaller tip sizes allow for greater reach. The
largest tip size should be utilized initially on the mounted
master stream device, preferably the 2-inch tip.
iii. Engine Mounted Master Streams should be considered for
structures that are well involved, beyond rapid reach of
attack lines, for exposure protection, and situations that
pose an unusual safety risk to firefighters. Engine
companies should be positioned to utilize their apparatus
mounted master stream for well involved fires or exposure
protection as they are capable of providing the most rapid
high GPM stream at such incidents.
h. Basement Fires
i. A look at all four (4) sides of the building (360) must be
completed before entering a building on a suspected

FIRE COMPANY RESPONSE AND ACTIONS
SECTION 203.01.10
12/20
Page 6 of 18

basement fire. Note: This shall be conducted during the
Follow-Up Report prior to entering the structure.
ii. If no exterior stairs or door to access the basement and
HEAVY FIRE CONDITIONS EXIST WITHIN THE
BASEMENT, then “knock down” fire from an exterior
window prior to attempting to enter from interior steps.
iii. If safe to do so, the second line must go to the interior of
the building at the steps to the basement and protect the rest
of the building from vertical extension.
iv. Third line may back-up either line or go to top floor for
extension control.
i. Fire Fighting Foam – Class A Foam
i. All Engine Companies are equipped with Class AFirefighting foam
ii. Class A foam shall be used on all offensive, interior attack
lines unless specifically instructed to not use the foam by
the Company officer or Incident Commander. Don’t wait
for the foam to be called for, use it on all fires.
iii. Note: Class A foam shall not be utilized for defensive or
master stream operations.
D. First Arriving Company ((Reference 201.01.04 Structure Fire Operations- Radio
Reports and Communications), shall perform;
1. Initial Radio Report and Assume Command in fast attack mode.
2. Follow-Up Radio Report
3. Give CAN Report to first in Chief Officer during Command Transfer.
E. Company Arrival On-Scene
1. First two (2) Engine Companies, First Ladder Company and First Chief
Officer will report to the building. All other companies will Level 1 Stage
on a one-alarm or still alarm dispatch.
2. Announce On-Scene or Level 1 Staging
3. Examples;
a. “Engine 17 On-Scene Level 1”
b. “Ladder 20, second Truck Level 1”
F. Engine Company Operations and Assignments
1. Arrival Benchmark Notification dictates Company Assignments.
2. First arriving Fire Company will become the initial (Fast Attack Mode)
Incident Commander.

FIRE COMPANY RESPONSE AND ACTIONS
SECTION 203.01.10
12/20
Page 7 of 18

3. First (1st ) arriving Engine:
a. Secure a water supply.
b. Position Engine as to not impede access to the structure for the
Ladder Company.
i. This is usually accomplished by pulling past the structure.
ii. If the apparatus mounted master stream is needed due to
large fire volume or immediate exposure protection, then
the ENGINE owns the front of the building.
c. Evaluate Exposures – Place exposure line if necessary or place
apparatus mounted deck gun into service to protect exposures.
NOTE: Essential tactic of first due Engine is to place lines to
protect life and then other hazards. If a major fire is exposing
other buildings, then protect those other buildings initially.
d. Direct the actions of the second due Engine Company.
i. Assist with attack line
ii. Bring a back-up attack line
iii. Take an attack line above the fire.
iv. Protect an exposure
v. Go On-Deck
e. Direct the actions of the other Companies dispatched on the first
alarm – Primarily the second engine.
f. Deploy the initial hose line to the seat of the fire.
g. Officer equipped with Haligan Tool and TIC
4. Second (2nd ) arriving Engine:
a. Secure a water supply independent of the first arriving engine.
This should be from a different direction and approach if possible.
b. SECOND ENGINE SHALL ASSIST FIRST DUE ENGINE at the
direction of the initial Incident Commander.
i. Ensure efficient and timely stretch of the first fire line,
without kinks and advancing to the seat of the fire. THIS
IS THE MOST IMPORTANT INITIAL TASK.
ii. Members must spread out and the company officers of both
companies must communicate to ensure smooth and speedy
advance.
c. If a 2-1/2” fire line is deployed by the initial company for offensive
operations, then the 2nd engine is ALWAYS mandated to assist the
1st engine and remain a cohesive part of that fire attack crew.
d. Only when the SECOND ENGINE is not needed on a simple
stretch to a 1 or 2 story private dwelling - Deploy a backup hose
line at the direction of the initial incident commander.
e. The backup line should come from the second engine whenever
possible. This action will provide two independent hose lines and

FIRE COMPANY RESPONSE AND ACTIONS
SECTION 203.01.10
12/20
Page 8 of 18

water supplies in the event of mechanical failure of the first engine
or hydrant.
f. If the initial attack line is containing and extinguishing the fire the
backup hose line may be repositioned to the floor above the fire to
cut off vertical fire extension. This must be communicated to
Command.
g. Backup line should be same size or greater than the initial attack
line and should be long enough to reach the floor above the fire.
5. Third (3rd ) Arriving Engine:
a. Level 1 Stage at the next appropriate hydrant and wait for direction
from Command.
b. The Officer and firefighters will be prepared for firefighting in full
PPE.
c. Once given an assignment by Command, the 3rd arriving Engine
duties are as follows:
i. The FAO shall assist first and second due Engine Company
FAOs if not operating their engine..
ii. If 2nd Engine Company is assisting and committed to first
attack line, deploy a back-up line.
1. Deploy this line from the second engine whenever
possible to provide two independent hose lines and
water supplies in the event of mechanical failure of
the first engine or hydrant.
2. The backup hose line should usually be deployed
through the same entrance as the initial attack hose
line.
3. Backup line should be same size or greater than the
initial attack line.
iii. If the initial attack line is containing and extinguishing the
fire the backup hose line may be repositioned to the floor
above the fire to cut off vertical fire extension. Shall notify
Command when repositioning above the fire.
iv. If ordered, also be prepared to: Search, Ventilate or
perform any needed fire ground tasks.
v. Officer equipped with TIC, handy line and hose strap
6. Fourth (4th ) Arriving Engine (SAFETY ENGINE):
a. The Safety Engine will be the 4th Engine on the 1-alarm
assignment and shall be responsible for establishing Accountability
and assisting with RAT Operations.
b. Dispatch will designate the 4th Engine as the Safety Engine on
dispatch. 4th engine will acknowledge safety engine designation on
the fireground channel. The only variance to this assignment is at
the order of the Incident Commander.

FIRE COMPANY RESPONSE AND ACTIONS
SECTION 203.01.10
12/20
Page 9 of 18

i. When dispatched as the Safety Engine, shall remain the
Safety Engine unless changed by Dispatch or ordered by
Command. If Command gives orders to go to work, make
sure Command is aware you were dispatched as the Safety
Engine. The Incident Commander must request an
additional Safety Engine.
ii. On arrival, Stage and park apparatus out of the way to not
impede other apparatus from accessing the scene.
iii. Never commit to operations with water supply or fire lines,
unless ordered by Command.
iv. The Officer of the Safety Engine shall assume the duties of
the Accountability Officer. (Refer to Section 202.07
Accountability)
v. One firefighter from the Safety Engine shall assist the
Accountability Officer for the duration of the Incident or
until relieved.
vi. The Officer and Firefighter assigned to Accountability shall
manage the accountability board and the SCBA air
monitoring system at the District Vehicle.
vii. The remainder of the individuals assigned to the Safety
Engine will immediately report to the RAT Team Officer to
increase the size of the RAT Team. They shall remain part
of the RAT Team and under the direction of the RAT
Officer for the duration of the incident. (Refer to Section
203.01.14 Rapid Assistance Teams)
c. On arrival will Level 1 stage unless the first companies report a
“working fire”, then will respond forward and notify Command
that you are establishing Accountability. For example, “Safety 21
has established Accountability at the rear of District 2.”
G. Ladder Company Operations and Assignments
1. Standard Ladder Company Functions Include: Forcible entry, search,
rescue, ventilation, salvage, and overhaul. Engine companies do their
work with hose lines; ladder companies do their work with tools.
2. When completing a task, example “primary search complete”, Command
should give you another assignment. Do NOT freelance.
3. Lighting
a. lighting is imperative for safety of personnel, especially after fire
control.
b. Lighting can be set up by any of the Ladder Companies at any
time, however the sooner the better.
c. The RAT Company needs to consider lighting all egress routes.

FIRE COMPANY RESPONSE AND ACTIONS
SECTION 203.01.10
12/20
Page 10 of 18

4. Salvage
a. Salvage is the act of protecting property from damage from fire or
water.
b. Salvage should begin with the arrival of the firefighting force.
c. The judicious use of water provides a salvage function without a
need for additional personnel.
d. Property can be protected by covering with salvage covers or
plastic.
5. Overhaul
a. Overhauling is a thorough examination used to make certain that a
fire is completely extinguished; it begins as soon as visible fire is
extinguished.
b. Whenever possible, overhauling should be done from the interior of
the building considering its structural stability.
i. Overhaul efforts should focus on searching for and locating
hidden fire.
ii. Overhaul efforts should take place where fire extension is
likely to occur.
iii. Utilize inspection holes and TIC to assist on where to
overhaul.
c. It is advisable to remove all burned debris and materials from the
main fire area. This needs to be coordinated with the Fire
Investigator and Command.
d. The public relations aspect of overhauling is very important to the
Fire Department.
6. First (1st ) Arriving Ladder Company:
a. Truck company officer shall state their company’s actions on the
fireground channel based on best use of their personnel and the
rescue profile of the emergency. Actions include: (See b and c)
b. Team A – Officer and Firefighter 1 (and Firefighter 3 if riding with
5 personnel)
i. Force entry
ii. Equipped with TIC, Halligan, Striking Tool and hooks at a
minimum.
iii. Search fire floor for endangered persons.
1. Reference 203.01.08 Structure Fire Operations Search and Rescue
2. Any deviation from standard search priorities shall
be communicated to command to include entry
point and intended location.
iv. Open up and expose hidden fire after primary fire has been
knocked down.

FIRE COMPANY RESPONSE AND ACTIONS
SECTION 203.01.10
12/20
Page 11 of 18

v. The Officer shall advise Command of conditions
discovered, work performed and benchmarks completed.
c. Team B – FAO and Firefighter 2
i. Duties will be determined by Company Officer.
ii. Potential assignments are as follows:
1. Spot apparatus to advantage
2. Search and force entry with Team A
3. Perform 360 checking sides and rear for endangered
persons and fire extension with 24’ extension
ladder.
4. Remove obviously endangered persons.
5. Ventilate as needed (Reference Section 203.01.09
Structure Fire Operations – Ventilation)
6. Open up and expose hidden fire.
iii. Raise ladders as needed with priority to structures with
front porch roofs for second floor egress.
7. Second (2nd ) Arriving Ladder Company:
a. Level 1 Stage until given an assignment by the IC
b. Team A – Officer and Firefighter 1 (and Firefighter 3 if riding with
five (5).
i. Equipped with TIC, Halligan, Striking Tool and hooks at a
minimum.
ii. Assist the first due ladder company with primary search.
iii. Search all floors above the fire for occupants and fire
extension.
iv. Avoid duplicating search efforts.
v. The Officer shall advise Command of conditions
discovered, work performed and benchmarks completed.
c. Team B – FAO and Firefighter 2
i. Duties will be determined by Company Officer.
ii. Remove obviously endangered persons.
iii. May need to raise an aerial ladder or ground ladders to
ensure alternate escape route for Companies operating or
potential victims.
iv. May need to perform horizontal or vertical ventilation at
the direction of Command. Ensure the attack line is in
position to put water on the fire. (Reference Section
203.01.09 Structure Fire Operations – Ventilation).
v. Position the positive pressure ventilation (PPV) fan. The
fan shall only be turned on at the direction of the IC.
vi. Provide interior lighting as soon as possible.
8. Third (3rd ) Arriving Ladder Company (RAT):
a. (Refer to Section 203.01.14 Rapid Assistance Teams)

FIRE COMPANY RESPONSE AND ACTIONS
SECTION 203.01.10
12/20
Page 12 of 18

b. Dispatch will designate the 3rd Truck as the RAT on dispatch. 3rd
truck will acknowledge the RAT designation on the fireground
channel. The only variance to this assignment is at the order of the
Incident Commander.
c. On arrival will Level 1 stage unless the first companies report a
“working fire”, then will respond forward and notify Command
that you are beginning RAT duties. For example, “RAT 20 is
beginning Proactive RAT duties.”
d. If Command gives orders to go to work, make sure Command
know you were dispatched as the RAT. The Incident Commander
then needs to request an additional RAT.
H. Heavy Rescue Company Operations and Assignments
1. First (1st ) Arriving Heavy Rescue Company (One-Alarm):
a. Level 1 Stage until given an assignment by the IC
b. Assignments may include:
i. On deck
ii. Secure utilities
iii. Additional fire lines to other areas for extension
iv. Relief of interior crews
v. Ladder Company duties; raise ladders, overhaul, salvage,
ventilation.
vi. Search and rescue
vii. RAT Assist
c. May be needed to assist the Incident Commander to assess the
structural stability of a building when necessary.
d. Exchange out air bottles.
e. Assess Haz Mat if necessary.
2. Second (2nd ) Arriving Heavy Rescue Company (Extra-Alarm):
a. Level 2 Stage.
b. Should be assigned as the RAT assist if the first Heavy rescue is
operating in the hazardous zone.
c. Depending on the fire and conditions, attempt to stage necessary
equipment and tools to help facilitate a firefighter rescue should a
collapse or entrapment occur (cutting, lifting, moving, shoring, etc)
d. Shall position the apparatus in a manner to facilitate a rapid exit
from the scene should another response become necessary.
e. All equipment should be procured from the first arriving Heavy
Rescue Company leaving the second Heavy Rescue intact for
future response.

FIRE COMPANY RESPONSE AND ACTIONS
SECTION 203.01.10
12/20
Page 13 of 18

I. District Fire Chiefs
1. First (1st ) Arriving District Fire Chief
a. Park District vehicle to view two (2) sides of the structure if
possible.
b. Perform Size Up – include 360° survey of building if possible
c. Assess current strategy and tactics and change tactics or strategies
based on continual size-up
d. Request a CAN from the initial Incident Commander
e. Perform a Follow-Up Report and relay to Dispatch.
f. Establish a stationary Command Post through the Command
transfer process (Reference 203.01.05 Structure Fire Operations –
Command and Command Transfer), preferably at the rear of the
District vehicle; if possible.
g. Command should always attempt to be on the “Alpha” side. If this
is not possible relay the location to Dispatch and all companies on
the scene.
h. Utilize the current Command Worksheet.
i. Ensure Accountability has been established and located at
Command
j. Efficiently and effectively manage the incident
k. Ensure tactical benchmarks are met as outlined in Section
203.01.07 Structure Fire Operations – Fireground Benchmarks
l. Request additional alarms or resources as needed
m. Note: The Initial arriving District Chief must utilize the provided
radio headset on the fire ground channel OR ensure someone is
listening with the headset.
2. Second (2nd ) Arriving District Fire Chief
a. Initially Level 1 Stage
b. Report to the Incident Commander to receive an assignment.
c. Don Full PPE & SCBA
d. Typical assignment of the second arriving District Chief is to:
i. Manage the opposite corner or side of the building from the
initial District Chief.
ii. May be assigned as a Division Supervisor
e. If the initial arriving District is a Captain riding above grade as the
District Chief, the second arriving District Chief shall assume the
role of the Incident Commander and reassign as if they were the
second DC arriving.
f. Becomes RAT Chief during a Mayday and is in-charge of the
rescue efforts.

FIRE COMPANY RESPONSE AND ACTIONS
SECTION 203.01.10
12/20
Page 14 of 18

3. Third (3rd) Arriving District Fire Chief or Chief Officer
a. Report to the Incident Commander for an assignment.
b. Replaces the second District Chief and assumes the 2nd district’s
division duties during a Mayday.
c. May be requested by Command to fill a staff position within the
Incident Command System. Example: Division Supervisor, Search
& Rescue, Extrication, etc.
J. Medic Units
1. The primary mission of the Medic Units on the scene of a structure fire is
to provide medical care for fire fighters and civilians.
2. If the Incident Commander chooses to use the Medic Unit personnel for
firefighting or other duties, the IC shall immediately request another
Medic Unit through Dispatch. The Incident Commander may utilize the
Medic Unit personnel for fireground assignments under the following
conditions:
a. The IC has an urgent fire ground task to assign and the Medic Unit
personnel are the only personnel available.
b. The second (2nd) Medic Unit or ALS Supervisor is on the scene
c. The assigned Medic Unit may function as a single resource or be
assigned to combine with another operating fire company.
d. Exception: If a Company is working by themselves and secondary
companies aren’t on scene the company officer may assign the
Medic Unit to firefighting tasks if they are urgently needed to
stabilize the incident, such as:
i. Search for known trapped occupants and no one else is on
scene or delayed.
ii. Protect exposures with a second fire line if no one else is on
scene or delayed.
iii. Members if assigned to firefighting duties must be fully
dressed in firefighting PPE. (Fire helmet shall have the
Medic Unit Helmet Identifiers in place)
iv. If deployed notify the responding District Chief on the
fire ground channel and request an additional medic
unit.
e. If there is not an immediate need upon the Medic Unit arrival to
care for a firefighter or civilian injury the Medic Unit personnel
shall follow the procedures below.
3. First (1st) Arriving Medic Unit:
a. Level 1 Stage Unit so as not to impede responding companies and
to provide rapid egress from the scene if necessary
b. Upon report of a working fire, place backboard, oxygen, drug box
on the cot and report in close proximity to the Command Post.

FIRE COMPANY RESPONSE AND ACTIONS
SECTION 203.01.10
12/20
Page 15 of 18

c. Deliver accountability passport to Accountability Officer
d. Standby at the cot for assignment. Monitor fireground and
“Treatment” channel in the fireground zone.
e. Stage apparatus for rapid egress from the scene away from fire
apparatus. Don’t get blocked in.
4. Second (2nd) Arriving Medic Unit:
a. Report to location of the first Medic Unit or to the on-scene ALS
Supervisor
b. Deliver Accountability Passport to the Accountability Officer
c. Standby at the cot for assignment. Monitor fireground and
“Treatment” channel in the fireground zone.
d. Stage apparatus for rapid egress from the scene away from fire
apparatus. Don’t get blocked in.
5. Additional Medic Units:
a. Report to ALS supervisor
b. Deliver Accountably Passport to Accountability Officer
c. Set up and manage Rehab
d. Report to location with COT and associated medical equipment.
K. ALS Supervisors
1. The ALS Supervisor shall be responsible for the overall medical treatment
and transport of all medical injuries on the fire ground.
2. Level 1 Stage
3. Upon report of a working fire, report to the Incident Commander for
assignment
4. Establish the Medical Branch
5. Deliver Accountability Passport to the Accountability Officer
6. Communicate with the responding Medic Units and establish a treatment
area. Communicate with medic units on the treatment channel.
7. Establish a rehab area if needed
8. Keep the IC updated with incident injuries
9. Keep a log of all victims treated and transported
10. Determine number of displaced occupants and report to command
L. Incident Safety Officer
1. Level 1 Stage until confirmed “working fire” then respond forward and
report to the Incident Commander.
2. Shall ensure that a Rapid Assistance Team is available and ready for
deployment. Must notify Command if they haven’t replaced a RAT team
if utilized.
3. Shall ensure that a Safety Engine is performing Accountability duties.
Must notify Command if they haven’t replaced a Safety Engine if utilized.

FIRE COMPANY RESPONSE AND ACTIONS
SECTION 203.01.10
12/20
Page 16 of 18

4. The Incident Safety Officers shall be responsible for assisting the Incident
Commander with overall scene safety.
5. Monitor the structure for safety and structural integrity.
6. Command must be immediately notified of any immediate safety hazards
that affect operations, or the strategic plan, via frequent and timely
progress reports.
7. Where fire has involved a building(s), shall advise the Incident
Commander of hazards, collapse potential, and any fire extension in such
building(s).
8. Shall evaluate visible smoke and fire conditions and advise the Incident
Commander on the potential for flashover, back-draft, explosion, or other
events that could pose a threat to operating teams.
9. Shall monitor the accessibility of entry and egress of structures and its
effect on the safety of members conducting interior operations.
10. Shall monitor radio transmissions and stay alert to transmission barriers
that could result in missed, unclear, or incomplete communication.
11. Ensure that the IC establishes the incident scene rehabilitation, tactical
level management component during the emergency operation.
12. Establishing control zones and no-entry (exclusion) zones and ensures that
established zones are communicated to all members present on the scene.
13. Shall have the authority to cause immediate correction of situations that
create an imminent hazard to personnel and must immediately notify
command.
14. At an emergency incident, when activities are judged by the Safety Officer
to be unsafe and to involve an imminent hazard, the Safety Officer shall
have the authority to alter, suspend, or terminate those activities.
15. Shall communicate to the IC the need for additional Safety Officers and/or
tactical specialists due to the need, size, complexity or duration of the
incident.
16. Monitors the Incident Action Plan, conditions, activities and operations to
determine whether they fall within the criteria as defined in the
Department’s risk management plan.
17. Monitor each fire environment, post extinguishment, to advise IC of
Carbon Monoxide (CO) and Hydrogen Cyanide (HCN) levels for SCBA
removal.
M. Additional Staff Officer Response
1. Fire Chief and Assistant Fire Chiefs
a. The Assistant Chief on call is the Duty Chief.
i. The Duty Chief shall monitor all special operations
incidents (hazmat, river operations, mass casualty
incidents, confined space, etc.) and 2 alarm fires.

FIRE COMPANY RESPONSE AND ACTIONS
SECTION 203.01.10
12/20
Page 17 of 18

ii. While monitoring, the Duty Chief will decide based on
incident severity or potential incident severity whether or
not to respond to the incident scene.
iii. The Duty Chief shall respond to all 3 alarm fires or greater,
and/or as requested by an Incident Commander
b. The Fire Chief and/or Assistant Fire Chiefs shall assume one of the
following positions:
i. Senior Advisor – Allowing the Incident Commander to
remain in Command of the incident and helping as
necessary. If the Senior Advisor outranks the Incident
Commander, the Senior Advisor is still responsible for the
outcome of the incident, allowing the Incident Commander
to remain in Command of the incident and helping as
necessary. If the Senior Advisor is of greater rank than the
Incident Commander they are still responsible for the
outcome of the incident.
ii. Incident Commander
1. Assumes Command and responsibility of the
incident and can assign the previous Incident
Commander as the Operations Section Chief. All
communications with operating Companies on the
fire ground will then be channeled through
Operations. The Incident Commander will monitor
the Dispatch Channel.
2. Assumes Command and responsibility of the
incident and retains the Operations Section and
reassigns the previous Incident Commander to a
Division/Group Supervisor or to another General
Staff position (Planning, Logistics, and
Administration).
iii. A General Staff position, Branch Director or
Division/Group Supervisor as assigned by the Incident
Commander (In this case, the IC must be an Assistant Chief
or the Fire Chief)
2. 40-Hour District Fire Chiefs, Captains and Lieutenants
a. Responding staff District Chiefs, Captains and Lieutenants shall
report directly to the Incident Commander for assignment with full
PPE.
b. Staff Officers shall be used for the following, in order of priority at
the incident:
i. Division or Group Supervisor
1. Interior Fire Control
2. Search & Rescue

FIRE COMPANY RESPONSE AND ACTIONS
SECTION 203.01.10
12/20
Page 18 of 18

3. Staging
4. Water Supply
5. EMS
ii. Shall deliver Accountability Passport to the Accountability
Officer


=== 203.01.11 Structure Fire Operations - Apparatus Placement Considerations ===
PROCEDURES MANUAL
SUBJECT: Structure Fire Operations – Apparatus Placement Considerations
NUMBER:
APPROVED:
203.01.11
FIRE CHIEF

TYPE: Structure Fire Operations

EFFECTIVE DATE: 12/2020

Page 1 of 3

REVISED DATE: 12/2020

203.01.11 Structure Fire Operations – Apparatus Placement Considerations
A. Purpose
To establish best practice guidelines for apparatus placement at structure fire
incidents
B. Apparatus function should regulate placement.
C. Effective placement must begin with the arrival of the first units, based on initial
size up, pre-fire plans, and general conditions upon arrival.
1. In large, complex, and lengthy fire ground operations additional alarm
Companies should be staged.
2. Think of fire apparatus as an expensive exposure. Beware of putting
apparatus in places where it cannot be repositioned easily and quickly.
Beware of overhead power lines that may fall on apparatus.
3. Medic Units
a. Medic units should be placed in a safe position that will provide the
most effective treatment of fire victims and firefighting personnel,
while not blocking movement of other apparatus or interfering with
firefighting operations.
b. Medic Units should not get blocked in.
4. Engine Company Placement
a. Engine Companies should not block Ladder Company access, or
place pumper in position that hinders removal of ground ladders.
b. Engines should not be placed in front of the fire building, unless
the layout of the street or parking areas allows for easy access of
ladder companies.
c. Consideration should be taken when laying supply lines to not
block access for other apparatus if possible.
d. Engine Companies should be positioned to utilize their apparatus
mounted master stream for well involved fires or exposure
protection as they are capable of providing the most rapid high
GPM stream at such incidents.

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS- APPARATUS PLACEMENT CONSIDERATIONS
SECTION 203.01.11
12/20
Page 2 of 3

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

e. On narrow or dead-end streets where access will be limited, Engine
Companies should consider utilizing a reverse lay (Crossfire) to a
hydrant past the address to allow unimpeded access for the first
arriving Ladder Company.
f. The first in Engine should generally pull past the structure.
g. The second arriving Engine should consider approaching the scene
from an opposite direction than the first due engine to secure a
water supply and then attempt to get as close as possible to the first
in engine – remaining on the same side of the street.
Truck Company Placement
a. The first arriving truck company should generally position the
apparatus in the front of the fire building or in a position to take
greatest advantage of the aerial ladder for rescue, ventilation or
eventual ladder pipe operations.
b. The second arriving truck company initially shall Level 1 Stage
then when needed shall place the apparatus in the best position to
utilize the aerial ladder for rescue or as a secondary exit from the
roof. This may require positioning the aerial on the opposite side
of the building from the first arriving Truck Company.
Heavy Rescue
a. The Heavy Rescue Company should be positioned in a manner to
not impede access to the scene for the first alarm Engines or
Trucks
b. Position the apparatus at the nearest cross street or on the fire street
as far to one side as possible.
c. Second arriving Heavy Rescue Company should be positioned to
be able to rapidly leave the scene if necessary to respond to another
emergency.
Safety Engine
a. The Safety Engine shall position in a manner not to block other
apparatus or extra alarm Companies.
b. Do not secure a water supply.
RAT Truck
a. The RAT Truck initially shall Level 1 Stage.
b. Upon declaration of a working fire and after the arrival of the
second truck, position as close to the scene as possible and utilize
the aerial device to provide secondary egress to upper floors where
companies are operating or secondary egress from the roof if
another ladder isn’t in place.
District Vehicle
a. The District vehicle shall be placed as close to the fire building as
possible without impeding the placement of the first arriving
Engine or Truck.

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS- APPARATUS PLACEMENT CONSIDERATIONS
SECTION 203.01.11
12/20
Page 3 of 3

b. Good placement of the District vehicle will allow a view of two
sides of the building.
c. Positioning the District vehicle may require parking in a driveway
of a house on the opposite side of the street from the fire building.
D. First arriving companies should approach in a manner to allow visualization of at
least two (2) sides of the building.


=== 203.01.12 Structure Fire Operations - Staging ===
PROCEDURES MANUAL
SUBJECT: Structure Fire Operations – Staging
NUMBER:
APPROVED:
203.01.12
FIRE CHIEF

TYPE: Structure Fire Operations

EFFECTIVE DATE: 12/2020

Page 1 of 2

REVISED DATE: 12/2020

203.01.12 Structure Fire Operations – Staging
A. Purpose
To establish a procedure for fire companies responding to structure fires on the
first and on additional alarms and their responsibilities as it pertains to staging.
B. Definition
1. Level 1 Staging - Units assigned in their direction of travel, uncommitted,
approximately one (1) or two (2) blocks from the scene. Apparatus will
not pass their last tactical objective when staging. Engine Companies will
not pass their last hydrant and Ladder Companies will not pass the last
access point to the building.
2. On Deck (Forward Staging) – This position may be located very close to
the entry point of the “hazard zone”. When assigned “On Deck” you are
awaiting an assignment outside of but close to the hazard zone for quick
deployment without being on air. “On Deck” will reduce the number of
people in an area (standing on the steps inside the building). This also
prevents individuals from wasting their air supply before receiving an
assignment.
3. Recycle – Is a timely and efficient means of air replacement and rehydration with the intent of going back to work as soon as possible. This
is different than Rehab where vitals and an extended rest period occurs.
C. One-Alarm Structure Fire Response
1. Report directly to the address
a. First (1st) and Second (2nd) arriving Engine Companies
b. First (1st) arriving Truck Company
c. First (1st) arriving District Chief
2. Level 1 Staging
a. Second Truck Company
b. Heavy Rescue Company
c. Second District Chief
d. RAT Company

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS - STAGING
SECTION 203.01.12
12/20
Page 2 of 2

e. Safety Engine
f. EMS Units
g. Examples of Radio Communication:
i. “Ladder 23 Level 1, 2nd Truck.”
ii. Engine 32 Level 1, 3rd Engine.”
D. Still Alarm Responses
1. Level 1 Staging
a. Second arriving Truck Company
b. Heavy Rescue Company
2. Confirmed fires, Dispatch will automatically upgrade to full One-Alarm
response.
E. Extra Alarm Responses
1. Level 2 Staging (Reference Operations 202.03 Staging)
F. Staged Companies will await direction from Command.
1. All confirmed “working fires” the RAT and Safety engine will stage
apparatus and begin procedure directed responsibilities. They shall
announce this on the fireground channel.
a. For Example; “RAT 23 on the scene, beginning RAT duties.”
Also, “Safety Engine 46 on the scene, assuming Accountability.”
b. These radio communications allow the initial Incident Commander
to remain in fast-attack mode and he/she knows that Accountability
and RAT operations have been established.”
2. The Incident Commander may begin directing the remainder of the firstalarm companies to come forward and respond in.
a. The IC can assign specific tasks for the third Engine Company,
second Ladder Company and the Heavy Rescue Company to
perform.
b. If no initial tasks are needed to be performed, can place these
companies “On Deck”.
c. Must assign a task, objective and location when assigning
companies. For example, “Command to Truck 23 (second truck),
complete a primary search of the 3rd floor.”
G. Recycled Companies may be requested by the Incident Commander to go back
into the building to perform tasks or be placed “On Deck”.
H. On-Deck companies shall never self-deploy and go to work outside of Command.
This will be considered “free-lancing”.


=== 203.01.13 Structure Fire Operations -Notifications ===
PROCEDURES MANUAL
SUBJECT: Structure Fire Operations – Notifications
NUMBER:
APPROVED:
203.01.13
FIRE CHIEF

TYPE: Structure Fire Operations

EFFECTIVE DATE: 12/2020

Page 1 of 2

REVISED DATE: 12/2020

203.01.13 Structure Fire Operations - Notifications
A. Purpose
To establish a procedure for when to notify the Building Department, Health
Department and the Utility Company.
B. Health Department
1. The Health Department will be notified if a fire occurs in one of the
following establishments:
a. Food Processing Plants
b. Day Care Centers
c. Groceries, Meat Markets, and other food establishments
d. Food Warehouses
e. Restaurants
f. Bars
g. Marinas
h. Homes for Adjustment (Halfway Houses)
i. Nursing Homes
ii. Schools
2. Dispatch should be told by radio that the fire is in an establishment
regulated by the Health Department
a. Dispatch will notify the Health Department of the same, giving as
much information as possible regarding the fire and its impact on
the food serving/selling capabilities of the establishment.
b. It is the responsibility of the Health Department representative to
decide if he/she will respond to the scene or follow up the next
working day, if the fire occurs after regular business hours.
c. The Fire Alarm Office has twenty-four (24) hour call up numbers
for Health Department representatives.
d. It is not necessary to remain on the scene once notification has been
made to the Fire Alarm Office. The Health Department
representative may call you by telephone at the scene or upon
return to quarters for details of the fire, if necessary.

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS - NOTIFICATIONS
SECTION 203.01.13
12/20
Page 2 of 2

C. The Incident Commander shall have Dispatch notify the Building Department of
all “working fires.” The amount of damage to the building will determine if this is
just a notification or if the Building Department needs to respond to the scene.
D. Utility Company - Electric or Gas Service
1. Whenever a major fire occurs (that involves structural damage) in a
dwelling or occupancy, Command will request the Electric and Gas
Service Company to respond to secure utilities.
2. Electric Service may be requested to disconnect power from the street
service in severe situations.


=== 203.01.14 Structure Fire Operations - Rapid Assist Teams (RAT) Updated 12-1-20 ===
PROCEDURES MANUAL
SUBJECT: Rapid Assist Teams (RAT)
NUMBER:

APPROVED:

203.01.14
FIRE CHIEF

TYPE:

Structure Fire Operations

Page 1 of 10

EFFECTIVE DATE: 12/2020
REVISED DATE: 12/2020

203.01.14 Rapid Assist Teams
A.

Scope
Establish procedures outlining the operations of a Rapid Assistance Team (RAT)
at a structure fire. The goal of this procedure is to create a proactive Rapid
Assistance Team to prevent the necessity of a firefighter rescue by removing all
barriers to exit allowing the firefighter to self-rescue.

B. Definitions
1. RAT Group Supervisor- The person, usually the second due in District
Fire Chief, that is in charge of RAT operations during a Mayday on the
scene of an incident. Radio designation can be “RAT Group Supervisor”
or “RAT Supervisor”.
2. Alternate Fire Ground – This fire ground is Channel 16 (the last fire
ground channel in a zone) in all CFD Zones. This Fire Ground Channel is
used during a Mayday only when the Incident Commander tells
companies to switch to it. Currently this is the Mayday Channel on all
CFD radios.
3. CAN Report – Conditions, Actions, and Needs report.
C. Assignment
1. Third closest available Truck Company will be designated as the RAT
Truck.
2. Fourth closest available Engine Company will be designated as the Safety
Engine. The Safety Engine will increase the size of the RAT Truck by at
least two members and will supply two members, one being the Officer, to
be designated as Accountability (Refer to Section 202.07 Accountability).
3. Once dispatched as the RAT Truck or Safety Engine, the Company shall
remain assigned in that role unless changed by the Incident
Commander. The Officer on the Company should not request to be
changed. The Officer should announce the benchmark “Safety Engine 12
is Level 1” over the radio on arrival; it would then be up to the Incident
Commander to change their role depending on the incident conditions or

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS -RAPID ASSIST TEAMS (RAT)
SECTION 203.01.14
12/20
Page 2 of 10

arrival order.
D. Designation and Reporting
1. The radio designation for the RAT Truck will be “RAT” followed by the
appropriate Company number. (Example: Truck 32 responding as the RAT
Truck will be designated “RAT 32”).
2. The radio designation for the Safety Engine will be “Safety Engine”
followed by the appropriate Company number. (Example: Engine 12
responding, as Safety Engine will be designated “Safety Engine 12”). Once
the Officer reports the “on the scene” benchmark, this will be the last time
the Officer will be using the radio designation as “Safety Engine 12”
a. The Safety Engine Officer and one other member, usually the FAO,
will assume the duties of “Accountability”. From this point on the
radio the Safety Engine Officer will use designation of
“Accountability”.
b. The other two / three members of the Safety Engine will now
become part of the “RAT” Truck and will remain as such for
Accountability purposes throughout the Incident.
The
Accountability Officer should move their names on the Company
passport to the RAT Truck passport. They will report to and be the
responsibility of the “RAT” Officer.
E. Proactive RAT Actions and Tasks (Pre-Mayday)
1. When assigned to a Truck Company, first thing in the morning following
the morning equipment check, the Officer should talk to everyone assigned
to the Company for the tour, and discuss their roles when assigned as a
RAT Truck.
2. Following Dispatch and throughout incident, remain alert to the radio and
available on the exterior of the structure. (Most fires will require the RAT
to remain on the exterior of the structure however; a high-rise or large
commercial structure may require the RAT to stage in a forward position
3. Upon arrival the RAT Company will Level 1 Stage and park apparatus out
of the way to not impede other apparatus from approaching the scene.
4. Once the initial companies report a “working fire” the RAT Company shall
stage apparatus and come forward to the scene, and announce they are
initiating pro-active RAT duties.
5. If a stationary Command Post has been established, the RAT Officer will
report face to face with the Incident Commander.
6. The RAT FAO and firefighters will bring RAT equipment forward.
7. The RAT Officer will perform an initial RAT size up of the structure. This
size up will include a complete survey around the structure (360°)
identifying all possible means of entrance and egress from the structure as

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS -RAPID ASSIST TEAMS (RAT)
SECTION 203.01.14
12/20
Page 3 of 10

well as conditions and/or obstacles that may prevent a firefighter from
rapidly exiting the structure. (Example: Doors padlocked closed, Security
bars on windows, etc.)
8. If the fire is above the ground floor of a multi-floor commercial building,
during this assessment, the RAT officer and another member of the RAT
Company can enter the first floor to determine the location of the interior
stairs. If this task is performed, the environment must be free of smoke
and it must be a rapid assessment; No Freelancing.
9. The RAT Company Officer shall report all findings to the Incident
Commander.
10. All impediments, locked doors, bars or plywood on windows, etc., to rapid
firefighter exit from the structure shall be removed.
Note: Use good judgment when removing barriers while this will create
a quick means of egress it may also increase fire conditions by creating a
fire flow path. Consider fire conditions and location when making these
decisions. For example, peeling back plywood without totally removing
it will still allow firefighters to escape, but minimally effect the fire flow
path. Also, when forcing locks on doors, close the door while still making
sure the door can easily be opened in an emergency.
11. When firefighters are operating above ground level, portable or ground
ladders shall be placed to upper story windows or roofs on all sides of the
structure where appropriate. Begin with the areas where firefighters are
working inside the structure. These ladders will provide an escape route
should interior positions or roof operations become untenable. Ground
ladders shall be placed on all sides of the building.
12. A safety fire line may be stretched and placed in front of the building. This
line is not to be used for firefighting purposes. This is to only be utilized
if needed during a “RAT” operation or rescue.
13. Lights shall be set up to illuminate all means of egress out of the building.
NOTE: All members of the RAT Truck must stay together as a Company
and not involve themselves in any activity that reduces their ability to
perform their primary function of firefighter rescue! The only exception is
when the Officer is completing the 360° size-up and performing duties to
develop an action plan should a Mayday occur.
F. Proactive RAT Action Checklist
Officer should utilize the current “Cincinnati Fire Department Rapid Assistance
Team Company Officer Checklist”.

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS -RAPID ASSIST TEAMS (RAT)
SECTION 203.01.14
12/20
Page 4 of 10

G. Responsibilities and Actions to be Taken in the Event a “Mayday” is Declared
1. Incident Commander
a. Acknowledge Mayday, and attempt to identify the firefighter(s)
involved, their last location and their problem.
b. Shall immediately request Dispatch to initiate the “Mayday”
procedure, which includes: an additional Alarm for staging,
additional RAT Team, and an additional District Chief.
c. Shall appoint a RAT Group Supervisor to command the rescue
operation.
d. Shall order all fire suppression Companies operating on the scene
and not involved in the Mayday, to change from the assigned Fire
Ground Talk Group to the Alternate Fire Ground (FG) Channel
(currently the Mayday channel). This clears the original Talk
Group from unnecessary transmissions. Note: Only change
channels when ordered by the Incident Commander.
i. This leaves the distressed firefighter(s), the RAT, Heavy
Rescue Company, and RAT Group Supervisor on the
original operating Fire Ground channel.
1. If known, identify Companies to remain on the
original fire ground talk group and tell everyone
else to switch. For example, Engine 3 is the
Mayday, the Incident Commander would state, “
Engine 3, RAT 19, Heavy Rescue 14, and District 2
all remain on this Fire ground Channel, everyone
else switch to Alternate FG B (currently MAYDAY
B)”.
2. If there is a Company in the area of the Mayday,
and they feel they can immediately assist the
firefighter(s) in distress, they must inform the
Incident Commander, and the Incident Commander
will then need to replace that Company. The
assisting fire company will then also stay on the
original FG Channel.
ii. The Incident Commander needs to relay this change to
Dispatch.
e. Instruct Accountability to conduct a comprehensive incident PAR
on the Alternate FG channel (currently the Mayday channel) as
soon as possible to determine who and how many firefighters
are in peril. Begin the PAR with the companies that were in the
most dangerous positions prior to the Mayday.
i. Companies not responding to the PAR or are reporting
missing members, need to be reported to the Incident
Commander ASAP.

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS -RAPID ASSIST TEAMS (RAT)
SECTION 203.01.14
12/20
Page 5 of 10

ii. The Incident Commander will then notify the RAT Group
Supervisor of this information. The RAT Group
Supervisor will then determine if those Companies /
Firefighters are in peril, involved in the Mayday or didn’t
switch to the Alternate FG channel (currently the Mayday
channel).
f. Shall continue to direct the firefighting efforts to extinguish the
body of fire to the extent safely possible, thus making the structure
more tenable for rescue operations.
Note: The Incident Commander must focus his attention on
controlling the fire and allow the RAT Group Supervisor to
manage the rescue effort. The attack on the fire must continue.
g. Shall assign someone as an Aide to the RAT Group Supervisor to
assist with accountability of companies entering the building
assisting in the Mayday operations.
h. Shall designate a Staging Officer and Staging Area for all
incoming Companies.
i. Shall request all resources that the RAT Group Supervisor needs
through Dispatch.
j. Shall determine and request additional EMS resources needed,
ALS Supervisor (EMS Group Supervisor) should be coordinating.
k. May have to decide to evacuate all members out of the structure
including the Rapid Assistance Team if fire conditions deteriorate.
The goal is to preserve as many lives as possible.
l. Utilize the current “Cincinnati Fire Department Rapid Assistance
Team Incident Commander Checklist” and the current “Command
Worksheet”.
m. If an additional “Mayday” occurs on the Alternate FG channel
(currently the Mayday FG channel), the Incident Commander may
need to instruct Companies working on Alternate FG channel
(currently the Mayday FG channel) to switch to a “Tac channel”.
NOTE: This should be a last resort due to companies working in
an IDLH environment could have difficulty switching.
n. Assign a Staff Officer as the second Safety Officer to assist with
the Mayday. This Safety Officer will report directly to the RAT
Group Supervisor.
2. Dispatch Responsibilities
a. Acknowledge Mayday
b. Immediately dispatch an additional alarm, an additional District
Chief, and an additional RAT Company.
c. Page the Administrative / Command Staff (All Call Page).
d. All dispatched and responding Fire Companies shall be told to
respond using the Alternate FG channel (currently the Mayday FG

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS -RAPID ASSIST TEAMS (RAT)
SECTION 203.01.14
12/20
Page 6 of 10

channel) in the originally dispatched Fire Zone (once the Incident
Commander has all companies on the scene switch to the Alternate
FG channel - currently the Mayday FG channel). For example, the
original Fire Talk Group was “B-2”, all dispatched and responding
Fire Companies will utilize “Alternate FG B (currently Mayday
B)”.
e. Shall monitor both the original fire ground channel and Alternate
FG channel (currently the Mayday FG channel). .
3. RAT Group Supervisor (RAT Chief)
a. Shall report directly to the Incident Commander (face-to-face).
b. Shall remain at the Command Post with the Incident Commander.
c. Shall wear a radio headset throughout the RAT evolution.
d. Shall request an Aid from the Incident Commander to assist with
accountability of the Mayday and RAT Companies.
e. Shall maintain accountability for all RAT teams deployed into the
structure.
f. Shall utilize the current “Cincinnati Fire Department RAT
Commander Checklist”.
g. Radio designation shall be “RAT Group Supervisor “or “RAT
Supervisor”.
h. Shall communicate directly with the downed firefighter on original
fire ground channel. If possible, determine who is involved, last
location and problem.
i. Shall direct the rescue efforts of the RAT Team from the exterior
of the structure or a forward Command location in the event of a
high-rise or large structure.
j. Shall prompt RAT officer if additional resources are needed for
the rescue effort.
k. Shall assemble fire companies to assist with the rescue efforts.
This may entail laying additional hose lines to protect the RAT
Team and/or victim. If victim is trapped, a protective hose line
shall be put in service.
l. Shall determine with the assistance of the ALS Supervisor (EMS
Group Commander) if additional EMS resources are needed.
m. Request additional needed resources through Command.
4. Rapid Assist Team (RAT)
a. Upon declaration of a “Mayday” shall report (face-to-face)
immediately to the Incident Commander to determine last known
location of distressed firefighter from Accountability Officer and
retrieve RAT Pack.
b. Determine with assistance of RAT Group Supervisor the best
location to make entry to search for distressed firefighter.

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS -RAPID ASSIST TEAMS (RAT)
SECTION 203.01.14
12/20
Page 7 of 10

c. Shall perform a rapid search of the structure with emphasis on the
distressed fire fighter’s last known location.
d. The use of a tag line while searching is highly recommended.
e. Upon finding the distressed firefighter, shall immediately transmit
to the RAT Group Supervisor the involved Company, and identity
of the firefighter(s) by name, utilizing name plate on back of coat
and or reflective name on facepiece. Note: Do not declare an
additional Mayday upon finding the distressed firefighter. This
could cause confusion.
f. Shall give the RAT Group Supervisor a CAN (Conditions,
Actions, Needs) report.
g. If no extrication is involved, the RAT Team shall remove the
firefighter from the structure.
h. The RAT Officer must weigh the decision to “quick fill” the
firefighter(s) air supply if trapped. If the firefighter(s) are not
trapped remove ASAP without “quick filling”.
i. The RAT Officer needs to request additional resources through the
RAT Group Supervisor to assist prior to their Company becoming
tired if it is going to be a long / tedious extrication.
NOTE: RAT operations are very labor intensive. The quicker the
firefighter(s) are removed from the building the better the chances
for a good outcome. Ask for help early.
j. If the firefighter requires extrication, the RAT Team shall
determine the most efficient access to the distressed firefighter,
communicate this information to the RAT Group Supervisor and
deploy the RAT Rope to the exterior of the structure. The RAT
rope will signify the most direct route to the firefighter from
the exterior of the structure. The RAT Company Officer shall
perform a rapid size-up of the extrication needs and request the
necessary equipment and personnel from RAT Group Supervisor.
k. The RAT Company Officer shall supervise and direct the rescue
effort from the interior. The RAT Officer answers directly to the
RAT Group Supervisor. If the RAT Officer must leave the
structure he/she will designate another interior rescue Officer for
the RAT Group Supervisor to communicate with.
NOTE: RAT Officer needs to be able to communicate at all times
with the RAT Group Supervisor The Officer should not get
involved in the process of RAT drags etc, this will delay
communication with the RAT Group Supervisor. The RAT
Officer needs to control and direct the rescue effort. If the need
arises that the Officer needs to get involved in the dragging /
carrying process, the officer should give another member of the

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS -RAPID ASSIST TEAMS (RAT)
SECTION 203.01.14
12/20
Page 8 of 10

RAT Company the responsibility of communicating with the RAT
Group Supervisor.
l. The RAT Company Officer shall maintain close supervision of
his/her members and shall be cognizant of their air supply and
physical condition.
5. Heavy Rescue Company
a. Upon declaration of a firefighter “Mayday”, the Heavy Rescue
Company shall be relieved of their firefighting duties if operating
on the scene.
b. The Heavy Rescue Company shall immediately report to the RAT
Group Supervisor in full PPE with fully charged SCBA and await
orders.
c. The Heavy Rescue Company shall not be used as part of the search
effort.
d. The Heavy Rescue Company primary responsibility will be to
perform technical extrication once the RAT Team locates the
victim.
e. When the Heavy Rescue Company is/are deployed inside the
structure to extricate a firefighter they shall report to the RAT
Company Officer. The Heavy Rescue Company is/are in charge of
the extrication however the RAT Company Officer has
responsibility for the interior rescue effort.
6. Additional Fire Companies used for RAT Operations
a. Additional Fire Companies can consist of engine or truck
companies depending on the nature of the task to be performed and
will report to the RAT Group Supervisor and stand by.
b. These companies may be utilized to assist with any of the RAT
operations.
c. May be utilized to place a protective hose line between the
fire and the RAT Team and/or the distressed firefighter.
d. May be utilized to place ground ladders or to transport SCBA
cylinders, tools and equipment to affect the extrication of the
distressed firefighter.
e. The radio designation for these fire companies will not change.
For example if Engine 3 is dispatched or designated to assist with
the RAT operations, their radio designation will remain “Engine
3”. This eliminates confusion during a very high stress time.
7. Accountability
a. Shall immediately set up the MSA SCBA Monitoring System
Computer in the District Vehicle (Incident Commander’s vehicle)
if it has not already been set up.
b. Per the Incident Commander’s request, shall conduct a
comprehensive incident PAR on the Alternate FG channel

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS -RAPID ASSIST TEAMS (RAT)
SECTION 203.01.14
12/20
Page 9 of 10

(currently the Mayday FG channel) as soon as possible to
determine who and how many firefighters are in peril. Begin the
PAR with the companies that were in the most dangerous positions
prior to the Mayday.
c. Any Companies not responding to the PAR or are reporting
missing members, this information needs to reported to the
Incident Commander ASAP.
d. Per the Incident Commanders, request, may need to also conduct a
PAR on the original FG Channel to determine if companies not
responding to the PAR on the Alternate Fireground Channel
(currently the Mayday Channel) are actually missing or just did not
switch to the Alternate FG (currently the Mayday channel) per the
Incident Commanders request. Note: This should only occur by
the Incident Commander request to not interfere with RAT
operations.
e. Notify the Incident Commander when the PAR is complete.
f. An additional Accountability Officer may also be assigned to the
RAT Group Supervisor to assist in determining the location of the
RAT Truck and all assisting companies.
8. Safety Captain (SO2)
a. In charge of overall scene and operational safety.
b. Reports directly to the Incident Commander, not the RAT Group
Supervisor.
c. Shall evaluate the proactive RAT tactics of the RAT Company and
take actions to correct insufficient RAT operations.
d. Shall monitor fire conditions and building stability, while advising
Command.
9. ALS Supervisor
a. Shall become EMS Group Supervisor.
b. Shall set-up Triage, Treatment and Transport Areas.
c. Shall ensure Medic Unit(s) are in a position for Rapid Transport.
d. Shall advise Command of additional EMS resources needed.
10. Medic Unit(s)
a. Shall position Medic Unit for rapid transport from scene.
b. Shall bring all ALS equipment and cot forward to area directed by
ALS / EMS Group Supervisor.
H. The third (3rd) arriving District Chief will report to Command and be assigned as
needed. The third (3rd) District Chief will most likely be assigned to the opposite
side of the fire building.

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS -RAPID ASSIST TEAMS (RAT)
SECTION 203.01.14
12/20
Page 10 of 10

I. Post Mayday
1. The Incident Commander should consider switching to defensive tactics to
regroup, if still active fire after extrication of firefighter(s) and the PAR
has been completed by the RAT Group Supervisor.
2. Evaluate the need to relieve companies of duty.
3. Consider Incident Stress Debriefing
4. Protect scene for investigation and assign someone to preserve potential
evidence until the arrival of a Fire Investigator.
5. Obtain witness statements from individuals before they leave the scene.
J. Notes and Other Considerations
1. Incidents of large geographical size or large structures such as high-rise
buildings may require the use of multiple RAT Teams.
2. Incident Commander, the RAT Group Supervisor, and Accountability
need to stay together in one area (face-to-face communication) during the
Mayday.
3. Consider using a company in staging as additional accountability
personnel or Chief Aides.
4. Once additional staff arrives on the scene, limit the number of personnel at
the Command Post to minimize the “noise” and distractions during the
Mayday operations.


=== 203.01.15 Structure Fire Operations - Mayday & Emergency Condition Declaration Procedure Updated 12-2020 ===
PROCEDURES MANUAL
SUBJECT: Mayday & Emergency Condition Declaration Procedure
NUMBER:
APPROVED:
203.01.15
FIRE CHIEF

TYPE:

Structure Fire Operations

Page 1 of 5

EFFECTIVE DATE: 12/2020
REVISED DATE: 12/2020

203.01.15 Mayday & Emergency Condition Declaration at Emergency Incidents
A. Purpose
1. This procedure is intended to ensure that all members operating at an
emergency scene are aware that an emergency situation on the scene is
imminent or has already occurred.
2. This procedure will outline the difference between the terms “Mayday”
and “Emergency”
B. Definitions
The following definitions will be used to alert members operating at an incident:
1. “MAYDAY” - Used when a firefighter is in danger. A firefighter must
declare a MAYDAY when confronted by, but not limited to the following
situations:
a. Injured and in need of immediate assistance or unable to reach a
safe location under their own power.
b. Lost / Disoriented.
c. Trapped / Entangled and unable to exit structure before expending
air supply.
d. Low on Air / Low air alarm sounding in conjunction with any
other item listed.
e. Negative or no response to PAR after second attempt (Refer to
Section 202.07Accountability C. “Policy”; 2.” Personnel
Accountability Report”; f. “Negative or No response to location of
PAR”).
f. “MAYDAY” will also be declared by other members and/or RAT
Team that locate a member(s) in any of the above situations.
2. “EMERGENCY” - Used when an emergency is imminent, or has already
happened, such as:
a. A collapse of a wall, the roof or the building.
b. A potential- collapse that needs to be investigated.
c. A backdraft or an explosion.
d. Flashover or rapidly changing fire conditions.

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS - MAYDAY & EMERGENCY CONDITIONS DECLARATION
SECTION 203.01.15
12/20
Page 2 of 5

e. Water supply interruption which puts firefighters in a precarious
position.
f. Hole(s) in the floor.
g. Burned out or missing stairs.
h. Weakened or compromised structural members.
i. Open shaft(s).
j. Non-secured elevator doors.
k. Elevators with swing type doors.
l. Downed power lines in street or yard.
m. Any other circumstance that can seriously injure a firefighter.
n. Immediate evacuation of the building necessary for any of the
above or for any circumstance the incident commander deems
necessary.
o. Requesting an additional alarm.
Note: The "MAYDAY" declaration is reserved for only those situations when a
firefighter is in peril as described above. When a hazardous condition exists the
"Emergency" declaration shall be utilized.
C. Mayday Procedure
1. The following procedure will be used to alert firefighters on the
emergency scene of a Mayday.
2. When in distress, the firefighter(s) shall declare a Mayday. This shall
clear the radio talk group of all other radio traffic.
a. The firefighter shall repeat the word “MAYDAY” three (3) times
followed by the nature of the Mayday, last known location,
Company number, and name(s) of the firefighter(s) involved if
possible and what, if any plans they have to remove themselves
from the situation. (Example - “Mayday, Mayday, Mayday, Firefighter Down - Second Floor - Firefighter Doe from Engine
22).
b. Any Fire Company finding a firefighter down shall declare a
Mayday and the Mayday information shall be repeated including
the manner of removal from the structure. (Example - “Mayday Mayday - Mayday - Firefighter Down - Lieutenant from Engine 22
- We will be coming out the rear door”). NOTE: A Mayday
declaration only occurs when the downed firefighter is initially
found. If a Mayday has already been declared for the downed
firefighter, another Mayday declaration does not occur when a
company locates the firefighter. However, the company can relay
pertinent information, for example the name of the firefighter and
manner of removal to the RAT Group Supervisor.
c. The firefighter shall then manually activate their PASS device.

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS - MAYDAY & EMERGENCY CONDITIONS DECLARATION
SECTION 203.01.15
12/20
Page 3 of 5

3. The Incident Commander will:
a. Shall attempt to confirm the Mayday and request all pertinent
information not received from the firefighter(s) involved in the
Mayday. For example, if the Incident Commander didn’t hear or
understand, the nature, the location, or firefighter(s) involved, he
would ask the firefighter(s) to repeat or ask specific questions.
b. Maintain radio contact with those involved in the Mayday until the
RAT Group Supervisor is assigned.
c. Notify all Companies on the scene of the “Mayday” situation
d. Notify Dispatch of the “Mayday” situation. Request an additional
Alarm, an additional RAT Company and an additional District
Chief.
e. Order all Companies to switch their radios to the Alternate
Fireground channel (channel 16 in their current Fire Ground Talk
Group-currently this is the Mayday Channel) for routine fire
ground messages. The original fire ground channel will only be
used for the firefighter(s) involved in the MAYDAY, the RAT
Group Supervisor, the Rapid Assistance Teams and the Heavy
Rescue Company. If the Incident Commander knows which Fire
Companies are involved, he can state “all Companies switch to the
Alternate FG channel (currently the Mayday Channel) with the
exception of Engine 22, RAT 25, District 5 and Heavy Rescue 25”.
NOTE: If there is a Company inside the structure that is in close
proximity to the Mayday, and they feel they can assist in
extricating the distressed firefighter(s) in a timely manner, they
will notify Command and stay on the original fire ground channel.
f. Shall order Accountability to conduct a PAR on the Alternate FG
channel (currently the Mayday Channel), to determine if any other
Companies are unaccounted for. Any Companies that do not
respond to the PAR should be relayed to the Incident Commander
so he/she can relay the information to the RAT Chief.
g. In the event another “Mayday” occurs while operating on the
Alternate FG channel (currently the Mayday Channel), the Incident
Commander will consider moving everyone to another fire ground
channel, for example, Zone being used “Tac 1” channel. This
should only be considered in extreme circumstances and will then
require another PAR being performed on the “Tac” channel.
h. For more detail on specific duties and responsibilities during RAT
operations - Reference Section 203.01.14 Rapid Assist Teams
(RAT.)

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS - MAYDAY & EMERGENCY CONDITIONS DECLARATION
SECTION 203.01.15
12/20
Page 4 of 5

4. Dispatch Responsibilities:
a. Transmit an additional alarm, dispatch an additional District Chief
to replace the second on-scene District Chief who has become the
RAT Group Supervisor and an additional RAT Company.
b. Page the 40-hr staff (All Call).
c. Once the Incident Commander has all on-scene Companies switch
to the Alternate FG channel (currently the Mayday channel),
Dispatch will notify all future dispatched and en-route Companies
that the current fire ground channel is now the Alternate FG
channel (currently the Mayday channel) in the originally
dispatched fire zone.
d. Dispatch will need to monitor both the original fire ground channel
and the Alternate FG channel (currently the Mayday channel).
D. Emergency Condition(s) Alert Procedure
1. This procedure shall be used to alert firefighters on the fire ground of an
emergency condition(s).
2. To clear all radio traffic on the fire ground channel, the Fire Officer or
firefighter requesting the emergency shall state their Company number
followed by the word "Emergency" and the nature, location and type of
emergency identified. For example, “Engine 22 Emergency, there is a
large hole in the floor on floor number 2”. At this time no other radio
traffic shall be transmitted until the Incident Commander acknowledges
the “Emergency” radio traffic.
Note: The "Emergency" declaration shall be reserved for situations on
the fire ground presenting imminent danger to firefighters. (See
aforementioned potentially dangerous situations).
3. Following the “Emergency” declaration, immediately verbally announce
findings to anyone in the area.
4. The Incident Commander upon hearing the Emergency Declaration shall
immediately repeat the emergency traffic as well as orders to rectify or
retreat from the situation. (Example - "Command, Emergency - All
Companies operating at 123 Main St. there is a large hole on floor 2, stay
off the second floor!”
5. For some “Emergency” declaration the Incident Commander can request
that Dispatch give the emergency tone over the fireground channel prior to
the ‘Emergency” declaration. Dispatch should only send the emergency
tone over the fireground channel on request from the Incident
Commander.
6. The Company or Firefighter declaring the “Emergency” will then:
a. Follow the orders of Command.
b. Attempt to cover hole if possible.
c. Block area with a large object if possible.

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS - MAYDAY & EMERGENCY CONDITIONS DECLARATION
SECTION 203.01.15
12/20
Page 5 of 5

d.
e.
f.
g.
h.

Attempt to secure area if possible.
Guard area if possible and conditions allow.
Secure a door if needed by driving a wedge under it.
Mark the area, “Danger - Do Not Enter” if possible.
Mark area as an exclusion zone with fire line or caution tape if
possible.
7. If the Incident Commander determines it is necessary to evacuate the
structure or hazard zone, he/she shall order all firefighters to “Retreat”.
The Incident Commander shall always request from Dispatch the
emergency tone prior to the announcement to retreat when ordering
Companies out of a building. The Incident Commander shall use the
command “Emergency” followed by the word “Retreat”: stated three (3)
times and finally request a PAR be given when the Company has exited
the building or hazard zone. For example, “Main St Command to
Dispatch give me the emergency tone”. Following the tone announce
“Emergency, Retreat, Retreat, Retreat give a PAR upon exiting the
building”.
a. Once Command gives the order to “Retreat”, there shall be no
discussion concerning this order on the radio. All Companies
shall exit the building and prepare for a PAR.
b. Upon the order to “Retreat”, all on-scene fire apparatus, shall give
ten (10) - three (3) second blasts of their air horns.
c. Company Officers shall give a PAR and location upon exiting the
building or hazard zone. For example, “Engine 19 out of the
building on the Alpha Side with a PAR.”
d. Accountability shall then initiate a PAR once all companies have
exited the building or hazard zone. Start the PAR with the
Companies that were in the most dangerous position prior to
exiting the building or hazard zone. Accountability does not have
to ask companies for a PAR that have already self reported upon
exiting the building or hazard zone.
e. Following the PAR, all Officers shall meet at the Command Post.
8. Any individual, whether it is a firefighter or an officer that finds a hazard
is required to communicate on the radio using “Emergency” traffic,
however if their Company Officer is with the firefighter, the Company
Officer should communicate the “Emergency” traffic


=== 203.01.16 Structure Fire Operations - Changing Strategy from Defensive to Offensive ===
PROCEDURES MANUAL
SUBJECT: Changing Strategy from Defensive to Offensive
NUMBER:
APPROVED:
203.01.16
FIRE CHIEF

203.01.16

TYPE: Structure Fire Operations

EFFECTIVE DATE: 12/2020

Page 1 of 3

REVISED DATE: 12/2020

Changing Strategy from Defensive to Offensive
A. Purpose
To establish procedures that reduces the risk of injury/death to firefighters due to
potential collapse of a fire building when changing from Defensive to Offensive
Tactical Operations.
B. Objective
1. The integrity of a building can be compromised due to heavy fire
conditions, the weight of water from master stream application and the
type of building construction involved (such as: lightweight truss etc.)
2. This procedure outlines the decision-making process and safety guidelines
for determining if a structure is safe to enter to perform interior attack
following a defensive operation.
C. Policy
1. This procedure shall apply to all structure fires where a tactical change
from defensive exterior attack to offensive interior is desired.
2. The Incident Commander has the ability to not implement this procedure
when a quick attack/knock down occurs by first arriving Fire companies.
3. Example: A fire line or Deck Gun is initially used from the outside of the
structure to decrease the spread of the fire while attack lines are being laid
or access to the building is being gained.
D. Priorities
1. To determine if the building is structurally safe to enter for Fire
Companies to perform interior operations.
2. The Incident Commander and the Safety Officer will develop a plan of
action prior to companies entering the building.

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS - CHANGING STRATEGY FROM OFFENSIVE TO DEFENSIVE
SECTION 203.01.16
12/20
Page 2 of 3

3. A meeting is required at the Command Post with Fire Companies to
identify hazards and review the plan of action.
E. Safety
1. Full protective clothing including SCBA shall be worn at the scene of all
structure fires until the Incident Commander directs otherwise. However,
members involved in exterior activities are not mandated to use respiratory
protective equipment as long as they are in a clear atmosphere.
2. An Accountability Officer and a Safety Officer will be identified within
the Incident Command Structure.
3. Only 2 Officers, with one being the rank of District Chief or above, will
enter the structure to complete the building safety assessment.
4. All units will work under the direction of Command, no “free-lancing”.
5. The RAT Team, Heavy Rescue and an Engine Company with a charged
line will be assembled in front of the building with all necessary
equipment ready to be deployed.
F. Tasks
1. A Safety Officer/Company must be implemented.
2. The following Companies will be assembled in front of the building prior
to anyone entering the building:
a. The RAT Company with equipment ready to deploy
b. Heavy Rescue with structural collapse equipment
c. An Engine Company with a charged hose line
3. Two (2) building assessment Officers, (a D.C. and a Heavy Rescue
Officer) shall enter the building to determine:
a. The structural integrity of the building
b. Hazards (holes in floors, stability of stairs, amount of residual
water on floors)
c. Identify the type of building construction
d. Risk/Benefit analysis (There is no point in committing to an
interior attack when the building will ultimately be torn down.
4. The Incident Commander will consult with the Building Assessment,
Safety, RAT, Accountability Officers and any other designees to decide
whether to begin offensive operations or remain in defensive mode.
(Strongly consider including a representative from the Building
Department.)
5. Prior to Fire Companies entering the structure, a meeting of All Officers
will be held at the Command Post and the following information
communicated:

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS - CHANGING STRATEGY FROM OFFENSIVE TO DEFENSIVE
SECTION 203.01.16
12/20
Page 3 of 3

a. Identify the Companies that will be involved in the operation.
(Limit the number of Companies to the minimum required to
complete the task.)
b. Clearly outline their respective tasks along with any exclusion
areas or special hazards noted by the Assessment Officers.
c. Areas that are deemed “off limits” to interior fire companies shall
be delineated by red fire line barrier tape by the Assessment
Officers prior to Fire Companies making entry.
6. The Accountability Officer shall continuously track the locations of
companies and be kept informed of any changes in assignment.
7. The Incident Commander shall be informed of any change in interior
conditions.
8. Any emergent conditions shall be transmitted to command as
“Emergency” followed by the conditions and location.
G. Building Assessment Officers
1. District Chief:
a. Car 402 (Risk Management District Chief) if on scene
b. Car 302 (Special Operations Chief-SOC) if on scene
c. Another District Chief designated by the IC
2. Company Officer:
a. A regularly assigned Heavy Rescue Officer
b. Safety Captain (SO-2)
c. A Senior Company Officer designated by the IC
3. Consider consulting with a Building Specialist or a representative from the
Building Department if available.


=== 203.01.17 Structure Fire Operations - Fireground Personal Decontamination ===
PROCEDURES MANUAL
SUBJECT: Structure Fire Operations – Personal Decontamination
NUMBER:
APPROVED:
203.01.17
FIRE CHIEF

TYPE: Structure Fire Operations

EFFECTIVE DATE: 12/2020

Page 1 of 4

REVISED DATE: 12/2020

203.01.17 Fireground Personal Decontamination
A. Purpose
1. Institute on scene personal decontamination to remove the largest
quantities of potential carcinogenic material from personal protective
equipment and the firefighter.
2. Reduce or eliminate contamination of the fire apparatus and the fire house
from products of combustion from the fire scene.
B. Policy
1. All personnel being exposed to a toxic/hazardous environment shall go
through a decontamination process of their PPE and their persons.
2. This policy will outline detailed decontamination procedures used upon
exiting a structure fire, vehicle fire, trash fire, dumpster fire, training fire
to include flashover and/or miscellaneous fires where exposure to smoke,
byproducts of combustion and/or debris is possible.
3. This policy is a comprehensive document including PPE exchange, SCBA
and equipment decontamination, and personal hygiene after the fire.
C. Objectives
1. Limit and reduce the exposure of firefighters to products of combustion
after exiting the IDLH atmosphere.
2. Establish a gross decon corridor for all incidents when firefighters exit an
IDLH atmosphere and PPE has been exposed to products of combustion.

D. Fireground Decontamination
1. Decon shall not be required until the firefighter has completely finished
their fire ground tasks and will not have continued involvement in

STRUCUTRE FIRE OPERATIONS – FIREGROUND PERSONAL DECONTAMINATION
SECTION 203.01.17
12/20
Page 2 of 4

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

firefighting or overhaul operations for the duration of the incident.
During incidents of long duration when multiple work cycles are
employed, firefighters will go through decon on their way to rehab. This
shall be at the discretion of the Incident Commander (IC) or the Safety
Officer (SO2).
Once the “Water on the fire” benchmark is received, an available Fire
Apparatus Operator (FAO) on the first or second arriving engine will be
assigned by the IC to set up for post fire decontamination. The timing and
location of decontamination set-up will be at the discretion of the IC, or
his/her designee, but prior to personnel doffing equipment.
The Incident Commander, the Safety Officer (SO2) and the Company
Officer shall determine the companies (or individuals) to be
decontaminated. Nothing precludes a member from going through decon
should they feel the need. The following guidelines should be used to
determine if personal protective equipment is soiled to the extent that
decon is necessary:
a. Obvious odor that cannot be removed or indicates contamination.
(diesel fuel for example)
b. Visible soil.
c. Known exposure to bio-hazards.
d. Suspected exposure to hazardous chemicals or CBRN.
The following decontamination equipment will be carried on all engine
companies:
a. Decontamination Bucket:
i. 10” garden hose w/ adaptor and spray nozzle
ii. Scrub brush
iii. Decontamination wipes
iv. “Red” bio hazard bags
v. Clear Garbage bags (large)
vi. PPE Tracking Labels
vii. Wire Ties
viii.
Garbage bags (small).
Contaminated members are encouraged to decon each other however any
other available member may be assigned to assist. Members assigned to
decontamination shall protect themselves from exposures related to
firefighters exiting the structure. SCBA should be considered. At a
minimum, EMS gloves and an MSA-2000 mask with appropriate filters,
shall be worn by those personnel providing decontamination efforts.
Upon exiting the structure, the firefighter shall report to the established
decontamination area, brush off loose debris and hose off bunker gear and
SCBA. Contaminated firefighters with lower air should be decontaminated
first. A scrub brush will be used as necessary.

STRUCUTRE FIRE OPERATIONS – FIREGROUND PERSONAL DECONTAMINATION
SECTION 203.01.17
12/20
Page 3 of 4

7.

Firefighters will proceed to a staging area near Rehab where PPE shall be
removed so that the firefighter remains on air as long as possible.
8. Personal decontamination wipes will be used to clean all exposed skin
areas. This will include the neck, face, behind the ears, hands, arms and
eyes. Use a new wipe for each body area. Decontamination wipes shall be
used on the fire helmet brow pad and ratchet pad. Place contaminated
wipes in small garbage bag.
9. Firefighters will then be released from the decontamination area and are to
report to REHAB as deemed necessary by the IC.
10. Once fire ground operations are complete, each firefighter/exposed
personnel shall, while wearing EMS gloves, place their soiled PPE (Fire
coat, Bunker pants and gloves) in a black plastic bag for transport back to
the firehouse for advanced cleaning and gear exchange. Depending on
nature of soiling, a black bag or a red bio-hazard bag for PPE that is
contaminated with a bio-hazard (body fluids) shall be utilized. In all
cases a PPE Tracking tag shall be filled out completely and attached to
each bag of soiled gear.
11. Large plastic bags will be stocked on all apparatus.
12. Protective hoods will be exchanged with SO2 on a 1 for 1 basis on the
scene. SO2 will ensure that the contaminated hoods are laundered and
ready for future exchange. SO2 will carry a sufficient supply of hoods to
accommodate multiple fires in one tour.
13. All tools, equipment and SCBA shall be decontaminated at the scene
wearing EMS gloves. Do not return to quarters with contaminated tools
and equipment.
14. During cold inclement weather the process of soaking firefighters while
performing a wet decontamination may create additional safety hazards
such as hypothermia, and equipment failure.
a. Brush off all large particles from the PPE, working from the head
down.
b. Use damp towels to wipe the area around the firefighters face piece
to suspend any particulate matter.
c. Attempt to remove all of the visible contaminants
E. Decontamination at the Firehouse
1. Fire companies may stay out of service for up to one hour for personal
decontamination. Consider holding the move-up company in place until
the company has completed the decontamination process. This does not
prevent the company officer from going back in service sooner if all
members of the company have completed the decontamination shower
prior to the one-hour interval. Company officers may use discretion to
respond to another priority response (Cardiac arrest, Structure fire, etc)

STRUCUTRE FIRE OPERATIONS – FIREGROUND PERSONAL DECONTAMINATION
SECTION 203.01.17
12/20
Page 4 of 4

while out of service for decontamination. Members should complete the
following tasks upon return to quarters:
2. Place all bagged fire clothes on the apparatus floor for pickup by stores for
cleaning. Make sure bags are properly sealed and PPE tracking tags are
securely attached.
3. Inspect helmet, boots, tools and equipment to determine if further cleaning
is required.
4. Clean face piece according to the CFD Drill Manual Topic 13.
5. It is required that all members take a shower within one hour of arrival
back in the fire house.
6. Change into a clean uniform.
7. Wash dirty uniform using the department provided washer and dryer.
8. Place spare fire clothes on the track.
9. Return apparatus to state of readiness.
10. Officer shall notify stores of PPE needing to be picked up and cleaned


=== 203.01.18 Structure Fire Opertions -Chimney, Flue and Ventilation Duct Fires Updated 12-26-19 ===
PROCEDURES MANUAL
SUBJECT: Structure Fire Operations- Chimney/Flue/Ventilation Duct Fires
NUMBER:
APPROVED:
203.01.18

FIRE CHIEF

TYPE: Operations

EFFECTIVE DATE: 12/2020

Page 1 of 4

REVISED DATE: 12/2020

203.01.18 Structure Fire Operations - Chimney/Flu/Ventilation Duct Fires
A. Purpose
This topic is intended to establish a methodical, standardized approach for
use at confirmed chimney, flue and ventilation duct system fires. The
guideline shall not preclude Operations 202.01 Response to Structural
Fires.
B. Priorities:
1. Rescue
2. Fire control
3. Property Conservation
C. Policy
Fires in a chimney, flue and commercial kitchen exhaust / ventilation duct system
can occur at anytime. These fires present unique challenges due to the limited
opportunity to visualize and access the fire area. These fires require specialized
tactics in order to extinguish them in a timely manner while ensuring that the fire
does not extend out of the chimney, flue or duct and involve other portions of the
structure. It is important that these fires are approached in a methodical and
standardized manner.
Response to a chimney, flue, ventilation or duct fire will be dispatched as a onealarm structure fire. Once a fire has been identified in one of these areas, the
following incident action plan should be instituted.
D. Strategy and Risk Management
1. Strategic goals for a chimney, flue or ventilation duct fire include:
a. Extinguishing the fire
b. Limiting fire extension
c. Ventilation as required

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS – CHIMNEY / FLUE / VENTILATION DUCT FIRES
SECTION 203.01.18
12/20
Page 2 of 4

2.

3.

4.

5.
6.

d. Overhaul
e. Salvage
Life safety is always a primary concern. Fortunately, the majority of these
types of fires allow for occupants to exit under their own power. Initial
arriving companies shall ensure the occupancy is fully evacuated.
Not all chimney, flue, and ventilation duct fires will show visible signs of
combustion from the exterior. A good size up and investigation for fire
extension on all floors and the roof shall be conducted.
Signs of extension into the ceiling and walls include discoloration or
blistering of surface materials; hot surfaces noted on the thermal imaging
camera and smoke emitting from cracks, electrical outlets, light fixtures,
eaves and roof coverings.
Ceilings and walls should be opened-up when fire extension is suspected,
and standard overhaul practices utilized.
Extinguishment of the chimney, flue, and ventilation duct fires should be
focused on reducing damage by limiting fire extension through proper
suppression methods. It is recommended ABC dry powder
extinguishment bags be utilized for rapid extinguishment while preventing
structural damage to the chimney flue system.

E. Operations and Deployment
1. Interior Operations
a. Interior operations should be focused on removing occupants,
locating and extinguishing the fire.
b. Advance and place a fire line to the most advantageous exterior
door.
c. Check the full length of the chimney on all floors for fire
extension. Early access to the attic or cockloft should be made.
d. Locate the firebox and work to extinguish and remove all hot and
combustible material to the outside for final extinguishment via the
chimney kit salvage can.
e. Salvage covers should be deployed at the base of the firebox or
anywhere else where debris could fall to prevent additional
property damage as a result of extinguishment efforts.
f. Avoid spraying water up the chimney flue to prevent thermal
shock to the flue structure. Once extinguishment and removal
completed, confirm the exhaust damper is open.
g. The firebox should then be starved of airflow via one of the
following methods.
i. For firebox with an open front, companies should utilize a
canvas salvage cover to temporarily cover the opening as
tightly as possible.

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS – CHIMNEY / FLUE / VENTILATION DUCT FIRES
SECTION 203.01.18
12/20
Page 3 of 4

ii. For stoves, ovens or fireboxes with doors; shut and close all
doors and air intakes in order to limit the airflow to the fire
in the flue.
iii. Fireboxes with a blower fan should have the fan turned off.
h. When air supply to the fire box has been shut off, notify roof
operations to deploy chimney bomb/bombs.
i. Carbon Monoxide levels should be monitored (usually by SO2).
2. Roof/Exterior Operations
a. Roof operations should focus on gaining access to the highest point
of the chimney flue for a visual inspection and extinguishment of
the fire. Note: with most chimney fires occurring in the winter
months, ladder companies are reminded to take precaution on roofs
covered with snow and ice.
i. Chimney tops may have a cap installed consisting of a
screen or spark arrestor. If equipped, all caps on the
chimney shall be removed. This will allow for hot material
and gas to lift from the chimney flue. Roof operations shall
monitor for flying brands exiting the chimney flue to
prevent extension.
ii. Roof coverings and sheathing around the chimney should
be checked for fire extension.
iii. Once access to the chimney top is gained, a visual
inspection of the chimney flue shall be conducted with the
mirror supplied in the chimney fire kit to determine the
extent of the fire. If there is fire in the chimney flue, notify
command and interior operations, and prepare to deploy
chimney bomb/bombs supplied with the chimney fire kit.
Do not deploy chimney bomb until interior operations
confirm starvation of air supply at the fire box. DO NOT
direct water into chimney flue from chimney top.
b. Additional exterior crews should be deployed with tools and
thermal imaging camera to make sure there is no extension to
exterior sheathing of the structure adjacent to the chimney flue.
c. Any exterior and or interior clean outs should be examined.
d. If the initial interior fire line is required to be placed in-service, a
second fire line should be stretched to the most advantageous
exterior door.
e. Interior operations will direct roof operations to deploy chimney
bomb/bombs. The chimney bomb melts releasing the
extinguishment agent as it falls. The heat from inside the fire box
and chimney flue will carry the agent vertically extinguishing the
fire.

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS – CHIMNEY / FLUE / VENTILATION DUCT FIRES
SECTION 203.01.18
12/20
Page 4 of 4

3.

i. A second chimney bomb may be deployed if the first is
unsuccessful in extinguishing the fire.
ii. If the chimney bomb falls to the fire box without breaking,
a second bag may be deployed.
iii. Do Not dump extinguishment powder down a chimney,
flue or ventilation duct as this has been proven ineffective.
f. If the chimney flue is excessively clogged with creosote, the
chimney chain should be deployed. Depending on the chimney flue
configuration, the chain weight can be removed. This will allow
the chimney bomb to fall the entire length of the chimney flue for
complete extinguishment.
i. After dropping the first chimney bomb, slowly lower the
chimney chain until it reaches the base. Interior crews will
notify the roof crew when the chimney chain is at the base.
ii. Once confirmation is received from interior operating
crews, roof crews should vigorously spin the chain inside
the chimney. This will cause the burning creosote to fall to
the base of the chimney. Once this is complete raise the
chain.
iii. Drop additional chimney bombs to extinguish any
remaining fire.
g. Should the above method be unsuccessful in extinguishing the
chimney, flue or ventilation duct fire, the fire may be attacked
from the interior at the firebox. This method involves the
introduction of ABC dry powder while simultaneously restricting
air intake via one of the aforementioned methods.
Final Overhaul and Salvage
a. Once extinguishment is completed, final overhaul and salvage
operations shall be conducted.
i. Confirm that no fire extension has occurred in all areas near
the flu or ventilation duct.
ii. Notify occupants to have firebox and chimney flue
professionally inspected and cleaned prior to re-use.
b. Ventilate as necessary.
c. Monitor all areas for CO prior to allowing occupants to return to
structure.
d. If fire has occurred in the ventilation duct / flue of a commercial
kitchen exhaust system, the Building Department and the Health
Department must be notified.


=== 203.01.20 Structure Fire Operations - High Rise Operations Updated 12-2020 ===
PROCEDURES MANUAL
SUBJECT: High Rise Operations
NUMBER:

APPROVED:

203.01.20
FIRE CHIEF

TYPE:

Structure Fire Operations

Page 1 of 15

EFFECTIVE DATE: 12/2020
REVISED DATE: 12/2020

203.01.20 Structure Fire Operations - High Rise Operations
A.

Purpose
This topic is intended to establish a standard approach and general
guidelines for use at high-rise buildings. High-rise buildings are defined
as buildings more than six stories or more than 75' above the lowest level
of Fire Department access. It must be recognized that the six-story
building does not present problems of the same magnitude as a forty-story
building. Logistics and access problems increase with height. The more
stories above the fire, the more people are endangered, and the more there
is to burn.

B. Definitions
1. FAST ATTACK TEAM (FAT)
The FAT shall consist of the first two (2) Engine Companies, first
two (2) Truck Companies and first Heavy Rescue Company
dispatched on the one-alarm fire response to a high-rise building
and shall work as a team to place the first fire line in service and
search the immediate fire area and floor.
2. BASE (Exterior)
Base for High-Rise fires identifies a location where support
equipment and personnel are kept on the exterior of the building.
The reason for this distinction is that the Staging Area is moved
inside the structure in a high-rise fire. Unless there is a possibility
of moving to an exterior operation, or the fire is involving other
structures, it would be unusual to amass a large force outside a
high-rise structure
3. STAGING (Interior)
a. In a high-rise situation, most of the reserve force is moved through
the lobby, and then to the interior staging area. The Staging area is
normally two (2) floors below the fire floor. The intent here is to
have a reserve force close to the fire floor for replacement of
operating companies without delay.

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS - HIGH RISE OPERATIONS
SECTION 203.01.20
12/20
Page 2 of 15

b. The duties of the Interior Staging Area Officer are enumerated as
follows:
i. Requests additional reserves maintaining a minimum
reserve of Engine and Ladder Companies as determined by
Command or the Division Supervisor.
ii. An accountability of all Companies in staging and interior
rehabilitation (if established on the same floor) must be
maintained at all times.
iii. Request and maintain an adequate supply of air cylinders.
iv. Assist in setting up Interior Rehab
v. Request and maintain an adequate supply of first aid
equipment and medical personnel for units involved in
rescue and suppression.
vi. Request and maintain a supply of additional special
firefighting equipment (hose, nozzles, adapters, box fans,
hand tools, etc.)
4. REHAB (Interior)
An Interior Rehabilitation area may need to be set up at the interior
staging area for a minor incident or three (3) floors below the fire
floor for a major incident. An accountability of all members in
Rehab must be maintained at all times.
5. STAIRWAY SUPPORT
a. Moving equipment up stairways is a necessity in high-rise fires.
Elevators may become unsafe to use, damaged by the fire, or
electrical power to the elevator may be disrupted. Moving supplies
and manpower up 10, 20, 30 or more stories is an arduous task.
b. Stairway Support is a method that has been developed for moving
supplies to the fire area, in the absence of, or limited, elevator
availability, by placing a firefighter on every other floor. Using
this method, firefighters ascend two stories with air cylinders and
other equipment, handling it off to the next firefighter. This
firefighter then descends two stories, empty handed, providing a
period of rest. During extended operations, involving many
companies in rescue and suppression activities, it may be necessary
to place two firefighters on every floor, or even move air cylinders
down for refill.
c. The minimum manpower requirement for Stairway Support is one
(1) firefighter for every two (2) stories.
6. LOBBY CONTROL (3rd Engine)
a. Control, operate, and account for elevators.
b. Locate all interior stairs.
c. Direct incoming Companies to the proper elevator or stairway.

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS - HIGH RISE OPERATIONS
SECTION 203.01.20
12/20
Page 3 of 15

d. Provide Accountability of Fire Companies entering the building
and assisting the Accountability Officer.
e. Locate and check alarm panel.
f. Advise occupants (if necessary) via the building intercom system
of important information. For example;
i. Areas to shelter-in-place
ii. Which stairs have been assigned as the evacuation stairway
iii. A progress report (for a long incident)
g. Consult with building maintenance / engineer
h. Shut down HVAC system
7. ASSIGNMENT DIAGRAM
FIRE
FLOOR
1 FLOOR
BELOW

RAT

2 FLOORS
BELOW

STAGING
(INTERIOR)

3 FLOORS
BELOW

REHAB

GROUND
LEVEL

LOBBY
CONTROL

BASE
(OUTSIDE)

C. Priorities for a High Rise incident will be:
1. Life Safety
2. Fire Control
(Note: Controlling the fire may have a larger impact on Life Safety than
actual Search and Rescue)
3. Property Conservation
D. Safety
1. Full protective clothing including SCBA shall be worn at the scene of all
high-rise fires until the Incident Commander directs otherwise.

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS - HIGH RISE OPERATIONS
SECTION 203.01.20
12/20
Page 4 of 15

a. Members involved in external activities are not mandated to use
respiratory protective equipment as long as they are in a clear
atmosphere.
b. Members involved in stairway support must have all PPE available
but may not be required to wear at all times.
2. All units will work under the direction of "Command", no free-lancing.
3. All accountability Passports shall be delivered to the Accountability
Officer.
E. Pre-Planning
1. Building specific pre-plans will identify major concerns and prescribe
what is needed to meet them, without going too deeply into step-by-step
actions.
2. Pre-plans may also include apparatus placement for first-alarm
Companies.
3. Pre-plans may modify this topic but should not otherwise address
procedures.
4. Pre-plans are required for high-rise buildings (Refer to 202.02
Pre-Planning).
F. Response
1. First Alarm – One-Alarm Structure Fire Dispatch
a. Three (3) Engine Companies
b. Two (2) Truck Companies
c. One (1) Heavy Rescue Company
d. One (1) Safety Engine
e. One (1) Rapid Assist Truck Company (RAT)
f. Two (2) District Fire Chiefs
g. One (1) Safety Captain (SO2)
h. Two (2) Medic Units –
i. One (1) EMS Supervisor
2. Second Alarm – Notify Dispatch that this incident is a High-Rise Fire and
request the Second Alarm “High-Rise” response. This response will
consist of:
a. Four (4) Engine Companies
b. Two (2) Truck Companies
c. One (1) Heavy Rescue Company
d. One (1) District Chief
e. One (1) EMS Supervisor
f. One (1) Medic Unit
g. Command Staff notified to respond
h. Mobile Command Van

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS - HIGH RISE OPERATIONS
SECTION 203.01.20
12/20
Page 5 of 15

3. Once a “working fire” is confirmed in a High-Rise building, each
additional alarm will be defined as a “High-Rise Alarm” and will consist
of:
a. Four (4) Engine Companies
b. Two (2) Truck Companies
G. Actions
All Companies shall report with their accountability passports and deliver to
Lobby Control or Accountability Officer.
1. Fire Attack Team (FAT) – First and second arriving Engine Companies,
first and second arriving Truck Companies and first arriving Heavy
Rescue Company.
a. First arriving Companies assigned to the FAT shall relay the
following information to Command:
i. Obtain information from the alarm panel and building
personnel concerning the location of the alarm, current
building occupancy and special considerations.
ii. Shall confirm the fire floor. NOTE: Determine the fire
floor by actual floor number not how many floors above
ground level. For example, some buildings the ground
floor may be Floor #3, or it could be listed as “G” for
ground level and Floor #1 is actually 2 floors above ground
level. Also note, some buildings don’t have a Floor #13.
iii. Shall determine the “fire attack” and “evacuation”
stairwells.
iv. Shall utilize stairs if fire is on the fourth floor or lower.
Can use the elevator for fires on 5th floor or above. Take
elevator to two (2) floors below fire floor and utilize stairs
from there. While ascending stairs, check the status of each
floor for smoke conditions.
v. Shall give conditions, actions, and needs (CAN) report to
Command.
b. Shall assemble in the lobby and ascend to the fire floor as a task
force.
c. Instances when a responding Company(s) assigned to the FAT
arrival is delayed, at the discretion of the first arriving officer, the
on-scene FAT Companies shall begin to ascend to the fire floor.
The delayed Company(s) shall report to the FAT’s location on
arrival to complete the task force.
d. Shall initiate fire attack on fire floor and primary search of fire
floor.
e. Reports to the Division Supervisor (2nd due in District Chief)

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS - HIGH RISE OPERATIONS
SECTION 203.01.20
12/20
Page 6 of 15

2. One- Alarm Companies
a. First Arriving Engine
i. Part of the Fire Attack Team (FAT)
ii. Shall secure a water supply and connect / supply the Fire
Department Connection (FDC).
iii. Officer and two (2) firefighters shall report to the lobby
with standpipe equipment.
iv. Officer shall check the alarm panel to determine the
location of the alarm.
v. Shall work with the second arriving Engine Company to
advance one (1) hose line to the seat of the fire.
b. Second Arriving Engine
i. Part of the Fire attack Team (FAT)
ii. Secure a secondary water supply and FAO shall assist first
arriving Engine FAO with water supply and FDC.
iii. Officer and two (2) firefighters shall report to the lobby
with standpipe equipment.
iv. Assist first arriving Engine in advancing one (1) hose line
to the seat of the fire.
c. First Arriving Truck Company
i. Part of the Fast Attack Team (FAT)
ii. Officer, two (2) firefighters, and FAO (if fire is above the
7th floor and the aerial ladder cannot be used) report to the
lobby with forcible entry tools, search rope and other hand
tools.
iii. Officer (if arriving before the first arriving Engine
Company) shall check the fire alarm panel.
iv. Officer to determine attack and evacuation stairs. Relay
information to Command.
v. Shall proceed to the fire floor and conduct search and
rescue operations.
vi. Shall utilize search rope secured to a place of refuge within
the fire attack stairwell.
d. Second Arriving Truck Company
i. Part of the Fast Attack Team (FAT)
ii. Officer, FAO, and two (2) firefighters shall proceed to the
lobby with forcible entry tools, search rope, and spare
SCBA cylinders (place cylinders in lobby).
iii. Shall proceed to the designated fire attack stairwell
beginning at the fire floor and search the stairs all the way
to the roof.
iv. Shall direct and/or assist occupants found in the fire attack
stairs to the designated evacuation stairwell.

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS - HIGH RISE OPERATIONS
SECTION 203.01.20
12/20
Page 7 of 15

v. Advise Division Supervisor when fire attack stairs are
“clear” of occupants.
vi. Ventilate the attack stairwell at the roof using scuttle or
door if possible, only with approval of the Division
Supervisor and after water is being put on the fire.
vii. Ventilate elevator shaft if possible with approval of
Division Supervisor.
viii.
Shall continue to sweep fire attack stairs for
occupants from the top to the lowest level of smoke
stratification below the fire floor.
e. First Arriving Heavy Rescue Company
i. Part of the Fast Attack Team (FAT)
ii. Officer, FAO, and two (2) firefighters shall report to the
lobby with forcible entry equipment, search rope, hand
tools including ceiling hooks and spare SCBA cylinders
(place cylinders in lobby).
iii. Shall perform forcible entry for FAT.
iv. Shall perform search and rescue operations on fire floor.
f. Third Arriving Engine Company
i. Park apparatus in a location not to impede the arrival of
responding Companies Note: Do Not Secure a Water
Supply.
ii. Officer becomes Lobby Control Officer.
iii. Determine the location of all stairwells. Be aware of which
stairwells have been designated as “Attack Stairs” and
“Evacuation Stairs”.
iv. Ensure all elevators have been recalled to the lobby and
placed in fire department service. Two (2) firefighters shall
maintain control of at least two (2) elevators to transport
Fire Companies and equipment to the designated staging
area below the fire floor.
v. Manage Alarm System, identify where alarms have been
activated and notify Command
vi. Coordinates evacuation efforts. May need to communicate
with tenants through the building intercom system at the
fire annunciator panel per direction of the Incident
Commander.
1. Shelter-in-place
2. Evacuation announcements and the location of
Evacuation Stairs
3. Updates
vii. Shut down HVAC System. (Locate and direct building
management to command)

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS - HIGH RISE OPERATIONS
SECTION 203.01.20
12/20
Page 8 of 15

g. Fourth Arriving Engine Company (Safety Engine)
i. Accountability (Refer to 202.07 Accountability).
ii. Accountability Officer and the Accountability Board need
to be at the Command Post.
h. Third Arriving Truck Company (RAT)
i. Stage one (1) floor below the fire floor.
ii. Officer to recon floor layout on the floor below the fire
noting the location of stairs and elevator shafts.
iii. Refer to 203.01.14 Rapid Assistance Teams (R.A.T.)
i. First Arriving District Fire Chief
i. Establishes Command
ii. Notifies Dispatch that this is a “High-Rise’ Building
iii. Requests a Second Alarm “Highrise Response”.
iv. Considers additional alarms to Staging / Base.
v. Notifies All Companies and Dispatch of the fire floor and
the locations of the “fire attack” and “evacuation”
stairwells.
vi. Attempt to contact building personnel, specifically building
fire safety and maintenance personnel. Have them remain
near Command Post as advisors for current occupancy,
evacuation procedures, ventilation systems and any other
building systems.
vii. Develop an Incident Action Plan (IAP).
viii.
Command Post may be outside at vehicle, in the
lobby or in the building fire command room. Notify
Dispatch and all Companies of the Command location.
Each incident will dictate this location.
ix. Command must utilize the Department Command HighRise worksheet.
j. Second Arriving District Fire Chief
i. Shall be assigned as a Division Supervisor. Depending on
fire conditions could be assigned to the fire floor or the
floor below the fire.
ii. Have a face-to face with IC prior to ascending to forward
position to develop Incident Action Plan (IAP).
iii. Radio designation shall be “Division + fire floor number.
iv. Shall immediately confirm fire floor and notify Command
of verification.
v. Shall give Command a CAN (Conditions, Actions and
Needs) report.
vi. Shall supervise and account for all Companies operating on
the fire floor including, the FAT, and also the RAT.

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS - HIGH RISE OPERATIONS
SECTION 203.01.20
12/20
Page 9 of 15

vii. Shall assess the evacuation procedure within the building in
relation to the fire conditions. The Division Supervisor
must consider recommending to the Incident Commander a
systematic full evacuation of the building or a partial
evacuation with areas being sheltered-in-place.
k. All First-Alarm Companies shall inform Command of location and
task(s) to be performed.
l. Radio traffic transmission examples following Engine 3 giving
their Initial Radio report and assuming Command;
i. “Engine 3 will be ascending to the 12th floor along with
Engine 5 in the south stairway which will be the attack
stairs, to advance a primary attack line onto the 12th floor.”
ii. “Ladder 29 to Command, we will be performing a primary
search of the attack stairway”.
iii. “Engine 29 to Command, we will be Lobby Control.”
3. Division / Group Supervisor(s)
a. Shall be assigned to a forward position to supervise Fire
Companies operating on floors of the structure.
b. Second arriving District Fire Chief shall assume a Division
Supervisor position, assuming Command of the fire floor.
c. Division radio designation shall be “Division + floor number” of
responsibility. Example – Second arriving District Chief proceeds
to the twelfth floor which is the fire floor. The second arriving
District Chief becomes Division 12 and is responsible for the
actions occurring within the twelfth floor, the fire attack stairwell
ascent team, and the RAT.
d. There may be several Division Supervisors assigned depending on
the magnitude of the incident.
e. Group Supervisors will be responsible for functional areas with the
fire operations. Examples may include Search and Rescue Group,
Evacuation Group, and Stairwell Support Group (Refer to 202.01
Incident Command System).
f. SO2 – Incident Safety Officer (Refer to 203.01-Q Structure Fires /
Incident Safety Officers)
g. ALS Supervisor (EMS Branch Director)
i. Establishes EMS Branch
ii. Facilitates the establishment of Rehab three (3) floors
below the fire.
iii. Establishes a Triage Officer / Group
iv. Establishes a Treatment Officer / Group
v. Establishes a Transport Officer / Group
vi. Reference Section 204.02 Mass Casualty Incidents (MCI)
Procedure

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS - HIGH RISE OPERATIONS
SECTION 203.01.20
12/20
Page 10 of 15

vii. Evaluates the need for additional EMS resources and
notifies Command.
h. Medic Units
i. Report to EMS Branch Director
ii. Report with all ALS equipment
4. Second-Alarm Companies
a. Should Level 1 stage and await to be assigned a task by the
Incident Commander.
b. Fire Companies on the second alarm; four (4) Engines, two (2)
Trucks, and one (1) Heavy Rescue.
i. Recommended Assignments:
1. Back-Up Line to fire floor (2 ½” line).
2. Fire Line above the fire (2 ½” line).
3. Search the floor above the fire.
4. Search the evacuation stairway.
5. Search other assigned floors.
6. Ventilation
7. Assist or relief of other fire companies.
8. RAT Assist (usually second Heavy Rescue)
9. Other tasks deemed necessary by the Incident
Commander.
c. Third Arriving District Fire Chief
i. Shall report to Command
ii. Shall be utilized as needed by the Incident Commander.
iii. Potential assignments are Accountability, Rescue Group
Supervisor, Division Supervisor or any other position the
IC needs filled.
d. Additional Medic Units and ALS Supervisors report to EMS
Branch or Group Supervisor.
e. Command Staff
i. Complete the ICS, consider the following positions:
1. EMS Branch positions
2. RAT Chief
3. Additional Division Supervisors
4. Rescue Group
5. Ventilation Group
6. Interior Staging / Stairwell Support
7. Logistics
8. Liaison to Building Maintenance or Supervisor
9. ICS position Aides
10. Base
f. All Companies and personnel arriving after the first alarm shall
bring their accountability passports to the Accountability Officer.

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS - HIGH RISE OPERATIONS
SECTION 203.01.20
12/20
Page 11 of 15

5. Additional Alarms / Fire Companies
a. Level 2 stage at location given by the Incident Commander
b. Assignments will be given by the Incident Commander or
Operations Chief on arrival
c. Additional assignments that may be necessary but not limited to:
i. Relief of working Fire Companies
ii. Interior Staging
iii. Stairway Support
iv. Other Search areas (Top floor then work down towards fire
floor)
v. Control of Fire Pump / Sprinkler Valves
vi. Aides to Chief Officers
vii. Accountability
H. High-Rise Elevator Procedures
1. Never use an elevator for fires on the fourth floor or lower, use the stairs.
2. Never take an elevator to the fire floor, take elevator to two (2) floors
below the fire floor then exit and use stairs.
3. Never pass the fire floor, use stairs.
4. Don't return in an “up” elevator except on Fire Department service.
5. Place all elevators in hoist way on Fire Department service.
6. Wear complete PPE and bring forcible entry tools and S.C.B.A.'s
7. Do not overcrowd elevator.
8. Use elevators whose hoist way terminates below fire floor whenever
possible.
9. Use elevator in another area of building away from the fire if possible,
preferably in an area separated by firewalls and fire doors.
10. Never take the word of building occupants as to the fire floor. Make
every attempt to determine exact fire location before ascending. This can
be accomplished by:
a. Identifying the floor number at the building’s entrance. IE: The
entrance may be floor #3.
b. Counting floors from the exterior. Note: There may be a
mezzanine or no 13th floor) or, opening the top escape door and
looking up the elevator shaft.
11. The elevator shall be stopped at an intermediate floor, to check floor
layout (stair locations, etc.) and verify that the elevator can be stopped.
12. Exit the elevator at least two floors below the reported fire floor or two
floors below the lowest level of fire alarm on the fire alarm panel.
I. Standpipe Procedures for High-Rise Structures
1. Standpipe equipment shall include:
a. 200’ of 2.5” lightweight standpipe hose

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS - HIGH RISE OPERATIONS
SECTION 203.01.20
12/20
Page 12 of 15

b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Vindicator Heavy Attack Nozzle
60° Elbow (2)
In-line pressure gauge
Spare valve wheel
18” Pipe wrench
Wood door wedges
1 set lightweight spanners
1.5” smooth bore tip
2.5” F to 1.5” M pistol grip shutoff

Note: The Vindicator and the smooth bore tips are the only nozzles to
be used when operating from a standpipe system
The initial standpipe connection shall be made to the outlet one floor
below the fire floor and stretched up the stairs to the fire floor.
The standpipe shall be flushed prior to connecting the hose to remove
debris.
The hose shall be stretched into position using two engine companies.
The nozzle fire fighter and the back-up firefighter will advance the hose
line
The Company Officer should be in the third position to get an overview of
the conditions on the fire floor.
The additional fire fighters should be located at friction points along the
hose line assisting with its advance. (Doors and corners)
One firefighter shall remain at the standpipe valve.
The second Company Officer should ensure proper flaking and
advancement of the fire line.

J. Additional High-Rise Equipment (when placed in-service)
1. KO Fire Curtain
The fire curtain is designed to be deployed from the floor above
the fire to block the window of the fire compartment during a
wind-driven fire. The Fire Curtain requires two companies to
deploy and secure. There are two fire curtains carried on each
Heavy Rescue.
2. Hero Pipe
Floor below nozzle The Hero Pipe floor below nozzle is designed
to be utilized when fire companies cannot make access to the fire
compartment due to heavy fire conditions. The Hero Pipe requires
one to two fire companies to transport the equipment to the floor
below the fire and for set up. The Hero Pipe is an alternative option
when the fire attack cannot be accomplished utilizing a fire attack
from the fire floor.

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS - HIGH RISE OPERATIONS
SECTION 203.01.20
12/20
Page 13 of 15

K. High-Rise Fire Information
1. Heat of the fire
The intensity and size of the fire will determine how much
combustion gases are heated, and how high they will rise inside the
building. In lower structures, there is generally enough heat
energy to cause the heated fire gases to rise to the highest level in
the structure. In high-rise buildings, the smoke and toxic gases
will tend to rise until they reach temperature equilibrium, then they
will stratify. It is not unusual to have heavy smoke on a mid-level
floor, and smoke free floors above. This stratification can
endanger occupants who enter a smoke free stairway, discovering
smoke several stories below. Many times, doors leading back into
a floor area are locked, forcing the fleeing occupant to wait it out
in the stairway or proceed through the smoke.
2. Stack Effect
On a cold day, the stack effect will be positive, or cause the
products of combustion to rise in the building. Tightness of the
structure has much to do with stack effect. The unpredictable
behavior of smoke within a High Rise is due, in large part, to stack
effect. In some buildings, the stack effect is so great that it
interferes with the proper operation of the HVAC. The colder it is
outside, and the warmer inside, the greater the stack effect.
Conversely, the stack effect can be negative on a warm day, within
air-conditioned building. Actually, the heat of the fire and stack
effect is interdependent. On a cold day, the chances of smoke
stratification are less than on a warm day.
3. Wind
a. There is a point within a high-rise structure of sufficient height,
called the Neutral Pressure Plane. Below the Neutral Pressure
Plane (NPP), air is moving into the building, at the NPP, forces are
neutral (air is not moving in or out) and above the NPP, air moves
out of the building. The heat of the fire and stack effect affects the
NPP. Wind also plays a major role. Ground level winds are not
always a good indication of wind direction and speed high above
the ground. Downtown areas of large cities, containing large
numbers of High Rise buildings, are like giant canyons. Wind
entering the high-rise canyon is redirected and becomes very
turbulent. This gustiness also prevails high above the ground, but

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS - HIGH RISE OPERATIONS
SECTION 203.01.20
12/20
Page 14 of 15

possibly in another direction at a higher velocity. Wind passing
over a roof opening has a pulling effect. In addition, the wind will
push smoke back into the building on the leeward side, and tend to
help on the windward side. Therefore, the wind will effect
ventilation in three ways, moving the NPP, pulling smoke through
a roof opening, and pushing or pulling smoke from a window. In
reality, it is impossible to predict the wind factor accurately. Wind
direction and velocity can change dramatically, even when
atmospheric conditions are not changing significantly.
b. If the window to the fire compartment fails there is the possibility
of having a wind driven fire.
c. Prior to opening the apartment door from the hallway, pierce the
eyehole of the door with the point of the haligan tool. If fire under
pressure emits from the hole, there is a good possibility of a wind
driven fire. Do not open the door. Immediately relay information
to Command or Division Supervisor. Use an alternative approach
to attack the fire.
d. If the fire appears to be wind driven and firefighters cannot make
an attack on the fire consider deploying the KO Fire Curtain and
placing the Hero Pipe in service.
Note: Wind driven fires have caused firefighter fatalities
throughout the fire service by trapping firefighters in the path of
the wind driven fire
4. Search and Rescue
a. The Incident Commander must obtain the building pre-plan and
determine if the building will conduct a full or partial evacuation
of the building. The Incident Commander will rely on reports from
the Division Supervisor on the fire floor regarding the necessity of
a systematic full building evacuation. Many high-rise buildings
within Cincinnati only conduct partial evacuations.
b. Search efforts must be systematic and include a complete primary
search of the fire floor and floors above the fire. As search and
rescue teams proceed with a systematic search, they must provide
status reports to their Division Supervisor and mark areas searched
using the chalk marking system as described in 203.01G. Search
teams must utilize the wide area search rope secured in the
stairwell to provide a lifeline to safety. The tenability of floors
above the fire must be assessed if the building has not been fully
evacuated.
c. Search Priorities:
i. Fire Floor
ii. Attack Stairwells to Roof

STRUCTURE FIRE OPERATIONS - HIGH RISE OPERATIONS
SECTION 203.01.20
12/20
Page 15 of 15

iii. Floor above the fire
iv. Evacuation Stairs to the roof
v. Top floor
vi. All floors in between top floor and the floor above the fire
working from the top down.
d. Occupants may display "convergence cluster" behavior by
gathering in certain rooms, thought to be safe and for the feeling of
safety gained when others are present. Searching firefighters may
not find anyone in several rooms or on an entire floor area, while
one room may contain far more victims than anticipated.
e. Helicopter rescues are extremely dangerous and in most cases
unnecessary. Few cases warrant the use of a helicopter in
removing occupants from a roof. There is no agreement in place
for helicopter rescues.
Note: It is imperative to notify the Division Supervisor or
Command of cleared floors and apartments during search
operations. It is also extremely important to notify them of areas /
apartments where sheltering-in-place is occurring. This eliminates
unnecessary duplication of search efforts.
5. Fire Control
a. In a high-rise building, confining and extinguishing the fire will do
more to save lives than any other single factor. Once the fire is
extinguished, the toxic products of combustion are no longer being
produced, and the whole operation becomes more manageable.
b. THE PRIMARY RESCUE TACTIC IS A WELL-PLACED,
AGGRESSIVE INTERIOR ATTACK.
c. Firefighters conducting fire attack operations shall remain in
contact with the hose line at all times. The hose line shall serve as
a lifeline to the safety of the stairwell.
6. Ventilation
a. Coordinate with the fire attack.
b. Ventilate stairways as soon as appropriate. Start with “Fire
Attack” stairs. Utilize building pressurized stair ventilation system
if possible.
c. Breaking glass is difficult and can’t be undone. Other hazards of
breaking windows are falling glass can cut hose or people on the
ground.
7. Staging (Interior) / Base (Exterior)
Always have a ready reserve of staffing available at Base and
Staging. Consider additional alarms to meet this need.


=== 203.02 Suppression Systems ===
FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
203.02
Page 1 of 8
CHAPTER II Operations

Rev. 3/91

SUBJECT 3 Emergency Operations
TOPIC 2

A.

Fire Suppression Systems

SCOPE
This topic modifies standard operations for structure fires when a fire suppression system
is in place. Normal procedures will be followed except when there is a conflict between
this section and standard structure fire operations, this topic shall take precedent.

B.

PRIORITIES
Priorities remain rescue, fire control and property conservation, but in addition a top
priority is supporting the fire suppression system enabling it to control and/or extinguish
the fire.

C.

PRE-PLANNING
Structures fully or partially protected by a Fire Suppression System shall be pre-planned.
As a minimum the pre-plan shall include a drawing showing the location of system
components (risers, shut-offs, pumps, agent supply containers, etc.) and area protected.

D.

WATER SUPPLY
Water supply requirements shall be the same as for any structure fire, namely a source of
water supply shall be secured by the first in Engine Company unless the pre-plan
preempts this requirement. Most properties protected by fire suppression systems are
large commercial buildings requiring a 5" supply line or soft suction connection. The
first-in Engine Company shall connect to the sprinkler intakes of a sprinkler system
(unless other arrangements are made on the pre-plan for that property) supplying the
system with 150 p.s.i.g..

FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
203.02
Page 2 of 8
E.

F.

SAFETY

Rev. 6/89

1.

Follow all safety precautions listed for structure fires.

2.

Be aware of the potential danger created by chemical suppression systems (CO2,
Dry Chemical, Halon).

3.

If the system is controlling the fire, it is not necessary to expose firefighters until
the overhaul phase.

GOING TO WORK IN A SPRINKLERED BUILDING - NOTHING SHOWING
1.

Listed here are tasks that should be accomplished at buildings equipped with a
sprinkler and no signs of fire or system operation are evident from the outside on
arrival.

2.

Connect two (2) 2-1/2" lines to the sprinkler intakes. The pumper supplying
sprinkler intakes shall be supplied by a soft suction or 5" hose connection to a fire
hydrant.

3.

One member equipped with a radio should be sent to the sprinkler system riser
(main shut-off) to determine if the system is flowing and making sure the valve is
fully open. This member shall immediately notify the incident commander of the
system status. This position should be manned throughout sprinkler operations if
at all possible.

4.

If pumps are near the main shut-off, the member assigned to the main shut-off can
also man this position. How-ever, if the pumps are remote, another member
should respond to the pump location. The Incident Commander must also be
notified of the pump status. Upon receiving orders from the Incident commander,
this member shall manually start the pumps. This position should also be manned
throughout sprinkler operations if at all possible. It is poor practice to rely on
annunciators to determine pump status. A physical check of the pumps should be
made.

5.

Other members should be assigned to conduct a systematic check of the entire
building, if there is any indication of fire or system operation. If in doubt - check
it out.

FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
203.02
Page 3 of 8
G.

GOING TO WORK IN A SPRINKLERED BUILDING FIRE OR SYSTEM OPERATION ON ARRIVAL

Rev. 6/89EVIDENCE OF

1.

If there are signs of fire or sprinkler system operation the main objective is to
assist the system in controlling and extinguishing the fire while limiting property
damage or in the case of system operation without a fire, to limit the damage
caused by the system.

2.

Connect two (2) 2-1/2" lines to the sprinkler intakes.

3.

Force entry limiting damage to a minimum. But, with a fire in progress or system
in operation, time spent in gaining entry will certainly add to the property
damage, making a more aggressive entry justified.

4.

One member equipped with a radio should be sent to the sprinkler system riser
(main shut-off) to determine if the system is flowing and making sure the valve is
fully open. This member shall immediately notify the Incident Commander of the
system status. This position should be manned throughout sprinkler operations if
at all possible.

5.

If pumps are near the main shut-off the member assigned to the main shut-off can
also man this position. How-ever, if the pumps are remote another member
should respond to the pump location. The Incident Commander must also be
notified of the pump status. Upon receiving orders from the Incident
Commander, this members should also be manned throughout sprinkler
operations if at all possible. It is poor practice to rely on annunciators to
determine pump status. A physical check of the pumps should be made.

6.

Let the system do it's job. It is better to shut down too late, rather than too early.
The system should be permitted to operate until the Incident Commander is sure
the fire is completely under control. The only remaining fire, if any, should be
small spot fires in concealed spaces.

FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
203.02
Page 4 of 8
G.

GOING TO WORK IN A SPRINKLERED BUILDING Rev. 3/91 EVIDENCE OF
FIRE OR SYSTEM OPERATION ON ARRIVAL (CONTINUED)
7.

Prepare for interior attack and/or overhaul by laying hose lines and manning them
with firefighters in full protective clothing, including Air Mask. Hose lines
should not be operated except to limit fire spread and for overhaul. However, if
the sprinkler system is in-effective due to damaged piping, malfunction or
in-adequacy, then hose lines will take priority. The best practice is to give the
system the benefit of the doubt being careful not to rob the sprinkler system of
needed water by unnecessary use of hose lines. Remember, sprinkler systems
have a 96%+ success rate in controlling fires.

8.

Ventilation can channel the fire and limit fire extension if done properly. As with
any ventilation, poor ventilation can spread the fire while increasing the fire's
oxygen supply. If you cannot locate the fire due to smoke, steam, etc., DO NOT
SHUT THE SYSTEM DOWN TO FIND THE FIRE, VENTILATE INSTEAD .
The effectiveness of the sprinkler system in cooling the entire fire area may
present a ventilation problem, as the cooled smoke refuses to rise sometimes
requiring mechanical ventilation.

9.

Members should be assigned to salvage operations while hose lines and sprinkler
control are in progress. Salvage includes shutting down the system once the fire
is KNOWN to be under control.

10.

Restore the system to service by replacing fused sprinkler heads and reopening
the valve if possible. If the system is too complicated or sufficient quantities of
the proper type sprinkler heads are not available have the owner/manager restore
the system as soon as possible.

FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
203.02
Page 5 of 8
H.

WORKING AT A PROPERTY PROTECTED BY A DELUGE SYSTEM

Rev. 6/89

1.

The tasks required at a sprinklered building are basically the same for wet, dry or
pre-action systems. The deluge system presents at least one more consideration,
manual operation of the deluge valve. Many of these systems are located outside
of buildings. Usually the hazard protected by these systems create extra hazards
for firefighters attempting manual suppression. System operation is evident
negating the need for the thorough investigation required in sprinklered buildings.
Listed below are general steps to be taken at these properties, but pre-fire
planning is the key to successful operation.

2.

Check control valve and fire pump. Just as with the wet and dry pipe systems, it
is important to maintain valves and pumps in a fully operational condition.

3.

Operate deluge valve. It is possible, though improbable, that a fire would be in
progress in an area protected by a deluge system that failed to operate. If the
system is needed for fire control, the manual deluge valve should be operated. It
is more likely that an exposure fire would threaten an area protected by a deluge
system. It may be possible to cover these protected exposures with the deluge
system by operating the deluge valve. Consideration must be given to the water
supply requirements of these systems when being used as exposure protection. A
deluge system may well deplete a private water supply system.

4.

Check interlocks, deluge systems often trip interlocking systems when activated.
For example, system operation may de-energize electric transformers, shut down
conveyor belts, or shut off fuel supply. In most cases, there is a means of
manually activating the interlock. If it is possible to safely shut down fuel
supplies, etc., this should be accomplished. Usually the deluge system will
control the fire even if the interlocks fail to function. It may be advisable to wait
for plant personnel to shut off fuel supplies, de-energize transformers, etc.

FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
203.02
Page 6 of 8
H.

I.

WORKING AT A PROPERTY PROTECTED BY A
DELUGE SYSTEM (CONT'D)

Rev. 6/89

5.

Let the system do it's job! As with the wet and dry pipe systems, it is better to
shut down too late rather than too early. A determination must be made that the
fire is completely under control before shutting down. This system will be
flowing large quantities of water, increasing the tendency to shut down
prematurely. Remember, even with hose lines in place, it may be impossible to
direct the quantity of water necessary to hold the fire if the system is shut down.

6.

Back up the system. Hose lines manned by fully protected firefighters are
required at strategic locations for fires involving conveyors. However, manually
operated hose lines usually create a substantial safety hazard, if the system is
protecting high voltage transformers. The Incident Commander must assess this
situation carefully, knowing that charged hose lines offer a tremendous
temptation. Most of the time, the protected transformer could completely burn
out without endangering lives or other property. If the system is equipped with
fire department connections, the water supply should be augmented.

GOING TO WORK IN A BUILDING EQUIPPED WITH A STANDPIPE
1.

2.

The first in Engine Company will advance to the fire floor with full protective
clothing including air mask. The following equipment shall be considered the
minimum:
a.

Two (2) sections of 1-3/4" hose

b.

Constant Flow 1-3/4" Nozzle

c.

2-1/2" to 1-1/2" Adaptor

The second in Engine Company will advance to the fire floor, backing up the first
in Engine Company with a minimum size line of 1-3/4".

FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
203.02
Page 7 of 8
I.

J.

GOING TO WORK IN A BUILDING EQUIPPED
WITH A STANDPIPE (CON'T)

Rev. 6/89

3.

The pre-plan can modify the equipment and company assignments. Unless
specifically addressed in the pre-plan, hose lines shall be connected to standpipe
risers on the fire floor, if the standpipe outlet is in the stairway. If the standpipe
outlet is located in the hallway, hose shall be connected to the standpipe one floor
below the fire.

4.

Proper elevator safety procedures must be followed if elevators are to be used in
the operation.

5.

For fires above the reach of aerial ladders refer to "High Rise Procedures".

6.

Check fire pumps and main control valves. This position will not usually require
manning throughout the operation, as it does for the sprinklered property. It is
important to assure the system is ready for service and pumps are operating. This
function becomes critical when fires occur in upper stories of high rise buildings.

7.

Supply the fire department connections. The water supply requirements are the
same as with a sprinklered building, namely, two 2-1/2" lines connected to the
fire department connection with a water supply from a hydrant via large diameter
hose, soft suction, or two 2-1/2" lines. Some standpipes systems will not have
internal supplies, relying entirely on the pumper supply. The volume supplied
must be hydraulically calculated according to the Cincinnati Fire Department
hydraulics as outlined in Drill Book #1.

GOING TO WORK IN AREAS PROTECTED BY TOTAL FLOODING CARBON
DIOXIDE OR HALON SYSTEMS
1.

If the system is controlling the fire, maintain the enclosure by keeping the doors
closed. There is no need to enter the area if the fire is being controlled, as
entering the area will allow the Carbon Dioxide or Halon agent to dissipate
thereby reducing the effectiveness.

FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
203.02
Page 8 of 8
J.

K.

GOING TO WORK IN AREAS PROTECTED BY TOTAL
CARBON DIOXIDE OR HALON SYSTEMS (CONTINUED)

Rev. 6/89FLOODING

2.

If it becomes necessary to enter the room to perform a rescue or for final
extinguishment, members must wear full protective clothing, donning the air
mask prior to entry. The area may appear to be completely clear yet pose a
serious hazard due to a lack of oxygen or in the case of Halon, pose a threat due
to corrosive decomposition gases.

3.

These systems will generally be equipped with a manual actuation device which
should be operated in the event that the automatic detection/activation devices
fail.

4.

Unlike the sprinkler and standpipe systems, Carbon Dioxide and Halon systems
will have a very limited supply of extinguishing agent. Usually there is only
enough Carbon Dioxide or Halon for two or three relatively short discharges
before agent depletion.

5.

Overhaul operations must be completed, especially in areas containing Class "A"
materials as rekindles will occur as the agent is diluted over time.

6.

System restoration, will by necessity, be left to the property owner and/or a
contractor capable of recharging and resetting the system.

GOING TO WORK IN AREAS PROTECTED BY LOCAL APPLICATION CARBON
DIOXIDE, HALON, FOAM, DRY CHEMICAL OR OTHER SPECIAL
EXTINGUISHING AGENT SYSTEMS
1.

These systems are generally protecting Class "B" or "C" hazards and do not
depend on an enclosure.

2.

Support the system by activating manual activation devices when necessary, or in
the case of foam, pumping into the system and following pre-plan information for
foam application to the area involved.

3.

Be prepared with back up equipment, hose lines, foam lines or portable
extinguishers as required to augment the system and/or complete overhaul.

4.

System restoration, will by necessity, be left to the property owner and/or a
contractor capable of recharging and resetting the system.


=== 203.03 Outdoor Fires ===
OUTDOOR FIRES
203.03
Page 1 of 4
Rev. 2/15
CHAPTER II Operations
SUBJECT 3

Emergency Operations

TOPIC 3

Outdoor Fires

A.

SCOPE
This topic is limited to outdoor fires, generally considered nuisance fires, including fires
in dumpsters, landfills, junk yards, mulch, brush and other small outdoor fires.

B.

C.

PRIORITIES
1.

Size Up and call for additional resources if necessary.

2.

Limit the fire area.

3.

Protect exposures and keep the fire from extending into structures or otherwise
damaging valuable property.

WATER SUPPLY
It is not usually necessary to secure a source of water supply for an outdoor fire. If there
is a large dumpster, brush, landfill or junk yard fire then a water supply should be
considered. If a structure is involved or threatened, a water supply will be established.

D.

SAFETY
1.

Full Protective Clothing shall be worn at the scene of all outdoor fires.

2.

SCBA will be utilized on all dumpster fires. SCBA shall be utilized at any other
outdoor fire deemed necessary at the discretion of the Incident Commander,
Safety Officer or Officer in Charge.

3.

Dumpster and trash fires may contain a variety of harmful materials including
aerosols, flammables, toxic materials. An upwind approach is best.

4.

Consider the fall/trip hazards associated with terrain when combating brush fires.

OUTDOOR FIRES
203.03
Page 2 of 4
Rev. 2/15

5.

E.

F.

DUMPSTER FIRES
1.

The preferred method of extinguishing dumpsters is to flood dumpsters using
open butts, strapping lines or otherwise using unmanned hose streams. (Avoid
entering dumpster with any portion of your body.)

2.

Consider using the Deck Gun to fill a dumpster with water.

3.

Use SCBA.

4.

Can use a ceiling hook or rag rake to assist in extinguishment if the dumpster
leaks and you are unable to flood it.

TRASH CAN FIRES
1.

G.

Remember that brush fires gain in velocity and intensity as they spread uphill and
downwind, stay out of the uphill and downwind path of fire spread.

Can usually be controlled with a water can extinguisher.

MULCH FIRES
1.

Can usually be controlled with a water can extinguisher.

2.

Make sure to soak a large area and overhaul mulch to prevent rekindle.

OUTDOOR FIRES
203.03
Page 3 of 4
Rev. 2/15

H.

I.

J.

LARGE OUTDOOR LANDFILLS AND JUNK YARDS
1.

Request adequate resources for the size of fire and potential for extension.

2.

Secure water supply.

3.

May need to request heavy equipment to move debris, prevent fire spread and to
overhaul.

4.

Incident can last for extended periods of time (days or weeks).

5.

Be aware of potential hazardous material presence. Environmental Crimes may
need to be notified.

BRUSH FIRES
1.

Brush fires can spread rapidly over large areas, threatening structures.

2.

A quick size up must be made weighing the potential for fire spread and
requesting additional resources as needed

3.

Use pre-connected hose lines, and master streams if possible to control and
extinguish the fire.

4.

If the fire is out of the reach of pre-connected hose lines and/or master streams,
then a combination attack using water extinguishers and fiber brooms to beat out
the fire is generally most effective.

5.

Chain saws may be needed to make a fire break to cut off the spread of fire.

6.

Setting up a water curtain to prevent spread to structures may be necessary.

DETACHED GARAGES, SHEDS AND OTHER SMALL STRUCTURES
1.

Follow Section 203.01 Structure Fire Operations

OUTDOOR FIRES
203.03
Page 4 of 4
Rev. 2/15
K.

SMALL CONTROLLED FIRES
1.

Examples: cooking fires, warming fires, bonfires, camp fires, etc.- Reference the
2005 Ohio Fire Code 1301:7-7-03 (Chapter 3 (G) Section 307 Open Burning and
Recreational Fires & (H) Section 308 Open Flames).


=== 203.04 Mailbox Fires ===
MAIL BOX FIRES
203.04
Page 1 of 1
Rev. 3/88
CHAPTER II Operations
SUBJECT 3

Emergency Operations

TOPIC 4

Mail Box Fires

A.

SCOPE
This topic is limited to fires involving mail in U.S. Government Mail Deposit Boxes.

B.

PRIORITIES
1.

C.

Keep damage to an absolute minimum.

MAIL BOX FIRES
Carbon Dioxide is the agent of choice. The Post Master's Office should be contacted as
soon as possible, given the location and asked to notify the proper person to respond and
open the box. The company or one member should stand by until the box is opened by
the Post Office employee.
If there is evidence of smoldering, short blast of Carbon Dioxide will control it until the
box is opened by a Post Office employee.
For fires in boxes at the base of mail chutes, have building personnel place "out of order"
notes on all floors, and notify the Post Office employee upon arrival.


=== 203.05 Elevator Escalator Emergencies ===
ELEVATOR/ESCALATOR EMERGENCIES
203.05
Page 1 of 5
CHAPTER II

Operations

SUBJECT 3

Emergency Operations

TOPIC 5

Elevator/Escalator Emergencies

A.

Rev. 3/91

SCOPE
This subject covers rescue of persons trapped in elevators, elevator safety in burning
buildings, and fires in elevator installations.

B.

C.

PRIORITIES
1.

To safely affect rescues from elevators.

2.

To teach fire personnel safe procedures when using elevators in burning
buildings.

3.

To safely extinguish fires in elevator installations.

SAFETY
1.

When using elevators in buildings on fire:
a.

Never use an elevator for fires below the fourth
floor, use stairs.

b.

Never take an elevator to the fire floor.

c.

Never pass the fire floor, use stairs.

d.

Don't return in an up elevator except on Fire Department service.

e.

Place all elevators in hoistway on Fire Department service.

f.

Activate stop switch when escaping.

g.

Bring forcible entry tools and S.C.B.A.'s.

ELEVATOR/ESCALATOR EMERGENCIES
203.05
Page 2 of 5
C.

SAFETY (CON'T)

Rev. 6/89

h.

Don't overcrowd elevator.

I.

Use elevators whose hoistway terminates below fire floor whenever possible.

j.

Use elevator in another area of building away from the fire if possible, preferably
in an area separated by fire walls and fire doors.

k.

Never take the word of building occupants as to the fire floor. Make every
attempt to determine exact fire location before ascending. This can be
accomplished by:
Counting floors from the exterior (there may be a mezzanine or no 13th floor) or,
opening the top escape door and looking up the elevator shaft.

l.

D.

The elevator shall be stopped at an intermediate floor, to check floor layout (stair
locations, etc.) and verify that the elevator can be stopped.

ELEVATOR RESCUES
Any elevator that stops for other than normal reasons is potentially dangerous. Elevator
service mechanics can usually correct elevator failures and get the car running. Expert
help and communications are two important needs that shall be taken care of immediately
when passengers are trapped in elevators. Fire Fighters should be sure a service
mechanic is on the way. At the same time they should communicate with the trapped
occupants to reassure them of their safety. Elevator mechanics can either correct the
malfunction or guide Fire Fighters in the safest and least damaging method of rescue.
1.

Methods of communication with occupants of stalled elevators are: Intercom
between elevator car and lobby, telephone in elevator car to lobby, or some other
area of building, and direct voice contact with trapped occupants.

ELEVATOR/ESCALATOR EMERGENCIES
203.05
Page 3 of 5
D.

ELEVATOR RESCUES (CON'T)
2.

E.

Rev. 6/89

Locate position of stuck elevator.
a.

Ask people at the scene; building management, person who called the fire
department, etc.

b.

Check the main lobby position indicator above elevator doors to determine
position of car (sometimes these readings can be inaccurate).

c.

Force open hoistway doors or use elevator keys and look up shaft.

RESCUE
If elevator mechanic is not immediately available and rescue must be made:
1.

Proper preparation for rescue is necessary for the safety of both trapped
passengers and Fire Fighters.

2.

Organize rescue, have proper tools at scene.

3.

Always disconnect the main power circuit to the driving motor. This switch is
usually in the machine room or near the door to the machine room. Send one Fire
Fighter with a portable radio to throw this main switch. The Fire Fighter should
remain at this switch throughout the rescue to insure power is not accidentally
turned back on.

4.

The emergency stop switch in the stalled car should be activated as further
security against accidental movement of stalled car. Passengers must be
instructed to activate this switch.

5.

If the elevator rescue is due to a bound door, the first act should be to see if the
hoistway door can be opened by hand from the hallway or lobby side. Binding
doors are not uncommon and can generally be forced open by hand. A hard rap
on the door panels may dislodge whatever caused the bind. Always warn
passengers before hitting door. Sometimes the interlock switch on the stalled car
can be reached from the adjacent elevator car and tripped with a ceiling hook, this
will usually open the door of stuck car.

ELEVATOR/ESCALATOR EMERGENCIES
203.05
Page 4 of 5
E.

F.

RESCUE (CON'T)

Rev. 6/89

6.

If elevator is stalled and you cannot wait for elevator mechanic, attempt rescue
from adjacent car, if available, by gaining access to stalled elevator through side
emergency exit opening. Multiple hoistway elevators usually have side exits in
addition to the exit out of the top. Side openings line up between adjacent
elevators. A person can pass from car to car when elevators are level with each
other. Side exit panels have electric contacts that prevent the movement of an
elevator with a side panel open.

7.

If electric power is off and you must force hoistway doors open, only pry at the
top, as near to the interlocks as possible. Interlocks are usually located on the
header of the entrance frame in passenger elevators.

8.

Top exit rescue from elevator car, may be required when trapped passengers
cannot be moved through doors and the fire officer decides he cannot wait for an
elevator mechanic. Top exit rescue is the alternative when an elevator stalls in a
single hoistway. Top exit rescue involves three steps: entering the car, securing
the passengers, and removing the passengers.

FIRES IN ELEVATOR INSTALLATIONS
1.

There is potential for fire at any of the three basic divisions of elevator
installations: the machine room, the car, and the pit.
a.

Machine Room - treat as any other electric fire. Electric power should be
removed from the affected equipment by its main disconnect before
attacking the fire.

b.

The Car - these fires are usually electrical. E.G. shorted fan motors and
shorted ballasts of fluorescent lights.

c.

Pit Fires - access can be gained through pit access door or the lower
hoistway door. Fires are usually minor and confined to trash and oily
residue. Move elevator cars to upper floors to gain entry to pit area.
Remove all occupants from elevator cars, and shut off all electrical power
to cars before allowing Fire Fighters to enter pit.

ELEVATOR/ESCALATOR EMERGENCIES
203.05
Page 5 of 5
3/91
G.

ESCALATOR EMERGENCIES
When necessary, power to escalator can be shut off with red emergency stop switch
located at top and bottom of escalator.
Older installations also have a disconnect switch under top landing plate.


=== 203.06 Vehicular fires ===
VEHICLE FIRES
203.06
Page 1 of 6
Rev. 2/15
CHAPTER II Operations
SUBJECT 3 Emergency Operations
TOPIC 6
A.

Road Vehicle Fires

SCOPE
This topic addresses the handling of fires in most over the road vehicles, including
automobiles, buses, postal vehicles, garbage trucks and large commercial vehicles.

B.

PRIORITIES
Priorities at the scene of a vehicle fire are:

C.

D.

1.

Size-up

2.

Safely remove vehicle occupants who are in or near the vehicle.

3.

Keep non-response people away from the vehicle for a distance of at least 100
feet in all directions.

4.

Control the fire and extinguish.

5.

Control fuel spills.

6.

Determine if there are alternative fuels or special hazards present

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
1.

Full Structural Firefighting Protective Clothing including Self- Contained
Breathing Apparatus (SCBA) shall be utilized when fighting vehicle fires.

2.

All members, i.e. FAOs & Medic Unit personnel, not in Full Structural
Firefighting Protective Clothing shall wear the reflective traffic safety vest at all
vehicle fires

PROCEDURE
1.

APPARATUS PLACEMENT
a. To afford protection from hazardous liquids and vapors, and to reduce
smoke in the work area, the apparatus should be placed upwind and uphill
of the incident if possible, unless used for blocking.
b. Protect personnel from being struck; a minimum of two lanes of traffic

VEHICLE FIRES
203.06
Page 2 of 6
Rev. 2/15
shall be stopped by placing the apparatus as a barrier in a position to stop
traffic.
c. Request police for traffic control.
d. Warning lights should be left operating, in conjunction with the use of
traffic cones and/or flares where needed.
2.

WATER SUPPLY
a. Water of sufficient quantity, flow rate, and pressure should be used to
meet suppression objectives and ensure fire fighter safety at all vehicle fire
incidents.
b. Consider the use of Class A foam, as it will increase the efficiency of the
water supply.
c. It may not be necessary to secure a source of water supply when a light
duty vehicle is involved in fire.
d. The Officer shall exercise good judgment in determining the need for a
water supply, but will secure a source of water when large vehicles are
involved.
e. If victims are trapped (see topic Vehicle Accidents 203.07) a water supply
shall be secured, unless on a limited access highway in which the second
engine dispatched can be utilized as a backup source of water.
f. At vehicle fires in limited access high volume freeways, a second engine
is dispatched as a “blocker”, and may be used as a second source of water
(see topic Highway Emergencies 203.18).

3.

FIRE ATTACK
Prior to fire attack, perform a size-up and determine if there are any special
hazards (see #5 of this section), determine type of cargo, and request additional
resources if needed.
When attacking a vehicle fire, fire fighters should approach from a 45-degree
angle towards the side of the vehicle. This will reduce the potential of being
struck by energy absorbing bumpers or trunk / hatchback hold open devices
(struts) that may explode.
Chock wheels on both sides of wheel as soon as possible to prevent burning
vehicle from rolling or lurching forward or backwards.
a. ENGINE COMPARTMENT FIRES
Engine compartment fires often present access problems and can be
difficult to release hood locking mechanisms. Every effort should be
made to enter the engine compartment with a minimum amount of

VEHICLE FIRES
203.06
Page 3 of 6
Rev. 2/15
damage.
Some alternative methods to forcing the hood are:
i.
Operating Dry Chemical extinguishers or a hose line into a
partially opened hood, containing the fire so the to contain
the fire until a secondary release can operated
ii.
Break a section of the grill out, reach in and manually
release the hood.
iii. Piercing the inner wheel well with a piercing nozzle.
iv.
A stream can be directed from the ground level against
underside of hood the engine compartment.
b. PASSENGER COMPARTMENT FIRES
Fires in the passenger compartment will be handled in the same manner as
any Class "A" fire. Have an 1 ¾” hose line ready before opening doors
unless a rescue is needed. In this case, consider using a portable
extinguisher to control the fire while the rescue is made. To gain access,
breaking door glass is the preferred method. Fires in the trunk area
generally require forcible entry. Consider popping the trunk lid lock or
removing the back seat to reduce damage.
c. CARGO COMPARTMENT FIRES (COMMERCIAL VEHICLES)
i. Consider use of metal blade on a circular saw to make a
window to expose cargo for extinguishment.
ii. Consider piercing nozzle.
iii. Secure a water source and back-up line.
iv. Prop open overhead style doors, as they may fail after
being involved in fire conditions.
.
4.

OVERHAUL
The cause of the fire must be determined before completing overhaul.
If a vehicle is completely involved in fire or a fire extends from one compartment
to involve the other, an incendiary fire should be suspected.
If the fire is in a vehicle that is drivable and the cause cannot be determined or is
of a suspicious nature, call a Fire Investigator.
If the fire is in a junk vehicle, notify the Fire Investigation Unit (FIU) at 0700
hours of the next working day. Make a note on the NFIRS (Fire Incident
Reporting System) report under Remarks as indicated in 202.04D.

VEHICLE FIRES
203.06
Page 4 of 6
Rev. 2/15
When fires appear suspicious, the Officer should also have individual members
complete the FIU Statement Forms and forward to the investigating Fire
Investigator.
Upholstered material must be removed and thoroughly extinguished.
The vehicle battery/batteries must be disconnected on all vehicle fires. Always
disconnect the ground (Negative) side first.
Take necessary precautions to assure that the vehicle will not present a fire hazard
during towing.
5.

HAZARDS and SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
a.

b.

c.

d.

e.

Ruptured Fuel Tank
i. Are rare, but must be guarded against.
ii. Fuel tanks can be cooled by bouncing a water stream off the
ground onto the fuel tanks on the underside of the vehicle.
Liquid Petroleum GAS (LPG) and Liquid Natural Gas (LNG)
i. Allow PRVs (Pressure Relief Valves) to perform and vent the
fuel if they are operating. If fuel is venting, then the risk of a
BLEVE is significantly reduced. The PRV will dissipate most
of the fuel in a vehicle tank in under 5 minutes.
ii. Cool tanks when possible to reduce risk of a BLEVE.
iii. Be Cautious to avoid standing in vapor clouds if present.
Pressurized Flammable Gases
i. Hydrogen Fuel Tanks (also have PRVs).
ii. Be aware of Flammable or Pressurized Tanks as cargo.
Electric and Hybrid Vehicles
i. Orange Cables denote High Voltage- DO NOT CUT.
ii. It may take 5 minutes for energy to dissipate, once manually
disconnected.
iii. High Voltage battery banks are usually found behind the back
seat or in trunk.
iv. There are several Hybrid Vehicle Extrication Apps, that can assist
with the location of the battery bank and high voltage (orange)
cable.
Batteries
i. Be careful when disconnecting battery cables, these can cause an
arc or shock an individual.
ii. Avoid contact with battery acid.
iii. Batteries can release explosive Hydrogen gases.

VEHICLE FIRES
203.06
Page 5 of 6
Rev. 2/15
f.

g.

h.

i.

j.

k.

Combustible Metals
i. Many cars use combustible metals including Magnesium for
components of a vehicle (IE dashboard supports and engine
blocks).
ii. Metals can react violently with water. Fight fire, initially, from a
distance using the full reach of the stream.
iii. Extinguish using large amounts of water to cool below ignition
temperature or use a Dry Chemical Extinguisher.
Energy Absorbing Bumpers and Trunk / Hatchback Hold Open
Devices (Struts)
i. Some vehicles are equipped with energy absorbing suspension
systems and/or bumpers which are capable of violent rupture
causing injury.
ii. Beware of seat belt pretensioners failing.
Vehicle Stability
i. Wheels and suspension systems can fail during and following fire
conditions. Attempt to stay clear of underneath of car.
Air Bags
i. Even if the battery is disconnected, air bags can still deploy.
ii. Attempt to adhere to the 5-10-20 rule
•
M
aintain a minimum of 5 inches from side impact bags
•
M
aintain a minimum of 10 inches from frontal airbags
(steering column)
•
M
aintain a minimum of 20 inches from passenger side
frontal airbags
Fuel Spills
i. May need to use hazorb (or other type of absorbent) and/or sand
to control and contain spills.
ii. Use Foam to decrease vapors.
Backdraft
i. Can occur in passenger and cargo compartments that are well
sealed. Take precautions, by standing to the side when venting
a window or opening a door.

Special Alternative fuel vehicles are usually marked with a symbol of a diamond
with the following abbreviations or wording;
•

LPG- Liquefied Petroleum Gas

VEHICLE FIRES
203.06
Page 6 of 6
Rev. 2/15

•
•
•
•
•
•

CNG- Compressed Natural Gas
LNG-Liquefied Natural Gas
Liquefied Hydrogen or Compressed Hydrogen
EV- Electric Vehicle
HEV- Hybrid Electric Vehicle
FCV- Fuel Cell Vehicle

E. SPECIAL VEHICLES
1. Garbage/ Sanitation Trucks
a. Attempt to extinguish and control fire without dumping load, using access
doors. Sometimes these doors may be on top of the vehicle.
b. If possible follow the truck to a processing center, where they can dump load
and use heavy equipment to spread the load out for final extinguishment and
overhaul.
2. Postal Vehicles
a. Following extinguishment, secure Vehicle and notify Postmaster.
3. Buses
a. Batteries and Alternative Fuel Tanks can be on Roof.
b. Some buses have Automatic Dry Chemical Extinguishing systems.
c. Some buses have an electrical interlock that disengages the brakes when the
battery is disconnected. Before disconnecting batteries, make sure that the
mechanical brake is engaged and wheels are chocked from both sides.
4. Large Commercial Trucks
a. Identify Cargo from driver, use of ERG (Emergency Response Guide) and/or
the Bill of Lading.
b. Consider requesting Foam Unit(s).


=== 203.07 Vehicular accidents ===
VEHICULAR ACCIDENTS
203.07
Page 1 of 2
CHAPTER II

Operations

SUBJECT 3

Emergency Operations

TOPIC 7

Vehicular Accidents

A.

Rev. 8/14

SCOPE
This topic includes Vehicular Accidents - No Entrapment, and Vehicular Accidents With Entrapment.

B.

C.

PRIORITIES AT THE SCENE OF A VEHICLE ACCIDENT ARE
1.

Safely remove occupants who are in or near vehicle, and prevent victim/s from
suffering additional injury.

2.

Keep non-response people away from the vehicle/s for a distance of at least 40
feet in all directions.

3.

Eliminate post accident fires.

4.

Be prepared to quickly extinguish any fire which may occur.

5.

Assist rescue personnel with extrication of victim/s.

6.

Control fuel spills.

WATER SUPPLY
Auto accidents with entrapment will require the first arriving Engine Company to have a
charged supply line if possible. If not, take appropriate action to get supply to pumper as
soon as possible, including calling additional companies, or water tanker as necessary.

D.

SAFETY
1.

Full Protective Clothing shall be worn at the scene of all vehicle accidents.

2.

Protect personnel from traffic. A minimum of two lanes of traffic shall be
stopped by placing the apparatus in position to stop traffic and/or police traffic
control.

VEHICULAR ACCIDENTS
203.07
Page 2 of 2
D.

E.

SAFETY (CON'T)

Rev. 8/14

3.

Be cognizant of fuel spills keeping firefighters, apparatus, pedestrians, and
vehicular traffic out of the spill area and uphill, if possible. Foam may be needed
to prevent ignition or re-ignition of fuel spills.

4.

The electrical system can produce electrical shock and injury due to arcing.
Disconnecting the battery cable may produce a spark capable of igniting fuel. Be
especially careful when disconnecting battery cables. When necessary to
disconnect battery, ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE GROUND (NEGATIVE)
SIDE FIRST.

5.

Vehicular accidents often damage overhead electrical equipment. Caution must
be used in approaching accident scene.

VEHICULAR ACCIDENTS WITH ENTRAPMENT

NOTE: Two engine companies are dispatched on all entrapments; one to focus on fire
control and one to focus on medical care. The first arriving engine will ALWAYS focus on
patient care UNLESS the patients are endangered by fire, in which case the first arriving
engine will focus on fire control and the second arriving engine will focus on patient care.
1.

Determine if there is an actual entrapment.

2.

It is advisable to use a dry chemical extinguisher to protect the victim while line is
being laid.

3.

Lay at least one 1 3/4" hose line, charge from tank if supply is delayed, and have it
manned until victim is extracted.

4.

Make sure vehicle is stabilized before rescue personnel enter.

5.

Facilitate arrival of Air Care Helicopter if necessary. (See 204.04 Air Care
Helicopter)

6.

The Officer of Heavy Rescue company is in charge of the extrication. The person
in charge of the EMS engine company is in charge of the medical operations. The
District Chief will be in charge of overall operations.


=== 203.08 Aircraft Emergencies ===
AIRCRAFT EMERGENCIES
203.08
Page 1 of 6
CHAPTER II Operations
SUBJECT 3

Emergency Operations

TOPIC 8

Aircraft Emergencies

Rev. 8/89

A. SCOPE
To establish guidelines for the response of C.F.D. Personnel and equipment to control an
emergency situation involving aircraft.
B. PRIORITIES
Rescue, fire control, and property conservation with emphasis on rescue and triage.
C. WATER SUPPLY
Will be from hydrants if at all possible or from water tanker.
D. SAFETY
1. Full protective clothing shall be worn at the scene of aircraft emergencies.
2. Personnel assigned to CR-1 shall wear protective clothing assigned to that apparatus.
3. Be aware of special hazards such as;
a. Landing gear collapse
b. large fuel capacity
c. transporting hazardous materials
4. Do not approach military aircraft from front, they may be loaded with forward firing
ordinance.
5. Overheated wheels may explode, approach from ends at oblique angle. It is possible that
too rapid cooling or the heat from a fire could cause an explosive failure of the wheel.
Cool with short burst (5 to 10 seconds) of water.

AIRCRAFT EMERGENCIES
203.08
Page 2 of 6
E. AIRCRAFT EMERGENCIES AT LUNKEN AIRPORT

Rev. 3/91

1. Lunken Tower Procedure
a

Contact Fire Alarm Dispatcher on emergency line (an extension of this line will
simultaneously notify Engine 18's quarters). For all aircraft emergencies at Lunken
Airport, a one alarm will be transmitted.

b. State the type of emergency which exist, including information such as:
Type of plane
Type of emergency
Number of people aboard
Type and quantity of fuel aboard
Hazardous cargo
Runway where plane will land, if known location in reference to nearest runway
(for planes on the ground)
Because of the many variables with which we must work, personnel must have as
much information as possible about the aircraft involved in order to plan their attack
intelligently.
c. As soon as possible close the airport to all air traffic. May be partially or entirely
reopened only with the approval of the Incident Commander.
d. Keep the Fire Alarm Dispatcher and/or Incident Commander fully informed of any
contemplated actions and all changes in the situation which may affect tactics. CR-1
is equipped with a ground control radio to Lunken Control, however, messages to the
Incident Commander must be relayed via Fire Dispatcher or Fire Division portable
radios.

AIRCRAFT EMERGENCIES
203.08
Page 3 of 6
E. AIRCRAFT EMERGENCIES AT LUNKEN AIRPORT (continued)

Rev. 6/94

2. Operational Procedures
a. A task group will be formed by personnel at Engine 18's quarters consisting of:
Engine 18 manned by Engine 18's personnel.
CR-1 manned by Ladder 3 Officer and CR-1 driver
Water Tanker manned by Ladder 3 FAO and one Ladder 3 Firefighter.
Foam 18 manned by Ladder 3 fourth and fifth Firefighter.
NOTE: Foam 18 will not respond with the Task Group but will standby at the rear of
E-18's quarters with all other responding companies. Foam 18 will be manned by the
second due engine company when Ladder 3 is operating with only 3 men.
The senior officer will be in command until the arrival of the District Chief.
b. CR-1 shall establish radio contact with Lunken Control and confirm that the airport is
closed and whether there is any additional information. (Radio contact is; 0700-2300
Lunken Control Tower, 2300-0700 Flight Service Station). If radio contact is lost,
the Control Tower can signal units on the field via Red and Green Light, Red- Stop,
Green - OK to Proceed.
c. The Task Group will then enter the airport and follow CR-1 to an appropriate
location. No other fire equipment will respond on taxiways or runways until
clearance is received from Lunken Tower. The appropriate location for the Task
Group, while waiting for a plane in the air, will be on the taxiway at the approach end
of the runway on which the aircraft will attempt to land.
d. All other responding companies shall standby at the rear of E-18's quarters.
Information will be relayed through the Fire Alarm Dispatcher or by personal radios.
No fire equipment shall enter or cross runways without permission from the Task
Group Commander or the Incident Commander.
e. Since an aircraft crash and/or fire would not usually have an exposure hazard, a quick
attack to provide access for rescue is preferred.
All equipment must be spotted with one thought in mind; to facilitate rescue by
achieving a rapid knockdown of the fire. Rescue personnel must be able to gain entry
in order to direct or aid evacuation of passengers and crew. It is the responsibility of
CR-1 to set up on, or establish the rescue side of the aircraft.

AIRCRAFT EMERGENCIES
203.08
Page 4 of 6
E. AIRCRAFT EMERGENCIES AT LUNKEN AIRPORT (continued)

Rev. 3/91

f. When a pumper is to be supplied by the water tanker, a hard suction connection
should be used, as this has been proven to provide more GPM's than any other
connection.
g. When advance information is received that an aircraft is to make an emergency
landing and the cause is known, this may indicate the most probable point for the
actual emergency. For example, if the landing gear is jammed and partly lowered, it
is probable that any emergency will occur in the first part of the approach runway,
shortly after contact with the runway. Brake difficulties cause emergencies well
down the runway near or beyond its end.
3. Airport Marking System
Taxiways -

Blue Lights and Yellow Center Stripe.

Runways -

White Lights except last 1000' of departure end has Amber Lights.

White Center Stripe.
Obstructions - Red Lights (Buildings, Antennas etc.)
4. Building Fires At Lunken Airport
The appropriate box will be transmitted for the specific building. CR-1 will respond with
driver only, L-3 will respond intact on their assigned apparatus.
5. CR-1 Response Off Of Lunken Airport
The Officer of L-3 will respond with CR-1, other members of L-3 will respond with
Scout 5 or Foam 18 if Scout 5 is not available.

AIRCRAFT EMERGENCIES
203.08
Page 5 of 6
E. AIRCRAFT EMERGENCIES AT LUNKEN AIRPORT (continued)

Rev. 3/91

6. Moving Companies To E-18's Quarters
The Fire Alarm Dispatcher is to move up a company or companies to fill E-18's quarters
whenever E-18 or L-3 will be out of service for 30 minutes or more. The Incident
Commander shall notify the Fire Alarm Dispatcher of the situation.
7. Lunken Airport map.(see next page for map)
Notes About The Map.
a. All Runways are referred to by numbers.
b. All Taxiways are referred to by letters.
c. All buildings & hangars are referred to by numbers.
(Note that the numbers on the buildings & hangars do not run in order. Even though
the owners of these buildings will change, the numbers will remain the same.)
Definition Of Letters On Map.
B = Control Tower
R = Flight Training School ("A" Frame building)
S = Helicopter Parking
(Military Helicopters will park in this area.)
G = Secure Area
H = Secure Area
(Secure areas are used to park Aircraft that are carrying Hazardous Materials, or
those Aircraft that are believed to have a bomb on board.)

AIRCRAFT EMERGENCIES
203.08
Page 6 of 6


=== 203.09 Structural Collapse ===
STRUCTURAL COLLAPSE
203.09
Page 1 of 4
CHAPTER II Operations
SUBJECT 3

Emergency Operations

TOPIC 9

Structural Collapse

A.

Rev. 6/88

SCOPE
In recent times, structural collapse has been a leading cause of serious injuries and death
to fire fighters. For this reason the possibility of structural collapse should be a major
consideration in the development of any tactical plan.

B.

PRIORITIES
Priorities at the scene of structurally unsafe buildings.

C.

1.

Determine structural stability of building before allowing fire fighters to conduct
interior fire fighting.

2.

A knowledge of various types of building construction can be invaluable to the
fire officers as well as all fire fighters. Certain types of construction can be
expected to fail sooner than others, e.g. under fire conditions, light weight truss
and bar joist roof construction can be expected to fail after minimal fire exposure.

SAFETY
Structures have been known to collapse without warning, but usually there are signs
which may tip off an alert Fire Officer. Action might be taken to avert any imminent
hazard.
TELL TALE SIGNS OF BUILDING COLLAPSE:
1.

Cracks in exterior walls.

2.

Bulges in exterior walls.

3.

Sounds of structural movement are creaking, groaning, snapping, etc.

4.

Smoke or water leaking through walls.

5.

Flexible movement of any floor or roof where fire fighters walk.

STRUCTURAL COLLAPSE
203.09
Page 2 of 4
C.

D.

SAFETY (CON'T)

Rev. 8/89

6.

Interior or exterior bearing walls or columns - leaning, twisting or flexing.

7.

Sagging or otherwise distorted rooflines.

CONSTRUCTION FEATURES THAT CAN CONTRIBUTE TO BUILDING
COLLAPSE
Some construction features that have been known to fail prematurely or to contribute to
early structural failure when affected by fire.
1.

Parapet Walls.

2.

Large open (unsupported) areas, e.g. supermarkets, bowling alleys, warehouses,
etc.

3.

Large signs or marquees, which may pull away from weakened walls.

4.

Cantilevered canopies, which usually depend on the roof for support and may
collapse as the roof fails.

5.

Ornamental or secondary front or sidewalls, which may pull away and collapse.

6.

Buildings with light weight truss, bar joist, or bow string truss roofs.

7.

Buildings supported by unprotected metal - beams, columns, etc.

Buildings containing one or more of the above features must be constantly evaluated for
collapse potential. These evaluations should be of major consideration toward
determining the tactical mode, i.e. OFFENSIVE/DEFENSIVE.
E.

RESPONSIBILITY
It is a principal command responsibility to continually evaluate and determine if the fire
building is tenable for interior operations. This ongoing evaluation of structural/fire
conditions requires the input of persons in charge of fire companies advising Command
of conditions in their area of operations.

STRUCTURAL COLLAPSE
203.09
Page 3 of 4
F.

COLLAPSE CAUSED BY FIRES

Rev. 6/88

1.

Structural collapse and/or partial collapse (stairs, floors) is always a possibility
when a building is subject to intense fire. If fire is allowed to affect a structure
long enough, some structural failure is inevitable, weight of water and/or
firefighters can further compromise the integrity of structures and/or appendages
(fire escapes).

2.

Regardless of the age and exterior appearance of the building, there is always the
possibility that a principal structural supporting member is being seriously
affected by heat and may collapse suddenly, inflicting serious injury to fire
fighters.
Example:

3.

A 100' length of unprotected steel will expand 9" when heated to
1100° F.

Structures of ordinary construction can be expected to fail after approximately
twenty minutes of heavy fire involvement. Fire resistive, and heavy timer
construction will withstand the effects of fire for a longer period of time.
Buildings of unprotected non-combustible construction may collapse in less than
20 minutes.
If after 10-15 minutes of interior operations, heavy fire conditions still exist,
command should initiate a careful evaluation of structural conditions, and should
be fully prepared to withdraw interior fire companies and resort to a defensive
position.

4.

G.

If structural failure of a building or section of a building appears likely, a
perimeter must be established a safe distance from the area which may collapse.
All personnel must remain outside this perimeter. Fire apparatus must also be
moved outside this perimeter.

OTHER CAUSES OF COLLAPSE
1.

Dilapidated buildings usually vacant/condemned structures that have been
abandoned by owners, are usually opened to the elements, and no maintenance is
performed on them. After a period of years they become structurally unsound and
portions of the building sometimes collapse.

STRUCTURAL COLLAPSE
203.09
Page 4 of 4
G.

H.

OTHER CAUSES OF COLLAPSE (continued)

Rev. 6/88

2.

Collapse due to nature, e.g. Tornados, Earthquakes, Lightning Strikes and Floods.

3.

Buildings struck by auto's, etc.

4.

Explosions.

OPERATIONS AT BUILDINGS THAT HAVE COLLAPSED
1.

Determine if there are victims in collapsed structure.

2.

Determine if collapsed structure is safe enough to allow fire fighters to search for
victims.
When working in collapsed structures, members shall support and shore access
way as they progress.

3.

Command must secure proper equipment to insure safety of fire personnel as well
as to properly conduct search and possible rescues.

4.

Make sure all natural gas and electric service is shut off to collapsed structures
before allowing fire fighters to enter area of rubble.


=== 203.12 Handling Fatalities rev 7-05 ===
HANDLING OF FATALITIES
203.12
Page 1 of 1
Rev. 7/05
CHAPTER II Operations
SUBJECT 3

Emergency Operations

TOPIC 12

Handling of Fatalities

A.

PURPOSE
Preservation of evidence at the scene of a fire or other emergency.

B.

POLICY
Police Department will investigate all cases where victims are found dead. This will
make it necessary to leave the scene as undisturbed as possible.
The Fire Chief is to be notified of all fire fatalities. The on-call chief, on-call fire
investigator and a FIU Officer will respond to all incidents involving fire fatalities.

C.

PROCEDURES
1. Bodies encountered, with a possibility of life, proceed with first aid and rescue
with least possible movement of furniture and contents.
2. Bodies encountered, obviously dead, leave as found, with least possible
destruction of area.
3. The Incident Commander shall notify dispatch that they have a fire fatality and
for dispatch to make proper notification including having police respond to the
scene. Do not move the body.
4.

Once the fire is extinguished; preserve evidence, secure scene, cordon off the
scene with barrier tape, and post a guard at all entrances while awaiting arrival of
fire investigator. All unnecessary personnel shall back out of the scene.

5. Keep overhaul to a minimum in the area of the body. To protect the body from
debris cover it with salvage cover as needed.
6. Deaths from Carbon Monoxide poisoning to be handled by normal response.
Police and building department will be requested to respond to the scene.


=== 203.13 Natural Disasters ===
NATURAL DISASTERS
203.13
Page 1 of 8
Rev. 3/91
CHAPTER II Operations
SUBJECT 3

Emergency Operations

TOPIC 13

Natural Disasters

A.

PURPOSE
1.

B.

C.

To describe general tactics and strategies to be used at the scene of a natural
disaster.

OBJECTIVES
1.

Safely rescue trapped occupants.

2.

Conduct a systematic search of the affected area.

3.

Triage and render emergency medical treatment as necessary.

4.

Minimize property damage, especially that caused by secondary emergencies
(fire, explosions, electrical emergencies).

SAFETY
1.

Strict accounting of all personnel shall be maintained through the Incident
Command System.

2.

Members shall carefully evaluate the potential for structural collapse before
entering a collapsed or partially collapsed structure ( see Structural Collapse
203.09).

3.

Shore or otherwise stabilize structures or debris before searching (see Cave-In
203.15).

4.

At least one member will remain outside the structure or debris when a search is
being conducted. When members enter a damaged area of questionable stability,
at least one member of the entry team shall have a Fire Division portable radio.

5.

The Incident Commander shall work with the Liaison Officer to shut down
utilities (gas and electric) where necessary. This also includes shutting down gas
or electric service to individual buildings.

NATURAL DISASTERS
203.13
Page 2 of 8
Rev. 3/91
D.

E.

F.

INITIAL ACTIONS
1.

There is a need for immediate and well coordinated action when a natural disaster
occurs. The actions taken by first responders effect the outcome more than any
other form of intervention. Natural disasters strike suddenly, many times with
little or no warning. The more sudden the occurrence, the greater the Fire
Division's role.

2.

The tactical priorities for a natural disaster are:
a.

Life Safety

b.

Incident Stabilization

c.

Property Conservation

SECONDARY HAZARDS
1.

Natural disasters disrupt community functions and leaves the community
vulnerable to other emergencies in the aftermath.

2.

A mass casualty incident could easily arise out of a natural disaster, as could a
hazardous materials incident.

3.

The Incident Commander must consider all the eventual outcomes, and be
pro-active.

SIZE UP
1.

First arriving units generally have no idea of the extent of the problem in terms of
lives or property.

2.

Many communities rely on one another for assistance when a major emergency
strikes. Natural disasters tend to be widespread, involving several communities.
Mutual aid may not be available.

3.

Natural disasters tend to block normal access routes. In an earthquake, the earth
separates, and building debris blocks normal street traffic. In a tornado, building
debris and downed trees block access. Floods block streets with water high
enough to make them impassible for fire apparatus.
Consider the fact that street signs may be missing or damaged, making street
identification difficult.

NATURAL DISASTERS
203.13
Page 3 of 8
Rev. 3/91
F.

SIZE UP (continued)
4.

Conditions leading to natural disasters make recurrence a distinct possibility.
After shocks are common in earthquakes. The unstable atmospheric conditions
leading to a tornado exist for hours after an initial touchdown. Part of the analysis
involves a determination of the likelihood of further destruction. The planning
section must be staffed by, or in communication with, technical specialists at the
earliest possible moment.

5.

Assessing the magnitude of the problem is another important consideration. The
Incident Commander must ascertain:
a.

How wide spread the incident is (geographical boundaries).

b.

The extent of property damage, which is directly linked to the life hazard.

c.

What access to the area is available.

d.

Status of utilities (water, gas, and electricity).

e.

The location of people who have escaped.

f.

Other possible contributing factors (fire, hazardous materials, etc.).

This is in addition to evaluating resource status. Pre-planned resources may be
damaged or unavailable. The planning section will be needed to process this
information and keep the information current.
6.

Under severe conditions, with many calls for assistance, it may be necessary to
dispatch companies at the district level. If this becomes necessary, the District
Chief will stage all companies in their district at a central location and the
dispatcher will announce all dispatches by district over the radio. The District
Chief will determine which companies to send.
Under these conditions, a recall should be considered by the Duty Chief, and
companies from non-affected districts should be reassigned to handle the
emergency.

NATURAL DISASTERS
203.13
Page 4 of 8
Rev. 3/91
G.

CONSIDER THE ALTERNATIVES
1.

H.

SELECT THE BEST ALTERNATIVE
1.

I.

Alternative actions in a natural disaster usually revolve around life safety
considerations. Search and rescue is the most common alternative; however, if
fires, hazardous material release, or other perils, threaten victims of the area,
incident stabilization may do more to save lives than any other action.

Initial response personnel can easily be overwhelmed by the variety of tasks
necessary to stabilize a natural disaster. Application of the tactical priority list is
essential, but only after evaluating the actions that will MOST favorably change
the outcome. Providing access for ambulances and fire apparatus may be the best
alternative. Searching a few buildings may not be as important as shutting down
a natural gas leak, or setting up a plan for systematically searching the area.
Many times, primary search efforts are not well planned, resulting in a search of
the same area several times before other areas are searched.

IMPLEMENT THE PLAN OF ACTION
1.

Once the plan of action has been formulated, some of the required tactical
activities will be foreign to fire-fighters. Resources are not sufficient until there is
enough manpower and equipment to:
a.

Search for, and Rescue trapped occupants.

b.

Provide necessary medical care.

c.

Account for, and shelter those in need.

d.

Provide access to the area for fire apparatus and ambulances.

e.

Control utilities.

f.

Control fires, hazardous material emergencies, etc.

NATURAL DISASTERS
203.13
Page 5 of 8
Rev. 3/91
I.

IMPLEMENT THE PLAN OF ACTION (continued)
All of these activities must be accomplished. In a resource deficient situation, they must
be done in a priority order, based on incident needs. On other occasions, it may be
feasible to conduct these operations concurrently. Sometimes, it may take days to
provide access or account for victims.

J.

SEARCH FOR AND RESCUE TRAPPED OCCUPANTS
1.

This task is a natural beginning, although not always the best choice for first
action. Once this option is selected, and sooner or later it will be, several
troublesome questions arise:
a.

How do you search areas that may be spread out over several miles, and
separated by long distances.

b.

Where do you start the search effort?

c.

How is a systematic search conducted?

The only way to conduct a systematic search, while prioritizing areas in greatest need, is
with an adequate command system. Units must be given specific areas to search. A
marking system, just as with a high rise fire, is a must. The chalk marking system (see
Structure Fires 203.01) leaves much to be desired in the open air environment of a natural
disaster. The use of barrier tape, carried by district chiefs and Squad 52 is one
possibility. Securely tying a large piece of this tape to part of the remaining structure can
show that the structure has been searched. Whatever method is used, a marking system is
a valuable adjunct to a systematic search.

NATURAL DISASTERS
203.13
Page 6 of 8
Rev. 3/91
J.

SEARCH FOR AND RESCUE TRAPPED OCCUPANTS (continued)
2.

K.

PROVIDE NECESSARY MEDICAL CARE
1.

L.

Prioritizing areas to be searched is difficult. The most devastated area, may not
be the area most in need of search. A form of triage is necessary when resources
are not sufficient to rescue all victims in a short period of time. It is difficult to
assess the condition of a victim until they are found. With limited resources, it
may be necessary to search for and remove those victims who are in danger, and
most easily rescued, first. Several firefighters should not be assigned to one
extremely difficult and time consuming rescue, when large numbers of other
people are in need. Search priorities are subject to change. Searchers may
discover that an area of total devastation, contains only fatalities, while other
tracts have large numbers of live, viable victims.

Mass casualty incidents are discussed in the topic 204.02. A natural disaster can
also be a mass casualty incident. Setting up triage and transportation groups is an
important part of a natural disaster. Command must anticipate the need for a
rapid build up of emergency medical services.

ACCOUNT FOR AND SHELTER THOSE IN NEED
1.

Many victims will be in need of transportation to medical facilities, many others
will need temporary shelter from the elements. Organizations, such as the Red
Cross, usually provide for the long range need, but there is an immediate need to
find a safe place for the evacuees. Just as with the fire scene search, victim
information is somewhat unreliable, but it would be foolish not to use intelligence
gathered from those involved in the incident. You might find out that everyone
escaped certain buildings or that others are unaccounted for.

NATURAL DISASTERS
203.13
Page 7 of 8
Rev. 3/91
M.

N.

PROVIDE ACCESS TO THE AREA FOR FIRE APPARATUS AND AMBULANCES
1.

Providing access to the area may be as simple as moving small amounts of debris,
or require a considerable effort removing trees, large objects, etc. In the case of
an earthquake or flood, it may be impossible to drive fire apparatus into the area.
Boats or helicopters may be needed. Whenever possible, access routes should be
established into the area. Carrying victims or laying hose long distances is time
consuming and inefficient. Once access to the area has been secured, it must be
maintained. Many agencies respond to a natural disaster. If they are not
controlled, they will park vehicles, blocking precious access routes.

2.

The liaison officer is an important part of the Incident Commanders team in these
situations. Liaison should establish a staging area for outside agencies and
coordinate their movement with the Incident Commander.

CONTROL UTILITIES
1.

O.

Electrical equipment can be a source of ignition, and cause injuries in the
damaged area and should be shut down. Gas lines will rupture, and gas operated
appliances will leak after major damage to an area, and should also be shut down.
Water supplies should not be shut down unless severely damaged. Major water
main ruptures are probable in an earthquake, and possible during other natural
disasters. If this happens, water should be shut down to the effected area. When
water is shut down, the fire division should establish a temporary water supply.
Flood waters may pollute the water supply, making it necessary to shut down
hydrant valves. Providing access for suction connections is an alternative water
supply during flood emergencies.

CONTROL FIRES, HAZARDOUS MATERIALS EMERGENCIES, ETC.
1.

Other emergencies are likely to occur after a natural disaster. If they are not
controlled, additional deaths, injuries, and property damage will result.
Preventing, containing, and controlling such emergencies is an integral part of
natural disaster management.

NATURAL DISASTERS
203.13
Page 8 of 8
Rev. 3/91
P.

RECOVERY OPERATIONS
1.

Restoring a community to normalcy is part of the Fire Division's responsibility.
Other government agencies have primary responsibility in this area, but the fire
division will be called upon to assist.

2.

During large scale, or particularly destructive incidents, it may take 72 hours or
longer to answer some citizen calls for assistance. Citizens should be encouraged
to take measures to stay informed and told not expect normal public service.


=== 203.14  Police Fire Operations ===
Police/Fire Operations
203.14
Page 1 of 4
Rev. 6/05
CHAPTER II
SUBJECT 3
TOPIC 14

Operations
Emergency Operations
Police/Fire Operations

A.

POLICY
The Fire Department will honor all requests for Fire Department responses to
Police Operations. A Rescue Unit shall also be dispatched upon request from the
Police Department for S.W.A.T. Operations. Consideration for activating the CFD
SWAT Rescue Unit should be taken at this time. The nearest Engine Company
will be dispatched for “Police Assistance” requests. The goal is to facilitate the
mission of both Departments while providing for the safety and care of all
individuals involved; Police, Fire, and the general public.

B.

COMMAND AND CONTROL
1.
At incidents where the primary responsibility lays with the Fire
Department (fires, vehicle crashes with injury, medical calls etc.) the
highest-ranking Fire Department member will be in Command. The Police
Department will serve in a support roll (perimeter security, traffic control,
etc.) with the exception of those instances where Police are conducting a
criminal investigation or police intervention is required. In these instances
the respective Police and Fire Staff Officers will confer as part of a
Unified Command.
2.
When Police respond to an incident that is primarily within their area of
responsibility (disturbance call, violent person, armed suspect, etc.) Police
will stabilize and secure the scene. The Fire Department will serve in a
support role to provide aid as requested by Police or dictated by the
circumstances.
3.
When a person is in Police custody, the welfare and wellbeing of that
person is the primary concern. If medical attention is required, Fire will
provide appropriate medical care while the Police maintain physical
custody of the patient. If the Police are not holding the patient in physical
custody and the patient is a perceived threat to Fire personnel, medical
care will be withheld until the threat is eliminated with the necessary
Police assistance within their scope of authority.
4.
At a Police incident the Police Incident Commander will determine when
it is appropriate for Fire personnel to leave the scene. At a Fire incident
the Fire Incident Commander will determine when it is appropriate for
Police personnel to leave the scene.

C.

SAFETY
1.
Whenever a Fire Department resource is dispatched to an area where there
is ongoing violence, or there is a known potential for violence to erupt, a
Police response shall also be dispatched. The safety of Fire Department
personnel is initially the responsibility of the member in charge of each

2.

Police/Fire Operations
203.14
Page 2 of 4
Rev. 6/05
responding unit. The highest-ranking Fire Officer on the scene will
ultimately be responsible for the safety of all Fire personnel at the scene.
For those situations where Police have not yet arrived on the scene or the
scene has not yet been secured by the Police the following procedures
shall apply:
a.) Fire and EMS units shall respond to a designated staging area until the
scene has been secured by Police and it is safe for the Fire Department
to perform their duties. The companies are to remain staged until
advised by Police that the scene is secured and is safe for Fire
personnel to enter. The verification of scene safety should be relayed
through Fire Dispatch.

3.

4.

5.

D.

Whenever a Fire Department unit has arrived on the scene, without the
Police first securing the scene, and events develop that place Fire
personnel or the public in danger from potential violence, the member in
charge shall request the appropriate level of Police response. This
response may be “Firefighter Back-up” or “Firefighter needs Assistance”
(see section 701.21 of procedure manual). Based on the situation, the
member in charge shall determine the need for retreat, and if necessary,
have all companies retreat to a designated staging area. The location of the
staging area should be relayed to Fire Dispatch, which will then be relayed
to Police units responding to the scene.
Whenever a Police officer calls for “Officer Needs Assistance” the closest
available Fire Company will be dispatched and respond to a designated
staging area. This company will stage and be immediately available
should the need arise for emergency medical services to be provided. If
there are reported injuries the normal EMS response protocol will be
dispatched and all companies shall respond to the designated staging area.
Fire Companies shall not enter the general area where the “Officer needs
Assistance” until advised by the Police that the scene is secured, it is safe
for Fire personnel to enter.
The Fire Department will provide equipment for forcible entry and gaining
access, but will not enter areas where there is a chance of encountering a
violent person. Fire Department personnel should not attempt rescues
involving violent persons at an unsafe scene. If there is any doubt about
the safety of the scene, request that a District Chief respond who will
consult with the Police Commander. Persons in need of medical treatment
must be brought to a secured area, or Police must render the treatment area
safe. Fire Department personnel shall not be placed in a clear line of fire
when an armed assailant is on the scene.

STAGING
The member in charge of the first arriving Fire unit, based on information given
by Dispatch, will determine the need for a staging area. If there is no

Police/Fire Operations
203.14
Page 3 of 4
Rev. 6/05
predetermined staging area provided by Dispatch, the member in charge shall
designate a staging area a minimum of four blocks from the reported incident,
out of sight, and out of any potential line of fire. As soon as a staging area is
determined, notify Dispatch of the exact location. All Fire Companies shall
notify Dispatch by radio when they have arrived at the staging area. Notify
Dispatch by SMT that you are “On Scene” at the actual incident and when
returning in service “Available On Radio”.
E.

POLICE INCIDENTS THAT MAY INVOLVE EMS SERVICES
1. USE OF THE X26 TASER
a.

b.

Whenever a police officer has used a Taser to control a subject
actively resisting arrest, the subject will have to be assed by EMS
prior to being taken to the Justice Center. The closest Fire Company
will be dispatched to assess the patient following successful use of
the Taser. The following information is provided to assist in
evaluation of the patient:
Police officers have been instructed not to use the Taser on
obviously pregnant females and those individuals under the age of 7
or over the age of 70, unless the encounter rises to the level of a
deadly force situation. This restriction is based on the potential for
these individuals to fall when incapacitated by the Taser. Two darts
are propelled from an attached cartridge. The device generates a high
voltage electronic spark. Once the Taser is fired it will automatically
cycle for five seconds.
No direct complications are expected from the use of the Taser.
However, there is always the potential for injury to the police officer
or subject when the use of force is necessary to gain control. Police
officers have been instructed in the technique for removing the darts
from the subject’s skin provided the darts are not embedded in
certain soft body tissue; i.e. genitals, female breast tissue or any area
above the collar bone
-

-

2.

If the darts are embedded in these soft tissue areas, described
above, transport the patient to University Hospital or
Children’s Hospital for treatment and dart removal.
Used Taser cartridges and darts are considered a biohazard.
The police officer may leave the used cartridge and darts with
Fire personnel for proper disposal in a receptacle at the fire
station or hospital.

ANY OTHER USE OF FORCE RESULTING IN ADVERSE MEDICAL
REACTION OR INJURY

Police/Fire Operations
203.14
Page 4 of 4
Rev. 6/05
F. BODY ARMOR
1.
The Fire Department receives useable body armor from the Cincinnati
Police Department. This body armor is fully functional, safe and provides
the level of protection required. This body armor is distributed to all Fire
Companies, Ambulances and Rescue Units.
2.
Additional sets of body armor are stored and available at Central Stores
for replacements and large-scale incidents.
3.
Members shall don body armor under the turn out coat when entering an
area previously designated as dangerous or violent. Body armor should not
be worn in a fashion that enables it to be seen by a potential attacker. Part
of the purpose of protection against attack or serious injury includes the
concealment of body armor so that the attacker will not purposely aim at
or attack an unprotected part of the body.
4.
Wearing body armor under the turn out coat will; obscure the body armor
from sight, provide additional body protection from possible assailants,
and clearly identify the responding CFD members as fire fighters.
6.
Situations where body armor should be worn:
a) Assault with a deadly weapon
b) Domestic Violence/Family Dispute
c) Shooting
d) Stabbing/Cutting
e) Sniper Incidents/Police Standbys
f) Other Violent Crimes or Conditions
g) During Civil Disturbances or other “Tactical Alerts”
h) During all SWAT standby incidents.
i) Or whenever the officer in charge deems it appropriate
7.
Company Commanders are to establish a system for the daily inventory of
the body armor assigned to the Company. Any missing or damaged body
armor SHALL be reported immediately to the District Chief. The District
Chief shall thoroughly investigate the circumstances and immediately
inform the Assistant Chief of Operations or the On-Call Assistant Fire
Chief of all pertinent information.
8.
Submit a Form 47 to the Operations Bureau any time body armor is used
on an emergency response. The report should contain at least the
following information:
a) Date and Time the body armor was used
b) The Incident number and type of Incident
c) The purpose for which the body armor was used
d) Any problems that were encountered with the body armor
e) Any suggestions that would benefit the future use of body armor


=== 203.15 Cave In and Manhole Rescues ===
CAVE-IN AND MANHOLE RESCUES
203.15
Page 1 of 2
CHAPTER II

Operations

SUBJECT 3

Emergency Operations

TOPIC 15

Cave-In and Manhole Rescues

A.

Rev. 8/88

SCOPE
To cover procedures that first in fire companies and SQ. 52 are to follow when dealing
with a cave-in or confined space rescue.

B.

C.

PRIORITIES
1.

To prevent additional injury to the victim and to prevent injuries to the rescuers.

2.

To remove the victim to a safe area.

3.

To secure the area from additional accidents.

SAFETY
1.

Keep apparatus and spectators a safe distance away to avoid further slides or
cave-ins.

2.

Shore up areas as necessary.

3.

Use Kernmantle Life Lines whenever the victim or a rescuer must be secured to a
rope.

4.

Do not enter a manhole, even for a rescue, unless the electricity is shut off.

5.

Do not enter a manhole or cave-in without a SCBA and Lifeline attached.

6.

Have an adequate number of above ground support people standing-by. These
people should be in SCBA's and ready to enter the manhole in an emergency.

CAVE-IN AND MANHOLE RESCUES
203.15
Page 2 of 2
C.

SAFETY (continued)
7.

D.

E.

Rev. 3/91

The atmosphere within any confined space shall be tested for flammable gases or
vapors before entry.

CAVE-IN RESCUES
1.

Determine the extent of victim injury and the need for additional equipment.
Additional equipment may include Highway Department backhoes, air
compressors and jack hammers, etc., which may be procured from Highway
Maintenance, Water Works, other City agencies or possibly from private
contractors.

2.

Provide the victim with fresh air (preferably), or oxygen if necessary. A garden
hose may be used to convey air from a SCBA air bottle. MAC-1 may be needed.

3.

Keep the victim's chest area free, provide oxygen and reassurance.

4.

Keep all unnecessary personnel away from the cave-in perimeter. Span the
opening with a ladder or other device and work off this platform to prevent any
additional caving in of materials.

5.

Lowering fire personnel into the hole from the end of an aerial with a Lifeline
may be a way to get to the victim without inducing additional cave-ins.

6.

Solicit advice from construction personnel that may be at the scene.

MANHOLE RESCUES
1.

Determine if there is a victim, if so condition of victim and location.

2.

Notify C.G.& E. if electrical equipment is involved.

3.

Provide sufficient personnel and fire equipment to handle any possible fire in the
manhole or adjacent buildings.

4.

Smoke ejectors, or High-Expansion Foam generators may be used to provide a
positive air flow into the manhole.


=== 203.16 Electrical Emergencies ===
ELECTRICAL EMERGENCIES
203.16
Page 1 of 10
Rev. 1/15
CHAPTER II

Operations

SUBJECT 3

Emergency Operations

TOPIC 16

Electrical Emergencies

A.

SCOPE
To establish standard operating procedures to be used at the scene of emergencies where
energized electrical equipment is involved.

B.

C.

PRIORITIES
1.

Scene Size-Up

2.

To protect lives and property.

3.

To secure and isolate the area effected by the electrical emergency.

4.

Rescue victims from the area.

5.

Request additional resources if necessary, including requesting the Utility
Company to respond.

6.

Regardless of the source, all electrical equipment must be treated with respect and
safe operations must be the priority. Ensure that all members are aware that
electricity can be fatal and that extreme safety precautions shall be taken at all
incidents involving electrical equipment.

ELECTRICAL EMERGENCY DEFINED
An Electrical Emergency is defined as any abnormal condition involving electrical wires
or equipment.

D.

SAFETY
1.

Shall treat all electrical incidents as potentially lethal.

2.

Wear full protective clothing in case of fire; however, PPE (gloves, boots, etc.)
will not provide protection from electrical shock.

3.

Treat all wires as "hot" and being high voltage (even low voltage can cause
serious injury or death).

4.

Proceed carefully in an area where wires are down. Minimum circle of safety

ELECTRICAL EMERGENCIES
203.16
Page 2 of 10
Rev. 1/15
from the point of contact is 30 feet for distribution lines and 100 feet for
transmission lines.
5.

Never cut or move a wire until the Utility Company de-energizes the wire and
gives you the OK, even when lives are in danger of being lost.

6.

When more than one electrical wire is down, consider all other wires equally
dangerous even when only one of the wires is arcing.
IF YOU MUST ASSUME, ALWAYS ASSUME THE EQUIPMENT OR WIRE
IS ENERGIZED.

7.

When wires are down in areas near fences or other metal objects (guard rails,
etc.), use extreme caution as electrical energy can be conducted to areas remote
from the primary hazard.

8.

All wires (including cable and telephone) can be energized to high voltage due to
contact with other wires.

9.

Entering an electrical vault or station is extremely hazardous. Never enter without
the direction of the Utility Company .

10.

Never assume the power is off or the breaker is tripped.

ELECTRICAL EMERGENCIES
203.16
Page 3 of 10
Rev. 1/15
E.

THE ANATOMY OF A UTILITY POLE

•

(1) Static Wire- Protection against static electricity & lightning (ground)

•

(2) Grounding Conductor- Connects Static Wire to the Grounding Rod

•

(3) Three Phase (A, B, & C) Primary Distribution or Transmission Lines- See
Transmission & Distribution Lines below for Voltage Range.

•

(4) Could either be Transmission Lines- 69,000-138,000 Volts or
Distribution (Primary) Lines 12,470-34,500 Volts

•

(5) Supply Space – Electrical Supply Area

•

(6) Distribution (Primary) Lines 12,470-34,500 Volts

•

(7) Transformer (contain oil)

•

(8) Multi-Grounded Neutral

•

(9) Distribution (Secondary) Lines 120-480 Volts

•

(10) Secondary Commercial / Industrial Service Drop – up to 13,200 Volts

•

(10) Secondary Residential / Light Commercial Service Drop 120-480 Volts

ELECTRICAL EMERGENCIES
203.16
Page 4 of 10
Rev. 1/15
•

(11) Communication Worker Safe Zone- Space that separates the Communication
Lines from the Electrical Lines.

•

(12/13) Communication (Cable, Telephone, Alarm Wiring) - can become
energized when touched by any of the above.

•

(14) Pole Number

•

(16) Ground Rod

*Voltage Values are approximate values per Duke Energy.
** Transmission Lines span Sub-Station to Sub-Station. Most Poles in the City of Cincinnati do
not have transmission lines on them. There could be more Primary Distribution Lines on those
poles. All Transmission Lines and Primary Distribution Lines are High Voltage.
F.

VICTIM IN CONTACT WITH ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND/OR WIRES
A victim in contact with live electrical equipment or wiring presents a real challenge to
the Fire Department. Fire fighters find it extremely difficult to stand by when a human
life is at stake. If the energy is high enough to injure the victim, it will also injure the
firefighter.
1. Do not attempt to rescue a person in contact with a power line. Firefighters must
wait for the Utility Company to de-energize the equipment or wire before
attending to the patient.
2. If the victim is awake, have them remain still and not move until the power is deenergized.

G.

OUTSIDE INCIDENTS
1.

WIRES DOWN
a.

Establish a secure area (operational perimeter); include fences, vehicles,
guardrails, railroad tracks, and puddles of water that may be energized.
Use traffic cones and caution tape to secure the area from vehicle and
pedestrian traffic.

b.

Request the Utility Company to respond, emergency basis if life hazard.
Also, give the Dispatcher the following information:
i. The wires are down pole-to-pole or pole to building.
ii. The pole number.

c.

Standby and keep the public away from the scene (isolate) until wires are

ELECTRICAL EMERGENCIES
203.16
Page 5 of 10
Rev. 1/15
de-energized by the Utility Company. (Police may relieve you if, in your
opinion, the scene is secured).
d.

Be careful when spotting apparatus. Allow one additional wire span for
safety, as additional lines may fall.

e.

Assign at least one (1) member to keep visual contact with the wires,
“power surges”, and / or a “back feed”, can make wires “dance” or have
movement over a large area. Always keep constant watch over the entire
area, especially above you.

f.

Wind or Ice Storms.
i. There may be large numbers of wires down requiring isolation.
The Duty Chief should be alerted of the Department Status. If a
large number of Companies are going to be out of service for an
extended period, a recall should be initiated. Recalled members
will be stationed at barricades to secure the scene. In most cases, a
single member can isolate the hazard area using barricades, barrier
tape, and/or light cars.
Recalled members will be assigned to Districts. The District Chief
will document time spent at various locations, and manage the
incident within their District. The Fire Alarm Dispatcher may elect
to have the District Chiefs dispatch Companies to electrical
problems and other calls within their District.
ii. The District Chief may limit the response to a single Company
due to a high volume of incidents.

2. VEHICLE INCIDENTS
a. Rescue From an Electrical Energized Vehicle
If occupants are uninjured, have them remain in vehicle. If occupants
must vacate, because of fire, caution have them to jump clear with both
feet at the same time. There must be no contact between the person and
the vehicle after the jump.
b. Vehicle Fire with an electrical wire involvement.
i. Protect Exposures.
ii. Life Hazard; Use Dry Chemical Extinguisher.
iii. No Life Hazard; Let Burn.

ELECTRICAL EMERGENCIES
203.16
Page 6 of 10
Rev. 1/15

3.

TRANSFORMER FIRE
a. Do not use water on a transformer fire until the power is confirmed shut
off by the Utility Company.
b. Protect exposures near electrical hazards by using a fog pattern or dry
chemical extinguisher.
c. Exercise caution; burning oil may overflow from the transformer tank.
Extinguish any oil burning on the ground with foam or a dry chemical
extinguisher .

4.

SUBSTATION FIRE
a. Request Utility Company to respond.
b. Stay clear and let equipment burn itself out.
c. Protect Exposures.

5.

UNDERGROUND MANHOLE / VAULT FIRES
a. Do not park apparatus or stand over manhole covers in the area.
Manhole covers weigh approximately 75 pounds. They can
become projectiles when there is a pressurized explosion in an
underground vault.
b. Request Utility Company to Dispatch their underground electric team.
c. Let burn until advised by the Utility Company, underground vaults
contain high voltage at a minimum of 13,200 Volts.
d. If Utility Company is going to enter the vault, CFD may need to set up
for a potential confined space rescue.

6.

LIGHT RAIL (STREET CAR) – Procedure Forthcoming.

ELECTRICAL EMERGENCIES
203.16
Page 7 of 10
Rev. 1/15
H.

INSIDE INCIDENTS
1.

STRUCTURE FIRES & SMELL OF SMOKE IN A BUILDING
a.

Use caution during Ladder Truck Operations- High Voltage can jump
several feet from wire to the aerial ladder. Ladders should be a minimum
of ten (10) feet from electrical wires.

b.

If fire has damaged or in any way impacted electrical wiring and / or
hardware, the power must be shut down to that portion of the structure or
the entire building. This can be achieved by:
i. Requesting the Utility Company to cut at the pole or pull the meter. The
CFD does not cut live wires or pull meters.
ii. Shutting down circuit breakers (do not reset tripped breakers)
iii. Once the Fire Department shuts down the electric; the CFD does not
turn it back on.

2.

c.

If unable to determine source or odor of smoke, have the owner / tenant
call an electrician or building maintenance personnel to respond to the
scene to investigate and determine the cause.

d.

Use Thermal Imaging Camera (TIC) to determine defective electric source
or equipment.

e.

Check Elevators for occupants prior to turning off power.

HIGH VOLTAGE AREAS (TRANSFORMERS INSIDE BUILDINGS)
Stay clear of area and request Utility Company to respond.

3.

ELECTRICAL POWER FAILURE
a.

At the Fire House
i.

Notify Dispatch and appropriate District Chief.

ii.

The Officer is to carry a portable radio and monitor Main Dispatch
for runs.

iii.

Keep telephone lines open.

iv.

Check overhead doors for manual operation.

v.

Test generators and lights.

ELECTRICAL EMERGENCIES
203.16
Page 8 of 10
Rev. 1/15

b.

Elevator Rescue
See Section 203.05 Elevator /Escalator Emergencies

3. WATER LEAKS
a. Electric Hazards can be caused by water leaks.
b. Shut Off electric in affected areas.
c. Remove Equipment sitting in water from the area after power to them is shut off.
d. Do not restore electric service to building once it is shut off.
e. Investigate entire building, including the basement for potential electrical hazards
caused by the water leak.
I.

SPECIAL FACILITIES
There are facilities or areas at an incident, where shutting all power down could possibly
lead to a larger more hazardous condition, with a high degree of risk and life safety.
If it is determined that the power should be shut down for any period of time, the Incident
Commander should ask for a representative from the utility company and a building
supervisor to respond to the incident to help with technical assistance. Planning should
take place prior to the Order to shut down power if at all possible to minimize the harmful
effects that it may cause. The following are areas of concern:
•

High Rise buildings or other large residential or commercial properties.

•

Hospitals, Nursing Homes, and other buildings with patients on life-support
systems.

•

Housing for the elderly or disabled.

•

Buildings using ammonia refrigerant systems which must remain operating.

•

Buildings that contain unknown Hazardous Materials, which may respond
negatively to the loss of power. (i.e. Laboratories, etc.)

•

Incidents where people can be trapped if power is lost (i.e. elevators, trains, etc.)

•

When there is danger of an electrical spark causing ignition
(i.e. gas leaks).

•

Fire in an underground vault or transmission equipment.

ELECTRICAL EMERGENCIES
203.16
Page 9 of 10
Rev. 1/15

J. SITUATIONS TO WATCH AND / OR AVOID
•

Caution when working around over head wires. Use a spotter when using aerials
and ground ladders. Maintain a distance of at least ten (10) feet from all wires.

•

Working with tools and equipment around potential electrical hazards.

•

Buildings under construction or renovations: be aware of open splice boxes,
unfinished wiring, breaker/fuse boxes with no covers on them and bare wires.

•

Metal roofs, ceilings, studs and wire mesh in plaster walls and ceilings can
conduct electrical current.

•

Electrically fed motors can store electricity in the motor, even after the power is
shut off.

•

Avoid using or carrying conductive equipment (metal ladders, wet hose, etc.)
when working in a Duke Energy facility, or any other high voltage location.

K. SUMMARY
•

Treat all wires as energized and dangerous.

•

Do not pull meters or cut service wires.

•

Do not enter sub-station fires. Secure area and await the arrival of the utility
company.

•

Exercise extreme caution when approaching electrical emergencies especially at
night.

•

Establish a safe zone and prevent unauthorized personnel from entering.

•

Use thermal imaging cameras (TIC) at all electrical emergencies.

•

If inside a building, shut down individual circuit breaker(s) or main circuit breaker
to the smallest area possible to mitigate the hazard.

•

Consult with utility company and building maintenance before shutting down
power to special facilities.

•

Once the power is shut down, never turn it back on.

•

Class "C" (Electrical) fires; only exist when electrical energy is present. Once
de-energized, a Class "C" fire no longer exists. The primary tactic when dealing
with live electrical equipment is to de-energize whenever possible. Most

ELECTRICAL EMERGENCIES
203.16
Page 10 of 10
Rev. 1/15
electrical fires can be de-energized by opening a circuit, pulling a plug, or
operating a switch.

•

Many times, wires that were de-energized, due to a fault, will become energized
as the substation switchgear tries the line again. Even a line that is known to be
de-energized, may again become energized, due to re-energizing by the Utility
Company or other electrical lines feeding through a downed line.

•

Never touch or move an electrical wire, even when lives are in danger of being
lost.


=== 203.17 Water Emergencies 11-2011 revision ===
WATER EMERGENCIES
203.17
Page 1 of 14
Rev. 11-2011
CHAPTER II

Operations

SUBJECT 3

Emergency Operations

TOPIC 17

Water Emergencies

A.

SCOPE
To define Operational Procedures at Water Emergencies. To establish standard and safe
procedures for the operation of Fire Department watercraft during water emergencies.

B.

C.

PRIORITIES
1.

Provide the safest possible environment during water emergencies for both
rescuers and those citizens in need at the time.

2.

Ensure the proper water emergency response protocol for the particular
emergency.

SAFETY
1.

All Fire Department watercraft shall be manned by members thoroughly trained in
boat and water operations.

2.

All members on Fire Department boats shall wear a PFD (Personal Floatation
Device) at ALL times. All members assisting in the water emergency and within
10 feet of the water MUST wear a PFD.

3.

Boats should not be used during dangerous ice conditions, excessively high and
rapidly moving waters, or excessive debris exists on the water at the time of the
emergency as determined by the first responding boat Officer. The Incident
Commander has final authority for the overall operation.

4.

Use extreme caution when approaching boats or barges that are on fire, leaking
fuel, or that have spilled their cargo. Do not allow fire boats to enter spill areas on
water.

5.

When dispatched for hazardous materials spills or leaks on river, use the same
precautions as outlined for hazardous materials incidents on land.

WATER EMERGENCIES
203.17
Page 2 of 14
Rev. 11-2011
D.

E.

RESCUE OBJECTIVES:
1.

When victims are reported to be in the water, every effort must be made to reach
them as quickly and safely as possible.

2.

The Incident Commander (this could be the highest ranking Officer) should
determine which type of boat to be used, depending on the type of rescue incident,
location of victim(s), and location of boat. The Incident Commander has final
authority for the overall operation and is advised to consult with the member with
the highest level of water response training on the scene – This will usually be a
member of Boat 3 or a member of a Heavy Rescue Company.

FIRE FIGHTING
Fire Department Boat 3 may be used to combat waterfront facilities fires such as
Oil/Chemical facilities, boat harbor/marinas, or floating restaurants moored to the shore.
Boat 3 can be used as a source of water supply when hydrants are not available. Boat 3
will be dispatched to fires involving pleasure boats, excursion boats, towboats, and barges
within the jurisdiction of the Fire Department. (Boats moored to the Kentucky shoreline
are not considered in our jurisdiction and would require a mutual aid request). The Zodiac
boats will only be used for rescue of victims in the water and as a water based RAT unit
during fire fighting operations.
CAUTION:
Cincinnati Fire Fighters are not trained or qualified to perform on-board offensive
fire attacks of watercraft that are not moored to shore. All fire fighting by the fire
boat will be defensive only from on-board the fire boat. DO NOT board a boat on
fire that is not moored to shore. If any offensive fire attack is to be performed, it
must be a shore based attack with backup lines and a secured source of water.

F.

DISPATCHING FOR RIVER EMERGENCIES
The dispatchers will attempt to provide the following information:
1.

Type of emergency (Fire, Spill, Rescue, etc.).

2.

Location, by land address or landmark if possible. The only location available
may be by river mile marker. River Mile marker is preferred by USCG.

3.

Size and type of vessel involved, or material that may be spilled.

4.

Attempt to notify all other agencies that require notification of river incidents, and
advise Incident Commander of notifications.

WATER EMERGENCIES
203.17
Page 3 of 14
Rev. 11-2011
G.

DROWNINGS NOT INVOLVING BOAT RESCUE - REFER TO CURRENT EMS
PROTOCOLS

H.

ICE AND WATER RESCUES

I.

J.

1.

Ice and water rescues shall be performed at the direction of the qualified in-charge
Heavy Rescue members with the overall approval of the Incident Commander.

2.

No member of the CFD should ever perform an in-water rescue unless they are
specifically trained and qualified to perform such rescues. In-water rescues will
only be performed by Heavy Rescue members certified by the CFD.

UNDER WATER SEARCH AND RECOVERY OPERATIONS
1.

The Hamilton County Underwater Search and Recovery Team is responsible for
body recovery operations. They are accessed through the Hamilton County
Dispatchers.

2.

The Cincinnati Fire Department will assist the Hamilton County Search and
Recovery Team by providing logistical support (Air Supply, Ropes, Boats, etc.),
and manpower as required for body recovery operations within the corporate
limits of the City of Cincinnati.

WATER EMERGENCIES:
1.

Firefighter Safety:
–
–

–
–

The Incident Commander shall make the determination if the water conditions
(water height and flow) will safely support water operations.
All firefighters aboard a Cincinnati Fire Department boat shall wear a PFD at
all times. Zodiac crews shall also wear a PFD and approved water helmet. The
Zodiac crews shall wear the approved surface water suits as deemed necessary
and appropriate.
Fire Clothes shall NOT be worn or carried on any CFD boat or when
operating within 10 feet of the water.
Firefighters operating within 10 feet of the water during a water emergency
shall wear a PFD.
 All fire companies are issued four PFD’s and four rescue throw bags.
The PFD’s and throw bags shall be carried on the apparatus at all
times. The whistles on the PFD’s shall be used as a warning device and
to get the attention of all rescuers in the area.

WATER EMERGENCIES
203.17
Page 4 of 14
Rev. 11-2011
2. In all water responses the following positions shall be staffed:
-

Incident Command – Responding District Chief, Special Operations District Chief
or highest ranking Officer

-

Upstream and Downstream Spotters – The spotter can be a single firefighter or an
entire company. The spotter must have a radio on the assigned Fire ground channel.
The spotter’s responsibility is to observe the river or tributary for any hazards that
may adversely affect the safety of the operation and alert Command of the potential
danger. The size of the waterway and the rate of flow of the water will determine the
appropriate distance to place the spotters upstream or downstream from the incident.

-

Downstream Safety – The downstream safety will consist of at least two firefighters
with a radio and throw bags. These firefighters will be positioned downstream of the
emergency in the event a victim or rescuer travels downstream The Downstream
Safety may have to act as spotters for river traffic approaching the scene from
downstream. On the Ohio River, the downstream safety will be a Zodiac Boat.

3.

Communications:
- Each Cincinnati Fire Boat has an 800 MHz River Interoperability Radio (RIR)
assigned. The radio will be mounted in a charger on the vehicle responsible for
towing the boat or in the pilot house of Boat 3. The radio can be identified by the
orange band on the face of the radio.
- When responding or training on the Ohio River, the Boone County Dispatch Center
must be notified by phone (859-371-1234). When training or patrolling on the river,
the fire company shall advise Boone County dispatch by telephone - Identify who you
are (“Cincinnati Zodiac 23”), the reason you are on the river (Training), and the time
frame you will be operating. When dispatched and responding to an emergency on the
Ohio River, Cincinnati Fire Dispatch shall notify Boone County Dispatch of the
response and what Cincinnati Fire Department river assets are responding. When the
boats are in the water, the boats shall inform Boone County Dispatch that they are on
the river using the RIR.
- When operating in any capacity on the Ohio River the River Interoperability Radio
(RIR) must be on board the boat. The RIR will provide communications capability
between all entities operating on the Ohio River. All entities operating on the Ohio
River will communicate via channel A-1 on the RIR. (This is also HCMA Channel 26
(H-10) – on the standard CFD radio)

WATER EMERGENCIES
203.17
Page 5 of 14
Rev. 11-2011
- When transmitting on the RIR, identify the department name first – “Cincinnati
Zodiac 23 prior to any message.
- The RIR is designed for boat-to-boat communications across all jurisdictions. This
will allow communications to all other river response assets including but not limited
to Covington Fire, Boone County Water Rescue, Anderson Twp. Fire, United States
Coast Guard, and any other response entity on the river.
- Boone County Dispatch will only monitor the RIR when units are active on the
River.
- Cincinnati Fire Dispatch will assign HCMA 26 (position H-10 on regular 800 MHz
radios – A-1 on the Orange Boat RIR) as the fire ground channel for all Ohio River
emergencies. The Fire Boats will need to take the RIR and a CFD issue radio aboard the
boats. The RIR radio is NOT capable of scanning between HCMA 26 and CFD Main
Dispatch. A CFD fire ground channel can be requested by the Incident Commander
however the CFD boats should only be required to monitor channels HCMA 26 and Main
Dispatch. The Incident Commander will still be required to continually update Cincinnati
Fire Dispatch regarding the incident on the CFD Main Dispatch Channel. All Cincinnati
Fire Department dispatch procedures will remain in place.
Marine Radio

(Boat 3, Zodiacs and District Chiefs)

The Marine radio installed on Boat 3 and the Marine radio portables carried by the
Zodiacs and District Chiefs can monitor Marine Channel 16 – the National Marine
Distress calling frequency - and communicate directly to the vessel in distress. Any
information obtained should be re-transmitted over the RIR channel Zone A1 (HCMA
26) to all in-water responding units. Marine channel 13 can be utilized to communicate
with barge and commercial traffic on the river.
4.

Boat Resources:
Boat 3 – Housed at the 3’s quarters. Ladder 3’s Officer shall be responsible for
Boat 3. Boat 3 is the only CFD boat that is classified to tow a stranded or disabled
boat. Ladder 3 is the assigned company for all Boat 3 dispatches.
Zodiac 14 – Housed at the 14’s quarters. Squad 14’s Officer shall be responsible
for Zodiac 14 (Respond with Heavy Rescue 14)
Zodiac 17 – Housed at the 17’s quarters. Ladder 17’s Officer shall be responsible
for Zodiac 17. Qualified members in the house shall make up a response company
for Zodiac 17. The remaining members shall make up the other company in the
house and respond if dispatched.
Zodiac 23 – Housed at the 23’s quarters. Ladder 23’s officer shall be responsible
for Zodiac 23. Qualified members in the house shall make up a response company
for Zodiac 23. The remaining members shall make up the other company in the
house and respond if dispatched.

WATER EMERGENCIES
203.17
Page 6 of 14
Rev. 11-2011
Zodiac 9 – Carried on-board Heavy Rescue 9 at all times. ZB-9 is a fully
inflatable Zodiac Boat. ZB-9 will respond with HR-9.
Special Note:
 Due to the ease of mobility and speed of deployment the Zodiac boats can be
in the water and on scene for life safety purposes much sooner when Boat 3 is
not docked. Therefore, whenever Boat 3 is on the trailer in quarters or out
of service (OOS) an additional Zodiac boat resource will be added to the
normal dispatch as listed.
5.

Boat Staffing (In Water):
Boat 3 – A minimum of four personnel shall staff Boat 3 for all water emergency
responses.
Zodiacs – 9, 14, 17 and 23 shall be optimally staffed with a crew of two qualified
and trained members in the boat during water emergency operations – a boat
operator and a rescuer. A maximum of three qualified and trained members may
staff the boat however the need for a second rescuer must be justified and will
reduce the victim capacity of the boat.
Boat 3 shall be dispatched to all Ohio River Emergencies.
– Boat 3 Commander shall be the lead Company Officer and may request
additional water emergency resources as needed.

6.

The priorities for a Water Emergency shall be:
1. Life Safety (Including Fire Fighter Safety)
2. Fire Control
3. Property Conservation

7.

Boat Fires on the Ohio River:
Response – Boat 3 and the closest two Zodiac Boat, plus one Engine, one Ladder,
two Heavy Rescues and one District Chief. (The Special Operations District Chief
shall also be notified and will respond if available).
Actions:
Life Safety – The first arriving boat shall concentrate initial efforts on boat based
rescue of victims in the water. Do not enter the water to perform victim rescue.
Personal Flotation Devices (PFD’s) shall be placed on the victims as soon as
possible. If both Boat 3 and a Zodiac boat are on-scene, the primary objective of
the Zodiac boat will be victim rescue and fire fighter safety while Boat 3 performs
fire control measures as necessary. Victim rescue and fire fighter safety are the
highest priorities. The second arriving Zodiac boat shall assume the position of
downstream safety. The ladder company shall be assigned as the upstream spotter
and the Engine will perform shore based support.

WATER EMERGENCIES
203.17
Page 7 of 14
Rev. 11-2011
Fire Control – After all endangered victims are rescued or in the process of
rescue, Boat 3 may initiate a DEFENSIVE fire attack while remaining aboard
Boat 3 at all times. At no time should a Cincinnati Fire Fighter board a boat
on fire that is not moored to the shore.
 Large Marine Vessel Fires:
Any interior fire fighting on large vessels shall only be conducted from the
shore with the attack and back-up fire lines attached to a fire pumper and a
secure water supply.
Large marine vessels on fire and moored to the shore may require a
structural fire compliment in addition to the River Response at the
discretion of the Incident Commander.
When a boat is moored to the shore and on fire, the Zodiac boat shall be
positioned in the water on the down river-side of the boat in the event anyone
should fall into the water. The Zodiac boat shall remain a safe distance away from
the boat on fire and pay vigilant attention to the operations being conducted on the
boat. The Zodiac boat will be used as a water-based RAT Unit. The second
arriving Zodiac Boat shall assume the position of the downstream safety.
Property Conservation - Once the fire has been extinguished the disabled boat
may be towed out of the navigational channel to the closest appropriate mooring.
(This may be a dock or simply tying the boat to a tree on the shore.) Do not cross
the navigational channel. Boat 3 should tow the disabled boat to the nearest shore.
In the event the disabled boat begins to take on water it shall be abandoned
immediately. Only Boat 3 should tow a stranded or disabled boat.
8.

Stranded Boater:
Response – Boat 3 and closest Zodiac Boat, one Engine, Two Heavy Rescues and
one District Chief.
Life Safety – The first arriving boat shall determine the hazard to occupants of
the involved boat and make the determination as to whether to have the occupants
board the fire boat. All occupants shall be immediately placed in PFD’s. The first
arriving boat will size-up the situation and determine resource needs. The Zodiac
boat shall assume the downstream safety position. The Engine will be assigned the
upstream spotter.

WATER EMERGENCIES
203.17
Page 8 of 14
Rev. 11-2011
Property Conservation – The first arriving boat shall make the determination as
to whether the boat can be safely towed to shore and the location to which the
boat will be towed. The boat should be towed out of the navigational channel to
the closest appropriate mooring. If at any time the stranded boat becomes a danger
to others it shall be abandoned immediately. Only Boat 3 should tow a stranded or
disabled boat.

9.

Victim in the River or Threatening to Jump into the River:
Response – Boat 3, closest three Zodiac boats, one Engine, one Ladder, Two
Heavy Rescues, one Medic Unit, one ALS supervisor and one District Chief (The
Special Operations District Chief shall also be notified and will respond if
available) .
Life Safety - The first arriving boat shall concentrate initial efforts on boat based
victim rescue. Personal Flotation Devices (PFD’s) shall be placed on the victims
as soon as possible.
Responding boats shall place the boats in the water at the closest convenient
location. The third arriving Zodiac Boat shall assume the position of the
downstream safety.
The Ladder, second-due Heavy Rescue and District Chief shall respond to the
incident location. The first due Zodiac equipped - Heavy Rescue shall deploy the
Zodiac into the water. The Engine will be assigned as the upstream spotter.
The Medic Unit and ALS supervisor shall stage at a location to be determined by
the District Chief.
Water Rescues may also be land-based rescues performed at the direction of the
first arriving Heavy Rescue with the approval of the Incident Commander.

10.

Victim in tributary water (Mill Creek, Duck Creek, Little Miami, Flooded areas):
 May include Mutual Aid request to other tributaries
 Mutual Aid Incident Commander has authority for overall operation.

WATER EMERGENCIES
203.17
Page 9 of 14
Rev. 11-2011
Response – Closest two Zodiac boats, one Engine, one Ladder, two Heavy
Rescues, one Medic Unit, one ALS supervisor and one District Chief. (The
Special Operations District Chief shall also be notified)
Engine Company responsibilities: 1 member as an upstream spotter with a radio
and 2 members downstream as safeties The downstream spotters shall each be
equipped with two throw bags.

Life Safety - The first arriving boat shall concentrate all initial efforts on boat
based victim rescue. Personal Flotation Devices (PFD’s) shall be placed on the
victims as soon as possible.
Water Rescues on tributaries may be land-based rescues performed at
the direction of the first arriving Heavy Rescue with the approval of
the Incident Commander.

WATER EMERGENCIES
203.17
Page 10 of 14
Rev. 11-2011

K.

MILE MARKER LOCATIONS:
Listed below are approximate mile marker locations on the Ohio River (Companies
assigned boats have a complete list)

MILE
461.0 R
461.9
462.0 R
463.5 R
464.3 R
465.0 R

OWNER
River Downs
I-275 Bridge (Twin Hwy)
Eldorado St
Little Miami River
Tucker Marine, Inc.
Lumsden St.

465.7 R
465.8 R
466.5 R

Queen City Terminal
Arcadian Chemical Corp.
Schmidt Field

468.4 R
469.5
470.0 R
470.2 L

Noramco
I-471 Bridge
Public Landing
Licking River

470.8 R
471.0

Hilltop Ready Mix Concrete
I-75 Bridge

TYPE OF FREIGHT

RAIL
CONNECTION

4301 Kellogg,
Cincinnnati, OH

N/A

N/A

Cincinnati, OH
Cincinnati, OH
Cincinnati, OH
Cincinnati, OH

N/A
N/A
Repairs
N/A

N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A

3806 Kellogg
Cincinnati, OH
Cincinnati, OH
Cincinnati, OH

Fuel Oil, Liquid
Fertilizer, Petro
Chemicals
Liquid Fertilizer
N/A

Conrail
N/A
N/A

Cincinnati, OH

Steel Products

N/A

511 W. Water St.,
Cincinnati, OH

Stone, Sand,
Gravel

N/A

Coal, Iron Ore

B&O

2 Mooring Cells
2 beached and
filled barges

LOCATION

REMARKS

Three Mooring
Cells and 2
Dolphins
2 mooring cells
Permanently
moored barge

Cincinnati, OH

471.6 R

Cincinnati Bulk Terminal

895 Mehring Way,
Cincinnati, OH

471.9 R

Cincinnati Bulk Terminal

895 Mehring Way,
Cincinnati, OH

Grain

B&O

472.1 R

Cincinnati Bulk Terminal

895 Mehring Way,
Cincinnati, OH

Steel Products

N/A

WATER EMERGENCIES
203.17
Page 11 of 14
Rev. 11-2011

472.4 R
472.5 R

Cumberland-Elkhorn Coal Co.
Mill Creek

Cincinnati, OH

Coal, aggregate,
Vernal freight

N/A

473.3 L

McGinnis Inc. Marine Service

4 Adela Way,
Ludlow, Ky

N/A

N/A

Harbor towing
& Barge
handling

474.0 R

Union Oil

Cincinnati, OH

Petroleum
Products

B&O

Permanently
moored barge

474.2 L
474.3 R

BP Oil Co.
UNO-VEN Co. Ind. Inc.

Bromley, KY
Cincinnati, OH

Bulk Petroleum
Bulk Cement

N/A
N/A

474.4 R

Consolidated Grain & Barge

3164 Southside
Cincinnati, OH

Grain

B&O and C&O

474.6 R

Holnam Inc.

3270 Southside,
Cincinnati, OH

Steel, Aggregate,
Coal

C&O

474.9 R
475.0 R

Mose Cohen & Sons
Southside Ave. City Boat Ramp

Cincinnati, OH
Cincinnati, OH

Processed Steel

N/A

Cincinnati, OH

Liquid fertilizer,
Caustic Soda,
Molasses

B&O

N/A

2 permanently
moored barges
& 3 dead men
Pipelines

475.1 R

Southside River Rail

475.3R

I. Deutch & Sons

Cincinnati, OH

Steel, Aluminum
& Scrap metal

475.5 L

ITAPCO

Ludlow, Ky

Petroleum
Products

N/A
B&O

476.2 R

Ashland Petroleum Co.

Cincinnati, OH

Petroleum
Products

476.4 R

Kosmos Cement Co.

200 Barkley,
Cincinnati, OH

Cement

B&O

Petroleum, Petro
Chemicals, and
other Chems.

B&O and C&O

476.7 R

Tresler Oil (Ashland Div.)

Cincinnati, OH

477.1 R
477.5 R

Ashland Petroleum Co.
Anderson Ferry

Cincinnati, OH
Cincinnati, OH

478.5 L
478.6 R

Harpers
Indiana Grain - Cincinnati

Constance, KY
Cincinnati, OH

Floating Dock, 4
Dolphins

2 sunken &
filled barges

Petroleum &
other Chemicals

Gravel
Grain

Moored Barge
with hopper
B&O

WATER EMERGENCIES
203.17
Page 12 of 14
Rev. 11-2011

478.7 R

479.0 R

479.2 R

Defense Logistics Agency

Cincinnati, OH

Petroleum
Products

Shell Asphalt Co.

5150 River Rd.
Cincinnati, OH

Petroleum
products, Asphalt
and light oil.

C.F. Industries

River Transportation Co.

479.7 R
480.5 R
480.9 L

Cargill Inc.
Rapid Run Creek (Bender Rd.)
Ashland Oil Inc.

5495 River Rd.
Cincinnati, OH
Cincinnati, OH
Stringtown, KY

482.5 R
482.5 R

CGB Marine Services
Saylor Park Ice Piers

482.6 L
Morehead Marine
484.0 R Muddy Creek
484.0
Cincinnati City Limits (West)

484.2 R

Monsanto Chemical

B&O

Salt, vagetable
oil, fertilizer,
petroleum
products, dry
bulk
commodities

B&O

4 cells with
permanent
barge

Grain

B&O

Permanently
moored barge

Phosphate and
Fertilizer

479.5 R

Fleeting

3 cells

Cincinnati, OH
Cincinnati, OH

Marine Services

Barge and Tow
repair

Stringtown, KY
Cincinnati, OH

Marine Services

Barge and Tow
repair

Addyston, OH

Chemical &
Plastic

B&O

4 cells with
permanent
barge

B&O & Conrail

2 permanently
moored barges
& 3 dolphins

486.0 R

Consolidated Grain & Barge

North Bend, OH

Agricultural
products and Salt

487.9 R

Kosh Asphalt Co.

North Bend, OH

Liquid Asphalt
and Flux oil

North Bend, OH

Anhydrous
Ammonia &
Liquid Fertilizer

North Bend, OH

Distillate Oils &
Asphaltic
Products

489.3 R

489.7 R

Vigoro Industries

Chevron USA, INC.

B&O and C&O
5 cells with
permanent
barge

5125 River Rd.
Cincinnati, OH

5297 River Rd.
Cincinnati, OH

B&O and C&O

Four cells with
floating dock

3 cells

B&O

2 cells

B&O

3 cells and
permanent
moored barge

WATER EMERGENCIES
203.17
Page 13 of 14
Rev. 11-2011

490.0 R

Miami Fort - Duke Electric

North Bend, OH

General Freight

B&O

4 cells

490.2 R

Miami Fort - Duke Electric

North Bend, OH

Coal

B&O

4 cells

490.3 R

Miami Fort - Duke Electric

North Bend, OH

Fuel Oil

B&O

Permanently
moored barge

490.7 R
491.6

E.I. Dupont De Nemours Co.
I-275 Bridge @ Lawrenceburg

11215 Brower Rd.
North Bend, OH

Sulfuric Acid

B&O

2 cells

WATER EMERGENCIES
203.17
Page 14 of 14
Rev. 11-2011
Available Boat Ramps - Ohio
Name
Boatsmith Marina
Catalina Harbour
Cincinnati Public Landing
Enerfab

Nearest Address
6641 Kellogg Ave
7514 Gracely Dr
601 Mehring Way
4333 River Rd

ZIP
45255
45233
45202
45204

Status
Open
Open
Open
Open

Waterway
Ohio River
Muddy Creek
Ohio River
Ohio River

Fernbank Park
Four Seasons Marina
Mariners Landing
River Downs
Riverside Boat Ramp
Schmidt Memorial Rec.
Area
Shawnee Lookout
Shelter Cove
Washington Marina

3 Wilkens Short Rd
4609 Kellogg Ave
7405 Forbes Rd
6295 Kellogg Ave
3540 Southside

45233
45226
45233
45230
45204

Closed
Open
Open
Open
Open

Ohio River
Ohio River
Ohio River
Ohio River
Ohio River

3019 Humbert Ct
1979 Lawrenceburg Rd
5001 Kellogg Ave
6629 Kellogg Ave

45226
45052
45228
45230

Open
Open
Open
Open

Ohio River
Gr.Miami River
Ltl. Miami River
Ohio River

Notes
Muddy ramp, not paved
941-7909

Concrete barriers at top of
ramp
Fuel available here

Shallow
Large ramp
Private


=== 203.18 Highway emergencies ===
HIGHWAY EMERGENCIES
203.18
Page 1 of 11
Rev. 08/14
CHAPTER II

Operations

SUBJECT 3

Emergency Operations

TOPIC 18

Highway Emergencies

A.

SCOPE
This procedure identifies apparatus placement and operations that will provide maximum
protection and safety for personnel operating in or near moving traffic. It also identifies
several approaches for individual practices to keep firefighters safe while exposed to the
hazardous environment created by moving traffic.
It shall be the policy of the Fire Department to position apparatus and other
emergency vehicles at a highway related incident on any street, road, highway or
expressway in a manner that best protects the incident scene and the work area.
Such positioning shall afford protection to fire department personnel from the
hazards of working in or near moving traffic.

B.

PRIORITIES
1.

All personnel should understand and appreciate the high level of risk when
operating in or near moving traffic. Responders should ALWAYS operate within
a protected area at any roadway incident Fire control and mitigation of hazardous
conditions

2.

Provide as safe and secure an environment for all non-fire personnel that may be
present at an incident in or near moving traffic

3.

Safely provide medical attention to all victims

4.

Control and mitigate any situation and return the scene to normal operations as
much as possible.

HIGHWAY EMERGENCIES
203.18
Page 2 of 11
Rev. 08/14
C.

TERMINOLOGY
Advance Warning - notification technique used to advise approaching motorists to
transition from normal driving status to the temporary emergency traffic control measures
ahead of them.
Block - positioning apparatus on an angle to the lanes of traffic creating a physical barrier
to defect approaching traffic away from the Safe Zone
Buffer Zone - the distance or space between personnel in the protected “Work Zone” and
moving traffic
Downstream - the direction that traffic is moving away from the incident scene
EMS Unit- Includes but not limited to Ambulances, Rescue Units, Rescue 2, and any
other medical units on the incident scene.
Full Fire Fighting Ensemble- Commonly referred to as “Turnout Gear” is the full
ensemble as approved by NFPA 1971 and 1851. It includes but not limited to all items in
the standard such as coat, pants, helmet, hood, boots, and gloves. The SCBA is an
ancillary piece of safety equipment used in conjunction with the Full Fire Fighting
Ensemble.
High Visibility Safety Apparel - Any approved safety apparel that meets the criteria set
in ANSI/ISEA 107-2004. This includes but is not necessarily limited to the CFD High
Visibility Safety Vest, and the CFD High Visibility jacket (Spiewak).
Safe Zone - the protected work area at a highway related roadway incident that is
shielded by the by apparatus or other emergency vehicles
Spotter - a fire department member assigned to monitor approaching traffic and activate
an emergency signal if the actions of a motorist do not conform to established traffic
control measures in place at the highway scene
Transition Zone - the lanes of a roadway within which approaching motorists change
their speed and position to comply with the traffic control measures established at an
incident scene
Upstream - the direction that traffic is traveling and approaching the incident scene
Work Zone - the physical area of a roadway within the “Safe Zone” in which emergency
personnel perform their fire, EMS and rescue tasks in or near moving traffic

HIGHWAY EMERGENCIES
203.18
Page 3 of 11
Rev. 08/14
D. SAFETY
1.

All personnel MUST wear High Visibility Safety Apparel or FULL fire
fighting protective ensemble any time they operate in or near moving traffic.
o All responders must wear High Visibility Safety Apparel except when
engaged in emergency operations that directly expose them to flame, fire, heat,
hazardous materials and/or extrications.
o This provision is not limited to just expressways or major highways. It applies
to any traffic area used by motorized vehicles of any kind.
o All personnel on a fireground in or near moving traffic and NOT in full fire
fighting PPE must wear High Visibility Safety Apparel i.e. pump operators,
EMS personnel, etc.
o All students, observers, and other authorized riders on CFD emergency scenes
will be provided with and required to wear a High Visibility Vest.
o Structural fire helmet should be worn at all times in or near moving traffic.

2.

If possible, place apparatus between the emergency and oncoming traffic, (for
protection) at the same time be aware of the need to keep apparatus upwind and
upgrade to be out of spill run off or vapor clouds.
o Establish an initial “block” with the first arriving emergency vehicle or fire
apparatus

3.

Always consider moving vehicles as a threat to your safety.

E. WATER SUPPLY
Water supply to Expressway incidents must be pre-planned by first due companies, and
may necessitate alternative means such as relay lines or the Water Tanker.
o An Engine Company placed on an adjacent or overpass roadway may provide
the best method of obtaining a supply line to sections of expressways.
o Remember it is faster to "drop" a line down than to advance one up.
o Consider ARFF 18 and Foam Units for large liquid fires on the expressways.

HIGHWAY EMERGENCIES
203.18
Page 4 of 11
Rev. 08/14
E.

RESPONSE (EXPRESSWAY MAPS)
When a single Engine Company is responding and the direction of travel of the incident is
unknown, or information indicates difficulty can be expected in reaching the scene, order
additional resources which will approach from the opposite direction.
The first unit approaching the incident will advise other units of alternate access. If
unable to reach the scene, specific directions should be given to other responding units.
o Locations for expressways are based on mile markers staring at the river going
north.


The numbering starts south to north and west to east.



Ft. Washington Way, Norwood Lateral and Ronald Reagan have
their own numbering system.



I-275 is numbered from I-75 in Kentucky clockwise.

F. OPERATIONS

APPARATUS PLACEMENT:
1.

Always position first-arriving apparatus to protect the scene, patients, and
emergency personnel.
a) Initial apparatus placement should provide a work area protected
from traffic approaching in at least one direction.
b) Angle apparatus on the roadway to create a physical barrier between
the incident scene and approaching traffic.
c) Allow apparatus placement to slow approaching motorists and
redirect them around the scene and away from the work area.
d) Use fire apparatus to block at least one additional traffic lane more
than that already obstructed by the crashed vehicle(s).
e) When practical, position apparatus in such a manner to protect the
pump operator position from being exposed to approaching traffic.

2.

Positioning of large apparatus must create a safe parking area for EMS units
and other fire vehicles. Operating personnel, equipment and patients should
be kept within the “Safe Zone” created by the blocking apparatus at all times.

3.

When blocking with apparatus to protect the emergency scene, establish a
sufficient size “Work Zone” that includes all damaged vehicles, roadway
debris, the patient triage and treatment area, the extrication work area,
personnel and tool staging area and the EMS Unit loading zone.

HIGHWAY EMERGENCIES
203.18
Page 5 of 11
Rev. 08/14
4.

EMS Unit should be positioned within the protected work area with their rear
patient loading door area angled away from the nearest lanes of moving traffic

5.

Command shall stage surplus emergency vehicles off the roadway or return
these units to service as soon as possible.

6.

At all intersections, or where the incident may be near the middle lane of the
roadway, two or more sides of the incident will need to be protected.
a) Police vehicles must be strategically positioned to expand the
initial safe work zone for traffic approaching from opposing
directions. The goal is to effectively block all exposed sides of the
“Work Zone”. The blocking of the “Work Zone” must be
prioritized, from the most critical or highest traffic volume flow to
the least critical traffic direction.
b) At intersection incidents, consider requesting additional resources.

7.

Traffic cones shall be deployed from the rear of the blocking apparatus toward
approaching traffic to increase the advance warning provided for approaching
motorists. Cones identify and only suggest the transition and tapering actions
that are required of the approaching motorist.

8.

Personnel shall place cones and flares and retrieve cones while facing
oncoming traffic whenever possible.

9.

Traffic cones shall be deployed at 15 foot intervals upstream of the blocking
apparatus with the furthest traffic cone approximately 75 feet upstream to
allow adequate advance warning to drivers

10. Additional traffic cones shall be retrieved from PD units to extend the advance
warning area for approaching motorists.

HIGHWAY EMERGENCIES
203.18
Page 6 of 11
Rev. 08/14
G. COMMAND FUNCTION
The first unit arriving on the scene of a multiple unit incident will establish command and
give an initial report, which should include:
1. Entrapment
2. Injuries/number
3. Fire/no fire
4. Hazardous Materials involved
5. Traffic conditions
6. Additional resources response if needed
The initial-arriving company officer and/or the Incident Commander must complete
critical size-up to assure that a safe and protected work environment for emergency scene
personnel is established and maintained including;
1. Assure that the first-arriving apparatus establishes an initial block to create an
initial safe work area.
2. Assign a parking location for all EMS Units as well as later-arriving
apparatus.
o Lanes of traffic shall be identified numerically as “Lane 1”, “Lane 2”,
etc., beginning from the right to left considered from the approaching
motorist’s point of view. Typically the right lane is the slow lane or the
curb lane.
o Instruct the driver of the EMS Unit to “block to the right” or “block to
the left” as it is parked at the scene to position the rear patient loading
area away from the closest lane of moving traffic.
3. Assure that all EMS Units on-scene are placed within the protected “Safe
Zone” of the larger apparatus.
4. Assure that loading of patients is done from within a protected “Work Zone”.
5. At residential medical emergencies, Command shall direct EMS Units to park
at the nearest curb to the residence and in the area protected by the fire
company apparatus whenever possible for safe patient loading.

HIGHWAY EMERGENCIES
203.18
Page 7 of 11
Rev. 08/14
H. PERSONNEL FUNCTIONS
1. Always maintain an acute awareness of the high risk of working in or near
moving traffic.
2. Never trust moving traffic.
3. Always look before you move!
4. Always keep an eye on the moving traffic whenever possible!
5. Avoid turning your back to moving traffic.
6. Personnel should exit and enter the apparatus from the protected “Safe Zone”
side, away from moving traffic if at all possible.
7. FULL PPE Protective clothing or High Visibility Safety Apparel with helmet
must be donned prior to exiting the emergency vehicle.
a) During dusk to dawn operations OR when ambient lighting is reduced
due to inclement weather conditions be extra cautious due to reduced
visibility.
8. Always look before opening doors and stepping out of apparatus or emergency
vehicle into any moving traffic areas. When walking around fire apparatus or
emergency vehicle, be alert to your proximity to moving traffic.
a. Stop at the corner of the apparatus, check for traffic, and then proceed
remaining as close as possible along the apparatus.
b. Maintain minimum exposure when moving through any area where a
minimum “Buffer Zone” condition exists.
9. Police Department personnel may place traffic cones or flares at the scene to
direct traffic. This action builds upon initial FD cone deployment and can be
expanded, if needed, as later arriving Police Officers arrive. Always place and
retrieve cones while facing on-coming traffic.
o Placing flares adjacent to and in combination with traffic cones for
nighttime operations greatly enhances scene safety. Do not add an
unwanted ignition source to an already hazardous situation without full
consideration for scene safety.

HIGHWAY EMERGENCIES
203.18
Page 8 of 11
Rev. 08/14
I. HIGH VOLUME LIMITED-ACCESS HIGHWAY OPERATIONS
High-volume limited access highways include the Interstates, expressways, and multilane roadways within the FD response area. The Police Department and Department of
Transportation (DOT) have a strong desire to keep the traffic moving on these highvolume thoroughfares. When in the judgment of FD Command it becomes essential for
the safety of operating personnel, any or all lanes, shoulders, and entry/exit ramps of these
limited access highways can be completely shut down. This, however, should rarely
occur and should be for as short a period of time as practical. Closing down any part of a
high volume thoroughfare should be coordinated through the Police Department.
Special considerations for high-volume limited-access, multi-lane roadway incidents;
1.

First-arriving engine company apparatus shall establish an initial block of the
lane(s) occupied by the damaged vehicle plus one additional traffic lane.

2.

A ladder truck apparatus shall be automatically dispatched to all highway
related incidents on all high-volume limited-access highways with the
exception of car fires. In the instance a car fire on high-volume limited
access highways, all of the functions of the Truck company mentioned in
paragraph 3 below will be performed by a second engine company. In these
instances, a second engine will be dispatched instead of a Truck.

3.

The primary assignment of this Truck company apparatus and crew shall be
to;
a) Establish an upstream block occupying a minimum of two lanes plus
the paved shoulder of the highway of the initial block provided by the
first-due apparatus.
b) The position of this apparatus shall take into consideration all factors
that limit sight distance of the approaching traffic including ambient
lighting conditions, weather-related conditions, road conditions, design
curves, bridges, hills and over- or underpasses.
c) Traffic cones and/or cones illuminated by flares should be placed
upstream of the ladder truck apparatus by the ladder truck crew at the
direction of the company officer.
d) Traffic cones on high-volume limited-access roadways shall be placed
farther apart, with the last cone approximately 150 feet “upstream”, to
allow adequate warning to drivers. Personnel shall place cones and
flares and retrieve cones while facing the traffic.

HIGHWAY EMERGENCIES
203.18
Page 9 of 11
Rev. 08/14
e) Assign a “Spotter” to monitor the response of approaching motorists as
they are directed to transition to a slower speed and taper into merged
lanes of traffic.
f) Notify Command on the incident fireground channel of any
approaching traffic that is not responding to the speed changes,
transition, tapering and merging directions.
g) “Spotter” shall activate a pre-determined audible warning to operating
personnel of a non-compliant motorist approaching.
h) For vehicle fires, the second engine company apparatus may also be
used as a second water source upon orders from Command.
4.

Police Department vehicles will be used to provide additional blocking of
additional traffic lanes as needed.

5.

Staging of additional companies off the highway in a safe area may be
required. Additional resources may be brought onto the highway scene one
or two at a time as needed. An adequate size multi-patient loading area must
be established.

6.

Command should establish communications with the Police Officer on the
scene as soon as possible to jointly coordinate a safe “Work Zone” and to
determine how to most efficiently resolve the incident and establish normal
traffic flows.

7.

The termination of the incident must be managed with the same
aggressiveness as initial actions. Crews, apparatus, and equipment must be
removed from the highway promptly, to reduce exposure to moving traffic
and minimize traffic congestion.

HIGHWAY EMERGENCIES
203.18
Page 10 of 11
Rev. 08/14

Officer Mental Checklist:
“Block” with apparatus to protect the scene, patients, and emergency personnel.


Block at least one additional lane



Block so pump panel is “down stream”



Block most critical or highest traffic volume direction first



Consider requesting additional PD assistance

Responders must wear proper PPE w/Helmet


High Visibility Safety Apparel at all times not in FULL fire fighting gear.



Helmet should be worn at all times



Full Fire Fighting PPE when engaged in fire fighting, extrication or
HazMat.

Establish more than adequate advance warning


Traffic cones at 15’ intervals



Deploy minimum 5 cones upstream



Cones only “Suggest” they don’t Block!



Expand initial safe Work Zone

Direct placement of EMS Units


Assure EMS Units park within Safe Zone of larger apparatus as directed



Lane 1 is furthest right lane, next is Lane 2, then Lane 3, etc. from
approaching motorist’s point of view



Direct EMS Unit to “block to the right” or “block to the left” to protect
loading doors



Place EMS Unit patient loading area facing away from closest lane of
moving traffic



All patient loading into EMS Units is done from within a protected Safe
Work Zone

Night or Reduced Light Conditions


Turn OFF vehicle headlights if not needed



Turn OFF unnecessary obtrusive light that may blind approaching drivers



Provide overall scene lighting

HIGHWAY EMERGENCIES
203.18
Page 11 of 11
Rev. 08/14


All personnel in PPE w/helmets



Illuminate cones with flares if not a hazard to scene safety



Consider additional company for additional upstream “Block”

High-Volume Limited-Access Highway Incidents


Establish initial block: minimum two lanes



Ladder truck establishes upstream block
o two lanes plus paved shoulder



Place cones and/or cones illuminated by flares upstream of ladder truck
apparatus
o last cone approximately 150 feet “upstream” of apparatus



Establish “Spotter” position
o monitor approaching traffic
o sound emergency signal as necessary



Use police department vehicles for additional blocking



Stage additional companies off highway



Establish liaison with on-scene Police



Terminate incident aggressively


=== 203.19 Railroad Emergencies ===
RAILROAD EMERGENCIES
203.19
Page 1 of 3
CHAPTER II

Operations

SUBJECT 3

Emergency Operations

TOPIC 19

Railroad Emergencies

A.

Rev. 3/91

SCOPE
To define operational procedures at railroad derailments and or fires.

B.

C.

PRIORITIES
1.

To determine which mode of operation to follow. A decision must be made to
either commit forces to "fight the fire", or to withdraw and evacuate the area.

2.

Pre-planning which railroads traverse your district, how the railroads are
contacted including a list of telephone numbers. Access roads, water supply,
evacuation routes, etc.

3.

All fire companies should know if the tracks in their district are main line or
switch tracks leading to an industrial complex.

SAFETY
1.

Responding members shall wear full protective clothing including SCBA.

2.

In fires involving pressure tank cars, (DOT 105 or 112) observe for possible
B.L.E.V.E conditions. If B.L.E.V.E. conditions exist, evacuate area immediately.

3.

When a cargo fire involves hazardous materials such as:
Explosives
Oxidizers
Organic Peroxides
Poison - A
Unstable or Reactive
the immediate and/or surrounding areas should be evacuated.

4.

When operating in areas where several sets of tracks must be crossed to approach
emergency, caution must be used until all rail traffic is shut down.

RAILROAD EMERGENCIES
203.19
Page 2 of 3
C.

D.

SAFETY (continued)

Rev. 3/91

5.

Fire apparatus can be an excellent source of ignition when driven up close to rail
incidents. Keep apparatus back, and if approach is necessary, do so on foot with
full fire protection clothing including SCBA.

6.

Do not approach derailed cars within 2000 feet, unless life is involved or absolute
identification is made of product in derailed cars. If cars are leaking toxic or
hazardous materials, follow 'HAZARDOUS MATERIAL", procedures, Chapter
203.20.

FIRE FIGHTING ALONG OR OVER RAILROAD TRACKS
1.

Make every attempt to determine what is involved in fire before making an
offensive attack. Incident Commander to use binoculars. Attempt to locate
railroad engineer and/or conductor to obtain shipping papers.

2.

Lay the first fire line over tracks, then immediately lay a section of hose under
tracks and shut down line. Then connect to line under tracks eliminating the
hazard of hose being cut by trains.

3.

If train(s) must be halted due to multiple lines over tracks, hazard to fire fighters,
or because of the nature of the fire or emergency:
(a)

Notify Fire Alarm Dispatcher of location and ownership of track.

(b)

Send fire fighters both directions on track at least ½ mile to alert
oncoming train of problem ahead on track. Light flares and place in
middle of tracks. Give hand signals to oncoming train. Train Engineers
have orders not to proceed past any flare.

RAILROAD EMERGENCIES
203.19
Page 3 of 3
D.

FIRE FIGHTING ALONG OR OVER RAILROAD TRACKS (continued)

Rev. 8/89

©

Railroad tracks have small electrical charges going through the tracks. By laying
a metal bar across tracks, thereby closing circuit, the lighting will change warning
oncoming trains of possible problems ahead. Station a Fire Fighter by metal
object to remove same if train approaches. This will only work on main line
tracks.

(d)

Fire Fighters sent down tracks shall have portable radios to notify command when
trains are approaching.


=== 203.20 Hazardous Materials ===
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
203.20
Page 1 of 40
CHAPTER II

Operations

SUBJECT 3

Emergency Operations

TOPIC 20

Hazardous Materials

A.

Rev. 1/90

SCOPE
Hazardous Materials incidents encompass a wide variety of potential situations including
fires, spills, transportation accidents, chemical reactions, explosions, and similar events.
Hazards involved may include toxicity, flammability, radiological hazards, corrosives,
explosives, health hazards, chemical reactions, and combinations of factors. This topic
provides a general framework for handling a Hazardous Materials incident, but does not
address the specific tactic or control measures for a particular incident. Unless
superseded by a specific part of this topic, all other Cincinnati Fire Division Procedures
remain in effect for Hazardous Materials Incidents.
Neutralization site cleanup, and final decontamination are beyond the scope of the
Cincinnati Fire Division and will be accomplished by the E.P.A. or other such agency.

B.

OBJECTIVE
To outline the Cincinnati Fire Divisions, duties and responsibilities at a Hazardous
Materials incident.
Goals: Save Lives
Prevent Injuries
Reduction of Property Loss
Restoration of Vital Services

C.

SAFETY
1.

Wear full protective clothing including SCBA. (Squad 52 personnel and/or other
members as assigned will use chemical protective clothing appropriate for the
hazard involved).

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
203.20
Page 2 of 40
C.

SAFETY (continued)

Rev. 1/90

2.

Action taken prior to determining the product involved may be wrong and may
compound the problem. A wrong decision, while working with hazardous
materials, can be worse than no decision, and may place personnel at unnecessary
risk.

3.

Limit personnel or apparatus commitment to immediate rescue until the following
is known:
Name and/or type of material(s) involved.
Amount and size of container(s).
Characteristics of material(s).
Problem (leak, spill, fire, etc.).

4.

The first arriving unit must consciously avoid committing itself to a dangerous
situation. Stop to assess any visible activity taking place, evaluate the effects of
wind, topography, and location of the situation. Approach from upwind direction
if at all possible.

5.

All other units to stage until instructed to take specific action. Placing apparatus
so it can provide a quick means of escape if necessary. Do not drive apparatus
into the red zone.

6.

Sometimes a non-attack mode is the best approach to a hazardous materials
incident. A fire in any of the following materials should signal a non-attack mode
and immediate evacuation of the surrounding area:
Explosives
Oxidizers
Organic Peroxides
Poison - A
Unstable or Reactive

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
203.20
Page 3 of 40
D.

ESTABLISHING COMMAND

Rev. 1/90

Command must be established, and will follow the Incident Command System (202.01)
utilizing Staff as necessary. Below is an example of an Incident Command System
Organization Chart.
Incident Command System

Incident
Commander
Safety

Liaison

Public Information

Operations

Planning

Logistics

Staging

Resources Unit
(Restat)

Communications
Unit

Evac. Branch North

Demobilization
Unit

Ground Support
Unit

N. Evac Div

N. Police Div.

Situation Unit
(Sitstat)

Transport Grp.

Evac. Branch South

S. Police Div

Documentation Unit

South Evac. &
Relocation Div.

Medical Branch

Observer

W eather

Chemist

Health Hyg.
S. Triage
Group

N. Triage
Group

Treatment
Group

Transport
Group

Suppression &
Rescue Div.
Decon Task
Force
Back Up
Task Force

Perimeter
Control T.F.

E.P.A Rep.

Supply
Unit
Medical Unit

Finance

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
203.20
Page 4 of 40
D.

ESTABLISHING COMMAND (CONTINUED)

Rev. 1/90

The Planning and Logistics Officers will have duties similar to any other emergency, as
will the Information and Liaison Officers. However, the duties of the Safety Officer and
Medical Officer will be somewhat different.
E.

SAFETY OFFICER
The Safety Officer is responsible for the establishment of Zones - Red, Yellow, and
Green (if they are not established), to assure that everyone working at the scene is
properly protected and to supervise decontamination operations.

F.

MEDICAL OFFICER
The Medical Officer is the member in charge of the first arriving Paramedic Unit, and
must take charge until relieved. This first arriving unit should not leave the scene of a
disaster, but should handle triage immediately and escalate medical response as required.
See 204.02 (Mass Casualties) for more information, should the Hazardous Materials
Incident involve Mass Casualties.
Duties of the Medical Officer include:
1.

2.

Evaluate (size up) the extent of the medical emergency including probable
escalation.
a.

Number of victims.

b.

Extent and type of injuries.

c.

To what materials have the victims been exposed.

d.

Should victims be moved and/or decontaminated prior to medical
treatment and/or transportation.

Establish triage and transfer area within the Yellow Zone.

If the Yellow Zone has not been established, set up operations upwind and well away
from the actual area of contamination, until the Yellow Zone is established. Choose
alternate area/s, should the wind change direction or the incident escalate.

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
203.20
Page 5 of 40
G.

EMERGENCY RETREAT

Rev. 1/90

In the event that an immediate withdrawal (retreat) of forces becomes necessary, the
following emergency message will be transmitted on all Cincinnati Fire Division Radio
Channels. "Emergency, all units at (location) retreat", repeat 5 times. Also, an apparatus
located near the will signal the retreat in using ten (10) 3 second blast on the apparatus air
horn.
H.

OPERATIONS
Primary responsibility will be control and/or containment, neutralization, dilution,
removal of all ignition sources, and bringing the leak or spill to a safe resolve with
minimum exposure to personnel.
When toxic or irritant vapors are being carried downwind, it MAY be most effective to
keep everyone indoors with windows and doors closed to prevent contact with vapors
instead of evacuating the area. In these cases, companies would be assigned to patrol the
area assisting citizens in shutting down ventilation systems and evacuating persons with
respiratory problems. The Incident Commander will decide when this is applicable.
In some cases it may be advantageous to use non-Fire Division personnel to evaluate
hazards and/or perform certain functions for which they would have particular experience
or ability. When such personnel are using SCBA, chemical entry suits, etc., they must be
made aware of the functions, limitations, and safety precautions necessary in their use.
Squad 52 personnel, using compatible protection, must closely monitor and accompany
such personnel.

I.

SELECT AN OBJECTIVE
Evacuate and Withdraw (Police evacuate outer area - Fire Division immediate area)
Rescue
Exposure protection
Containment
Extinguish
Temporary holding action until evacuation complete
Control

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
203.20
Page 6 of 40
I.

SELECT AN OBJECTIVE (continued)

Rev. 1/90

The following actions may require consideration at any Haz- Mat incident. (Not all will
be significant at any particular incident.)
1.

Cooling Containers
a.
b.
c.
d.

2.

Remove Uninvolved Materials
a.
b.
c.

3.

4.

Move individual containers
Move tank cars away from flame
Cool containers before moving

Stop the Leak
a.

Close valves

b.

Place plug in openings

c.

Place container in upright position

d.

Use water spray to approach leak

e.

Cover particulate materials with plastic or other suitable material

Apply Diluting Spray or Neutralizing Agent
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

5.

Use adequate water supply
Apply heavy streams to vapor space
Use unmanned streams if possible
Use natural barriers to protect personnel

Dilute water-soluble liquids
Flush corrosives to reduce danger
Use spray streams to absorb vapor
Use water with caution as some materials are water reactive
Reduce vapor production with foam

Construct Dams, Dikes or Channels
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Direct running liquid away from exposures
Control run off from corrosive materials
Use sand or dirt
Collect in temporary ponds, made with diking materials
Keep contaminants out of sewers and/or waterways

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
203.20
Page 7 of 40
I.

SELECT AN OBJECTIVE (continued)
6.

Remove Ignition Sources
a.
b.

7.

J.

Rev. 1/90

Start down wind
Eliminate all sources of heat, spark, friction

Call for Additional Resources when their need is only anticipated. The action
taken in the first few minutes of an incident affects the outcome more than any
other single factor.

ESTABLISH ZONES
RED ZONE (contaminated area)
1.

Limit entry to personnel who are adequately protected and to as few people as
necessary for objective.

2.

Use red Barrier Tape to delineate.

3.

Establish Control Point.

YELLOW ZONE (area immediately surrounding contaminated area)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Triage and Transfer area
Contaminated civilian assembly area
Limited Equipment Staging area
Decontamination area
Use Yellow Tape to delineate
Entry and Exit Routes should be established

GREEN ZONE
1.
2.
3.

Command Post (Communications Van)
Staging area
Support equipment from other agencies
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Police
Other City Departments
Cincinnati Gas & Electric
Cincinnati, & Suburban Bell Telephone
Other Agencies as required

NOTE: Squad 52 and all District Chief's carry red and yellow barrier tape.

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
203.20
Page 8 of 40
K.

ISOLATION AND EVACUATION

Rev. 1/90

ISOLATION
Keep everybody away from the hazard area if not directly involved with the emergency
response or rescue operation. Do not let unprotected people into the area. Conduct any
rescue operations as quickly as possible entering the scene from the upwind approach.
This "isolate" step is the first to be taken even if "evacuation" is to follow.
During the isolation stage of a hazardous materials incident, the Fire Division will
perform any NECESSARY duties in the immediate hazard area. The Cincinnati Police
Division will assist in isolation; however, they are not equipped with protective clothing.
Therefore, their main function will be traffic control and preventing unauthorized
persons from entering the hazard area.
*The Model Response Guide from the Hamilton County Disaster Council was used
extensively in developing this appendix.
Keep unnecessary people from entering contaminated area.
Assemble for further examination, anyone who may have had contact with the material.
(In yellow zone if established).
Avoid cross contamination with other victims, EMT's and Fire Fighting personnel.
EVACUATION
Remove all people from area and buildings for the distance required. Good judgement
must be used in evacuation procedures to avoid placing people in greater danger. In
some cases, it may be advisable to leave people inside structures while securing the
ventilation system. The key to successful evacuation is a systematic notification and
removal of occupants.
1.

Since Police and Fire share concurrent responsibility in evacuation situations, the
agency charged with the primary role (Fire in Hazardous Material Incidents) will
determine the need and whether one or both agencies will participate.

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
203.20
Page 9 of 40
K.

ISOLATION AND EVACUATION (continued)
2.

3.

Rev. 1/90

Develop Evacuation/Search Plan
a.

Select initial evacuation area and evacuation collection point(s).

b.

Utilize maps and fix responsibility for search groups.

c.

Designate responsibility for specific areas to individual supervisors and
assign personnel in numbers appropriate to the need.

d.

Utilize chalk marking system for structures to indicate and assure
complete search.

Evacuation Notification/Warning
a.

Notify occupants of:
1. Reason for the evacuation.
2. Best available route(s) out of the affected area.
3. Location of Evacuation Relocation Collection Point(s).

4.

b.

Use public address systems on Police and Fire vehicles.

c.

Sound sirens on vehicles or use air raid siren to alert residents.

d.

Door to door notification. (Generally this phase will be accomplished at
the same time search teams go through the area).

e.

Use of Electronic News Media via Cincinnati Police Teletype System.

Provide for transportation using the following as available:
Private Vehicle
Metro Buses
School Buses
Taxi Cabs
Police, Fire, other Automotive Equipment
On Foot
See Notification and Request For Assistance
Transportation Resources, 203.200, pages 23 & 24

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
203.20
Page 10 of 40
K.

ISOLATION AND EVACUATION (continued)
5.

Rev. 1/90

Relocation Assistance:
a.

Coordinate with the American Red Cross

b.

Use Crisis Relocation Centers during incidents of extended duration.

Evacuation is a continuation of the isolation stage. Evacuation can involve one to
three phases.
Phase 1 (Initial Evacuation)
Evacuate occupants to an initial evacuation area. These area/s are located
out of immediate danger. People are collected for short periods of time,
weather permitting up to six hours. Attempt to account for all affected
people.
Phase 2 (Crisis Relocation Collection Point)
In the event the incident continues or it is obvious from the beginning, the
incident will continue for an extended period of time, people should be
moved to an evacuation collection point. During this phase, people are
collected at central location/s away from the initial evacuation area. An
attempt should be made to make a complete accounting for people.
Crisis Relocation Point
This is the location where the general population can be immediately
moved out of harm's way without previous notification for a limited time
in order to coordinate their movement to a relocation center with more
permanent resources and facilities.
Classification of Crisis Relocation Collection Points
Class I
A Inside Shelter
B) Parking Space Capability
C) Ingress and Egress
D) Security Capability
E) Traffic Flow Capability
F) Capability for Command Post, Registration, Medical Station,
PublicInformation Station
G) Food Supply
H) Gas Supply, Towing

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
203.20
Page 11 of 40
I) Essential Supplies (Tools, Hardware, Bedding, Etc.)
K.

ISOLATION AND EVACUATION (continued)

Rev. 1/90

Class II
A)
Class

Inside shelter but lacking one or more of the requirements for
I.

Class III
A)

All of Class I except:

No inside shelter
No gas, food, or essential supplies
Crisis Relocation Points - Designated
Name

Parking Spaces

Class I
Beechmont Mall
Eastgate Mall
Kenwood Mall
Northgate Mall
Tri-County Mall
Class II
Riverfront Stadium
Riverfront Coliseum
Convention Center
Cincinnati Gardens
K-Mart Stores
Central Hardware
Van Leunen's
University of Cincinnati
Xavier University
Mt. St. Joseph
Eden Park
Mt. Airy Forest
Carthage Fairgrounds
Winton Woods
Miami Whitewater Forest
Sharon Woods
Del-Fair Shopping Center
Delhi Shopping Center

2,700
3,800
2,600
5,000
5,000

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
203.20
Page 12 of 40
K.

ISOLATION AND EVACUATION (continued)

Rev. 1/90

Greenhills
Hyde Park Plaza
Kenwood Plaza
Milford Plaza
Northland Shopping Center
Norwood Plaza
Princeton Plaza
Promenade Plaza
St. Bernard Plaza
Surrey Square
Swifton
Union Terminal
Western Woods
Western Hills
Brentwood Shopping Center
Cassinelli Square Center
Hills Shopping Centers

2,600

4,000
2,000
2,800
1,000
1,800

Class III
Dillonvale Shopping Center
Milford shopping Center
Ashtree Shopping Center

350
700
900

Notify Incident Commander of Crisis Relocation Collection Points.
See Notification and Request For Assistance American Red Cross 203.20, page 24 and
25.
Phase 3 (Crisis Relocation Center)
This phase is used only when people are displaced for an extended period of time
(usually 24 hours or more).
Crisis Relocation Center
This is the location where the general population will be housed, fed and provided
community support due to an emergency situation requiring displacement from their
normal community habitat.

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
203.20
Page 13 of 40
L.

IDENTIFICATION

Rev. 1/90

Occupancy Location
Pre-Plans
Right To Know
Container Shapes
Markings/Colors
Placards and Labels
Shipping Papers
Senses
M.

HAZARD OF SPECIFIC MATERIAL
DOT Response Guide
Hazardous Materials Library carried by District Chiefs
Hazardous Materials Library carried by Squad 52
CHEMTREC (1-800-424-9300)
Aid from manufacturer or others responsible for material.

N.

DECONTAMINATION
All personal protective equipment must be decontaminated before reuse. If it cannot be
decontaminated, it must be disposed of in accordance with state and federal regulations.
The decontamination area shall be in the yellow zone immediately adjacent to the red
zone.
The most common decontamination is scrubbing with soap and water.
Personnel performing decontamination must be equipped with adequate chemical
protective clothing (carried by Squad 52).
Contaminated people should not leave the Yellow Zone, except where an immediate
threat to life exists.
Attempt to contain contaminated water used in decontamination.
Isolate and contain contaminated clothing and equipment.
Neutralization site cleanup, and final decontamination are beyond the scope of the
Cincinnati Fire Division and will be accomplished by the E.P.A. or other such agency.

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
203.20
Page 14 of 40
O.

NOTIFICATION & REQUEST FOR ASSISTANCE
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Rev. 1/90

INTERNAL
Special Equipment
Extra Alarms, Hazardous Material Emergency, or both
Other City Departments
City Manager Disaster Team

B.
1.
2.

EXTERNAL
Hamilton County Emergency Operations Center.
Ohio EPA (EPA will notify other State agencies). See Appendix "D" for
list of State Departments and possible aid. If you want assistance from a
State Agency, it must be requested; a notification will not necessarily
secure State Agency Assistance.
3.

U.S. Coast Guard - National Response Center (1-800-424-8802).

4.
a.
b.
c.

Private Sector
Manufacturer
Transporter
Special Teams
Railroad Wreck Crews (call Railroad Dispatcher)
Monsanto Merit Team (467-2400)
Mats Team (721-2345) Academy of Medicine
Others

d.

NOTIFICATIONS - LOCAL STATE AND FEDERAL AGENCY ASSISTANCE
The Fire Chief shall be in charge of the incident until such time that he relinquishes that
authority.

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
203.20
Page 15 of 40
O.

NOTIFICATION & REQUEST FOR ASSISTANCE (continued)

Rev. 1/90

A notification and a request for agency assistance is not the same. If agency assistance is
required, state who and what is needed.
A.

Notification
Local Agencies:
Cincinnati Police & Fire 911
Metropolitan Sewer District 352-4800 - (24 hour number).
Cincinnati Board of Health 352-3197 - weekdays (0800-1700). 721-2345
outside normal work hours or through Fire Alarm Dispatcher.
Cincinnati Building Department - go through Fire Alarm Dispatcher, they
have unlisted telephone number.
Cincinnati Public Works 352-3371 - (24 hour number or through Fire
Alarm Dispatcher).
Cincinnati Water Works 352-4626 - (24 hour number or through Fire
Alarm Dispatcher).
Hamilton County Disaster Net 825-2260 - (Hamilton County Dispatcher)
or through Fire Alarm Dispatcher.
State and Federal Agencies:
The Ohio Environmental Protection Agency (Ohio EPA) maintains a 24
hour emergency telephone number 1-800-282-9378, or through Fire
Alarm Dispatcher. (See Ohio EPA Notice for more information). The
Ohio EPA must be notified of a Hazardous Materials Incident. They will
then notify all other State and Federal Agencies with an interest in the
situation.
When notified of an incident, the agencies decide whether to respond or not.

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
203.20
Page 16 of 40
O.

NOTIFICATION & REQUEST FOR ASSISTANCE (continued)
B.

Rev. 1/90

Request for assistance - State and Federal Agencies
Most State and Federal Agencies, including the Ohio EPA, have resources and are
willing to lend assistance.
When requesting assistance, specifically request the agency and type of help. The
Ohio EPA will request assistance from other Federal or State Agencies, however,
requests for assistance or information are best done from the scene directly to the
agency.
Listed are State and Federal Agencies that are frequently called during hazardous
materials incidents.
OHIO ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY - 1-800-282-9378
(24 hour number)
The EPA is particularly concerned with hazardous materials incidents which
involve one or more of the following conditions:
a.

Release of toxic fumes or runoff which threatens the public health or

b.

The air, water, or lands of the state could be adversely affected.

c.

A public water supply, sewage treatment system or water disposal site
could be adversely affected.

safety.

In the event the hazardous materials incident does not involve fire or explosion ,
the potential for fire or explosion, or radioactive materials, EPA will assume the
State primary role for coordinating activities of State Agencies, supported by
State Fire Marshal, DSA and other State Agencies as appropriate (Department of
Health, Department of Agriculture, Department of Natural Resources). If the fire
or explosion potential is greater than the environmental hazards, as determined by
the Director of EPA or his authorized representative(s), the EPA will assume an
advisory role to the State Fire Marshal until the threat of fire or explosion
subsides. EPA will support the other agencies when not employed in a primary
role and will provide advice, monitoring and coordination of the removal,
neutralization and/or disposal of hazardous materials from the incident site.

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
203.20
Page 17 of 40
O.

NOTIFICATION & REQUEST FOR ASSISTANCE (continued)

Rev. 1/90

OHIO DISASTER SERVICES AGENCY (DSA) - (614)-889-7150
In hazardous materials incidents involving radioactive materials, Ohio Disaster Services
Agency (DSA) will assume the primary State role for coordinating activities of the other
State Agencies. In incidents not involving radioactive materials, DSA will support the
State Fire Marshal and EPA. Except, that local authority will maintain control until
arrival of State Representative.
FEDERAL EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT AGENCY (FEMA) National Response
Center -800-424-8802 (24 hour number)
The National Response Center serves as notification center for pollution incidents in U.S.
waters. It is located at the U.S. Coast Guard Headquarters in Washington, D.C. and is
staffed by Coast Guard personnel. The National Response Team is composed of
representatives of primary and advisory agencies. The National Response Team is
responsible for planning and response activities at the national level.
United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission - 312-932-2500.
This notification will normally be made by the Cincinnati Board of Health.
United States Coast Guard - Cincinnati -684-3295 (24 hour number).
The National Response Center will notify the local office; however, it is possible to call
direct and ask for assistance.
In case of any accidental or unauthorized release of contaminants to the air, land, or
waters of the state, such spills, releases, or emissions shall be reported to the Ohio EPA.

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
203.20
Page 18 of 40
O.

NOTIFICATION & REQUEST FOR ASSISTANCE (continued)

Rev. 1/90

The Ohio EPA EMERGENCY RESPONSE maintains 24 hour service for emergencies.
CALL:
1 - 800 - 282-9278
(IN OHIO ONLY)
and give as much as possible of the following information relative to the contaminate
release:
TIME OBSERVED
LOCATION
MATERIAL RELEASED
PROBABLE SOURCE
VOLUME & DURATION
PRESENT & ANTICIPATED MOVEMENT OF CONTAMINATES
WEATHER CONDITIONS
PERSONNEL ON SCENE
ACTIONS INITIATED
PERSON TO CONTACT ON SCENE
For inquiries other than emergencies call (614) 466-8565
STATE OF OHIO ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
The incident commander will be responsible for requesting equipment as needed. In
large scale incidents, where the logistics officer position has been filled, he will request
or provide standby for the needed equipment.
Cincinnati Police
Manpower and vehicles to assist in isolation especially in securing the area and traffic
control.
Manpower and vehicles to assist in evacuation of areas.
Manpower and vehicles to transport victims as prioritized by the Medical Officer.

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
203.20
Page 19 of 40
O.

NOTIFICATION & REQUEST FOR ASSISTANCE (continued)

Rev. 1/90

Direct communications with the news media via teletype.
Note: Police Officers are not equipped with personal protective clothing or respiratory
protection, therefore, they cannot enter areas already effected by toxic or anoxic
materials.
Note: The highest ranking Police Officer on the scene will report to the Command Post.
Cincinnati Public Works Department Highway Maintenance

352-3371

Primary agency providing construction type equipment used to build dikes, dams, ditches
or other means of containment. The Highway Maintenance Division does provide
limited manpower on a 24 hour basis. Highway Maintenance also maintains a recall
system that is used regularly during snow emergencies.
Below is a list of equipment available from Highway Maintenance:
15
50
66
54
23
9
2
1
2
4
5
2
2
3
10
4
1
2
1
1
3

trucks dump tandem 38,000 lbs. net
trucks dump 14,500 lbs. net
spreader attachments
truck mounted snow plows
4 wheel drive units
loaders rubber tired
loaders track
hoist trucks 6 tons
generators 2,750 watts
generators 1,750 watts
pumps centrifugal 2"
power flushers 2,000 gallons
sweepers mechanical
backhoes rubber tired
chain saws
circular saw gasoline
bob cat with attachments
welding trucks
fuel supply truck 1,500 gallons
tractor and drag 35 ton
vac-alls

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
203.20
Page 20 of 40
O.

NOTIFICATION & REQUEST FOR ASSISTANCE (continued)

Rev. 1/90

8
air compressors
1
fork lift 4 ton
traffic control aids
rope and barricades
Note: Highway Maintenance Personnel are not equipped with personal protective
clothing or respiratory protection, therefore, they cannot enter areas already effected by
toxic or anoxic materials.
Telecommunications
The Telecommunications Division has the following equipment available for our use:
3
3
2
1
1
2
1
1

1
- work truck with 35' aerial bucket
- 10' window vans with 25' aerial bucket
- 10' window vans
- multi purpose heater, blower, generator, pumps
- generator 30 AMP
- wood chipper used as a blower
- 85 GPM sump pumps
- 60 CFPM blower
- stake body truck with 12' flat bed

Various shovels, picks, etc. Facilities to establish on site private land line
communications independent of the communications van capabilities. (connect
command posts with constant communications)
Note: Tele-comm. Personnel are not equipped with personal protective clothing or
respiratory protection, therefore, they cannot enter areas already effected by toxic or
anoxic materials.
Public Works Waste Collection 352-3690
The Waste Collection Division does have manpower and equipment available, but not on
an emergency call basis such as Highway Maintenance. Below is a list of equipment
available from Waste Collection.
1 - rubber tired bobcat loader
2 - roll-off container trucks ("Dino")
10 - roll-off containers (25 and 30 cubic yards)

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
203.20
Page 21 of 40
O.

NOTIFICATION & REQUEST FOR ASSISTANCE (continued)
3
69
7

Rev. 1/90

- dump trucks with lift gates
- rear-loader compactor trucks
- front-loader compactor trucks

Note: Waste Collection Personnel are not equipped with personal protective clothing or
respiratory protection, therefore, they cannot enter areas already effected by toxic or
anoxic materials.
PUBLIC WORKS - TRAFFIC ENGINEERING
The Traffic Engineering Division has the following equipment available with the
necessary operators.
4
3
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
2

- bucket trucks single 40'
- bucket trucks, double 30'
- bucket truck, double 65'
- Van/bucket
- backhoe rubber tired
- forklift
- truck derrick
- electric generators
- platform trucks
- trucks dump 14,500 net
- trailers utility
- trailer, pole
- air compressor

Note: Public Works Personnel are not equipped with personal protective clothing or
respiratory protection, therefore, they cannot enter areas already effected by toxic or
anoxic materials.
Cincinnati Health Department
Primary support agency in radiation incidents. The Health Department has radiological
dosage and rate meters. They also have personnel available to use the equipment and
evaluate the health hazards.
The Health Department also provides inspection of food and sanitation facilities at Crisis
Relocation Collection Points and Crisis Relocation Centers during any prolonged
evacuation.

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
203.20
Page 22 of 40
O.

NOTIFICATION & REQUEST FOR ASSISTANCE (continued)

Rev. 1/90

Note: Health Department personnel are not equipped with personal protective clothing or
respiratory protection, therefore, they cannot enter areas already effected by toxic or
anoxic materials.
Cincinnati Water Works 352-4623
The Cincinnati Water Works has manpower and equipment available on an emergency
basis as listed below.
20
2
1
1
1
8
2
2
19
14
40
4
2
2
10
4
1
6

- dump trucks 14, 500 net
- dump trucks tandem 38,000 net
- loader rubber tired
- hoist truck mounted 9 tons
- crane rubber tired 22 tons
- backhoes rubber tired
- welders truck mounted
- welders trailer mounted
- air compressors
- generators 1,750 watts
- pumps centrifugal 2"
- pumps diaphragm 4"
- pumps centrifugal 4"
- pumps centrifugal 3"
- saws circular gasoline
- saws chain
- light tower 15' w/2 1,000 watt
- fork lift 4-8 ton capacity

The Water Works can aid in increasing water flows where necessary. The Water Works
should be notified immediately in cases where an incident may disrupt or contaminate
water supplies.
Note: Water Works Personnel are not equipped with personal protective clothing or
respiratory protection, therefore, they cannot enter areas already effected by toxic or
anoxic materials.

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
203.20
Page 23 of 40
O.

NOTIFICATION & REQUEST FOR ASSISTANCE (continued)

Rev. 1/90

Metropolitan Sewer District
The MSD must be notified when hazardous materials enter or are likely to enter the
sewer system. MSD has the following equipment available.
24
6
1
6
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
5
6
8
6
12

- dump trucks 14,500 lbs. net
- backhoes rubber tired
- tractor and drag 35 ton
- drags tilt 12 ton
- crane truck mounted 40 ton
- crane crawler 20 ton
- crane rubber tired 15 ton
- hydraulic truck cranes 12 - 15 ton
- bulldozer with wench
- loaders track
- loader rubber tired
- chain saws
- pumps 3"
- pumps 6"
- pumps 2"
- generators

Note: Metropolitan Sewer District Personnel are not equipped with personal protective
clothing or respiratory protection, therefore, they cannot enter areas already effected by
toxic or anoxic materials.
Transportation Resources
1)
QUEEN CITY METRO
24 hour number:
632-7550
632-7551
632-7552
2)
TRANSPORTATION AUTHORITY OF NORTHERN KENTUCKY (TANK)
24 hour number:
331-8406
3)
GREYHOUND BUS LINES
352-6071
4)
JOSEPH L. HAMILTON
ARLINGTON HEIGHTS
24 hour number:
761-6100
761-3413

24 HOUR NUMBER:

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
203.20
Page 24 of 40
O.

NOTIFICATION & REQUEST FOR ASSISTANCE (continued)

Rev. 1/90

5)
KUTZ SCHOOL BUS
SALEM ROAD
24 hour number:
231-2200
769-3980
6)
KLUG SCHOOL BUS
1053 EBENEZER ROAD
941-3232
7)
TAXI CABS
Center Dispatching for four (4) companies:
Checker
Yellow
East
24 hour number:

Parkway
241-2100

8)
CENTER CAB COMPANY
24 hour number:
761-5007
9)
BRADY CAB COMPANY
24 hour number:
631-9154
10)
READING TATMAN
24 hour number:
821-2066
948-9783
American Red Cross 579-3000 (24 hour number)
Early notification is the key to effective response and the ability of the Red Cross to
assume responsibility for persons evacuated from a hazardous situation. Red Cross
endeavors to maintain lists of shelters in the area and stands ready to respond 24 hours
per day. Early notification prior to an evacuation (if time permits) will allow Red Cross
evacuation of the affected population.
Red Cross has been designated the primary agency with responsibility for mass care
(shelters and feeding). FEMA recognizes the Red Cross' responsibility: "The Red Cross
will operate appropriate shelter facilities and arrange for mass feeding and other
appropriate support. (Crisis Relocation Center) FEMA will not reimburse state or local
governments for mass care costs..."

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
203.20
Page 25 of 40
O.

NOTIFICATION & REQUEST FOR ASSISTANCE (continued)

Rev. 1/90

Canteen Service will be available to the command post and field units.
The Red Cross emergency lighting system will be available to the emergency services.
Portable generators and lights can be operated by emergency workers at the accident site,
as Red Cross volunteers are not trained, nor equipped for working in hazardous materials
danger zones.
Drug & Poison Information Center (24 hour number) 558-5117
The Cincinnati Drug and Poison Information Center will provide the following
emergency response information.
1.

The degree of hazard.
2.Risk assessment information concerning the community and
environment.
3.
Treatment and Decontamination information.

Greater Cincinnati Hazardous Materials Control Committee telephone numbers are: Paul
Fultz - 874-3440 and Bob Long - 271-2468
This organization is made up of local companies who handle large quantities of
hazardous materials. Most of the companies in the organization are located in close
proximity to the Ohio River. The Haz Mat Control Committee has equipment for
containing and controlling hazardous materials especially leaks entering waterways.
Storage location: 3117 Southside Avenue
Equipment available:
1 - 24" skimmer w/4 cycle non-shielded gasoline engine
4 - 50' lengths skimmer discharge hose
11 - skimmer hose floats
3 - skimmer hose connectors - straight w/clamps
8 - skimmer hose connectors - 450 ells w/clamps
2 - 100' sections Acme boom w/quick connects
2 - 50' sections Acme boom w/quick connects
4 - 10' sections absorbent boom
10 - Bags loose absorbent
2 - Marker drums for securing anchor and boom

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
203.20
Page 26 of 40
O.

NOTIFICATION & REQUEST FOR ASSISTANCE (continued)

Rev. 1/90

1 - Hand operated siphon pump
1 - 4.5 KW portable electric generator, w/4 cycle non-shielded, gasoline engine
Monsanto Emergency Response Information Teams (Merit) -telephone number 467-2400
Is available with equipment and expertise and will respond on request.
Equipment available:
Drager tubes
Vapor tester
Oxygen analyzer
Drum patching materials
Drum pump
Vapor foam
H nu pho-ionizer organic vapor tester
Portable Ph meter
Glove and protective gear compatibility charts
Chemtrec 1-800-424-9300
CHEMTREC stands for Chemical Transportation Emergency Center, a public service of
the Chemical Manufacturers Association, with offices in Washington, D.C.
CHEMTREC provides immediate advice for those at the scene of emergencies, then
promptly contacts the shipper of the chemicals involved for more detailed assistance and
appropriate follow up.
CHEMTREC operates around the clock -- 24 hours a day, seven days a week -- to receive
direct-dial toll-free calls from any point in the continental United States through a wide
area telephone service (WATS) number, 800-424-9300.

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
203.20
Page 27 of 40
O.

NOTIFICATION & REQUEST FOR ASSISTANCE (continued)

Rev. 1/90

An emergency reported to CHEMTREC is received by the communicator on duty, who
records details in writing and by tape recorder. The Communicator then attempts to
determine the essentials of the problem. This is to enable him to provide the best
available information on the chemical(s) reported to be involved, thereby giving specific
indication of the hazards and what to do (as well as what not to do) in case of spills, fire,
or exposure as the immediate first steps in controlling the emergency. Information on the
various chemicals, as furnished by the producers, is within easy reach. Trade names and
synonyms of chemical names are cross-referenced for ready identification by whatever
name is given.
CHEMTREC's Communicators are not scientists. They are chosen for their ability to
remain calm under emergency stresses. To preclude unfounded personal speculation
regarding a reported emergency, they are under instructions to abide strictly by the
information prepared by technical experts for their use.
Although proceeding to the second stage of assistance (contacting the shipper) becomes
more difficult where the shipper is unknown, the Communicator is armed with other
resources to fall back on. For example, concerning radioactive materials, CHEMTREC
can call on the Department of Energy.
CHEMTREC is also responsible for notifying the Pesticide Safety Team Network
(PPTN.) if response by their team is indicated.
National Response Team
The National Response Team will respond to large scale emergencies with a fully
equipped team and backed by private cleanup contractors funded through the Superfund.
An important immediate resource is the information available through the "Oil and
Hazardous Materials - Technical Assistance Data Systems" (OHM-TADS).

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
203.20
Page 28 of 40
O.

NOTIFICATION & REQUEST FOR ASSISTANCE (continued)

Rev. 1/90

OHM-TADS computer stores information about the properties of over 1000 substances
and can help identify materials when given information about the physical characteristics
of an unknown substance. OHM-TADS can be accessed through CHEMTREC.
P.

FLAMMABLE AND/OR COMBUSTIBLE LIQUID INCIDENTS
The main operational problems with flammable liquids are:
Extinguishment
Ignition Prevention
Disposal of Spills
All of these may be involved in the same incident.
Spills must be protected to prevent ignition until they can be picked up or removed.
Unless absolutely necessary, personnel shall not work in a spill area. When it becomes
necessary to enter a spill area to perform a rescue or control a leak, the spill must be
covered with AFFF and all possible precautions against ignition must be taken. Attempt
to determine hazardous area with the use of explosimeters. The number of exposed
personnel must be kept to a minimum. Concentrated vapors are toxic, wear SCBA.
Vapors from flammable liquids are heavier than air (vapor density > 1.0), will
accumulate in low areas and/or move along ground possibly reaching an ignition source.
If flammable liquid/gas is leaking from burning tank car or cylinder keep clear of tank
ends. If the whistling sound from the pressure relief valves on the tank becomes louder,
evacuate area, explosion is imminent. (NOTE: it is not necessary to wait until whistling
sound becomes louder if other conditions warrant immediate withdrawal). In the case of
a tank fire, streams must be used to cool the vapor area of the tank (area above liquid
level).
Do not extinguish cylinder fires unless shut-off can be effected.
Isolate spills by the use of dikes and absorbent materials.

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
203.20
Page 29 of 40
P.

FLAMMABLE COMBUSTIBLE LIQUID INCIDENTS (CONTINUED)

Rev. 1/90

Unless immediate hazard to life is involved, any efforts to remove spill by flushing into
any drainage system should be restricted. If a spill is flushed, it will have to be picked up
downstream.
Q.

NATURAL GAS INCIDENTS
Natural gas is much lighter than air (0.55 vapor density) and will dissipate rapidly
outside. Inside buildings, however, it tends to pocket, particularly in attics and dead air
spaces. The flammable limits are approximately 4.5% to 15% in air.
Burning natural gas should not normally be extinguished, since this changes the hazard
from visible to invisible and creates an explosion hazard. Fires should be controlled by
stopping the flow.
When responding to a possible gas leak approach as a potentially dangerous situation. A
minimum number of personnel should be allowed to enter the area to size-up the situation
using explosimeters.
Evacuate any civilians in the area of escaping gas.
Attempt to locate the source and any shut-off devices available.
In any gas leak situation within a building, control ignition sources, shut off electrical
power from an outside breaker, and ventilate. The gas supply shall be shut off and
red-tagged until repairs are completed.
Closing of main line valves shall be done by C. G. & E. employees only. Fire Division
members may close a gas valve serving a building when necessary.

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
203.20
Page 30 of 40
R.

LPG INCIDENTS

Rev. 1/90

Do not commit personnel within 300 of tank ends.
If whistling from pressure relief valve becomes progressively louder, explosion is
imminent. Use unmanned streams to cool vapor area of tank. Do not extinguish unless
flow of gas can be shut-off. Use fog streams to protect personnel working to control flow
of gas. Vapors are heavier than air.
S.

TRANSPORTATION INCIDENTS
Transportation Incidents are often more difficult than those at fixed locations.
The product(s) involved may be unknown.
Placards may be missing or obscured by smoke and/or debris.
The driver may not be able to contribute information.
The vehicle may be damaged and/or in a peculiar position.
DOT placarding regulations cannot be relied upon up to 1,000 pounds of some
Hazardous Materials do not require a placard, or combinations of products may be
involved with only a "Dangerous" placard showing. Sometimes only the most evident
hazard is identified, while additional hazards are not labeled. "Empty" placards may be
misleading.

T.

RADIOLOGICAL INCIDENTS
This procedure is for peace time radiological emergencies and does not specifically apply
to nuclear warfare radiological contamination.
Actual cleanup and overhaul operations will not normally be a Fire Division function,
although the Fire Division will be responsible for seeing that such operations are
completed.
If there is no life hazard, rescue situation or fire, there is no reason to expose Fire
Division personnel.
If the immediate commitment of personnel is necessary, Zone procedures shall be
implemented to minimize exposure and contain the spread of contamination.

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
203.20
Page 31 of 40
T.

RADIOLOGICAL INCIDENTS (continued)

Rev. 1/90

Any commitment of personnel to the Red Zone shall include at least one survey
instrument and dosimeter per team to monitor radiation hazard levels.
Treatment of Contaminated Patients:
Do not delay field treatment of injuries. Radiological contamination, itself, is not a
medical emergency. Treatment of contaminated patients should proceed with the
following precautions:
1.

All contaminated patients should be placed in one Treatment Area, separate from
non-contaminated patients, within the Yellow Zone perimeter.

2.

Before transporting, all contaminated patients must be wrapped in blankets or
sheets to completely cover them in order to limit the spread of contamination.
Only the face should be left exposed.

3.

Re-use of contaminated ambulance/rescue units for contaminated patient
transportation may need to be considered. If all available vehicles become
contaminated, they can be out of service for long periods of time awaiting
decontamination.

4.

Before personnel can be released from the scene, they must be decontaminated.
All equipment used in patient treatment must also be decontaminated.
Treat radiological fires in the same manner as fires involving toxic chemicals. If
the material is involved in fire consider evacuation of the nearby areas, avoiding
exposure to smoke.

Radiation Emergencies
A radiation emergency is a hazardous materials incident and is to be handled as such.

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
203.20
Page 32 of 40
T.

RADIOLOGICAL INCIDENTS (continued)

Rev. 1/90

Protecting Emergency Response Personnel and the public are somewhat different, as are
the roles of Local, State and Federal Agencies in a Radiation Emergency.
Isolate and Evacuate
Isolation and Evacuation in a Radiation Incident are much the same as in any other
Hazardous Materials accident. The source and type of radiation determine the method of
delineating the Red, Yellow, and Green Zones.
A.

Radiation Source Emitting Rays
1.

Zones are delineated by using the Survey Meters.
a.

The Red Zone is the immediate danger area, detectable or
suspected radiation exposure area.

b.

The Yellow Zone will, if at all possible, be free of detectable
radiation. However, in the case of a high yield source or nuclear
detonation could be located in an area with a dose rate not
exceeding 100MR.

c.

The Green Zone will be beyond the Yellow Zone and beyond
detectable Radiation Levels.

d.

Victims and/or Emergency Response Personnel exposed to
External radiation source rays do not present a cross
contamination risk to Emergency Response Personnel.

Radiation in the form of contaminated dust or liquids
A.

The dispersion pattern will be the same as other hazardous gases, vapors, liquids,
or solids. Contaminated materials will be in motion, with the direction determined
by wind and topography.

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
203.20
Page 33 of 40
T.

RADIOLOGICAL INCIDENTS (continued)

Rev. 1/90

B.

Survey meters will aid in determining zones. Generally, any area where readings
are obtained is considered the Red Zone should be expanded to include areas
where contaminated materials are likely to spread.

C.

The Yellow and Green Zones will be established upwind, uphill, and beyond the
Red Zone.

D.

Victims and/or Emergency Response Personnel exposed to smoke, dust or liquid
DO PRESENT a definite cross contamination risk to Emergency Response
Personnel.

Guidelines for Handling a Radiation Incident
1.

Follow the procedures outlined in this subject.

2.

If there is any indication or reason to believe that radioactive material is
involved in a fire, accident or other emergency to which you respond,
notify the Fire Alarm Dispatcher at once that Radiation Monitoring
assistance is needed and make the best possible use of the Radiological
Monitoring Equipment in the District Chief's car and Squad 52.

3.

Segregate and retain those who have had possible contact with radioactive
material until they can be examined further. Obtain names and addresses
of those involved.

4.

Remove injured from area of accident with as little contact as possible and
hold at the Yellow Zone. Take any measures necessary to save life, but
carry out minimal first-aid, and move victim just outside of the suspected
contaminated area where first-aid work can be completed and victim
turned over to Rescue Company for transportation to hospital. Rescue
Company should make every effort to avoid contaminating themselves
and their equipment. This can be done by having personnel in the area
perform all work requiring contact with the victim and placing stretchers
on uncontaminated surfaces. The rubber sheet used directly under the
victim will help contain contamination and can be decontaminated more
easily than woven material. A check with the radiation meter should be
made, and will be of value if Gamma or Beta radiation is present.
However, a negative meter

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
203.20
Page 34 of 40
T.

RADIOLOGICAL INCIDENTS (continued)

Rev. 1/90

indication should not be taken as conclusive evidence that there is no contamination
unless it can be ascertained that there are no Alph-emitting chemicals present. Squad 52
carries an Alpha Measuring Meter. Consider the use of a scout vehicle or police car for
transportation as they would be easier to decontaminate.
In all cases of suspected or known contamination, the hospital must be notified in
advance.
Do not take contaminated victims into hospital emergency rooms. University Hospital
has a set procedure using a Radiation Safety Team and Radiation center in Pavilion J.
5.

Upon arrival, the Health Commissioner or his representative will assume
responsibility for the disposition of persons being retained or others who may
have been affected.

6.

After the initial emergency period has expired, the Health Department will
assume responsibility for the supervision of the decontamination of any persons
involved and not otherwise disposed of and the area and buildings affected.
Clearance for reoccupation will be the responsibility for the Health Department.

7.

The fear attendant on the word radiation, and the relatively few who really
understand the health implications of any particular radiation exposure, make it
imperative that the public be given accurate information which will not create
unnecessary alarm.
The Health Department representative will be responsible for making the
statements as to the seriousness and any other facts which are necessary for public
dissemination. Persons making the initial response to the call will limit
statements to the fact that radioactive materials are involved.

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
203.20
Page 35 of 40
T.

RADIOLOGICAL INCIDENTS (continued)

Rev. 1/90

The factors of Time, Distance, and Shielding are the primary means of protection from
radiation, to take advantage of these protective factors, Emergency Response Personnel
must first recognize that a radiation hazard exists by using monitoring equipment,
looking for placards and labels, and knowing the businesses that have radiation sources
on their premises.
The maximum exposure limit for Cincinnati Fire Division members is 25 Roentgens.
Literature from the Nuclear Regulatory Commission points out the fact that although
high level Gamma radiation source material is shipped with all practical precautions and
safety measures, there is always a possibility that such source of radiation could become
involved in a serious fire that would destroy the shielding and expose fire fighters to high
level radiation.
They estimate the shielding could be destroyed by 30 minutes exposure to severe fire
temperatures.
Should a fire fighter closely approach a 2,000-Roentgen source of Gamma radiation, he
would receive serious - if not fatal exposure. (Refer to Time, Distance and Dosage
Charts.)
To prevent this, and because it is practically impossible to know each and every material
involved, either during or after a serious fire, the Officer in charge will see that the
radiation monitoring equipment carried in the District Chiefs car and Squad 52 is used to
check for radioactivity in any fire in Commercial Carriers, Truck Depots, Warehouses,
etc., that has been identified with a radiation placard.
The Chart on pages 41, 42, and 43 will aid you in understanding the application of the
time and distance protective factors. Simply stated, the less time spent in the hazard area,
the less exposure and the further away from the source, the less exposure.

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
203.20
Page 36 of 40
T.

RADIOLOGICAL INCIDENTS (continued)

Rev. 6/96

Shielding is very effective in the case of Alpha or Beta Radiation. With Gamma
Radiation, shielding is usually considered impractical in emergency operations; however,
staying behind an earthen wall or other such barrier, can be effective.
At least one person operating in each team in the Red Zone, must be equipped with a
dosimeter. The Health Department has several dosimeters available for our use.
Dosimeters are also carried in the District Chiefs car and Squad 52.
U.

KNOWN RADIATION SOURCES
If anyone concerned has knowledge of additional sources, please report them to the
Cincinnati Fire Department, Training Bureau, 352-2340.
The following is a list of radioactive materials stored or used inside the Cincinnati city
limits. This list was compiled from the latest State of Ohio and Cincinnati Health
Department radiation registration. The list is in alphabetical order by company name:
COMPANY NAME

ADDRESS

Bethesda N. Hosp. Nuclear Medicine

10500 Montgomery Rd., Cinti, OH 45242

Bethesda Oak Hosp. Nuclear Medicine

619 Oak St., Cinti, OH 45206-1690

Bruck Hartman Environmental Inc.

4055 Executive Park Dr., Cinti, OH 45241

Cardiology Consultants, Inc.

10525 Montgomery Rd., Cinti, OH 45242

Christ Hosp. Blue Ash Testing Center
Nuclear Medicine

4747 Lake Forest Dr., Cinti, OH 45242

Christ Hospital Nuclear Medicine

2139 Auburn Ave., Cinti, OH 45219

Cincinnati Health Dept.

3101 Burnet Ave., Cinti, OH 45229

Cinti. Metro Housing Authority

1041 Cutter St., Cinti, OH 45203

Deaconess Hospital Nuclear Medicine

311 Straight St., Cinti, OH 45219

Dosimeter Corporation

6106 Interstate Cr., Cinti, OH 45242

General Electric Co.

One Neumann Way, Cinti, OH 45215

Good Sam. Hospital Nuclear Medicine

375 Dixmyth Ave., Cinti, OH 45220

Greater Cinti. Cardiovascular Consult.

2990 Mack Road, Fairfield, OH 45014

Greater Cinti. Cardiovascular Consult.

415 Straight St., Ste. 300, Cinti, OH 45219

Hamilton County Park District

10245 Winton Rd., Cinti, OH 45231

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
203.20
Page 37 of 40
HC Nutting Company

4120 Airport Rd., Box C
Cinti, OH 45226

Jewish Hosp. Kenwood Nuclear Med.

8000 Kenwood Rd., Cinti, OH 45236

Jewish Hospital Nuclear Medicine

3200 Burnet Ave., Cinti, OH 45229

Medi-Physics, Inc.

344A Gest St., Cinti, OH 45203

Mercy Hosp. Anderson Nuclear Med.

7500 State Rd., Cinti, OH 45230

Merrell Pharmaceuticals, Inc.

2110 E. Galbraith Rd., Cinti, OH 45215

Midwest Nuclear

46 E. Hollister St., Cinti, OH 45219

Mobile Radon Diagnostics, Inc.

3975 Erie Ave., Cinti, OH 45208

Providence Hosp. Nuclear Medicine

2446 Kipling Ave., Cinti, OH 45239

St. Francis-St. George Hosp. Nuclear Med. 3131 Queen City Ave., Cinti, OH 45238
Shriners Burns Institute

3229 Burnet Ave., Cinti, OH 45267

Syncor International Corp.

2300 Wall St., Ste. R, Cinti, OH 45212

UC Childrens Hospital Medical Center

Elland & Bethesda Avenues
Cincinnati, OH 45229-2899

UC Radiation Safety Laboratory

231 Bethesda Ave., Box 670591
Cinti, OH 45267

UC Radiation Safety Laboratory

234 Goodman Ave., Cinti, OH 45267

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
203.20
Page 38 of 40
(SEE CHART FOR EFFECT OF DISTANCE)

Rev. 1/90

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
203.20
Page 39 of 40
(SEE CHART FOR EFFECT OF TIME)

Rev. 1/90

EFFECT OF

100 MR per Hr.

TIME
ON RADIATION

EXPOSURE
1 HR. 100 MR

2 HR. 200 MR

4 HR. 400 MR

8 HR.

800 MR

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
203.20
Page 40 of 40
Rev. 1/90
(SEE CHART FOR UNSHIELDED)

UNSHIELDED

1000 CURIE (1 - KILOCURIE)

1 CURIE COBALT 60 = 1.59 /HR. AT 3 FT.

(APPROX)

Approx. Time to
receive 25
emergency dose

3 Ft.

1590

56 Sec.

9 Ft.

176

8 Min.

15 Ft.

63

24 Min.

24 Ft.

25

60 Min.

30 Ft.

16

94 Min.

60 Ft.

4

375 Min.

90 Ft.

2

833 Min.

Distance

r/HR.


=== 203.21 Hazardous Device Response ===
Hazardous Device Operations
203.21
Page 1 of 3
Rev. 4/13
_________________________________________________________________________________

CHAPTER II Operations
SUBJECT 3 Emergency Operations
TOPIC 21
Hazardous Device Operations
A) PURPOSE
1) To establish standard operating procedures for fire suppression personnel at incidents
involving hazardous devices/explosives.
2) To identify roles and responsibilities for the responding units.
B) OBJECTIVES (listed by priority)
1) To ensure safety of the Public
2) To promote safety for all responders
3) To provide for the protection and preservation of public and private property
4) To provide for the collection and preservation of evidence
5) To provide for the convenience of the public and restoration of services
C) C. SAFETY
1) Personnel WILL NOT move, open or disturb any potential hazards to confirm that a
“hazard” does exist. DO NOT APPROACH A SUSPICIOUS PACKAGE.
2) Units shall not stage in direct line of sight of the incident and shall position themselves,
whenever possible, behind buildings or natural barriers and away from glass windows.
3) All responding personnel should remain cognizant of the potential for secondary devices.
4) CFD personnel may wear body armor and/or full protective gear, including SCBA,
during operations at the discretion of Command. It is necessary to realize that public
safety personnel may be the intended target.
5) Members shall not transmit on mobile phones or portable radios within 50 feet of the
Exclusion Zone.
a) All radio/electrical devices must be turned OFF when operating within 50 feet of the
Exclusion Zone.
b) Telemetry equipment and Mobile Data Computer (MDC) must also be turned off when
operating within 50 feet of the Exclusion Zone.
6) Taking photos/video of EOD operations by members or the media is prohibited (except at the
discretion of the senior ranking Bomb Technician) The Incident Commander or designee
shall have the media stage away from the incident and shall not allow video or photos of
downrange operations.
D) INCIDENT MANAGEMENT
1) Bombing/Explosive Incidents are to be treated as crime scenes, unless otherwise directed.
2) Due to the sensitive nature of these incidents, and the likely response of many different
agencies, a unified Command Post will most likely be established.
3) The location of the Command Post will be coordinated with the ranking bomb technician and
the incident commander. Under no circumstances shall the Command Post be within 300 feet
of the suspected device or post blast scene. This distance shall be increased appropriately
based on the type and nature of the threat.
4) Communications:

Hazardous Device Operations
203.21
Page 2 of 3
Rev. 4/13
_________________________________________________________________________________
a) All personnel shall monitor the assigned Fire Ground Channel, DO NOT TRANSMIT
except in an emergency, The IC may transmit instructions and information as guided by
the Bomb Technicians.
E) BOMB THREAT RESPONSE
1) CFD response to a reported bomb threat will be limited to those incidents that pose a
significant threat and to those premises deemed to be priority targets.
2) Units shall stage at one location,
a) Stage a minimum of 300 feet from the incident. This distance may be increased
depending upon the nature of the threat.
b) Units shall not stage in direct line of sight of the incident and shall position themselves,
whenever possible, behind buildings or natural barriers and away from glass windows.
3) The decision to evacuate a premise is the responsibility of the property owner or manager
until a device or suspect package is found at which time Command will mandate the
evacuation
4) Search of a premise is the responsibility of the owner/manager. Command may have units
assist by organizing search teams.
a) Each team must have a radio for monitoring the Fire Ground – Not to transmit.
b) Team will usually consist of K-9 with handler and a bomb technician. These may be
accompanied by a representative of the owner/manager.
c) Command will coordinate search teams activities to ensure a thorough search.
d) If a suspicious item is located, Command will notify teams of its location and sound the
evacuation. Once all teams report to Command, Bomb Techs will investigate. After the
item is cleared the search may resume.
e) If no threat is found, Command will report this to the owner/manager. (Do not state that
the area is “safe” but that no devices were found)
F) SUSPICIOUS PACKAGE / DEVICE RESPONSE
1) When approaching the scene, slow down to assess and observe the surroundings for
suspicious activities, items, and/or persons.
2) First arriving unit duties:
a) Contact complainant and identify the location of threat, withdraw as necessary. It may be
necessary to have the complainant walk out of the exclusion zone to the apparatus.
b) Survey area for hazards- be aware of the possibility of secondary devices that target first
responders.
c) Establish zones and begin evacuation.
(i) RED ZONE – Hazard area where suspect device/explosive(s) is located. This zone
should be a minimum of 300 ft. radius. NOTE: ONLY EOD PERSONNEL SHALL
OPERATE IN RED ZONE – Barrier tape shall be placed ASAP
(ii) YELLOW ZONE – This zone shall be an area at least 50 ft. wide outside of the Red
Zone. This is where EOD personnel will stage equipment. Barrier tape shall be placed
ASAP.
(iii) GREEN ZONE –Command Post shall be staged in this zone at a location that takes
advantage of existing cover.
NOTE: Civilians and media personnel shall be located a minimum of 100 ft. from
the Command Post and staged emergency response vehicles.

Hazardous Device Operations
203.21
Page 3 of 3
Rev. 4/13
_________________________________________________________________________________
(iv) EOD personnel may request larger zones.
(v) Fire Department is responsible for evacuation of the immediate area (Red and Yellow
Zones).
(vi) Police Department is responsible for the evacuation of the surrounding areas and
securing perimeter outside of the yellow zone.
3) Incident Commander’s duties:
a) Establish Command.
b) Establish communications with Police for perimeter security / traffic control.
c) Assure scene is secure and suspicious item is not moved or disturbed
d) Assure zones are established and evacuation from the Red and Yellow zones is underway
or completed.
e) Attempt to locate and secure witnesses.
f) Brief EOD team upon their arrival.
g) Stage any additional units at a remote location.
4) Engine Company duties:
a) Locate a water supply and alternate supply and standby for possible hose line
deployment.
b) Assist with evacuation as directed.
5) Ladder Company duties:
a) Evacuate immediate area and establish zones including barrier tape.
G) POST BLAST RESPONSE
1) Should a detonation occur prior to the arrival of the Bomb Squad, or if units are initially
dispatched for a reported explosion, personnel should take the following actions:
a) Survey the blast area for unsafe conditions from a protected area
b) Evacuate all people from the area and establish control zones
c) Perform a PAR
d) Wear full protective clothing and utilize Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA) for
any activities in the hot zone.
e) Limit activities in the hot zone to rescue operations until cleared by EOD.
f) Conduct a rapid assessment to identify the potential for chemical, biological or
radiological involvement.
g) Estimate the number of casualties and activate the mass casualty incident procedures as
necessary.
h) Do not disturb any potential evidence.
i) Personnel should be aware of the possibility of secondary devices that target first
responders.


=== 203.24 Bulk Power Emergencies ===
Bulk Power Emergencies
Section 203.24
Rev. 8/08
Page 1 of 1
CHAPTER
SUBJECT:
TOPIC

II
3
24

Operations
Emergency Operations
DUKE ENERGY BULK POWER EMERGENCY PROCEDURE

Definition
A. Duke Energy has five Bulk Power Emergency levels to deal with electrical power
shortages in our area.
1. Level 1 and 2 deal with a potential shortage.
2. At level 3 voluntary reductions in electrical use are requested.
3. Level 4 and 5, rotating “brown outs” and “black outs” may occur.
Policy
A. The Fire Department will be notified when Level Three is put into effect. At that
time, Fire Dispatch will send an all call page and teletype message to all companies.
B. When a Level Four or Five Emergency Level is reached, Fire Dispatch will again send
an all call page and teletype message. Additionally, the Zetron alert all will be activated
and a radio message broadcasted over Channel Four. The Communications Center will
also notify all companies and necessary staff by phone using a recorded message giving
necessary details.
C. The duration of a brownout will usually range from two to four hours, normally
between the hours of 1200 hours and 1900 hours.
1. A brownout should be handled the same as a power outage due to a storm.
2. There may not be a warning given prior to an actual brownout; therefor, when
level three is declared, from that point on until the situation is under control, a
brownout could occur at any time.
3. If the power is off to your firehouse, the house radio and Zetron will not work.
Therefore, the radio will have to be monitored by mobile or portable.
D. All company commanders shall review procedures with all members for handling
power outages specifically sections 203.05 and 203.16 of the Operation Manual and
section 1101.05A of the procedures manual.


=== 203.26 Chemical Suicide ===
CHEMICAL SUICIDE
203.26
Page 1 of 3
March 2014
______________________________________________________________________
CHAPTER II
Operations
SUBJECT 3
Emergency Operations
TOPIC 26
Chemical Suicides

SCOPE
Chemical suicide has been on the rise since 2008. This method of suicide first became
prevalent in Japan and has spread across the world with numerous “How-To” websites
providing detailed instructions. This form of suicide can be potentially dangerous to the
first responder. The chemical involved is usually Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S), Hydrogen
Cyanide (HCN) or any other gas that may displace oxygen. These chemicals are
produced using readily available household chemicals and are mixed in an open
container (Garbage can, bucket, pots or a cooler). The two primary ingredients are an
acid based product (Toilet bowl cleansers, acidic based drain cleaners or acids such as
muriatic or sulfuric) and sulfur based compound (detergents, pesticides) and when
combined they produce H2S.These suicides are usually staged in small confined spaces
such as vehicles or small rooms in order to increase the concentration of the chemical.
This advisory shall serve as interim procedures until formal procedures can be adopted.
OBJECTIVE
To outline the Cincinnati Fire Department’s, duties and responsibilities at a Chemical
Suicide incident.
Goals:
Save Lives
Prevent Injuries
Reduction of Property Loss
Restoration of Vital Services
1. Scene Size-Up - Recognition
a. Initial report of a patient/unresponsive person in a vehicle or other confined space
(Bathroom/closet). Be suspicious if the vehicle is parked well away from other
vehicles.
b. Strange odor in the area: Rotten eggs or sewer gas (H2S), Bitter Almonds (HCN)
c. Be alert for warning signs stating to “Stay away – Chemical hazard” or “Call
Hazmat”
d. Efforts to seal the environment with tape, towels, plastic or weather stripping.
e. Presence of containers of common ingredients.
f. Unusual presence of buckets, pots or other containers for mixing.

CHEMICAL SUICIDE
203.26
Page 2 of 3
March 2014
______________________________________________________________________
***If any of the above factors are observed, request a hazmat response be dispatched. If
located in a building – evacuate the entire building***
2. Initial Response Actions - If any of the above indicators are present.
a. Determine responsiveness or signs of life.
i. Tap on the glass to illicit a response from the patient
ii. Observe for signs of breathing
b. If patient has signs of life remove the patient from the area to fresh air after
donning PPE. Firefighters must be wearing fire clothes with SCBA when
opening the space and removing the patient. (H2S & HCN are flammable
and toxic gases) Inhaling even a small dose of the gas will be toxic to the rescuer.
c. Perform emergency decon of a viable patient by removing all clothing. Double
bag removed clothing. Flush with water for 5-15 minutes if the patient has
contacted the liquid. The patient’s breath may continue to off-gas. The standard 4gas meter will monitor for H2S.
d. Avoid contact with any of the material.
e. If the patient is unresponsive and does not have any signs of life do not open the
confining space. Wait for the arrival of the hazmat response and District Chief.
Avoid disturbing the scene and attempt to preserve as much evidence as possible.

CHEMICAL SUICIDE
203.26
Page 3 of 3
March 2014
______________________________________________________________________


=== 203.27 Streetcar Emergencies ===
Streetcar Emergencies
203.27
Page 1 of 13
July 2016

Chapter II

Operations

Subject 3

Emergency Operations

Topic 2

Streetcar Emergencies

A.

PURPOSE
This procedure provides guidelines for managing emergency incidents involving the
Metro Streetcar System, highlights specific life safety hazards inherent to the system,
and also discusses considerations for shutting down power to the system when
necessary. This procedure also provides streetcar system information necessary for
safe operation and focuses on the most likely streetcar scenarios crews will
encounter. These guidelines are not a universal remedy, and due to the limitless
possible scenarios responding personnel could encounter, responding crews should
always consider the risk management profile and exercise caution when operating
near the streetcar system.

B.

TERMINOLOGY AND SPECIFICATIONS
1.

Streetcar Terminology
a. SCV = Streetcar Vehicle
b. OCS= Overhead contact system (overhead streetcar electrical wires)
c. TPSS= Traction power sub-station
d. Pantograph – Mechanical arm that electrically connects the streetcar vehicle
to the overhead contact system wires
e. MOF = Maintenance and Operations Facility
f. ETS= Emergency Trip Switch (located at TPSS)
g. OC= Operations control (nerve center for communications and operations
of light rail)
h. Sectionalization – Isolating parts of the streetcar system
2. Specifications
The streetcar system is an electrically powered public transportation system. A detailed
map of the route, stops, and substations are provided in the appendix along with a list
of important telephone numbers. The streetcar uses a single track system that runs in a
loop through downtown and the Over-the-Rhine area.
The SCVs operate on DC electric current supplied from the traction power sub-stations
(TPSS) by a single overhead contact system wire (OCS). Streetcar vehicles (SCVs)
connect with the OCS via a pantograph that can be raised and lowered. The tracks
operate as the negative return (not a significant electrical threat) for the current. The
Operations Control (OC) functions as the nerve center for the streetcar system, and is
able to communicate, coordinate, and remotely shut off power to the OCS. The OC is
located at the maintenance and operations facility located at 1927 Race Street. The
estimated train frequency is every 12-15 minutes during peak operations. however

Streetcar Emergencies
203.27
Page 2 of 13
July 2016

unusual streetcar movements (testing, charters, etc.) or traffic conditions can cause
streetcars to operate more or less frequently .
The SCVs have an operator (driver) located in the forward cab (each end has a cab) of
the SCV. The (operator/driver) must operate the train by utilizing a controller equipped
with a "dead man" switch. In the event the operator becomes incapacitated, the SCV
will come to a stop.
The streetcar will obey all traffic signals however there will be certain intersections
where optical sensors will allow the streetcar to proceed through the intersection while
all other traffic is at a four-way stop. These intersections are equipped with a special
“lunar bar” type transit signal to assist the streetcar operator in moving through the
intersection. Responding fire companies should proceed with extra caution at these
intersections.
3. Streetcar Vehicle
a. The vehicle is 77’ 6” long, 12’ 8” high 8’ 8” wide with a Cab at each end
and four doors on both sides
b. The vehicle weighs 78,400 lbs empty with 154 person max capacity (38
seated/116 standing)
c. The normal maximum operating speed is 25 mph, and up to 44 mph during
high speed testing. The streetcar will be governed at 25 mph when fully
operational.
d. Approximately 529 foot stopping distance at 25 mph with passengers using
normal braking or 218 feet using the maximum emergency braking.
e. Very Quiet and equipped with both a gong (bell) and horn.
f. There are three sections to a streetcar vehicle
i. The “A” Section – Cab and car WITHOUT pantograph
ii. The “B” Section – Cab and car WITH the pantograph attached
iii. The “Center” Section – Flexible car between the “A” and “B” cab.

B

Center

A

4. Track Switch
a. Tracks that move when manually thrown by a streetcar staff member
changing the route of the streetcar.
b. Manually operated and contain switch heaters (750v)
5. Traction Power Sub-Stations (TPSS)
a. The transfer power stations will supply specific sections of the track – a color
coded schematic will be provided in the appendix. It may be necessary to
shut down two stations to de-energize the line in certain locations.
b. The sub-stations will be protected by a fencing system. The key will be
located in a Knox box near the gate.

Streetcar Emergencies
203.27
Page 3 of 13
July 2016

c. Emergency Trip Switches (ETS) are located outside the door to the TPSS in
a silver box on the exterior of the building. The box is opened using a
Knox box key. Pushing the button may or may not kill the power to the
section of the streetcar overhead contact system as the system is built
with electrical redundancy. (Other TPSS may back feed the system. In
addition, other streetcar vehicles moving along the system can generate
electricity back into the system through their braking system.)
d. The traction power sub-stations are located as follows
i. TPSS #1 – Riverfront Transit Center
ii. TPSS #2 – 101 E. Court
iii. TPSS #3 – 1829 Race
iv. TPSS (Yard) – 117 Henry
v. TPSS (MOF) – located inside the south end of the MOF building
e. The TPSS contain electrical rectifiers, breakers, switchgear and transformers
and Ni-cad batteries
f. Electricity AC 13,500 volts in, and 550-1000 volts DC out
6. Overhead Contact System
a. The wire is solid grooved copper 350 kcmil (.592 inch diameter) noninsulated wire carrying 750v DC
b. 0-4000 AMPs (a taser is .00021 amps 50k volts) AMPS KILL
c. Wire is tensioned at 2000 lbs however the tension will fluctuate with the
ambient temperature as the wire expands and contracts.
d. The normal height of the light rail overhead contact system wire is 19’ 6”;
BEWARE of lights, flags, or anything else sticking up when crossing the
line. NOTE – The OCS may be as low as 14’6” in locations where the
OCS travels under overhead walkways

Streetcar Emergencies
203.27
Page 4 of 13
July 2016

7. Pantograph
a. The pantograph connects the SCV to the overhead contact system to power
the streetcar. (Always size up the pantograph!) If the pantograph is in
contact with the OCS the ENTIRE pantograph is energized. Do not place
personnel on top of the car when the pantograph is in contact with the
OCS.
b. Lowering the pantograph to de-energize the vehicle can be accomplished in
two methods
i. Automatic – a switch is located in the cab that will electronically
lower and raise the pantograph. The switch is located on the righthand side of the driver’s console. Push the RED button to lower the
pantograph.
Switch location to
lower pantograph

Key

Push the RED button
to lower the
pantograph

Streetcar Emergencies
203.27
Page 5 of 13
July 2016

ii. Manual Lowering – The pantograph can be manually lowered from
inside the “B” car.
1. The key in the cab of the SCV must be in the “off” position.
2. A shaft is located in the ceiling behind a cover plate.
Remove the cover plate using a “square key.” The square
key is located on a ring with the operator’s key in the cab.
3. Retrieve the pantograph manual crank from the overhead
compartment. The “square key” will unlock the
compartment.
4. Insert the crank onto the shaft in the ceiling and rotate in the
direction noted to lower the pantograph.

iii. Auxiliary switch – If the cab is significantly damaged, the pantograph
can be lowered using the auxiliary switch in the opposite cab. The
auxiliary switch is located on the right side wall (when seated in
operators seat) just inside the door, under the electric panel in each
cab. Turn and hold the auxiliary switch and it will lower the
pantograph. (You will hear the power to the ventilation systems shut
down)

Streetcar Emergencies
203.27
Page 6 of 13
July 2016

8. Streetcar vehicle lighting
a. The SCV has lights on the front and rear of the vehicle.
b. Lighting configurations
i. Red/Amber – The vehicle is stopped and the keys are out.
ii. Red/Red – The vehicle is traveling away from you and you are
looking at the rear of the vehicle
iii. Amber/Amber with Headlights – The vehicle is traveling toward you
and you are looking at the front of the vehicle.

Streetcar Emergencies
203.27
Page 7 of 13
July 2016

C.

POLICY
1. Response
a. Adhere to all emergency response procedures when crossing the streetcar
system.
b. Be cautious of left hand turns across the streetcar system.
2. Operating in streetcar system intersections
a. Never park apparatus on or between the streetcar tracks
b. When operating in streetcar intersections for incidents such as motor vehicle
accidents company officers should consider the impact of streetcar traffic on
scene safety. When streetcar traffic could compromise the safety of
firefighters operating on or adjacent to the streetcar tracks, the company
officers will contact Fire Dispatch and request they contact the Operations
Center (OC) to temporarily stop streetcar traffic in the vicinity of the
accident.
c. The streetcar should be allowed to continue operating when it doesn't
compromise scene safety. Activities within 5’ of the centerline of the tracks
could be impacted by streetcar traffic. Nonetheless, crews must remain
watchful for SCVs and company officers should consider assigning a crew
member to watch for SCVs. When in question, always error on the side of
scene safety and stop SCV traffic as necessary.
3. Shutting down power to the OCS
a. If there is an immediate life safety risk, request SORTA/Transdev Streetcar
Supervisor through fire dispatch AND push the emergency trip switch
(ETS) at the closest TPSS. REMINDER: Pushing the button may or may
not kill the power to the section of the streetcar overhead contact system
as the system is built with electrical redundancy. (Other TPSS may back
feed the system. In addition, other streetcar vehicles moving along the
system can generate electricity back into the system through their braking
system.)
b. Depending on the location and potential for back feed, a second ETS may
need to be pushed on the TPSS at the opposite side of the incident to
create a safety zone. (This still does not guarantee the electric is
sectionalized or de-energized)
c. Metro/Transdev personnel will respond and place grounding straps from
the OCS to the rail on each side of the incident creating a safe work zone.
This is the only procedure to ensure the electricity has been sectionalized
and de-energized. This process may take 30-45 minutes from request.

Streetcar Emergencies
203.27
Page 8 of 13
July 2016

D.

PRIORITIES
Life Safety
Incident Stabilization
Property Conservation

E.

OPERATIONS
1. Emergency medical response on the streetcar (passenger)
a. SCV operator will coordinate the next stop location with the OC and Fire
Dispatch. The SCV will always proceed to the next stop location for EMS
response.
b. Fire Dispatch will provide the address and stop name location during
dispatch
c. After entering the car, have operator show you the key is out. This engages
the brake and disables the throttle ensuring the SCV won't move. The key
is located on the left-hand side of the operator’s console.

Key

d. As long as SCV is functioning normally and on the track there is no need
to shut down power. This will allow the heat/air conditioning and lighting
to continue functioning
e. Be aware of traffic safety at all times
f. Response: 1 Engine, 1 Medic,
g. Safety – Members shall wear all required PPE for response including
reflective vests
h. Note: Patients in wheelchairs can only be evacuated through the
middle doors of the SCV.
2. Emergency medical response on the streetcar (operator)
a. SCV operator will coordinate the next stop location with the OC and Fire
Dispatch if physically able. If the operator becomes physically incapacitated
the “dead-man” switch will operate and stop the vehicle.
b. The SCV operator will be located behind a glass partition isolating the
operator from the passengers. If it is necessary to force entry to access the
operator. Consider breaking the glass to the side of the door and reaching in
and unlocking the door.

Streetcar Emergencies
203.27
Page 9 of 13
July 2016

c. Have operator remove the key or remove the key if the operator is
incapacitated. This engages the brake and disables the throttle ensuring the
SCV won't move. (See E-1-c above)
d. Response: 1 Engine, 1 Medic,
e. Safety – Members shall wear all required PPE for response including
reflective vests
3. Vehicle accidents – SCV vs. another vehicle
a. In most instances when SCVs collide with other vehicles they do NOT derail.
b. When SCVs derail, the operator can usually lower the pantograph and
therefore eliminate the electrocution risk from the OCS.
c. Occasionally, when SCVs derail the pantograph becomes entangled in the
overhead wire and cannot be lowered. In this scenario, the entire SCV
becomes energized and poses a significant electrocution risk to both
emergency responders and any passenger who makes ground contact
(completes the circuit).
d. When responding to any accident involving a SCV the size up must include
the following:
i. Is the pantograph raised and connected?
ii. Is the pantograph tangled in the OCS? If Yes DO NOT LOWER
THE PANTOGRAPH - This could damage the OCS.
iii. Is the SCV on the tracks?
iv. Is the OCS intact? (no poles or wires down)
e. Electrical Hazard Actions: The SCV is derailed and the pantograph is still in
contact with the OCS or if the OCS has been compromised and lines are
down.
i. Do not approach the SCV or track
ii. De-energize the OCS by utilizing the procedure in Section C-Policy 3.
iii. Wait to approach the SCV and advise passengers to stay inside the
SCV until power confirmed shut down by a Metro supervisor.
iv. The Metro supervisor will confirm that the appropriate breakers have
been racked out and locked out in the TPSS. The supervisor should
also attach a meter to the line to confirm power is off and attach a
grounding strap. At this point power is assumed safe. See Section C
Policy 3.

Streetcar Emergencies
203.27
Page 10 of 13
July 2016

f. SCV access and extrication.
i. Easiest access is through the SCV door – Manually open the doors by
using the exterior emergency door releases located on each side of the
vehicle. There are two releases on each side of the vehicle – one at
each end. The releases are located behind a body panel.

ii. Cutting through the body of the SCV does not provide adequate
access to the patient compartment. Attack the doors if at all possible.
iii. The SCV has a bumper and bar three inches off of the track to reduce
the possibility of people or cars becoming trapped underneath.
g. Lifting the SCV
i. SCVs are extremely heavy and unstable when lifted. Lift the SCV as a
last resort. Metro has a specially designed vehicle to safely lift and rerail the SCV however the response time is 30-60 minutes.
ii. Emergency lifting operations will only be conducted for the rescue of
a viable patient. Metro re-railing equipment will be utilized for all
other lifting
iii. Lifting procedures:
1. Ensure key has been removed by the driver and the
pantograph has been lowered.
2. Lifting plates are mounted along the bottom frame of the SCV.
3. If possible, lift the “A” section or the “B” section or both.
Avoid lifting the “Center” section by itself.
4. Utilize a bottle jack and wood cribbing to lift the car.

Lifting Plate

h. Response: 1 Engine, 1 Ladder, 1 Heavy Rescue, 1 Medic, 1 District Chief
and a Safety Officer (SO2 shall survey scene safety and be vigilant regarding
electrical and traffic safety)

Streetcar Emergencies
203.27
Page 11 of 13
July 2016

4.

5.

6.

7.

i. Safety – Members shall wear all required PPE for response including
reflective vests (If not wearing full firefighting PPE)
Vehicle Accident: Streetcar vs. Pedestrian
a. If the victim has been thrown out of the pathway and away from the rails of
the streetcar – treat patient per protocol of car vs. pedestrian
b. If patient is within the pathway or near the rails of the streetcar, isolate the
streetcar by having the driver remove the key and lower the pantograph.
c. If the victim is under the streetcar, refer to lifting procedures: Section
Operations 3-g-iii
Fire in a Streetcar Vehicle
a. The SCV is not equipped with a fire protection system. Most of the working
equipment is located on the top of the SCV. (Power, Heat/AC, batteries) The
streetcar is specified to NFPA 130. The floor and ceiling have a 30 minute
burn through rating.
b. Evacuate the SCV
c. De-energize the SCV (lower the pantograph) prior to attempting any fire
suppression activities.
d. If necessary, disconnect the batteries using the battery isolation switch
located behind an access panel in the “B” section of the SCV. The access
panel is removed using a “square key”
e. Stop other SCV traffic as required
f. Use the apparatus to protect the scene from traffic for firefighters and
passengers
g. Response: 1 Engine, 1 Ladder, 1 Heavy Rescue, 1 Medic, Safety Officer
(SO2 shall survey scene safety and be vigilant regarding electrical and traffic
safety)
h. Safety – Members shall wear all required PPE and SCBA for response
including reflective vests (If not wearing full firefighting PPE)
Fire in a Traction Power Sub-Station (TPSS)
a. Treat this fire like a fire in an electrical sub-station or vault.
b. Do not enter or place water on the fire until it has been verified that the TPSS
has been de-energized.
c. Be aware of the overhead contact system
d. Consider pushing the ETS if safe to access.
e. Response: 1 Engine, 1 Ladder, 1 Heavy Rescue, 1 Medic, 1 District Chief,
Safety Officer (SO2 shall survey scene safety and be vigilant regarding
electrical and traffic safety)
f. Safety – Members shall wear all required PPE and SCBA for response
including reflective vests (If not wearing full firefighting PPE)
Structure Fire Operations along streetcar system
a. The overhead contact system presents an additional electrical hazard. Take
additional precautions when spotting aerial apparatus. Just standing on top of
the apparatus places the firefighter dangerously close to the contact lines
(19.5’). NOTE – The OCS may be as low as 14’6” in locations where the
OCS travels under overhead walkways.

Streetcar Emergencies
203.27
Page 12 of 13
July 2016

b. Maintain ten feet clearance in every direction from the OCS to include the
apparatus, ladders and any other equipment.
c. Do not operate hose streams close to the OCS as an electrocution risk exists
if a straight stream contacts the OCS. If exterior hose lines must be operated
– shut down the OCS. (See Section C-3 above)
d. Companies along the streetcar route should pre-plan apparatus placement for
the least impact on the streetcar system.
e. If necessary to lay fire lines across the streetcar tracks, advise fire dispatch to
shut down the streetcar system in your area of operation. Flag and stop
streetcar vehicles that approach a hose or other apparatus placed on tracks.
SCV will sever hose lines if is crosses over them.

Streetcar Emergencies
203.27
Page 13 of 13
July 2016

8. Natural gas leak in vicinity of streetcar system
a. Streetcar produces significant sparks and could represent a source of ignition
for natural gas leaks
b. Stop SCV traffic in the vicinity for any significant gas leak in close
proximity. Have Fire dispatch contact Metro streetcar OC to suspend
operations and lower pantographs of any vehicles in proximity.
c. Response: 1 Engine, 1 Ladder, 1 Heavy Rescue, 1 District Chief, Safety
Officer (SO2 shall survey scene safety and be vigilant regarding electrical
and traffic safety)
d. Safety – Members shall wear all required PPE for response including
reflective vests (If not wearing full firefighting PPE)
9. Suspicious Package/Bomb Response on Streetcar Vehicle
a. The Cincinnati Police Department will investigate any bomb threat to the
streetcar system
b. Once a suspicious package or device has been determined follow
Operations Procedures 203.21 Hazardous Device Response.


=== 204.01 Emergency Medical Responses Updated 12.15 ===
EMERGENCY MEDICAL RESPONSES
204.01
Page 1 of 14
Rev.11/2015

CHAPTER II

Operations

SUBJECT 4

Emergency Medical Services

TOPIC I

Emergency Medical Responses

A.

PURPOSE
1.

B.

C.

To establish a standard approach and general guidelines for Emergency Medical
Responses.

SCOPE
1.

Actual medical treatment is not a part of this procedure.

2.

EMT Basic and Paramedic protocol are not a part of this procedure. Protocols are
delineated in the current Southwest Ohio Protocols for Pre-Hospital Care.

3.

The Current Southwest Ohio Protocols for Pre-Hospital Care are adopted by
reference as part of this topic.

POLICY
1.

Fire Department personnel must provide the level of care for which they have
been authorized by Fire Department training and certification. All skills and care
will be administered up to, but not beyond, the level of training of each member.

2.

Fire Department personnel shall make every attempt to provide the most
appropriate level of emergency medical care on every response

3.

Fire Department Medic Units will be staffed with either;
a. One (1) EMT Basic and one (1) EMT Paramedic or
b. Two (2) EMT Paramedics

4.

Unfortunately, even though we are an emergency service we are going to be
called for injuries and illnesses that are not necessarily emergency situations. This
is when our professionalism must prevail as we provide service to the community.
The emergency is in the eyes of the caller, and the Fire Department has agreed to
provide Emergency Medical Service. Fire Department personnel shall be
professional and courteous in their dealings with the public. Members performing
Emergency Medical Services deal with individuals at times of crisis and mental
anguish and must consider the needs of the entire situation while at the scene.

EMERGENCY MEDICAL RESPONSES
204.01
Page 2 of 14
Rev.11/2015
Procedures cannot be written to cover every possible situation, therefore, common
sense and good judgment must be exercised at the scene of all emergencies,
including medical responses.
D.

OBJECTIVE
1.

To provide the citizens and visitors of Cincinnati with the best possible
pre-hospital medical treatment in a courteous, professional and cost effective
manner. To accomplish this objective, The Cincinnati Fire Department will send
the closest available Engine or Ladder Company on every Emergency Medical
Response.

2.

The highest ranking on-scene Fire Officer shall assess each situation encountered
to determine safety to members, paying particular attention to:

3.

E.

a.

Indications of victims suffering from contagious disease, protecting
members who are attending to such patients with the equipment provided
and limiting exposures.

b.

Scenes of violent crimes, or situations presenting a possible threat to
personnel, withholding care until the scene is secured if indicated.

c.

Mentally disturbed and unstable victims, taking a cautious approach,
obtaining police assistance as needed.

When at the scene of fires or other emergencies requiring personal protective
equipment, members assigned to Medic Units shall not enter hazardous areas
unless ordered and properly protected.

CHAIN OF COMMAND - ROUTINE BUSINESS
1.

Members assigned to Medic Units are under the direct supervision of the Engine
Company Officer. When the Engine Company Officer is not available, Medic
Unit personnel shall be under the direct supervision of the Ladder Company
Officer.

.2.

When questions arise that are beyond the medical scope of the Engine or Truck
Company Officer concerning Medic Units the ALS Supervisor of the District will
be notified.

EMERGENCY MEDICAL RESPONSES
204.01
Page 3 of 14
Rev.11/2015
F.

G.

CHAIN OF COMMAND - ON SCENE
1.

The senior ranking Fire Department Officer shall be in-charge of all medical
emergencies, regardless of medical certification status.

2.

This senior ranking Fire Department Officer should defer medical decisions to the
most qualified Emergency Medical Technician on the scene. In cases of dispute
over the level of care to be provided, the senior ranking Fire Department Officer
can upgrade the level to a two Medic transport even over the objections of Medic
Unit personnel. This Officer cannot down grade a run to a Single Medic transport
when Paramedic personnel determine that Advanced Life Support is required.

3.

During transport, and other times when no Officer or Member in charge is
present, the senior member with the highest certification level is in charge of the
Medic Unit.

TRANSPORTATION CRITERIA
1.

2.

Emergent, immediate threat to life and/or limb:
a.

Critical/Unstable - Transport with Two Paramedics to the closest
appropriate hospital capable of handling the emergency.

b.

Critical/Stable - (Includes serious and/or special needs cases). Transport
with Two Paramedics.

Emergent, non-life and/or limb threatening emergency.
Transport with a Single Paramedic.

3.

Chronic illnesses or problems.
Transport with one or two paramedics as necessary.

4.

Minor Injuries.
Minor injuries requiring first aid such as band aids, ice packs, etc. can be directed
to find alternate methods of transportation to the hospital if they desire to visit
such a facility. All members are reminded that this option should be reserved for
visible minor injuries. If at any time you must use diagnostic skills to determine
the extent or severity of a malady we are required to err on the side of mercy and
transport the patient.

5.

Extenuating circumstances (psychiatric, violent, other, etc.).
Transport via appropriate Fire Department or Police Department vehicle.

EMERGENCY MEDICAL RESPONSES
204.01
Page 4 of 14
Rev.11/2015
6.

The Fire Department will not transport patients for scheduled medical
appointments

7.

The infant/child requiring spinal immobilization:
a.

8.

9.

For Infants to 65 lb Children - Transport utilizing the LSP Pedi Immobilizer

The infant/Child who is ill and/or injured not requiring spinal immobilization
a.

For infants/children: infant- 40 lbs the Pedi-Mate restraint system attached to
the cot.

b.

For children from 22 to 100 lbs the safeguard child transport may be utilized
attached to the cot

The infant/child who is uninjured/not ill
a.

CPD needs to be contacted to arrange transport for uninjured/not ill
child(ren) if the mother or guardian is transporting with CFD.

10.

b.

In rare/extreme cases the family child seat (secured appropriately) may be
secured on the Captains seat.

c.

At no time may a child be transported unrestrained or on the mother’s lap
with the mother secured to the cot

CFD Transports to Freestanding Emergency Departments (Notice 2013-037)


In general, freestanding EDs have most of the capabilities of an Emergency
Department but are not physically attached to a hospital. Patients who require
admission or evaluation by a surgeon or other medical specialist would
require transfer to another hospital.



The Cincinnati Fire Department strives to provide patients with the most
appropriate care, which includes transport to an appropriate destination. This
policy attempts to outline which patients should or should not be transported
to a freestanding ED, including Jewish-Rookwood and Mercy- Western Hills.
However, the policy cannot cover all clinical scenarios; when in doubt,
transport to a hospital-based Emergency Department.

EMERGENCY MEDICAL RESPONSES
204.01
Page 5 of 14
Rev.11/2015

DO NOT TAKE TO A FREESTANDING ED
Protocols specify transport to a specialty hospital
(cardiac arrest, STEMI, trauma, active labor/
imminent childbirth / field delivery)
Abnormal Vital Signs
Patients on CPAP, intubated, or requiring
BVM Ventilation
Complicated hand or eye injuries
Complex Lacerations
Open Fractures
STEMI, Chest Pain, CHF
Status Epilepticus
Critical High Blood Sugar
Stroke
Pediatric asthma, anaphylaxis, abdominal pain,
fever and <1 year old, possible meningitis,
possible
fractures, lacerations, cellulitis or abscess
Altered Mental Status (except
intoxication / overdose)
Hypoglycemia and on oral agents
Severe Respiratory Distress

OK FOR A FRESTANDING ED
Pregnant patient without pregnancy related
complaints such as bleeding, leakage of fluid,
or contractions.
Normal Vital Signs
Stable psychiatric patients (not belligerent
or requiring sedation / restraints)
Intoxication or Overdose
Simple Lacerations
Closed Fracture Distal to Knee / Elbow
Chest Pain <30 years old & normal 12-lead EKG
Seizure (no versed given)
Nausea, Vomiting, Diarrhea
General Illness with Normal Vital Signs
Minor MVC (Ambulatory at scene, normal vitals,
normal mental status, no abdominal pain,
no difficulty breathing)
Allergic Reaction without Airway or
Breathing Problems
Hypoglycemia and on Insulin only and
improved after D50 (or equivalent)
Opiate Overdose improved with Narcan
Rash
Back Pain without Arm or Leg Weakness
Simple Assault
Minor Burns
Fall From Standing Height (Normal Mental
Status,
Vital Signs, and No Weakness/Numbness <65
y/o)

EMERGENCY MEDICAL RESPONSES
204.01
Page 6 of 14
Rev.11/2015
H.

DETERMINING PATIENT DESTINATION
1.

Individual patient or family preference for a hospital facility shall be foremost
considered for transport, providing the quality of emergency care at the receiving
hospital is sufficient to handle the situation, and patient condition is conducive to
transportation to the requested facility.

2.

During times when Emergency Medical Resources are limited, (last Medic Unit
available is making response) or other factors (road conditions, traffic, inclement
weather, hospital diversion, etc) the patient and/or family shall be so informed and
asked to choose another hospital. Judgment must be exercised in taking victim to
closest appropriate emergency facility. Transportation of a patient to an
emergency facility other than their request requires thorough documentation in the
EPCR.

3.

Destination request made by the victim's attending physician, when the physician
is on the scene, shall be followed. Destination request by a physician in direct
contact with the scene shall be followed provided victim's condition permits.

4.

Some special medical emergencies exist that required transportation to specific
medical facilities as enumerated below:

5.

a.

Critical Burns to victims 16 years of age and older are to be taken to
University Hospital. Critical Burns to victims under 16 years of age are to
be taken to Children's Hospital.

b.

Neonatal (newborn) Emergencies are to be taken to Children's Hospital,
Good Samaritan Hospital or University Hospital.

c.

Critical Pediatric Emergencies are to be taken to Children's Hospital.

d.

Trauma patients as defined in Trauma Triage Guidelines should be taken
to a Level I Trauma Center (University hospital or Children's Hospital.

Hospital Destinations where CFD can transport to:
Christ Hospital
Children’s Hospital
University Hospital
Mercy Anderson
Mercy Fairfield

EMERGENCY MEDICAL RESPONSES
204.01
Page 7 of 14
Rev.11/2015
Mercy West
Jewish Hospital
St. Elizabeth Covington (former St. Luke West)
St. Elizabeth Fort Thomas (former St. Luke East)
Bethesda North
Good Samaritan
Veterans Affairs Medical Center
Free standing ER’s in the City limits including:

I.

-

Jewish-Rookwood

-

Mercy- Western Hills

DUTIES OF MEMBERS ASSIGNED TO MEDIC UNITS
1.

Remain available for emergency response as much as possible, keeping the Fire
Alarm Dispatcher advised of their status. Return to quarters promptly after each
response or assignment.

2.

Report their location when reporting in-service or receiving a response while out
of quarters, Press "on-scene" on the PMDC upon arrival at scene.

3.

Inform District Chief whenever a member of the Cincinnati Fire Department is
rendered emergency medical care. The District Chief will report serious injuries
or illnesses to the Operations Chief during working hours and to the Duty Chief at
other times.

4.

At unit change, review special instructions and exchange a list of equipment that
is to be picked up at hospitals. Instructions and the list of equipment should be
written in the desk diary.

5.

Inspect vehicle for damage and operational readiness. The Cincinnati Fire
Department Drivers Manual shall be consulted for maintenance items. Any
damage to the vehicle shall be immediately reported verbally to the immediate
supervisor and in writing using the proper forms as prescribed in the Cincinnati
Fire Department Report Manual.

6.

Check all equipment for operational readiness. Take necessary action to provide
completely operable equipment.

7.

Vehicle interior and equipment shall be cleaned and sanitized daily, and as

EMERGENCY MEDICAL RESPONSES
204.01
Page 8 of 14
Rev.11/2015
needed, during a tour of duty.

J.

J.

8.

Vehicle exterior shall be washed daily and more often if needed.

9.

Complete necessary forms and reports for the Medic Unit.

10.

Participate in training, housework and other duties required of members.

EMERGENCY OPERATION OF EMERGENCY MEDICAL SERVICES VEHICLES
AND FIRE APPARATUS
1.

Operation of all vehicles shall be governed by Chapter 3 of this Manual, Laws of
the State of Ohio and Ordinances of the City of Cincinnati. In addition, defensive
driving practices shall be observed at all times as explained in the Cincinnati Fire
Department Drivers Manual.

2.

Fire Department vehicles responding to Emergency Medical Runs shall respond
as an emergency vehicle. On rare occasion a non-emergency run may be
authorized.

EMERGENCY OPERATION (Continued)
When a run is to be made as a non-emergency response, the Fire Alarm
Dispatcher shall communicate the non-emergency status.

K.

3.

While at the scene of an emergency, Medic Unit vehicle engines shall be left
running with emergency lighting in operation. Where possible, park vehicles so
they do not impede traffic movement. If vehicles are needed to protect scene
from traffic, place them in position to block the necessary lanes of traffic. If
possible, a member should be left near apparatus and Emergency Medical
vehicles as a security measure. At times other than at the scene of an emergency,
vehicle engines and lights shall be turned off and keys removed from ignition of
Emergency Medical Vehicles.

5.

When responding in an emergency status, the vehicle is required by law to have
both the visual (red lights) and audible (siren) warning devices operating. If
either the audible or visual warning device is not operating, the vehicle must be
operated as a non-emergency vehicle. There are no exceptions to this rule.

6.

If the patient’s condition does not warrant emergency transportation, all traffic
regulations will be obeyed en route to the hospital.

7.

Emergency Medical Vehicle operation shall be consistent with proper medical
care, and not further complicate injuries.

MENTALLY ILL OR VIOLENT PATIENTS

EMERGENCY MEDICAL RESPONSES
204.01
Page 9 of 14
Rev.11/2015
1.

A mentally ill patient that is believed to present a danger to themselves or others
can be taken into custody by a police officer. If such a patient is encountered,
request response by the Cincinnati Police Department.
Violent persons encountered on an emergency run, are a police matter, and the
police should be called immediately. If a victim is both violent and injured, it
may be necessary to have police ride in the Medic Unit with the EMT.
If a victim becomes violent during transport, request police response (back-up or
assistance), stop and vacate the vehicle if necessary. When vacating the vehicle
remove the keys.
Mentally ill patients that are sick or injured can be transported to any appropriate
hospital.
(Note: The Fire Department responds only when mentally ill patients are sick or
injured)

L.

M.

VICTIMS REFUSING EMERGENCY MEDICAL CARE
1.

Any mentally competent individual may decide to accept or refuse emergency
care. Members of the Fire Department may not force treatment on any person
unless they are judged incompetent or irrational. Members should make every
effort to determine if the person is able to make their own decisions, even if the
decisions are medically wrong. This is a difficult area of medical care requiring a
careful assessment. Online medical direction can help in these situations

2.

If a victim does refuse care, make every effort to have them sign the Form 33
EPCR on the HIPPA/Refusal Signature button and indicate that the victim refused
care on the report.

POLICE ASSISTANCE
1.

When encountering an obviously deceased person during an EMS response, call
for police. Await their arrival, answering any questions they may have before
returning to service. If there is any doubt as to whether the victim is deceased or
not start medical treatment immediately and call for a Medic Unit and ALS
Supervisor.

2.

The Police Department must be notified any time one of the following causes
appears, even if the patient is en route to the hospital for medical treatment:
a.

Injuries of a violent or suspicious nature (child abuse, etc.)

EMERGENCY MEDICAL RESPONSES
204.01
Page 10 of 14
Rev.11/2015

N.

O.

b.

Obvious trauma which may be criminal (beatings, stabbings, shootings,
etc.)

c.

Any other suspicious cause or injury.

d.

Anytime a death is involved or anytime a victim may possibly die no
matter what the cause.

e.

Mentally disturbed patients (violent, suicidal, danger to self, etc.)

PATIENT TRANSFERS FROM ONE MEDICAL FACILITY TO ANOTHER
1.

The Cincinnati Fire Department does not Transfer stable patients from one
nursing home or hospital to another.

2.

The Cincinnati Fire Department does not transport patients to medical facilities
other than hospital emergency rooms or freestanding ED’s.

3.

The Cincinnati Fire Department does not transport patients from another
ambulance vehicle, because an ambulance vehicle prefers not to cross a political
boundary.

4.

The Cincinnati Fire Department will transport patients from one medical facility
to another where the patient needs paramedic support during transport and
medical treatment dictates the transfer. In such cases, a nurse and/or doctor from
the medical facility must accompany the patient during transfer, and the transfer
must be to a hospital. Notify an ALS Supervisor for this type of transport.

5.

The Cincinnati Fire Department will transport unstable patients from nursing
homes to hospitals.

6.

Vehicle to vehicle transfers from another emergency medical provider will be
permitted when the original vehicle can no longer respond or the victim’s
condition deteriorates beyond the expertise of the transporting vehicle's crew.
These transfers are only permitted within the political boundaries of the City of
Cincinnati, between Cincinnati Fire Department vehicles, or as part of a mutual
aid response.

PRESERVATION OF EVIDENCE
1.

Emergency Medical responses often involve intervention into a crime scene.
Many times proper treatment of the victim requires disruption of the crime scene.
In all cases, the victim’s welfare takes precedence over evidence preservation.
However, every attempt should be made to preserve the scene to the extent

EMERGENCY MEDICAL RESPONSES
204.01
Page 11 of 14
Rev.11/2015
possible.
2.

P.

Where the Medical Emergency involves a crime, verify that the Police
Department is responding and keep unauthorized persons out of the area. Make
visual observations, taking notes as appropriate for the situation. As soon as the
Police Department arrives and live victims have been removed, turn control of the
scene over to the Police Department.

CONTAGIOUS DISEASE
1.

Limiting exposure to contagious disease organisms is the primary method
employed by the Cincinnati Fire Department in protecting members against the
transmission of contagious disease. This is accomplished in two ways:
a.

Avoiding contact with body fluids from victims of accidents or illness.

b.

Providing a barrier between the organism and member.
Equipment such as protective gloves, goggles, face masks and bio hazard
suits are used to provide a barrier. Also, it may be possible to cover a
wound or protect members from exhaled contaminants by placing a face
mask on the victim.

P.

CONTAGIOUS DISEASE cont.
2.

3.

4.

Realizing that exposures will take place, other strategies to protect members from
contagious disease are also used:
a.

Members are to thoroughly wash their hands with soap and water after
contact with a victim or body fluids.

b.

Protect open wounds and sores on members using protective dressings and
bandages, as needed.

c.

Members are provided an opportunity to receive Hepatitis B vaccinations.

The Employee Health Service will make a determination as to exposure to an
infectious disease, only after an injury report has been submitted. A member will
usually be considered as exposed only if:
a.

They are stuck with a contaminated needle.

b.

Body fluid from a contagious victim comes in contact with a member in a
manner known to spread the disease. Simply being in the presence of a
diseased person does not constitute an exposure.

The presence of a contagious disease is not always evident; therefore, protective

EMERGENCY MEDICAL RESPONSES
204.01
Page 12 of 14
Rev.11/2015
measures should be taken anytime members are at risk of coming in contact with
body fluids from an individual. Contagious disease reporting methods often
protect the confidentiality of the victim at the expense of emergency personnel.
5.

Disposable equipment shall be disposed of in a proper manner to avoid further
exposure to members and the public.
Special care should be exercised when handling contaminated needles.
Hospitals have means of disposing of, or cleaning soiled materials. Most
disposable contaminated equipment will accompany the victim to the hospital and
should be disposed of properly at the hospital.
Disposable equipment brought back to quarters shall be placed in a plastic bag,
sealed and placed in a proper receptacle.

P.

CONTAGIOUS DISEASE (CONTINUED)
6.

Non-disposable equipment should be thoroughly cleaned with a 10% Sodium
Hypochlorite solution (2 cups of laundry bleach mixed in one gallon of water) or
appropriate cleaning solution provided by central stores. A moderate amount of
10% Sodium Hypochlorite solution is applied to a clean cloth or gauze pad, and
then applied to thoroughly clean the equipment. It may be necessary to complete
the cleaning process using hot soapy water. The interior of Emergency Vehicle
surfaces that are contaminated or suspected of being contaminated should be
clean in the same manner.

7.

When handling contaminated equipment, wear protective gloves.

8.

Uniforms or protective clothing that is contaminated should be removed at the
first available opportunity and washed in a hot soapy water solution.
Contaminated clothing should not be placed in a hamper or laundered with
non-contaminated clothing to avoid cross contamination with other clothing,
including that of the member's family.

9.

An ALS Supervisor shall be called on any suspected exposure immediately.

TREAT ALL VICTIMS AS THOUGH THEY HAVE A KNOWN
CONTAGIOUS DISEASE!

EMERGENCY MEDICAL RESPONSES
204.01
Page 13 of 14
Rev.11/2015
Q.

MEDICAL MUTUAL AID
1.

There are several reasons to call for medical mutual aid. Among them are:
a.

When no Medic Units are available and the victim requires ALS
treatment.

b.

At the scene of an accident requiring more Emergency Medical Units than
are currently available. This includes, but is not limited to Mass Casualty
incidents. Mass Casualty incidents are addressed under a separate topic in
the operations manual.

2.
Medical Mutual Aid involving no more than two Medical Units from other
communities can be ordered by the highest ranking on-scene officer without calling the
Operations or Duty Chief when there are no Cincinnati Medic Units available, or when
there will be a substantial delay in administering critical medical care. Determining the
need for additional or more qualified units will normally be a decision left to the highest
qualified Emergency medical person at the scene. Mutual Aid beyond two Emergency
Medical Units or for a situation where our resources are inadequate can be made by a
District Chief with notification to the Operations or Duty Chief.
3.

The Fire Alarm Dispatcher shall immediately request mutual aid from The
Hamilton County Dispatcher on request, and not delay assistance while awaiting a
call to the Operations or Duty Chief.
Private ambulance companies are the last resource to be used at an accident site.

R.

COMPLAINTS
1.

S.

Any instance involving accusations of improper conduct, inadequate or improper
service lodged against members of the Fire Department shall be immediately
reported to the member in charge who will submit a Form 47 explaining the
incident. If the complaint originates from a citizen, have them complete a Form
273B (Citizen Complaint Report) explaining the incident.

CONTAMINATED MEDICAL SUPPLIES LEFT AT EMS SCENES
1.

The last fire company on the scene will canvas the entire area where first aid was
rendered and collect all disposal equipment and fist aid supplies that have been
left at the scene. These disposable articles will be secured in the plastic bags
supplied by Central Stores and returned to quarters, at which time they will be

EMERGENCY MEDICAL RESPONSES
204.01
Page 14 of 14
Rev.11/2015
disposed of in the Bio-Hazard canisters located at each fire station.

T.

2.

Incidents where public places, such as sidewalks, are contaminated with blood
and/or body fluids will require decontamination with a 10% solution of sodium
hypochlorite (bleach) and water. All Companies are to carry sodium hypochlorite
and an appropriate container to be used for disinfecting the above mentioned
public places.

3.

Occurrences that involve police investigations may require the area contaminated
with blood, body fluids, and used first aid supplies, to be left undisturbed until the
police investigation is complete. When such circumstances occur, the fire
company officer should have the ranking police officer on the scene contact their
company when the on-scene investigation is concluded. The Fire Company will
return to the scene to appropriately decontaminate the public area and return the
contaminated medical supplies to the Bio-Hazard canister located at all fires
stations.

4.

As in the past, paramedic personnel are to be cognizant at all times of the location
of needles that are used in the field. These needles should be secured by
paramedic personnel prior to leaving the scene.

MEDIC UNIT RESPONSIBILITIES AT FIRE SCENES
1. When the Medic units arrive at a fire scene, they are to immediately gather the
backboard and the cot. A first in bag and monitor will be utilized from the first in
Engine and kept with the backboard and cot. These supplies will be maintained in
close proximity to the fire building. The members assigned to the medic unit will
maintain this equipment until released by the incident commander
2. Make every attempt to keep vehicle from being blocked in.
3. Treat injured firefighters or victims as needed.
4. Report to the ALS Supervisor and assist with Rehab Operations.
5. The Incident Commander can choose to use the Medic Unit personnel for other
duties. Refer to Operations Section 203.01 Structure Fires.


=== 204.02 Mass Casualty Incident Rev 11-2012 ===
MASS CASUALTY INCIDENT
204.02
Page 1 of 19
Rev. 11/12

Chapter II

Operations

Subject 4

Emergency Medical Services

Topic 2

Mass Casualty Incidents

A.

PURPOSE
To establish a standard approach and general guidelines for Mass Casualty Incidents,
defined as an incident involving more casualties than can be handled using normal
resources. An exact number of casualties cannot be stated, as victim condition and number
of victims injured both effect the Fire Department's ability to handle the situation. The
ultimate goal on any incident is to provide the highest level of care, for the most people, in
the shortest amount of time. Incident organization is based on the National Incident
Management System (NIMS) and the Simple Triage and Rapid Treatment (START)
method of triage.

B.

C.

POLICY
1.

Fire Department personnel must provide the level of care for which they have
been authorized by Fire Department training and certification.

2.

To provide the best possible Pre-hospital care for victims of a Mass Casualty
Incident.

3.

Full protective clothing, including SCBA if applicable, shall be worn at the scene of
a Mass Casualty Incident, unless otherwise indicated by the Incident Commander.

PRIORITIES
Priorities for a mass casualty incident are the same as for a natural disaster or hazardous
materials incident, namely:
Life Safety
Incident Stabilization
Property Conservation
Property conservation efforts are seldom considered in this type of incident and are a
distant third, given the magnitude of priority #1, Life Safety. There is generally an
underlying cause for a mass casualty incident, therefore Incident Stabilization may be a
top priority. If the release of hazardous materials can be stopped or the fire extinguished,
the source of further injuries can be arrested. By definition, a mass casualty incident or
medical disaster will require a massive life safety effort.

MASS CASUALTY INCIDENT
204.02
Page 2 of 19
Rev. 11/12

D.

OPERATION
A mass casualty incident can occur anywhere. Mass casualty incidents do not exist on
their own, they are the result of another occurrence. The following incidents frequently
result in mass casualty emergencies:
Transportation accidents (air, rail and highway)
Fires
Hazardous Material releases
Natural Disasters
Building collapses
A mass casualty incident exists when:
The number of victims and the nature of their injuries make the normal level of
stabilization and care unattainable.
and/or
The number of trained personnel and transportation vehicles immediately
available are insufficient;
and/or
Hospital capabilities are insufficient to handle all the victims requiring care.
With victims spread out over a large area and in various conditions, a proper assessment
will take time. Incident Commanders must assign personnel to survey the area to get a
complete picture of the problem. The following information is needed immediately at the
scene of a mass casualty incident:
The total number of victims
Condition of survivors
How many people are trapped or otherwise in need of rescue.
Other conditions, fire, hazardous materials, etc.
Having this information is crucial to proper decision making. Using a helicopter to
survey the area can be helpful if one is immediately available. Most of the time, the best
source of information will be from Departments and groups working at various locations.

MASS CASUALTY INCIDENT
204.02
Page 3 of 19
Rev. 11/12

E.

CONSIDER THE ALTERNATIVES
Basically, two alternatives exist at a mass casualty incident:
Search and rescue
Incident stabilization
If sufficient resources are available, both may be accomplished at the same time. Forces
may be able to extinguish the fire, and control a fuel spill, while conducting search and
rescue operations. Search and rescue is a multi-faceted task at a mass casualty incident.
Alternatives not only involve whether to search and rescue, but where to start.
After victims are rescued, many will need medical care.
Providing medical care is not an alternative, it is an absolute necessity. Few alternatives
exist in reference to medical care. Providing a system including triage, treatment and
transportation is the only proven method when large numbers of victims are encountered.
Doctors and nurses can be a valuable asset or a serious liability at the scene of a medical
emergency. When they are properly identified, and operating within the command
system, they are extremely useful. When they do not understand their part in the plan,
and freelance, or try to take command, they become a serious liability.
Regardless of the Pre-planning effort, some emergency workers at a mass casualty
incident will not be accustomed to working under a structured command system
(doctors, nurses, private ambulance personnel), making it imperative that they be
supervised by someone who understands the system.

MASS CASUALTY INCIDENT
204.02
Page 4 of 19
Rev. 11/12

F.

INCIDENT COMMAND FOR MASS CASUALTY INCIDENTS
The National Incident Management System (NIMS) is designed to be a flexible
management system designed to fit the specific needs of any incident. The NIMS
organizational structure builds from the top down and expands as needed depending of
the size of the incident and the resources available with responsibility and performance
placed initially with the Incident Commander. The Incident Commander has the
responsibility for the coordination of all public and private resources committed to the
incident. In addition, the IC or his/her designee is responsible for notifying appropriate
authorities, requesting resources and developing incident objectives and strategies.
Depending on the size and duration of the incident, the IC may directly supervise EMS
operations or may delegate this responsibility to another resource. The IC may delegate
specific tasks, functions, or geographic area to maintain an effective span of control.
The Incident Command System is an adaptable tool. To set up exact organizational
charts, prior to an incident, is relinquishing a valuable system advantage. Rather than
setting up the exact organizational chart, it is better to define personnel needs at a mass
casualty incident, and establish organization functions to meet that need. The decision
as to how to plug the various functions into the system should be practiced, but actual
command organizational charts should be developed to meet the specific incident.

MASS CASUALTY INCIDENT
204.02
Page 5 of 19
Rev. 11/12

RESOURCE MANAGEMENT
The Incident Commander has the overall responsibility for developing objectives and
requesting the necessary resources required to mitigate the incident. The IC may
delegate tasks or responsibilities to other qualified individuals; however, this should not
be assumed, clear communications between all involved agencies is imperative.
A Staging Area with appropriate ingress/egress and sufficient space to expand as
necessary, should be established and access secured by law enforcement. Some
potential MCI Staging Areas have been predetermined.

EMS Unit Staging Log: The Staging Officer will maintain the EMS Unit Staging Log

EMS Positions within the Incident Management System
EMS Branch Director: (Usually the first arriving ALS supervisor or EMS-1)
•
•
•
•
•
•

Reports to the Operations Chief. If Operations has not been established, reports to the
Incident Commander.
Supervises Treatment Group Supervisor
Supervises Triage Group Supervisor
Supervises Transportation Group Supervisor
Requests additional personnel and equipment to staff triage, treatment and
transportation groups.
Radio Designation shall be “EMS Branch”

Treatment Group Supervisor: (Usually an ALS Supervisor)
• Reports to the EMS Branch Director.
• Establishes a centralized Treatment Area.
• Requests additional personnel/equipment to staff the Treatment Areas.
• Determines which patients should be transported first.
• Communicates/coordinates patient movement with the Transportation Supervisor.
• Radio Designation shall be “Treatment”
Triage Group Supervisor: (ALS Supervisor or other Officer/Medic)
• Reports to the EMS Branch Director.
• Oversees the Triage process.
• Notifies the EMS Branch Director of the total number of patients.
• Directs the movement of patients from the impacted area to the Treatment Area(s).
• Radio designation shall be “Triage”

MASS CASUALTY INCIDENT
204.02
Page 6 of 19
Rev. 11/12

Transportation Group Supervisor: (ALS Supervisor or any Officer)
• Reports to the EMS Branch Director.
• Communicate with the Hamilton County Hospital Network/Net Control.
• Orders transportation resources from Staging, notifies IC if additional transportation
resources are required.
• Determines mode of transport for all on-scene patients.
• Contacts medical control as needed.
• Communicates/coordinates patient movement with the Treatment Supervisor and
Medical Communications Coordinator.
• Consider more than 1 person assisting this position
• Radio designation shall be “transportation”
Medical Communications Coordinator:
• Reports to Transportation Officer
• Communicates with the Hamilton County Hospital Network/Net Control.
• Receives destination hospital for ambulances from Net Control.
• Contacts medical control as needed.
• Documents the number of patients transported to each hospital.

EMS Positions within the
Incident Management System

Incident Commander

Operations Section Chief

EMS Branch Director

Triage Group Supervisor

Treatment Group Supervisor

Transportation Group
Supervisor

Medical Communications
Coordinator

MASS CASUALTY INCIDENT
204.02
Page 7 of 19
Rev. 11/12

DESIGNATED AREAS
After the scene has been determined safe, the specific areas (such as the Treatment, Staging,
Morgue Area, etc.) shall be determined/approved by the Incident Commander or his/her
designee.
AREA
Treatment Area

Staging Area

Loading Area

Morgue

G.

CRITERIA
Treatment Areas should be located a safe distance away from hazards,
upwind from toxic fumes and provide for easy access/egress. Consider
identifying the Treatment Area representing the respective triage categories
using tarps, flags and barricade tape.
A separate area should be established for Fire/EMS resources. These areas
will be the gathering point for personnel and equipment. Transport units
will be maintained in a one way traffic pattern facing the loading area.
This is the area designated for the loading of patients into transport units. It
shall be located in very close proximity to the Treatment Area. Position the
helicopter landing zone to not block access or egress of ground
transportation.
Area designated for the temporary storage of deceased patients. This area
should be located away from the treatment areas and is the responsibility of
the Coroner or law enforcement.

TRIAGE
•
•
•

Use the START method of triage.
Triage packs and ribbons should be used in the early stages of the incident to allow
for rapid triage. Ribbons should be replaced by triage tags applied when the patient
arrives in the treatment area. Triage tags should always be used.
The Triage Tag Number will be documented on the Treatment Area Log and the
Hospital Routing Log.

(Triage ribbons are carried on all companies and Triage Tags are carried on all Medic
Units)
Triage is a French word meaning "to sort". Sorting victims as to need is an essential
element of a multiple victim scene. Most firefighters and EMS personnel are adept at
performing this rapid evaluation on a small scale. At a multiple victim scene, it is not
unusual to delay treatment of minor injuries, while turning all attention to a critically
injured patient. At a scene with more victims than can be treated, triage sorts victims
into the following categories:

MASS CASUALTY INCIDENT
204.02
Page 8 of 19
Rev. 11/12

•

Recognized Triage Categories: Standard terminology will be used. The triage category will
be identified using the following criteria:
CATEGORY

ACTION(s)
CRITERIA

IMMEDIATE
(RED)

DELAYED
(YELLOW)

MINOR
(GREEN)

Critical patient, life-threatening
injuries, likely to survive if
patient receives definitive care
within 30 minutes.

Immediate or non-ambulatory
casualties will be moved with
minimal stabilization as quickly as
possible to treatment area for
reassessment and treatment.

Serious injuries but stable, maybe
life threatening. Likely to survive
if care is received within several
hours.

Casualties tagged “Minor” or
“Delayed” and patients without
obvious injuries will be moved as
quickly as possible to the ambulatory
casualty collection area for
reassessment and treatment.

Not considered life threatening,
walking wounded.
Mortally wounded or death is
imminent.

Casualties tagged “Deceased” will
not be moved or disturbed unless
approved by the Coroner.

CONTAMINATED Contaminated by a hazardous
substance.

Patient treatment delayed until the
patient is decontaminated.

DECEASED
(BLACK)

•

NOTE: For Pediatric patients - START may not adequately identify the severity of pediatric
casualties. Consider use of the JumpSTART system or other age-appropriate vital signs and
behaviors.

MASS CASUALTY INCIDENT
204.02
Page 9 of 19
Rev. 11/12

Triage tape is carried by all fire companies and identifies victims as to the level of
treatment required. Three important points need to be made regarding triage teams:
1.

They must be supervised so all victims are assessed and separated.

2.

The most highly qualified medical personnel at the scene should perform triage.

3.

Triage teams should not treat or transport victims until triage is complete. At
the scene of a large disaster it may be best to have triage personnel reevaluate
patients, rather than involving them in actual treatment.

The triage activity is the first medical priority in a medical disaster. The first arriving
Medic unit should not leave the scene until relieved of triage responsibilities.
Emergency medical teams are accustomed to treating one or two individuals, then
transporting. Categorizing without treatment runs contrary to their normal role and
must be overcome by rigid enforcement of the triage concept.
H.

TREATMENT
Once the triage teams have sorted victims, the victims will need to be moved to a
treatment area – usually by Engine or Ladder company personnel. The Treatment Area will
be managed by the Treatment Group Supervisor. Once in the treatment area the victims
will be treated by Treatment teams. The Treatment Teams will first treat those needing
immediate care. Later, delayed treatment and minor injury treatment will be performed.
The most highly qualified medical personnel are on the triage teams. The next highest
level is the immediate treatment teams. The order of arrival also dictates who is on
what team. Later arriving personnel may be assigned to delayed treatment teams,
although they may be more qualified than others assigned to higher level activities.
Triage Tags are carried by all Medic Units and shall be completed in the Treatment
Area.
Treatment Area Log: The Treatment Supervisor will maintain the Treatment Area Log
The Medical Equipment Checklist: The Treatment Supervisor will maintain the
Medical Equipment Checklist

I.

TRANSPORTATION
Providing access to victims is an important role of the transportation group
supervisor. A "drive through" arrangement for ambulances will keep traffic lanes
open. Helicopter landing zones need to be in safe areas, far enough away from
treatment and triage areas so as to not interfere with those activities (See 204.04 Air
Care). Staging and categorizing transportation capabilities is essential in providing
proper transportation.
It may be possible to transport several "delayed care" victims in the same vehicle.

MASS CASUALTY INCIDENT
204.02
Page 10 of 19
Rev. 11/12

"Immediate care" victims often require ALS personnel on-board the transport
vehicle, and only one can be transported.
Minor care victims are usually staged for later treatment near the site. If minor care
victims need transportation, it can be provided using non-ambulance vehicles. The
only way to manage transportation vehicles is utilizing a staging area or areas. All
incoming vehicles must be directed to a staging area.
PATIENT DISTRIBUTION
The Transportation Supervisor or Medical Communications Coordinator (if
designated) will make patient destination decisions in cooperation with the Hospital
Network - Net Control. The Hospital Network is activated by calling the Hamilton
County Communication Center at (513) 825-2260. Communication with Net Control
once the Hospital Network is activated is through Net Control (University Air Care
Dispatch) at (513) 584-7522. The direct number to Net Control is 1-800-826-8100.
Communication can be made to Net Control via radio on the HOSPITAL channel/talk
group or via cell phone.
First Round Destination Procedure may be implemented without prior
authorization prior to the Disaster Net having a bed count. Hospitals should prepare to
receive these patients upon receipt of the MCI Alert from Dispatch.
First Round Destination Procedure
Patients transported to the following hospitals:
Two (2) “Immediate” patients – CLOSEST TRAUMA CENTER
Six (6) “Delayed and/or “Minor” patients – Closest or peripheral hospital

Hamilton County Hospital Network (Surge Net): (800 MHz Radio)
The Transportation Supervisor and/or Medical Communications Coordinator should
establish contact with the Hospital Network early in the incident, as needed, for:
• Greater Cincinnati Area hospital bed availability
• Out-of-county trauma center availability
• If the number of patients will exceed the first round destination procedure, or to
send more patients to hospitals included during the first round procedure.
• Destination assistance.
TRANSPORTATION / SCENE TO HOSPITAL COORDINATION
The Transportation Supervisor along with the Medical Communications Coordinator
(if designated) will be responsible to coordinate with Net Control the transportation of
all injured patients.

MASS CASUALTY INCIDENT
204.02
Page 11 of 19
Rev. 11/12

Once transport units are available, patients will be moved from the Treatment Area to
the Loading Area.
• Vehicle loading should be maximized without jeopardizing patient care (example
one immediate and one delayed patient per ambulance as opposed to two immediate
per ambulance).
• Alternative methods of transportation, such as mass transit or school bus, may be
used for the transportation of minor priority patients.
• In general, no more than two (2) transport units should be committed to duties or
assignments other than the transport of patients. Utilize Engine and Ladder personnel
to transfer victims on the emergency scene.
Whenever possible, patients should be transported to the most appropriate facility
without overloading any one facility. For example: transport critical “immediate”
trauma patients to University Hospital and “immediate” pediatric patients to
Children’s Hospital.
Transport units should refrain from directly contacting the hospitals in a MCI Event
to eliminate overwhelming the system. Communications should be from the
Transportation Officer only to advise a count and severity such as 1 Red/ 2 Green
only.
Hospital Capability and Patient Tally Sheet: The Transportation Supervisor or
Medical Communications Coordinator (if designated) will maintain the Hospital
Capability and Patient Tally Sheet
Hospital Routing Log: The Transportation Supervisor or Medical Communications
Coordinator (if designated) will maintain the Hospital Routing Log

The Cincinnati Fire Department in coordination with Hamilton County Fire Chiefs have
established a uniform Mass Casualty Incident System for the entire County. The
following outlines the terms utilized and proper response for declaring a Mass Casualty
Incident:

MASS CASUALTY INCIDENT
204.02
Page 12 of 19
Rev. 11/12

MCI NOTIFICATION - An MCI NOTIFICATION is used to notify the EMS and
Hospital systems that a situation may exist that has the potential to exceed the day-today capabilities, requiring additional resources and/or complex organizational structure.
When to initiate an
MCI Notification

Who should initiate
How to initiate

What information
should be provided
How to cancel an
MCI Notification

In the early stages of an incident to alert the system that a situation may
exist that has the potential to exceed the day to day capabilities and may
require additional resources and/or initiation of a complex
organizational structure.
Any responder to the incident or a dispatcher if initial reports
indicate an MCI incident.
Through dispatch on the primary fire band frequency. MCI Notification
status may be upgraded at anytime to an MCI Alert after a more
complete analysis has been completed
The location and type of incident. Dispatch will notify ALL hospitals
via Hospital Net. This notification is for information only.
Through the Dispatch Center if it is determined that an MCI does not
exist and no additional resources are needed.

MCI ALERT - An MCI ALERT consists of: Mobilization of the necessary resources,
Notification of the Hamilton County Communication/ Hospital Net Control and
Initiation of the Incident Management System and this MCI Management Plan.
ACTIVATE HOSPITAL NETWORK. The incident may go directly to MCI ALERT
based on need.
Initiating an MCI Alert:
When to activate an When the number of injured persons exceeds the available resources.
This will be different for each incident based on time of day, location,
MCI Alert
resources available, etc.
For example, consider initiating an MCI Alert when:
• The number of patients may be more than can be managed by the
local fire department based on severity and/or quantity.
• The number of patients exceeds the capabilities of the nearest
hospital Emergency Department.
• The Incident Commander deems necessary.
Who may activate
Any responder to the incident or Dispatch
Through Dispatch on the primary fire band frequency.
How to initiate
What information
Type of Incident
should be provided
The location of the incident
to the Hospital
An estimate of the number of injured
Radio Net
Through dispatch by the Incident Commander once all patients have
How to cancel an
been transported or if it is determined that no additional resources are
MCI Alert
needed.

MASS CASUALTY INCIDENT
204.02
Page 13 of 19
Rev. 11/12

MCI Response Deployment – Once an MCI Alert has been issued Hamilton County
Communications Center or Cincinnati Dispatch Center will dispatch the following
resources for the incident upon the request of the Incident Commander.
If the event is beyond the capacity of local resources assistance may be provided by:
Local mutual aid and/or American Red Cross Medical Assistance Team (ARC MAT)
Aero-medical resources will most likely be used to augment medical staff and
equipment within the treatment area. University Air Care/ Mobile Care will dispatch
additional Aero-Medical resources as needed. In most MCI incidents, critical patients
will be transported by ground ambulance.
MCI Level

Ambulances

Level 1
MCI

5
Transport
Units

Level 2
MCI

Level 3
MCI
Level 4
MCI
Level 5
MCI

10
Transport
Units
10
Transport
Units
10
Transport
Units
25
Transport
Units

Engines

3

8

Rescue

1 Heavy

1 Heavy

0

Full Staff
Response

As
Requested
by IC

10

10

Chief
Officer
2 ALS
Supervisors
1 - District
Chief
Notify
EMS-1

0

0

Other
Notify SOC if
entanglement
or hazmat

UASI-MCI
Trailer, CFD
Command
Vehicle

Notes
Open Hospital Net/Surge
Net

Prompt Command to
consider: Air Care, Red
Cross Medical Assistance
Team (MAT), Metro Bus,
Airport Disaster Truck
(999)
Salvation Army
CISM Team

0

0

Contact State of Ohio
Mutual Aid Assistance

MASS CASUALTY INCIDENT
204.02
Page 14 of 19
Rev. 11/12

Medic Units – When responding on the initial alarm shall respond directly to the scene.
If responding as part of the 1st alarm or subsequent MCI level assignment all medic units
shall respond to staging unless otherwise directed by the Incident Commander..
Engine and Ladder Companies - When responding on the initial alarm shall respond
directly to the scene. If responding as part of the 1st alarm or subsequent MCI level
assignment all engine and ladder companies shall respond to staging unless otherwise
directed by the Incident Commander. The primary responsibility of Engine and Ladder
companies responding on MCI levels will be to move patients throughout the emergency
scene. Companies should report with all required PPE and any patient hauling
equipment available (Backboard, Stokes, SKED, etc) Ladder companies may also be
utilized for light extrication or to assist the Heavy Rescue Companies.
Heavy Rescue Companies - When responding on the initial alarm shall respond directly
to the scene. If responding as part of the 1st alarm or subsequent MCI level assignment
all Heavy Rescue Companies shall respond to staging unless otherwise directed by the
Incident Commander. The Heavy Rescue Company’s primary responsibility will be
extrication and disentanglement of victims. If no victims are entrapped the Incident
Commander shall utilize the Heavy Rescue as deemed necessary.
J.

EXTRICATION
Freeing trapped victims is accomplished by the Rescue/Extrication Group. This
Group is usually comprised of Heavy Rescue and Ladder Companies. Priorities must
be set, saving the greatest number of lives possible. In a wreck situation, extrication
tools will be at a premium, like all other resources, their use must be set in proper
priority order. The Heavy Rescue Officer or Special Operations Chief should
establish the Rescue Group. The radio designation is “Rescue”.
Actual extrication is part of the rescue activity. A question arises here, should victims
be treated where they are found, or should they be moved to another location for
medical evaluation and treatment? Conditions and resources dictate the answer to this
question. If victims are in locations of imminent danger due to fire, hazardous
materials etc., they must be moved to a safe location. If the immediate site is deemed
safe, manpower and victim condition regulate this factor.
If medical personnel are adequate they may move victims whose conditions will
tolerate a move to treatment areas. Some victims will be best treated where they are
found.

MASS CASUALTY INCIDENT
204.02
Page 15 of 19
Rev. 11/12

K.

LAW ENFORCEMENT
Law Enforcement will be notified of a MCI Advisory and appropriate units from the
affected jurisdiction shall respond as needed. The Law Enforcement supervisor on
duty will assign additional on-duty law enforcement personnel to the incident. Law
enforcement personnel arriving at the location initially will be responsible to secure
ingress for responding Fire/EMS units and begin to secure the area involved. A member
of the Law Enforcement Command Staff from the affected jurisdiction shall respond to
the Incident Command Post and will assume responsibilities as a member of the Unified
Command Staff.
Scene Ingress and Egress:
First arriving law enforcement personnel will attempt to ensure that incoming Fire/EMS
units can access the scene by controlling traffic along ingress routes. Law Enforcement
should coordinate with Incident Command to determine the egress routes to be used by
ambulances transporting to hospitals. These egress routes should be secured by traffic
control measures.
Staging Area Security:
Law Enforcement will need to provide security for any staging area which is established.
Access to the staging area will be limited to public safety personnel and others
authorized by Incident Command.
Perimeter Control:
When sufficient law enforcement personnel arrive an appropriate perimeter will be
established. The perimeter will extend from the site of the incident outward to an
appropriate distance that provides for the safety of emergency response personnel, the
general public and provides security for injured persons and any debris or other potential
evidence. Access through the perimeter will be limited to public safety personnel and
others authorized by Incident Command.
Evidence Preservation:
Every effort will be made by all personnel responding on a MCI to limit disruption of
any potential evidence. It is recognized that life safety including rescue and extrication
of the injured may result in some unintended disruption of the scene.

MASS CASUALTY INCIDENT
204.02
Page 16 of 19
Rev. 11/12

L.

Evacuation
In cases where the incident occurs in a populated or developed area, surrounding
residential, commercial and industrial occupancies may be evacuated for safety concerns.
If an evacuation is required, emergency management personnel will designate an
appropriate reception and care facility(s). The American Red Cross will coordinate and
manage the reception and care facility. Re-entry into the evacuated area will be
authorized by Incident Command.

M.

Deceased Persons / Coroner / Temporary Morgue
Ohio law provides that once the injured are removed from a MCI site, the County
Coroner is responsible for the disposition of all deceased persons. The County Coroner
will direct all operations pertaining to the processing of the deceased. The concept of
preservation of evidence should be applied when caring for the deceased. Therefore,
recovery of the deceased will be methodical and managed thoroughly.
1.

Care of Fatalities Prior to Site Investigation - Public safety personnel performing
triage and treatment of injured persons shall not move deceased persons and attempt
not to disturb the area immediately surrounding the deceased. Extrication of the
deceased prior to the arrival of the Coroner should be performed only when necessary
to prevent their destruction by fire or other similar compelling reasons. Otherwise,
the deceased will be moved to the temporary morgue or other designated location
only by direction of the Coroner.
When it becomes necessary to move bodies or parts of any debris/wreckage,
photographs should be taken showing their relative position within the
debris/wreckage, and a sketch of their respective positions should be made prior to
removal. In addition, tags should be affixed to each body or part of the wreckage that
was displaced, and corresponding flags, stakes or tags should be placed where they
were found in the wreckage. A journal should be kept of all tags issued. Law
enforcement or the Coroner’s office should handle this issue.

2. Temporary Morgue – A temporary morgue facility may be required. The
temporary morgue will be under the direction and control of the County Coroner.
The temporary morgue should be located as close to the disaster site as possible.
Once notified of fatalities associated with a MCI the Coroner will determine the level
of assistance required and then call upon the State Medical Examiner, other County
Coroners, private practitioners in forensic sciences, morticians, and other
professionals. If required a request may be made through County Emergency
Management for additional State assets or Federal assets such as the Disaster
Mortuary Operational Response Teams (DMORT).

MASS CASUALTY INCIDENT
204.02
Page 17 of 19
Rev. 11/12

Essential morgue operations include identification (dental charting, x-ray,
fingerprinting, etc.), toxicology, documentation of personal effects, autopsies,
embalming, a records area, a secured area for personal effects, clerical space, vital
statistics personnel and a telephone bank for gathering and handling inquiries.
Law enforcement personnel will be required at the facility to control access and
provide security.
N.

PUBLIC INFORMATION
The PIO will be the sole point of contact for all media. All media release will be
distributed through the PIO after the Incident Commander approves the release.

MASS CASUALTY INCIDENT
204.02
Page 18 of 19
Rev. 11/12

O. Designated Staging areas
Staging areas for Mass Casualty Incidents
NORTH STAGING SITES
1 Forest Fair/ Cincinnati Mills Mall Parking Lot
600 Cincinnati Mills Drive – Forest Park
2 Hamilton County Communications Center – Civic Center Drive
2377 Civic Center Drive – Area by Comm
Center/Library/Sheriff’s Office
3 Springdale Municipal Complex – 12147 Lawnview Avenue
Near Exit 41 off of I-275 – Next to Station 90

Longitude
84°30'54.11"W

Latitude
39°18'08.62"N

84°33’58.30”W

39°16’47.48”N

84°29’03.21"W

39°17’22.80”N

WEST STAGING SITES
1 Whitewater Crossing Christian Church
5771 State Route 128 – Whitewater Township
2 Blue Rock Road @ I-275
Exit 31 off of I-275
3 Kilby Road @ I-275
Kilby Road Area at Interchange Exit 21 off of I-275

Longitude
84°44'00.56"W

Latitude
39°12'18.65"N

84°37’41.19”W

39°14’06.10"N

84°46’41.64"W

39°11’10.50”N

CENTRAL STAGING SITES
1 Hamilton County Fairgrounds
77th Street and Vine Street - Carthage
2 Neumann Way and I-75
I-75 Connector at Exit 13 in front of GE
3 Princeton High School Complex – 11080 Chester Road
Sharon Road and Chester Road – Exit 15 off of I-75

Longitude
84°28'26.89"W

Latitude
39°12'02.58"N

84°26’51.19”W

39°14’40.12”N

84°26’40.07”W

39°16’14.70”N

EAST STAGING SITES
1 Coney Island/Riverbend/River Downs
Kellogg Avenue and Sutton Avenue – Anderson Township
2 Loveland Madeira Road @ I-275
Exit 52 off of I-275 – Area by Lake Isabella Park
3 Milford Parkway @ I-275
Milford Parkway Interchange Exit 59 off of I-275

Longitude
84°25'00.45"W

Latitude
39°03'22.05"N

84°18’05.07”W

39°14’20.86”N

84°15’57.54”W

39°09’31.24”N

SOUTH STAGING SITES
1 The Cincinnati Museum Center
Union Terminal – 1301 Western Avenue - Cincinnati
2 West 2nd Street @ Elm Street
2nd Street area at Northeast side of Paul Brown Stadium
3 American Red Cross Operations Center
2111 Dana Avenue – Dana Avenue Exit (Exit 6) off of I-71

Longitude
84°31'57.06"W

Latitude
39°06'33.65"N

84°30’55.14”W

39°05’50.77”N

84°27’42.59”W

39°08’36.31”N

MASS CASUALTY INCIDENT
204.02
Page 19 of 19
Rev. 11/12

Additional Notes:
MEDICAL ASSISTANCE TEAM
In Hamilton County there is a Medical Assistance Team (MAT Team). The MAT
Team is comprised of Physicians, Nurses and Paramedics who have identification
and will respond upon request.
The Medical Assistance Team (MAT) is sponsored by the Cincinnati Academy of
Medicine and the Hamilton County Disaster Council. All team members are linked by
portable radio, which is integrated into the established disaster communication system
for all the hospital emergency departments in the area. MAT in cooperation with the
Greater Cincinnati hospital Council has established seven sets of "Disaster Boxes". All
Disaster sets can be brought to the scene by emergency vehicle in the event of a major
mass casualty incident. This provides medical equipment for definitive critical care for
35 to 50 victims.
Physicians on the MAT team are by identified green helmets with MD in reflective
letters. Registered nurses wear red jump suits, with Red Cross insignia, and a white
helmet marked "nurse". Physicians and nurses have photo-identification cards. All
MAT Team members wear patches and/or arm bands from the Cincinnati Academy of
Medicine.
On notification of a possible disaster, the medical commanders of MAT are notified
immediately through dispatch. The MAT commander then decides the extent of MAT
response by evaluating the number of potential casualties, the type, size, and location of
the disaster. A back up notification system for MAT is conducted through the Hamilton
County Hospital Net radios located in the emergency departments of hospitals.
Hamilton County dispatch can also notify the MAT Team.


=== 204.03 Carbon Monoxide Incident Rev 8-05 ===
CARBON MONOXIDE INCIDENTS
204.03
Page 1 of 25
Rev. 8/05
CHAPTER II

Operations

SUBJECT 4

Emergency Medical Operations

TOPIC 5

Carbon Monoxide Incidents

A.

SCOPE
This procedure provides specific information to be used at the scene of Carbon Monoxide
Incidents. Unless specifically superseded by this plan, all other Fire Department
Procedures shall be used in operations involving Carbon Monoxide Poisoning.

B.

PRIORITIES
1.

Ensure scene safety for all emergency responders

2.

Remove all immediate victims of Carbon Monoxide Poisoning to safe
atmosphere. Adult victims with a significant exposure should be transported to
University Hospital (only hospital locally with Hyperbaric Chambers). All
children should be taken to Children's Hospital.
Note: All suspected CO victims should be administered Oxygen at 15 L/Min via a
non-rebreather mask.

3. Investigate cause of CO detector activation if applicable.
 Eliminate the Carbon Monoxide source if possible.
4. Determine if dangerous levels of CO are present.
• Evacuate area if necessary
• Ventilate as required and search for other possible victims.
• Reset or clear CO detectors where activated. Document readings on any
activated CO detectors.
5. Notify other agencies as required.






Building Department/HVAC 10 PPM or more in ambient air
Cincinnati Health Department
CINERGY (Cincinnati Gas & Electric)
OSHA
EPA

CARBON MONOXIDE INCIDENTS
204.03
Page 2 of 25
Rev. 8/05

C.

SAFETY
1. The safety of the emergency responders is paramount at all times. A carbon monoxide
response may require the use of an SCBA and protective EMS equipment. The SCBA
shall be worn in any untested atmosphere until it is determined that it is safe to remove
and permission is given by the OIC.
2. Members should conduct an arm’s length test when entering an area suspected of
containing Carbon Monoxide. A CO monitor shall be held at arms length and a reading
taken approximately every four feet as the tester enters the area to be sampled. If 35
PPM or greater is recorded in the general air, member must be protected by an SCBA.

D.

DISPATCH
Report of a CO detector sounding, no illness – Closest Engine or Ladder Company
Any CO dispatch with a report of a person ill – Closest Engine or Ladder Company an
Ambulance or a Rescue Unit as necessary

E.

SCENE CONTROL
First arriving company shall determine if anyone is exhibiting signs or symptoms of
possible CO poisoning and if so, are there other possible victims. Officer or member in
charge should size-up the situation, ventilate, and request medical transport units as
deemed appropriate, providing medical care as per current EMS guidelines. Possible CO
victims should have oxygen administered at 15L/min via non-rebreather face mask.
Hospitals should be notified in advance of the number of actual or potential victims to be
transported to their hospital and the status of the victims. If there are more than 5
victims, the Incident Commander should have Paramedics consult with University
Hospital Base about the feasibility of activating the Disaster Network. Adult victims
should be transported to University Hospital and children should be transported to
Children’s Hospital. Note: University Hospital has 3 Hyperbaric Chambers to treat
victims of CO as deemed necessary. A multi-patient Hyperbaric Chamber is also
available through University Hospital at Wright Patterson Air Force Base in Dayton,
Ohio.
If a victim appears to have only minor CO poisoning, they can be transported to a facility
other than University Hospital.

CARBON MONOXIDE INCIDENTS
204.03
Page 3 of 25
Rev. 8/05
F.

INVESTIGATION
If there is reason to believe that CO is present or there is a CO detector sounding start the
investigation by observing and interviewing the occupants. Note: some victims may not
be aware that they are suffering from the effects of CO, infants, the elderly, and also
observe any pets in the area.
The interview should determine the following:
1. What were the activities of the occupants for several hours before the arrival of
the Fire Department?
2. Were any combustion appliances operating and for how long?
 Furnace
 Water heater
 Gas range-was it being used to heat house
 Gas oven-was it being used to heat house
 Gas or wood burning fireplace
 Space heater (gas or Kerosene)
 Cooking grills gas/charcoal – inside or outside
 Vehicles
 Small engines – lawn mowers etc.
3. Location of any power vents; bathroom, kitchen, clothes dryer, etc.
4. Any recent repairs or installations of combustion equipment
5. Is there a history of people feeling ill – if yes, do they feel better when they are
away
6. Were any appliances shut off prior to the arrival of the Fire Department?
7. Were any doors or windows opened prior to the arrival of the Fire
Department?

CARBON MONOXIDE INCIDENTS
204.03
Page 4 of 25
Rev. 8/05
G.

TESTING FOR CARBON MONOXIDE
All fire companies carry meters capable of detecting and measuring CO. Where possible,
use the pump accessory with the meter when conducting a survey. Readings are in partper-million (PPM), 10,000 PPM equals 1 percent concentration.
Before entering the area to be tested take a reading in fresh air to determine if there is a
baseline of CO in the ambient air. CO in the ambient outside air could be due to weather
conditions, automobile fumes from a nearby expressway, factories, etc. If there is a CO
reading outside, use this number as your baseline. Any increase from this number in the
area to be surveyed will be the amount of CO generated by internal sources.
Once the meter has been zeroed-in take a reading as you enter the area with the meter at
arms length. If the reading is in excess of 35 PPM of CO, don SCBA. Continue the
survey, checking the general air in each room, and at a distance of 1 to 2 feet from each
gas appliance, fuel/vent and fireplace.
Inspect all flues, vents, and chimneys for defects including but not limited too:
• missing – pipe, collars, inverters
• holes
• rusting
• obstructions
• lack of a ¼ inch rise per foot
• improper multiple flue installations
• detective chimney
Check flame for color (should be blue; however CO can still be present if there is a blue
flame). An orange color may indicate incomplete combustion and the production of CO.
Soot formation and condensation on windows may also be indicative of a CO problem.
If the survey fails to find the source of CO or there are no readings hazardous readings
obtained the survey can be repeated, at which time the owner/Occupant should be
advised to consult with the Building Department, Cinergy, or a qualified service to
technician if they desire additional follow up.

CARBON MONOXIDE INCIDENTS
204.03
Page 5 of 25
Rev. 8/05
1.

READINGS RESIDENTIAL/NON WORKSITE OCCUPANCIES
Because infants, the elderly, and people with certain health problems are at a
greater risk for complications from CO poisoning and tend to have longer
exposure periods in the home, the following guidelines should be followed:
If no one exhibits symptoms of Carbon Monoxide poisoning and there is less
than 10 PPM CO in the general air the Fire Department will:
•

•

•

Attempt to locate the source of CO or the reason the CO detector is sounding.
If a gas appliance is found to be leaking CO (reading 1 to 2 feet from
appliance) but is less than 10 PPM, notify Building Department/HVAC
Section and advise of the situation or notify CG&E. Remain on the scene
until the arrival of the requested department or the unit has been sealed off.
If unable to locate and CO is present but below 10 PPM, notify CG&E to
respond for a CO investigation. This has the same priority as a gas leak and
allows a CG&E representative to be pulled off of a non-priority job. The
Cincinnati Building Department/HVAC may also be requested if there a
concern for the health and welfare of the occupants. Remain on the scene
until the arrival of CG&E or the Building Department.
If a CO detector is sounding and no CO is found after an investigation, reset
detector if possible and tell occupant to call 911 if alarm sounds again.

Readings 10 PPM to 35 PPM CO ambient air or at appliance:
•

Advise occupants that readings in this range are considered above
normal.
Recommend that all occupants leave the building until it can be rendered
safe and begin ventilation.
•

Attempt to identify source of CO.

•

Request the Building Department/HVAC Section to respond if 10
PPM or more CO is encountered. Unless the CO situation is severe,
leave the defective appliance as found so that the HVAC inspector can
investigate the problem and order repairs. If there is an issue of safety,
use good judgment and shut appliance off. CG&E can also be called
to the scene at the discretion of the Incident Commander.

CARBON MONOXIDE INCIDENTS
204.03
Page 6 of 25
Rev. 8/05
•

Remain on the scene until the arrival of the HVAC inspector.

•

When corrective action is taken (defects fixed or unit sealed off) use
meter to assure area is safe.

•

After the area has been rendered safe and if a CO detector is present,
reset if possible. Advise occupants to call 911 if the CO detector
activates again.

Reading over 35 PPM of Carbon Monoxide in ambient air:
•

Don SCBA

•

Order all occupants to leave the building and begin ventilation.

•

Attempt to identify source of CO.

•

Request the Building Department/HVAC Section to respond. Unless the
CO situation is severe, leave the defective appliance as found so that the
HVAC inspection can investigate the problem and order repairs. If there
is an issue of safety, use good judgment and shut appliances off. CG&E
can also be called to the scene at the discretion of the Incident
Commander.

•

Remain on the scene until the arrival of the HVAC inspector.

•

When corrective action is taken (defects fixed or unit sealed off) use meter
to assure area is safe.

•

After the area has been rendered safe and if a CO detector is present, reset
if possible. Advise occupants to call 911 if the CO detector activates
again.

CARBON MONOXIDE INCIDENTS
204.03
Page 7 of 25
Rev. 8/05
2.

READINGS WORKSITE
If no one is exhibiting symptoms of Carbon Monoxide poisoning and there is
less than 35 PPM CO in the general air the Fire Department will:
•

Attempt to locate the source of CO or the reason a CO detector is
sounding, if applicable. If a gas appliance is found to be leaking CO
(reading 1 to 2 feet from appliance) but is less than 10 PPM, notify
Building Department/HVAC section and advise of the situation and notify
CG&E. If the reading is 10 PPM or more at the appliance or in the
general air request the Building Department/HVAC to respond to the
scene. Remain on the scene until the arrival of the requested department.

•

If unable to locate and Co is present but below 10 PPM, notify CG&E to
respond for a CO investigation. This has the same priority as a gas leak
and allows a CG&E representative to be pulled off a non-priority job. The
Cincinnati Building Department/HVAC Section may also be requested if
there is a concern for the health and welfare of the occupants. Remain on
the scene until the arrival of CG&E or the Building Department.



If a CO detector is sounding and no CO is found after an investigation,
reset detector if possible and tell occupant to call 911 if alarm sounds
again.

READINGS > 35 PPM BUT < 100 PPM in general air
•

Don SCBA

•

Order all occupants that readings in this range are considered above
normal. Recommend that all occupants leave the building until it can
be rendered safe and begin ventilation.

•

Attempt to identify source of CO

•

Request the Building Department/HVAC Section to respond to the
scene. Unless the CO situation is severe, leave the defective appliance
as found so that the HVAC inspector can investigate the problem and
order repairs. If there is an issue of safety, use good judgment and
shut appliance off. CG&E can also be called to the scene at the
discretion of the Incident Commander.

CARBON MONOXIDE INCIDENTS
204.03
Page 8 of 25
Rev. 8/05

•

Remain on the scene until the arrival of the HVAC inspector.

•

When corrective action is taken (defects fixed or until shut off) use
meter to assure area is safe.

•

After the area has been rendered safe and if a CO detector is present,
reset if possible. Advise occupants to call 911 if the CO detector
activates again.

READINGS 100 PPM or more/general air
•

Don SCBA

•

Order all occupants to leave the building and begin ventilation

•

Attempt to identify source of CO

•

Request the Building Department/HVAC Section to respond. Unless
the CO situation is severe, leave the defective appliance as found so
that the HVAC inspector can investigate the problem and order
repairs. If there is an issue of safety, use good judgment and shut
appliance off. CG&E can also be called to the scene at the discretion
of the Incident Commander.

•

Remain on the scene until the arrival of the Building
Department/HVAC inspector.

•

When corrective action is taken (defects fixed or unit shut off) use
meter to assure area is safe.

•

After the area has been rendered safe and if a CO detector is present,
reset if possible. Advise occupants to call 911 if the CO detector
activates again.

CARBON MONOXIDE INCIDENTS
204.03
Page 9 of 25
Rev. 8/05
Carbon Monoxide Procedure Matrix
Residential:
CO PPM
0
<10
10 to 35
>35

Worksite:
CO PPM
0
<10
10 to 35
35 to 100
>100

SCBA
A s needed
A s needed
Yes

SCBA
A s needed
A s needed
Yes
Yes

E V AC U AT E
CG&E
B ld g . D ep t.
reset detector, call 911 if alarm sounds again
U ntil C lear
Yes
A s N eeded
R ecm d.
Yes
R equired
O rder O ut
Yes
R equired

E V AC U AT E
CG&E
B ld g . D ep t.
reset detector, call 911 if alarm sounds again
investigate
Yes
Yes
advise
Yes
R equired
R ecm d.
Yes
R equired
O rder O ut
Yes
R equired

H ealth
A s N eeded
A s N eeded
A s N eeded

H ealth
A s N eeded
A s N eeded
A s N eeded
A s N eeded

ADDITIONAL NOTES:

If occupants are exhibiting symptoms of CO poisoning, order area vacated until it can be
checked thoroughly or rendered safe.
Any suspected CO situations or CO detectors sounding must be checked with a CO meter.
The Cincinnati Building Department/HVAC Section must be notified whenever 10 PPM or more
CO is found in the ambient air. They are required to respond to the scene when this notification
is made. If less than 10 PPM is found in the ambient air and the Incident Commander has a
concern for the health and welfare of the occupant, he may request that the Building Department
HVAC inspector to respond to the scene. This request will also be honored by the Building
Department.
The Cincinnati Health Department is an additional resource for CO incidents. They will respond
to the scene if requested by the Incident Commander or can do follow-up test and evaluation by
contacting them during business hours.
Worksite CO scale assumes healthy adult workers working an 8 hour shift. If worksite area
involved includes infants, elderly, or ill people, use the residential guidelines for procedure to be
followed.

CARBON MONOXIDE INCIDENTS
204.03
Page 10 of 25
Rev. 8/05
H.

SUSPECTED CARBON MONOXIDE FATALITIES
If a fatality has occurred, have Fire Dispatch make the required notifications. Request
that a District Chief respond, if not already on the scene.
Following are those that may be notified of the fatality:
•

Operations Chief – after business hours, Duty Chief

•

Fire Chief

•

Building Department/HVAC Section, except suicide by auto exhaust

•

Police Division – Homicide

•

Coroner’s Office

NOTE: Notify Fire Chief and Operations Assistant Chief (Duty Chief after hours) if
there are over 5 non-fatal victims.
I.

CARBON MONOXIDE SCENE OPERATIONS
Where it is possible and practical to do so, the situation may be temporarily
remedied i.e.


Vent pipe disconnected or a Vent pipe pushed too far into chimney.

These repairs are only temporary to mitigate the immediate hazardous condition.
The owner/occupant should be advised to seek permanent repairs by a qualified
service technician.
If there is an obvious hazardous defect in the gas appliance seal it O.O.S. Have
the gas company respond if the appliance is suspected as the source of the
problem.
In any case, where a correction has been made it is recommended that a Carbon
Monoxide test be made after the appliance has been back in service for a period of
time, to be sure that the situation has been fully corrected.
At no time should we leave premises that are going to be occupied if there is a
possibility of further CO poisoning. Nor should we leave unoccupied property
without having taken all possible measures to secure it from illegal entry.

CARBON MONOXIDE INCIDENTS
204.03
Page 11 of 25
Rev. 8/05
If a fatality has occurred, have Fire Dispatch make the required notifications.
Request that a District Chief respond, if not already on the scene.
Air monitor readings shall be taken and recorded. The PPM and the proximate
location of each reading shall be documented. If there are victims, take and record
air monitor reading at the location of the victims. All pertinent information shall
be included on the run report. A follow up F-47 Chiefs Report may be necessary
to convey all the information.
The location, activation, and reading of any residential CO detector shall be
documented.
J.

NOTIFICATIONS
It is very important that the Building Department has an opportunity to respond to
the scene of a Carbon Monoxide incident as soon as possible after such an
incident. The Heating Inspections Section of the Building Department must be
notified immediately of any significant CO incident. The Incident Commander
shall direct Fire Dispatch to contact the Building Department during regular
business hours and the proper on-call person after hours.
A Fire Division representative shall remain on the scene until arrival of Building
Department personnel.
The Incident Commander shall ensure that the Fire Prevention Bureau is notified,
The Fire Prevention Bureau shall forward a formal, written referral to the
Building Department as soon as possible.

K.

CARBON MONOXIDE SUPPLEMENTAL INFORMATION
What is Carbon Monoxide (CO) and who is at risk?
CO is a colorless, odorless tasteless, non-irritating toxic gas. It is a by-product of
incomplete combustion. CO is slightly lighter than air, having a vapor density of
.96. Since warm air rises, CO rises with it and stays in the upper strata of air.
CO poisoning is the leading cause of accidental deaths in the U.S. According to
medical authorities, exposure to CO causes about 1500 accidental deaths and
about 10,000 illnesses annually. CO poisoning can be easily mis-diagnosed as the
flu. Data from a medical study showed that about one fourth of patients
complaining of the flu had elevated levels of carboxyhemoglobin.
Carbon monoxide enters the body by respiration. It is transferred to the blood via

CARBON MONOXIDE INCIDENTS
204.03
Page 12 of 25
Rev. 8/05
the lungs by bonding with blood’s hemoglobin to form carboxyhemoglobin
(COHb). COHb reduces blood’s ability to transport oxygen (02) to the body.
Carbon Monoxide Facts
Because CO can be present without people being aware of it, it can injure or kill
before its presence is recognized. CO can pose a danger in new homes as well as
older ones. New homes are built much more weather-tight to reduce energy costs,
but this restricts the dissipation of CO. Older homes that are being weatherized
can create the same problem.
CO from appliances that burn fossil fuels such as natural gas, propane, oil, coal
and wood can reach dangerous concentrations if proper steps are not taken.
Charcoal-burning appliances can emit up to 200 PPM. Gas ranges can emit up to
800 PPM when cold and up to 400 PPM after reaching operating temperature.
Regarding gas ranges, their CO emission levels are not considered a safety
problem because ranges are used intermittently, so the CO normally dissipates to
a lower level throughout a home.
Some people feel that it is safe to run an automobile in a garage as long as the
garage door is open. This practice is not safe because the home may be under a
negative pressure and pull CO-laden air through the door jamb and spaces around
doors and windows.
Everyone is at risk from CO poisoning, but some persons are at higher risk than
others. Infants have higher respiration rates and greater need for oxygen than
adults, so they can be affected by lower CO concentrations. This applies to others
who may be oxygen-deprived, such as people with heart problems.
Why is Carbon Monoxide dangerous?
CO is highly toxic, is undetectable without special instruments, and provides no
early warning signs of its negative effects. It suffocates its victims by displacing
oxygen in the bloodstream.
Reduced oxygen in the blood harms life-support function (brain, cardiac and
respiratory activity), and can cause death. Hemoglobin in the blood transfers 02
from the lungs to organs and returns C02 to the lungs for exhalation. Hemoglobin
has a greater affinity (200-300 times) for CO than 02.
Low level CO poisoning can mimic flu symptoms, causing headaches

CARBON MONOXIDE INCIDENTS
204.03
Page 13 of 25
Rev. 8/05
(mild/severe), fatigue, nausea, dizziness, confusion, and irritability. Higher levels
of COHb can cause, vomiting, drowsiness, and loss of consciousness. Extreme
levels of COHb can cause seizures, comas, permanent brain damage, and
eventually death.
Where does Carbon Monoxide come from?
Carbon Monoxide is a by-product of combustion, so it may be present wherever
fuel is burned. It can result from blocked chimneys, corroded or disconnected
flues, engine exhaust (auto, lawn mower, snow blower, generator), charcoal grills
in or near enclosed areas, gas clothes dryers, fireplaces, furnace heat exchangers
or flues, gas ranges, wood burning stoves, water heaters, space heaters, portable
heaters (kerosene, propane), downdrafts, and reverse stacking.
In properly vented homes with properly operating appliances, CO is safely
dissipated and vented to the outside. When homes are made “energy efficient”
homes, however, this may not be the case. Weatherization designed to keep
warm air in during winter months can allow CO concentrations to increase. An
inadequate air supply can cause reverse stacking, forcing contaminated air back
into the home. This is especially true where 2 vented appliances are enclosed and
there is inadequate air supply for both units at the same time.
Symptoms of Carbon Monoxide poisoning
CO poisoning can cause a number of symptoms, depending upon the length and
severity of exposure. Mild exposure can result in a slight headache, nausea,
vomiting, and fatigue. These are often described as “flu-like” symptoms.
Medium exposure can produce severe throbbing headaches, drowsiness,
confusion, and fast heart rate. Extreme exposure can produce unconsciousness,
convulsions, heart and lung fatigue, brain damage and eventually death.
A 1986 study of emergency room patients found that 24% of patients reporting flu
symptoms had low level CO poisoning. Medical reports also indicate that CO can
aggravate cardiovascular conditions. Medical experts estimate that one third of
all cases of CO Poisonings go undetected, and that one third of survivors of CO
poisoning may have lasting memory deficits or personality changes.
Unborn babies can be at risk when exposed to lower levels of CO. A University
of Utah report revealed that in 50 percent of emergency room cases studied,
expectant mothers single exposure to high levels of CO resulted in death of the
fetus while the mother survived. Medical evidence suggests that lower lever

CARBON MONOXIDE INCIDENTS
204.03
Page 14 of 25
Rev. 8/05
exposure to CO, even at 20 PPM, can be hazardous to children, infants, the
unborn, the elderly, and those with heart or lung disease.
Extreme CO poisoning can disorient and impair motor skills. This may affect a
person’s ability to open doors or perform other simple tasks. Upon exposure to
CO, the rate of COHb increase in blood varies with each individual. This rate is a
function of the concentration of CO, length of exposure (PPM), the age and health
of the individual, and the amount of physical exertion taking place during
exposure. Since children have a higher respiration rate than adults, their COHb
levels rise more quickly than adults.

Carbon Monoxide Exposure Levels and Detector Alarm Standards
There is no consensus on acceptable exposure levels to CO. The various
exposure thresholds set by different regulatory agencies reflect differences in the
purposes of their regulations. The table below contains a sample of the exposure
thresholds set by federal agencies.
Federal Exposure Standards
Organization

Time Period

CPSC
CPSC
EPA
EPA
OSHA

8 hours
1 hour
8 hours
1 hour
8 hours

Recommended Maximum
Exposure Level
15 PPM
25 PPM
09 PPM
35 PPM
50 PPM

Ambient Conditions
The EPA standard for ambient air is 9 PPM/8 hours. The air in several U.S. cities
exceeds this threshold two or more times year. Outdoor CO levels in Los Angeles
can reach 30-50 PPM. In Chicago, a weather inversion in 1994 created 10 PPM
throughout the city. Denver regularly has outdoor CO levels that exceed the EPA
threshold.

CARBON MONOXIDE INCIDENTS
204.03
Page 15 of 25
Rev. 8/05
Measuring Carbon Monoxide
Exposure to CO is expressed in parts per million over time. The higher the
concentration, the shorter the time period needed to affect the body.
Underwriters Laboratories Standard 2034
A. General features
UL Standard 2034 requires that CO detectors pass over 37 tests of safety,
reliability and performance. One test requires that CO detectors activate when
exposed to specific levels of CO.
The higher the CO concentration, the shorter the time allowed for the detector to
activate. The concentrations and time periods selected for the tests are levels that
will cause a CO detector to activate before an average healthy adult begins to
experience symptoms of CO poisoning. For example, exposure to 100 PPM for
20 minutes may have no effect on an average healthy adult, but a four-hour
exposure to the same level may produce a headache. Exposure to 400 PPM for 35
minutes may cause a headache, but a 2-hour exposure to same level of CO could
be fatal.
B. Sensitivity Test, Section 37
To comply with UL 2034, detectors must activate before the concentration of CO
would result in a 10 percent COHb level in a healthy adult. The consensus of the
medical community is that a healthy adult can handle up to 10 percent COHb with
no perceptible effect. Some medical evidence suggests that chronic effects may
occur at levels as low as 2-3 percent COHb.
Specifically, UL Standard 2034, Section 37.1.1., states, “A carbon monoxide
detector shall operate at or below the plotted limits for the 10 percent COHb
curve specified in Figure 37.1 and Table 37.1.”
UL Table 37.1, Part A
CO Exposure/Alarm Level

Maximum Time Period

100 PPM
200 PPM

Before 90 minutes
Before 35 minutes

CARBON MONOXIDE INCIDENTS
204.03
Page 16 of 25
Rev. 8/05
400 PPM

Before 15 minutes

C. False Alarm Resistance
Part B of Table 37.1 contains CO concentrations over specified time periods for
which CO detectors must not activate.
UL Table 37.1, Part B
CO Exposure Tolerance

Time

100 PPM + 5 PPM
60 PPM + 3 PPM
15 PPM +/- 3 PPM
35 PPM +/- 3 PPM

16 minutes
28 minutes
30 days1
See Note 1 and 2 below

Note 1 - Effective October 1, 1995
Note 2 - Rush-hour test –30 cycles of 35 PPM/1 hr, then 6 hrs cleans air, then 35
PPM/1hr, then 16 hrs clean air

D. Reliability
Both the biomimetic-type and semiconductor-type CO detectors pass the
reliability tests in UL 2034. UL also conducts periodic unannounced factory
inspections to select additional units for testing.
By virtue of its design, a biomimetic sensor can only detect CO. Semiconductor
sensors that comply with UL 2034 are highly selective for CO, and are only
affected by relatively high concentrations of other gases, much higher than would
be expected in a normal residential environment.

Sensor Technology & Operating Principles of CO Detectors
A. General
Carbon monoxide detectors are designed to continuously monitor indoor air and
activate before CO reaches unsafe concentrations. It is important to note that CO
detectors are designed specifically to detect the presence of CO, and are not

CARBON MONOXIDE INCIDENTS
204.03
Page 17 of 25
Rev. 8/05
intended to replace smoke detectors.
CO detectors may be hard-wired only, battery only or hard-wired with battery
back-up. The AC-powered units may have pigtails for direct connection, or they
may have appliance cords or plugs for connection to an outlet.
At present, CO detectors use one of two technologies. The first one uses a sensor
employing a chemical reaction and is called biomimetic. The other type of
technology uses a semiconductor.
B. Biomimetic
Biomimetic means to mimic life, in this case a biological system. The biomimetic
process is sometimes referred to as gel cell because of the translucent disks used
in the sensor. The disks are molecularly engineered synthetic hemoglobin. This
product mimics the reaction of natural hemoglobin to CO because it is designed to
form a molecular keyhole that only CO can fit. As CO attaches to the artificial
hemoglobin, the disk darkens. A light-emitting diode (LED) monitors the degree
of optical change. When the concentration of CO on the disk reaches the
activation threshold, the detector activates.
Biomimetic sensors do not accumulate CO. Like the human body, the sensors
attract and discharge CO at the same time, but the discharge rate is slower than
the pickup. CO half-life is the same for both human body and these sensors,
about five hours. For example, assume that a person who was exposed to CO has
a COHb level of 20%. After being in fresh air for five hours, the person’s COHb
level will be 10%. Depending upon CO concentration and exposure period,
cleansing may take several hours.
CO detectors that use biomimetic sensors comply with UL 2034 Performance
tests. They are designed to activate at chronic exposure levels as well as acute
levels. They may sound an intermittent alarm as CO levels build. Per UL 2034,
the detector will sound a trouble signal (one short beep every minute) when the
battery or sensor need to be replaced. The batteries have a 2-3 year lifetime,
depending upon how often the detector has activated. The overall life expectancy
of the detector itself is 10 years.
C. Semiconductor
1. General

CARBON MONOXIDE INCIDENTS
204.03
Page 18 of 25
Rev. 8/05
Semiconductor-based CO detectors use an electrically-powered sensing element
that is monitored by an integrated circuit, or computer chip. The majority of
manufacturers use the Figaro TGS-203 Gas Sensor. The TGS-203 sensor is
highly selective to CO. The sensing element is a thin layer of tin dioxide that
covers a ceramic base. Wires on the same circuit are embedded into each end of
the ceramic. Because it is not a conductor, the ceramic base creates an open
circuit and the tin dioxide maintains as electrical continuity between the wires.
2. Operating principles
The surface of the electrically-charged tin dioxide attracts O2 and CO. O2
restricts the flow of electrons, thus increasing the electrical resistance between the
wires. CO causes the electrons to flow more easily, reducing the electrical
resistance. The lower the resistance is the higher the CO level recorded by the
microchip. The sensors work in 2.5 minute cycles, monitoring air quality,
burning off CO collected during last test cycle, and conducting a self-test. The
microchip records each sampling and will cause the detector to activate if the
samples continue to show CO levels over the UL 2034 concentration/time
thresholds.
Humidity can increase the sensitivity of the semiconductor sensor. To
compensate for this, the sensing element heats to a high temperature for 60
seconds, then to a low temperature for 90 seconds. During the high-temperature
cycle, any water vapor that was deposited on the surface is burned off along with
the CO. During the low-temperature cycle, the microchip measures the amount of
CO that is deposited on the sensor surface, then cycles to the high-temperature
stage to burn it off before the next sample phase.
3. Design, optional features
Semiconductor detectors meet the requirements of UL 2034. They are all ACpowered and feature a reset button. Different models come with a variety of
features, such as a digital, readout showing PPM of CO detected and a dual alarm
for chronic and acute levels of CO. These detectors have a life expectancy of 510 years.
Common Installation Practices
Emergency response personnel should be familiar with the proper methods for
locating and installing CO detectors for three primary reasons. First, detector
location is a factor in the investigation of possible causes for detector activation.

CARBON MONOXIDE INCIDENTS
204.03
Page 19 of 25
Rev. 8/05
Second, emergency response personnel can advise occupants on proper
installation practices. Finally, this information should be included in public
education programs to reduce CO detector calls.
At present, there is no installation standard for CO detectors. The recommended
installation depends upon the type, model and manufacturer of the device. The
Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC) does recommend, however, that
there be at least one CO detector per household, located outside the sleeping area.
Most manufacturers recommend additional CO detectors for each level and
bedroom of a residence. The NFPA may publish an installation standard for CO
detectors in the future.
Until an installation standard is published, owners of CO detectors are advised to
follow manufacturer’s instructions. The instructions generally agree that
detectors should be near sleeping areas so they can be heard at night, in areas with
fuel-burning appliances in order to respond to CO buildup, and on each level of a
residence so that they are within hearing distance.
Detectors designed to be wall-mounted should be placed with the test/reset button
at the bottom of the unit. If installed on a sloped ceiling, CO detectors should be
placed at least three feet horizontally from the peak of the ceiling. Generally, CO
detectors should be placed in every room where people spend a lot of time.

Common Installation Problems
There are a number of common problems associated with the installation of CO
detectors, which may hinder their performance. The most fundamental problem is
the failure of owners to read the instruction manual. Consequently, detectors are
sometimes installed:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Too close to cooking and heating appliances in common areas of
multi-family dwellings.
In very cold or very hot areas.
In dead air space.
In locations where the detector is obstructed.
In the path of turbulent air from a ceiling fan.
In locations where they accumulate grease and soot.
In unvented rooms with cleaning supplies and other contaminants.
On switched electrical outlets.

CARBON MONOXIDE INCIDENTS
204.03
Page 20 of 25
Rev. 8/05

All of these locations can prevent a CO detector from opening properly.
Investigative Techniques
An effective CO investigation is logical and systematic, just like a fire
investigation. All possible sources must be checked and each potential source
systematically eliminated. Care should be taken so that nothing is inadvertently
overlooked. Effective investigation is the key to achieving the goal – mitigating
the hazard. Systematic investigation assts in determining the danger level,
identifying CO sources, mitigate/eliminating CO sources, and advising occupants.
Investigation Steps
1. Consider firefighter safety
CO detection instruments should be checked for proper calibration and an initial
test of the instrument should be conducted at the door before proceeding through
a residence. In some cases CO may be present in the ambient air outside and
should be considered when assessing CO readings.
2. Interview occupants
Firefighters should observe occupants to help confirm CO symptoms. Remember
to observe the behavior of pets, since they are likely to exhibit symptoms sooner
than adult humans. Check for presence of people in at-risk groups (very young,
elderly, pregnant females, anyone already ill). Ask about activities of the
occupants over the past several hours, since lower concentrations can take several
hours to activate the detector.

3. Determine condition of home prior to detector activation
Through discussion with occupants, emergency response personnel should
determine what combustion appliances were operating and for how long. Were
ranges or oven being used to heat the home? Have there been any recent
installations or repair of combustion equipment?
The location of CO detector(s), by area and level in a residence should be
determined. Emergency response personnel should also determine if any
occupants are presently feeling ill or had been feeling ill earlier. Did the

CARBON MONOXIDE INCIDENTS
204.03
Page 21 of 25
Rev. 8/05
occupants open any windows or doors? Did the occupant shut off any
appliances?
4. Create a worst-case scenario
In order to isolate possible sources of CO, emergency responders should begin by
closing all windows and doors in the residence.
Next, turn on all fuel burning appliances and all exhaust fans (kitchen/bath). Let
appliances reach operating temp. (10 minutes). Then check potential sources of
carbon monoxide. Supplement instrument readings with visual inspection.
Investigate every potential source.
5. Checklist
A checklist helps the investigator conduct a systematic and through investigation.
The checklist can be used in two steps. First, check the premises and confirm the
presence of all potential CO sources. Then go back and record any CO
concentrations found at each item. This will ensure that potential sources are not
overlooked. The checklist also becomes a record of the investigation as well as
an aid to follow-up for other agencies.
Appliances and CO sources
Check furnaces flue pipes for corrosion, rust holes, loose or missing connections,
and blockage and down drafting. Flu pipes must also be installed so that there is
a ¼ inch rise on the run from the appliance to the chimney. Down drafting can
occur when the air pressure inside a home becomes lower than outside, causing
flue gases to reverse and flow into the house. Furnaces may also contribute to
reverse stacking. Reverse stacking is a reversal of airflow in a flue or chimney
when two or more appliances are competing for the same air. An example is a
furnace pulling outside air back through the water heater flue. This is especially
true where the water heater and the furnace have been located in an enclosed area.
Check the furnace fan for proper installation (direction of flow). Burner and pilot
light flames should be blue (note: a blue flame does not mean that there is not a
CO problem). Examine the combustion chambers for corrosion and cracks from
metal fatigue. It is not possible to visually inspect the entire combustion
chamber. To check for a cracked heat exchanger, take readings at air register
discharges. The register closest to the furnace may be the best indicator.

CARBON MONOXIDE INCIDENTS
204.03
Page 22 of 25
Rev. 8/05
Check the condition of all flues. The flue should be free of rust holes, loose or
missing connections and blockage. Examine the draft inverter on water heaters
for soot and rust deposits. Burners and pilot’s lights should be checked to be sure
that the flame is properly adjusted (blue). Note: only 1 draft inverter should be
installed on a water heater. Older instantaneous water heaters require no draft
inverter.
On kitchen ranges, check the burners and pilot lights for proper adjustment.
Kitchen ranges are allowed to emit CO under normal operation. Each brand will
vary, but they are allowed to emit up to 800 PPM on start-up and 400 PPM when
at their operating temperature. These levels are not considered to pose a risk if
the home has sufficient make-up air to dissipate the CO and if the range is used
intermittently.
The combustion chambers and flue pipes of wood-burning stoves should also be
inspected for cracks or loose connections. If a gas clothes dryer is present, check
the pilot and burner flame for adjustment. Check the exhaust flue for blockages
or other damage.
The combustion area and operation of space heaters should be checked, as well as
the practice of opening a window for fresh make-up air when the space heater is
used. Inspect fireplace flues/chimneys for cracks or blockage.
Confirm if a barbecue grill was being used indoors or outside near a window that
would allow CO to enter. CO from running automobile engines can enter living
areas even if they are being operated in a garage with the garage door open.
Gas-operated refrigerators can still be found and need to be inspected like any
other gas-operated appliance.
Testing & Returning Carbon Monoxide Detectors to Service
Biomimetic Detectors
This type of detector is self-testing. It will produce a trouble alarm, consisting of
one short beep per minute, to indicate that the sensor pack needs replacement. If
the detector is not sounding, push test button (10-20 sec) to confirm that the
detector is operational. If the detector is operating properly and the sensor has
purged the CO, the horn should sound for 5-10 sec and then silence.
If the detector is sounding, remove the sensor pack to silence the alarm. Place the

CARBON MONOXIDE INCIDENTS
204.03
Page 23 of 25
Rev. 8/05
sensor pack in fresh air to regenerate. It may regenerate in as little as an hour if
the CO concentration was low.
If the detector activates when the sensor pack is reinserted, remove it for a loner
period, 2 to 48 hours. The biomimetic sensor mimics the human body’s
hemoglobin, and CO takes just as long to clear from the sensor as it does the
body. The sensor module can be permanently damaged by a high concentration
of CO, just as a person can die in spite of medical intervention when the percent
of COHb is high.
Semiconductor Detectors
These types of detectors are self-testing and will sound a trouble signal if a
component fails. The trouble signal consists of one short beep per minute. This
indicates that the detector needs to be replaced. If the detector is not sounding,
push the test button to confirm if the detector is operational. If the detector is
sounding, push the button to silence the detector. Pushing the test button initiates
a 60-second high-heat cycle to burn off any CO, water vapor, and other gases.
After this cycle, the detector should reset and return to normal operational mode.
If the trouble signal continues or the horn does not respond to test, the detector
needs replacement. High concentrations of contaminants can kill this type of
detector. In addition, it is important to note that the sensor in these types of
detectors becomes more sensitive with age, and therefore, the detector eventually
needs replacement.

PUBLIC EDUCATION
The first priority of a public education program should be to prevent CO emergencies
from occurring. The next priority is to reduce the number of unnecessary CO calls due to
poor placement of detectors, poorly maintained detectors, and occupant misunderstanding
of detector operation.
Advising the public on preventive measures:
The methods for public education on CO detectors are the same ones used for general fire
prevention. They include group presentations, community council meetings, civic clubs
and media interviews. Public education efforts should include advice on the need to test

CARBON MONOXIDE INCIDENTS
204.03
Page 24 of 25
Rev. 8/05
and maintain fuel-burning equipment annually, as well as the role of public utilities,
private fuel companies and appliance repair firms. Check with the E.S.S. Bureau for the
availability of hand-outs and videos regarding CO.
The importance of cleaning chimneys and flues yearly should be stressed. This should
include an explanation of why this is important, along with maintenance tips. Equally
important is the need for regular inspections by qualified personnel of all fuel-burning
appliances. The public should be reminded to watch for excessive rust and scaling,
burners and pilot lights, which need adjustment (consistently yellow flame means fuel is
not being burned completely, a source of CO), and check for downdraft and reverse
stacking.
Public education programs should include tips on the safe use of appliances, e.g., not
using charcoal grills, keeping outdoor barbecues away from open windows and doors, not
using a range for heating, venting clothes dryers outside, slightly opening windows for
fresh air, and not running a car in a garage, even with the overhead door open.
The public needs to be taught what to do when CO poisoning is suspected and advised
about the fact that CO poisoning can mimic flu symptoms.

CARBON MONOXIDE INCIDENTS
204.03
Page 25 of 25
Rev. 8/05
UNDERSTANDING THE AFFECTS OFCARBON MONOXIDE ON HUMAN BEINGS
09 PPM: The maximum allowable concentration for continuous exposure in any 8 hour
period according to EPA
35 PPM: The maximum allowable concentration for continuous exposure in any 8 hour
period according to OSHA
100 PPM: In an average healthy person the blood level will not reach a level higher than
10% Carboxyhemoglobin within 90 minutes, which means it will have little or no affect on
the average healthy person
200 PPM: Slight headache, tiredness, dizziness, nausea after 2 to 3 hours exposure
400 PPM: MAXIMUM carbon monoxide concentration for exposure at any time as
prescribed by OSHA
600 PPM: Frontal headaches within 1 to 2 hours of exposure - Life threatening after 3
hours (Minimum PPM in flue gas according to EPA & AGA/GAMA)
800 PPM: Dizziness, nausea and convulsions within 45 minutes - Unconsciousness within 2
hours Death within 3 hours
1600 PPM: Headache, nausea, dizziness within 20 minutes - Death within 1 hour
3200 PPM: Headache, nausea, dizziness within 5-10 minutes. Death within 30 minutes
6400 PPM: Headache, nausea, dizziness within 1-2 minutes. Death within 10-15 minutes
12,800 PPM: DEATH within 1 to 3 minutes
NOTE: A car can produce as much as 100,000 PPM carbon monoxide per minute during start up and
warm up periods. This level is reduced once engine is at normal operating temperature.
NOTE: PPM represents Parts Per Million in the atmosphere. 1% of carbon monoxide in the atmosphere
equals approximately 10,000 PPM.


=== 204.04 Air Care Helicopter rev -8-05 ===
AIR CARE HELICOPTER
204.04
Page1 of5
Rev. 8/05

CHAPTER II

Operations

SUBJECT 4

Emergency Medical Operations

TOPIC 4

Air Care Helicopter

A.

SCOPE
This topic provides specific information to be used at all situations involving the use of
the all medical helicopters. Unless specifically superseded by this procedure, all other
Fire Department Procedures shall be used in operations involving medical helicopters.

B.

C.

PRIORITIES
1.

Safe movement and treatment of patients using medical helicopters.

2.

Safety of emergency responders, helicopter crews and the public.

SAFETY
1.

Landing site must be clear of overhead obstructions. Notify the pilot of the
location and height of any overhead obstructions.

2.

Clear the site of debris and loose objects, e.g., clothing, sheets, or blankets. You
may expect winds of 60 to 70 mph.

3.

Wearing eye protection in the landing zone is mandatory.

4.

Never approach the helicopter until signaled by the flight crew. Remember, if
you can see the pilot’s eyes, he can see you.

5.

Only flight crew members may open and close aircraft doors.

6.

Always approach and leave the helicopter from the front

7.

When flammable or poisonous vapors are involved select a landing site at least
one mile upwind.

8.

Night Operations:
• Do not use flashing lights, or point lights at the helicopter while it is airborne.
This could temporarily blind the pilot at a critical time.
• Mark the corners of the landing site, and the center of the windward edge with
flares. An alternate method of marking corners is to use police cars, or apparatus
with flashing lights. Headlights or auxiliary lights should point toward the center
of the landing site to avoid "blinding" the pilot.

9.

Never smoke during emergency helicopter operations.

AIR CARE HELICOPTER
204.04
Page2 of5
Rev. 8/05

D.

10.

Do not run while in the vicinity of the helicopter.

11.

Do not carry IV's or other objects above your head. Carry long objects parallel to
the ground.

12.

Do not operate anywhere near the tail rotor of the helicopter.

13.

There is no standard ground clearance for helicopter blades. Use extreme caution
anytime around rotating blades.

OPERATIONS
The first arriving fire unit, recognizing the possible need for a medical helicopter, should
notify Fire Dispatch to request that the Air Care helicopter be placed on "stand by". This
will alert the air crew to respond to the helicopter and prepare for a potential response. In
situations involving entrapments or multiple victims, request that the Air Care helicopter
is dispatched anytime the medical assistance team might be beneficial to the patients.
All calls for Air Care will be channeled to Fire Dispatch through the Incident
Commander.
Communications with Air Care can be accomplished using the 800 MHz radio on 8i TAC
2 (Zone C 14) to provide landing instructions, advising of overhead wires, etc.
Communications with Police can be accomplished on CPD channels 1 through 5 (Zones
D 8-12). Even though the Police radios are divided by Districts, communication can still
be accomplished through any of the Police District Channels regardless of which channel
is selected.
Police officers on the scene will be responsible to secure a suitable landing site, and to
keep unauthorized personnel and vehicles at least 100 feet away from the landing zone.
Air Care crew will work with you to stabilize the patient before transport. Do not take
the patient to the helicopter until directed by Air Care personnel.
Once Air Care has been placed on standby or is responding, only the Fire Department
Incident Commander can cancel to request.
Only trained in Landing Zone personnel should set up the LZ.
Consider parking emergency vehicles under any overhead wires if possible and notify
pilot.
Air Care can land on any reasonably level area; minimum 100’ x 100’ firm surface.
The clearance for a Landing Zone should be large enough to allow the helicopter to
approach and depart in a 45 degree angle.
The Landing Zone Officer should survey the area for ½ mile radius for all obstacles.
Note: Structures less than 200 feet in height are not required by law to have
warning lights.

AIR CARE HELICOPTER
204.04
Page3 of5
Rev. 8/05

Be alert around the helicopter
Don’t slam the doors, but close
them gently and don’t let them
swing in the wind
Don’t touch the bubble [it’s
only plastic], or any moving
parts

PROTECT YOURSELF
1. Fasten seatbelt on entering the helicopter and
leave it done until the pilot signals to get out
2. Ask the pilot about emergency exits and
escape procedures
3. Dress for the operating environment
4. Keep well clear of landing areas when the
helicopter is landing or taking off, especially
with external load
5. Shield your eyes near a helicopter when it is
landing or taking off.

ALWAYS
approach from the
downhill side

Approach and leave the helicopter in
a crouched manner

ALWAYS avoid this blind
area. The pilot can’t see you

Never approach or leave uphill
[rotor blades are expensive]
Keep the landing area clean…
The helicopter downwash will
lift and move an amazing

Carry tools
and other
long objects
horizontally
below waist
line, not
upright or
over the
shoulder

He can’t
see you
here either

Don’t even
get close
to the
tail rotor
[it bites
hard]

Never throw any
object in the vicinity
of the helicopter

Hold on to your hat. Don’t make campfires
near the pad. She makes great winds

AIR CARE HELICOPTER
204.04
Page4 of5
Rev. 8/05

NIGHT LANDING ZONE MARKINGS
100'

Danger

100'
100'

Caution

Vehicle

100'

Vehicle

AIR CARE HELICOPTER
204.04
Page5 of5
Rev. 8/05

Flare

Flare

Helicopter
Approach
Direction
Wind
Flare

Direction

Flare
Flare


=== 204.05 Infection Control SOP ===
INFECTION CONTROL SOPs
204.05
Page - 1 of 15
6/12
CHAPTER

II

Operations

SUBJECT

4

Emergency Medical Operations

TOPIC 5

Infection Control Standard Operating Procedures

A.

SOP #1: INFECTIOUS DISEASE EXPOSURE GUIDELINES
SCOPE: When a Cincinnati Fire Department member receives a significant exposure to
the body fluids of a patient, or shares the intimate air space of an infectious TB patient
without proper respiratory protection, the exposed member shall follow these guidelines.

B.

A SIGNIFICANT EXPOSURE MEANS
1.

2.

C.

More than just casual contact with the following body fluids: blood, sputum,
saliva, semen, vaginal secretions or amniotic fluid, spinal fluid, synovial fluid
(joint, bone, tendon), pleural fluid (lung), peritoneal fluid (abdomen), pericardial
fluid (heart). These are body fluids to which universal precautions apply. The
exposure to body fluids must occur via one of three routes:
a.

Mucus membranes (body fluids splashed into eyes, nose, or mouth).

b.

Exposed unhealed open sores, wounds, or rashes.

c.

Percutaneous route (needle stick or break in the skin).

Exposure to a known contagious disease.

STEPS TO TAKE AFTER SUSTAINING A SIGNIFICANT EXPOSURE
1.

Special arrangements have been made between University Hospital and the
Cincinnati Fire Department, therefore all exposed CFD member should go to UC
hospital immediately, even if this means taking the company out of service. If an
injury or significant exposure occurred, the member should sign-in as a patient at
the UC Emergency Room to be treated at the hospital. As with all injuries, the
reports in the Workers Compensation folder should be completed, including the
F-91 S/F, the BWC First Report of Injury, and the State of Ohio Sharps Injury
Form, where applicable. The F-91 S/F must be completed for tracking the claim
and identifying the source patients testing process. They are carried by all Medic
Units and ALS 34/32.

2.

Time is of the essence. Notify ALS 34/32 as soon as possible after a suspected
significant exposure. An exposure must be reported to the hospital while the

INFECTION CONTROL SOPs
204.05
Page - 2 of 15
6/12
patient is still under their care. Locating and obtaining permission to test patients
that have been discharged is extremely difficult.

D.

3.

The paramedic, ALS 34/32, or hospital personnel should attempt to obtain a blood
sample in a “tiger top” tube while the patient is still in our care in order to have
the patient’s blood tested at U.C. The tube must be properly labeled. The label
must contain the Source Patients Last Name, the word “LINK”, and then the
Firefighters Last Name. (Example: Smith, LINK, Davis)

4.

The Hospital Exposure Form officially notifies the hospital that you are
requesting information about a patient, and allows them to give the EHS a followup report with results of the patient's blood tests. All of the necessary forms and
informational sheets are contained in the Red Folder labeled “Infectious Disease
Exposure Packet”. The Red Folders are carried on all Medic Units, and ALS
34/32.

5.

In the event that the Emergency Physician and the exposed member disagree on
whether there was an actual significant exposure, the member will be guided by
ALS 34/32 and the CFD medical director’s instructions. The Paperwork should
still be completed and submitted.

6.

There may be some occasions in which a patient is suspected of having, or known
to have, a contagious infectious disease and is not transported to the hospital,
(e.g.: refuses aid, taken by police to jail, taken to the morgue, etc.). In this event, a
Run Report completed at the scene should include, not only, all appropriate
information about the patient (including physician's name), but also, the names
and badge numbers of any police officers on the scene. Notify ALS 34/32
immediately upon your return to quarters and be guided by their instructions.

GENERAL INFORMATION ON INJURIES OR EXPOSURES
1.

State laws (Statute 3701.242) permit area hospitals to test patients for contagious
or infectious diseases when a health-care worker has sustained a significant
exposure. In most cases, mouth-to-mouth contact with a patient is not considered
a significant exposure unless blood is visualized in the body fluids. CFD
members shall avoid mouth to mouth contact. Mouth to mouth ventilation is
NOT an approved procedure for Fire Department personnel. All Fire Department
Personnel must use devices provided for ventilation of patients.

INFECTION CONTROL SOPs
204.05
Page - 3 of 15
6/12
The final notice for the Ryan White Act issued March 21, 1994 and effective April 20,
1994 states:
- If the hospital determines the patient has TB it must notify the ERE's
(Emergency Response Employee) designated officer as soon as practicable but
not later than 48 hours after the determination has been made.
- For exposures to a blood borne or other infectious diseases listed, the ERE may
submit a request to determine whether a significant exposure occurred to the
designated officer for the Fire Department who investigates the exposure.
- The hospital then determines:
- Was the exposure significant?
- Can a patient be identified?
- Do the patient's records show a disease listed or does the patient show symptoms
of the listed diseases?
- If the answers above are yes, the hospital then notifies the designated officer as
soon as possible but not later than 48 hours after receipt of the request.
- The Ryan White Act does not authorize hospitals to require testing of victims for
disease nor does it allow the patient's confidential medical information be
disclosed. The hospital notifies: that the ERE may have been exposed to an
infectious disease, the name of the disease involved, actions the ERE should take,
and, the date of the emergency.
The Ohio Senate Bill 2, the omnibus AIDS bill became effective November 1, 1989
contains the following provisions for HIV test results:
HIV test results may be released to a health care provider, emergency medical
services worker or peace officer that has sustained significant exposure to the
body fluids of the tested individual. However the identity of the individual tested
is not to be revealed.
Exceptions to Informed Consent for HIV testing:
When the test is performed in a medical emergency by a nurse or physician and
the test results are medically necessary to avoid or minimize an immediate danger
to the health or safety of the individual to be tested or another individual
(counseling is to be given to the individual tested as soon as possible after the
emergency is over);

INFECTION CONTROL SOPs
204.05
Page - 4 of 15
6/12
When the test is performed by or on the order of a physician who, in the exercise
of his or her professional judgment, determines the test is necessary for providing
diagnosis and treatment to the individual to be tested, if the individual or the
individual's parent or guardian has given consent to the physician for medical
treatment;
When an infection control committee of a health care facility or other body
performing a similar function of a health care facility determines that a health care
provider, emergency medical services worker or peace officer, while rendering
health or emergency care to an individual, has sustained a significant exposure to
the body fluids of that individual and that individual has refused to be tested.

E.

2.

No overtime will be paid for time spent seeking medical assistance or while
hospitalized (e.g.: a member injured at 0630 hours and taken to the hospital will
not be paid past 0700 hours).

3.

A member working past shift change who becomes injured while in an overtime
status will be paid one hour of overtime per Union Contract.

4.

No CFD member is required to report to EHS while in an off-duty status.
However, per CFD Procedures Manual 903.03, if a member wishes to be carried
in an IWP status, he or she must contact the EHS Physician the next business day.
As has been our past policy, no overtime will be paid for these visits.

SOP #2: POST-EXPOSURE PROTOCOLS
1.

Any member exposed to potentially infectious material will immediately wash the
exposed area with water or saline eye wash if the eyes are involved.

2.

Any member exposed to a communicable disease will immediately report the
incident to a supervisor and ALS 34/32. Needle stick injuries will be reported to
the infection control officer immediately. Refer and be guided by procedures in
SOP #1: INFECTIOUS DISEASE EXPOSURE GUIDELINES.

3.

The supervisor will complete the F-91 F/S unofficial worksheet and forward it the
District Chief to be entered into the injury report program on the computer.

4.

Disciplinary action may be required to ensure all members are wearing PPE for
infection control. Retraining will be required and/or stress management
counseling will be given if indicated. Spousal stress management / family
counseling will also be made available.

INFECTION CONTROL SOPs
204.05
Page - 5 of 15
6/12

F.

5.

The source patient will be traced to the receiving medical facility by the Infection
Control Officer/ALS 34/32. The Infection Control Officer will notify the
receiving facility that a communicable disease exposure took place, and request
an infectious disease determination, as provided under the Ryan White Act of
1990. Notify ALS 34/32 IMMEDIATELY to respond when any exposure takes
place. Time is of the essence. See sections A through D of SOP #1 Infectious
Disease Exposure Guidelines.

6.

The Employee Health Physician or UC Hospital will provide appropriate
diagnostic work-up and treatment of members with communicable disease
exposures. All long-term follow up and member counseling will be through EHS
and the Department.

SOP #3: SCENE OPERATIONS
1.

The blood, body fluids, and tissues of all patients are considered potentially
infectious, and Universal Precautions/Body Substance Isolation procedures will
be used for all patient contact.

2.

The choice of personal protective equipment is specified in 204.05 (H) SOP #5:
Personal Protective Equipment. Members will be encouraged to use maximal
rather than minimal PPE for each situation.

3.

While complete control of the emergency scene is not possible, scene operations,
as much as possible, will attempt to limit splashing, spraying, or aerosolizing of
body fluids.

4.

The minimum number of members required to complete the task safely will be
used for all on-scene operations. Members not immediately needed will remain a
safe distance from operations where communicable disease exposure is possible
or anticipated.

5.

Hand washing is the most important infection control procedure. Members will
wash hands:
•
•
•
•
•

After removing PPE.
After each patient contact.
After handling potentially infectious materials.
After cleaning or decontaminating equipment.
After using the bathroom.

INFECTION CONTROL SOPs
204.05
Page - 6 of 15
6/12
6.

Hand washing with soap and water will be performed for ten to fifteen seconds.
If soap and water is not available at the scene, a waterless handwash may be used,
provided that a soap and water wash is performed immediately upon return to
quarters or hospital.

7.

Eating, drinking, smoking, handling contact lenses, or applying cosmetics or lip
balm is prohibited at the scene of operations and while in an ambulance or rescue
unit, and decontaminating equipment.

8.

The paramedic or firefighter who is starting the IV, administering medications or
checking blood sugar with a needle will be responsible for immediately securing
the needle in an approved sharps container. This means that the needle should not
be dropped onto the floor or sat on the seat next to the technician performing the
procedure. Once the needle is removed from the plastic catheter or the needle is
removed from the patient after giving medications, it should be immediately
placed in a sharps container. This may require that a sharps container be placed
next to the paramedic performing the procedure prior to starting the IV. All drug
boxes have been issued and should contain single use sharps containers. Everyone
will be held responsible for the proper disposal of contaminated needles. Needles
will not be recapped, re-sheathed, bent, broken, or separated from disposable
syringes.

9.

Sharps containers will be easily accessible on-scene. If sharps are used remote
from response vehicles, transport the individual sharps containers to the vehicle
and place contaminated sharps in the vehicle sharps container. The goal is to
place the contaminated sharps in the proper containers ASAP to prevent needle
sticks from occurring.

10.

Disposable resuscitation equipment will be used whenever possible. For CPR, the
order of preference is:
•
•
•

11.

Disposable bag-valve mask.
Demand valve resuscitator with disposable mask.
Disposable pocket mask with one-way valve.

Mouth-to-mouth resuscitation is not an approved procedure for CFD members.
All members will use pocket masks with one-way valves to eliminate the need for
mouth-to-mouth resuscitation. Disposable resuscitation equipment will be kept
readily available during on-scene operations.

INFECTION CONTROL SOPs
204.05
Page - 7 of 15
6/12
12.

G.

Patients with suspected airborne communicable diseases will be transported
wearing a face mask or particulate respirator whenever possible. Medic Unit
windows will be open and ventilation systems turned on fully whenever possible.

SOP #4: POST RESPONSE
1.

Any contaminated regular work clothing, fatigues or firefighting PPE, shall be
removed IMMEDIATELY at the scene. Take care to prevent further
contamination to any building or apparatus. Use hospital sheets to contain blood
products/infectious material and provide contaminated member with a visual
barrier from bystanders. The goal is to place PPE suits on prior to having any
possibility of contamination. However, it may rarely occur that the patient’s need
for rescue, as in a structure fire, requires immediate action. Should this happen,
immediately remove contaminated work clothing. Bag the contaminated clothing
in a plastic contamination bag. Contaminated member will then dress in provided
infection PPE suits. Any contaminated hospital sheets shall be sent to the hospital
for cleaning per procedures. Upon returning to quarters, contaminated work
clothing will be sent to central stores for laundering. Personal protective suits
worn at the scene will be removed after leaving the work area, or as soon as
possible if contaminated. After use, all PPE suits will be placed in red leak proof
Biohazard bags and transported back to the station for proper disposal in
contaminated waste receptacles.

2.

At conclusion of scene operations, all potentially contaminated patient care
equipment will be removed for appropriate disposal or decontamination and
reuse. Contaminated equipment will be stored only in the decontamination area
and removed only after decontaminated or sent out to be decontaminated. The
Fire Department has a contract to supply and pick up medical waste containers at
each station.
The containers are red in color and constructed of a plastic material with a locking
style lid. Each container will have a plastic red color polyethylene liner. The
container and the liner shall have the biohazard symbol imprinted on them. Only
medical waste shall be disposed of in this container. Latex gloves, bandages,
tyvek biohazard suits, etc., are a few examples. Sharps containers can also be
deposited in the biohazard container. Do not dispose of other regular trash in
these containers.
The container shall be stored in a safe manner on the apparatus floor. The
biohazard container will be picked up by the vendor on a monthly basis for proper

INFECTION CONTROL SOPs
204.05
Page - 8 of 15
6/12
disposal. A replacement container will be delivered. If the container becomes
full before the monthly scheduled pick up, the company officer shall request an
earlier pick up by calling Central Stores.
3.

Disinfecting will be performed with a department-approved disinfectant or with a
1:10 solution of bleach in water. All disinfectants will be tuberculocidal and EPA
approved and registered.

4.

Any damaged equipment will be cleaned and disinfected before being sent out for
repair.

5.

The manufacturer's guidelines will be used for the cleaning and decontamination
of all equipment. Unless otherwise specified:
•

•

Durable equipment (backboard, splints, MAST pants) will be washed with hot
soapy water, rinsed with clean water, and disinfected with an approved
disinfectant or 1:10 bleach solution. Equipment will be allowed to air dry.
Delicate equipment (radios, cardiac monitors, etc.) will be wiped clean of any
debris using hot soapy water, wiped with clean water, then wiped with
disinfectant or 1:10 bleach solution. Equipment will be allowed to air dry.

6.

Work surfaces will be decontaminated with an appropriate disinfectant after
completion of procedures, and after spillage or contamination with blood or
potentially infectious materials. Seats on response vehicles contaminated with
body fluids from soiled PPE also will be disinfected ASAP and prior to placing
apparatus in service and/or sitting on same with regular work clothes.

7.

Contaminated structural fire fighting gear will cleaned by special extractor
machines at Central Stores. Washing firefighting gear by our previous methods
has been found to deteriorate the materials in the firefighting PPE. Under no
circumstances should contaminated work clothes be laundered at home by any
member. Contaminated firefighting PPE will be removed at the scene
immediately and bagged appropriately as detailed in #1 of this section: SOP #4:
Post Response.

8.

Contaminated boots will be brushed and scrubbed with a hot solution of soapy
water, rinsed with clean water, and allowed to air dry.

9.

Contaminated fatigue work clothes will be sent to Central Stores for cleaning. All
members will maintain extra clean work uniforms in the station to change into if
necessary. If body fluids were in contact with skin under work clothes, member
will wash/disinfect area on scene and shower immediately upon arrival back at
quarters prior to being placed in an in-service status.

INFECTION CONTROL SOPs
204.05
Page - 9 of 15
6/12

H.

SOP #5: PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
1.

Standards for Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) will be developed by the Fire
Department Infection Control Committee and will be updated or modified as
needed.

2.

The Cincinnati Fire Department will supply personal protective equipment.

3.

The Company Commander at each station will ensure that station stock of PPE is
adequate and that supplies nearing expiration dates are used first.

4.

The amount, type, and location of PPE will be standardized on all response
vehicles as much as possible.

5.

Available PPE (in addition to PPE for structural firefighting) will include
disposable gloves, face masks, eye protectors, the Fluidshield Procedure Mask
with Wraparound Splashguard Visors, Tyvek polyethylene coated suits (first
choice for blood borne pathogens and body fluid protection), Tyvek/Saranex 23P; Splash Protection Suits (offer chemical protection in addition to blood borne
pathogens and body fluid protection), CPR Microshield Clear Mouth Barrier
carried in personal turnout gear, sharps containers, leakproof disposal bags
marked with the infection control symbol and red in color..

6.

Disposable gloves will be constructed of latex and non-latex rather than plastic.
While both types provide equal protection, latex is more durable for on-scene
operations. In the event that a member is allergic to latex, N-DEX nitrile
disposable gloves will be provided to the identified member, available from
central stores.

7.

Sharps containers will be closable, puncture resistant, and leakproof. Sharps
containers will be red in color, labeled as a biohazard, and be immediately
accessible.

8.

All members are issued a pocket mask with one-way valve the CPR Microshield
Clear Mouth Barrier. The Microshield shall always be carried in the member's
personal turn out gear. Replacement pocket masks will be carried on every
response vehicle and stocked in each station. Fire Companies will keep additional
shields available for use while members are out of quarters in uniform performing
assigned duties.

9.

Selection and use of personal protective equipment:

INFECTION CONTROL SOPs
204.05
Page - 10 of 15
6/12
•

•

•

•
•
•
•

•
•

•
•

Emergency response often is unpredictable and uncontrollable. While blood
is the single most important source of HIV and HBV (Hepatitis B Virus)
infection in the workplace, in the field it is safest to assume that all body
fluids are infectious. For this reason, PPE will be chosen to provide barrier
protection against all body fluids.
In general, members should select PPE appropriate to the potential for spill,
splash, or exposure to body fluids. No standard operating procedure or PPE
ensemble can cover all situations. Common sense must be used. When in
doubt, select maximum rather than minimal PPE.
Disposable latex gloves will be worn during any patient contact when the
potential exists for contact with blood, body fluids, non-intact skin, or other
infectious material.
Gloves will be replaced as soon as possible when soiled, torn, or punctured,
and will not be reused. Wash hands after removing gloves.
Gloves should be changed between patients in multiple casualty situations
where possible.
Structural fire fighting gloves will be worn in situations where sharp or rough
edges are likely to be encountered.
Heavy duty utility gloves may be used for the handling, cleaning,
decontamination, or disinfecting of potentially contaminated patient care
equipment.
Facial protection will be used for the handling, cleaning, decontamination, or
disinfecting of potentially contaminated patient care equipment.
Facial protection will be used in any situation where splash contact with the
face is possible. Facial protection may be afforded by using the Fluidshield
Procedure Mask with Wraparound Splashguard Visors to provide both face
mask and eye protection. When treating a patient with a suspected or known
airborne transmissible disease, face masks or approved particulate respirators
will be used. Additional protection is afforded by placing a mask on the
patient. However, if the patient is contagious, masking the provider is
required in addition to masking the patient.
Face shields on structural fire fighting helmets will not be used for infection
control purposes.
The Tyvek polyethylene coated suits and the Tyvek/Saranex 23-P; Splash
Protection Suits are designed to protect clothing from splashes. Structural
firefighting gear also protects clothing from splashes and is preferable in fire,
rescue, or vehicle extrication activities. Splash protection suits may interfere
with, or present a hazard to the member in these circumstances. The decision

INFECTION CONTROL SOPs
204.05
Page - 11 of 15
6/12
to use barrier protection to protect clothing, and the type of barrier protection
used will be left to the member. Structural fire fighting gear will always be
worn for fire suppression and extrication activities.

10.

SUMMARY:
•
•
•
•

I.

If it's wet, it's infectious - use gloves.
If it could splash onto your face, use the procedures for wearing the Fluidshield Mask
with Wraparound Splashguard Visor.
If it's airborne, mask yourself and the patient.
If it could splash on your clothes, head, or feet, use the infectious PPE suits: Tyvek
polyethylene coated suit or the Tyvek/Saranex 23-P; Splash Protection Suit

SOP #6: STATION ENVIRONMENT
1.

All fire stations will designate the following separate storage, decontamination,
and disposal areas:
•
•
•

2.

Equipment decontamination and disinfecting.
Storage of clean patient care equipment and infection control personal
protective equipment.
Storage of biohazard waste.

The Department has installed decontamination sinks in all fire stations. In
addition, it will be a goal to have decontamination areas marked with biohazard
signs and equipped with:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Two sinks, constructed of non-porous materials, equipped with spray
attachments and foot controls.
Proper lighting and adequate ventilation.
Adequate counter areas constructed of non-porous materials.
Adequate rack space to allow air drying of equipment.
Appropriate containers for disposal of biohazard waste.
Facilities for safe storage, use, and disposal of cleansing and disinfecting
solutions.
Appropriate PPE for the use of disinfecting solutions.
Material safety data sheets (MSDS) for cleansing and disinfecting solutions.
All personnel using these solutions will be familiar with the MSDS and will
use the recommended PPE.

INFECTION CONTROL SOPs
204.05
Page - 12 of 15
6/12
3.

Infectious waste storage areas will be marked with biohazard signs and will
be maintained in accordance with all EPA and local regulations.

4.

Contaminated sharps will be stored in closed puncture resistant containers (sharps
boxes) with appropriate markings and red in color.
•
•

5.

All disposal of biohazard waste will be in accordance with EPA and local
regulations and will be performed by an approved licensed contractor designated
by the department.

6.

LAUNDRY: All fire stations shall be equipped with a clean laundry area with
washer, dryer, and wash sink.
•

7.

All linen used for patient transport is considered potentially contaminated.
Contaminated linen will be exchanged by the medical facility receiving the
patient. Contaminated linen will not be washed in station laundry facilities.
Disposable gloves shall be worn when handling potentially contaminated
linen.

KITCHEN:
•

•

J.

If outside contamination of a disposal bag is a possibility, a second bag with
identical markings will be placed over the first.
Reusable bins and containers used to store biohazard waste will be inspected,
cleaned and disinfected weekly, and immediately if outside contamination is
present.

Under no circumstances will any kitchen facility be used for the purpose of
cleaning, sterilizing, disinfecting, storing, or disposal of any infectious
material or waste. This also applies to bathrooms and other living areas.
Food will be properly prepared and cooked. Hands will be washed before
eating and preparing food.

SOP #7: INFECTION CONTROL TRAINING
1.

All members providing emergency services will be required to complete initial
infection control training at time of assignment to tasks where occupational
exposure may occur. This training will be given by the EMS Education with
assistance from the Fire Training Center Personnel, EMS 1, EMS 2, ALS 34/32
Personnel, and the Safety Officer / Risk Manager. Ongoing infection control
training will be part of the regular and continuing medical training program.

INFECTION CONTROL SOPs
204.05
Page - 13 of 15
6/12
2.

All infection control-training materials will be appropriate in content and
vocabulary to the educational level, literacy, and language of members being
trained.

3.

Training will be in compliance with NFPA Standard 1581 and OSHA Regulation
29 CFR Part 1910.1030 and shall include:
•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•
4.

An accessible copy of 29 CFR Part 1910.1030 and an explanation of its
contents.
A general explanation of the epidemiology and symptoms of blood borne
diseases.
An explanation of the modes of transmission of blood borne pathogens.
An explanation of the Cincinnati Fire Department's exposure control plan and
how the employee can obtain a copy.
An explanation of the appropriate methods for recognizing tasks and other
activities that may involve exposure to blood and other potentially infectious
materials.
Information on the types, proper use, location, removal, handling,
decontamination and disposal of personal protective equipment.
An explanation of the bases for selection of personal protective equipment.
Information on the hepatitis B vaccine, including information on its efficacy,
safety, and the benefits of being vaccinated.
Notification that the hepatitis B vaccine and vaccination will be provided at no
charge.
Information on the appropriate actions to take and persons to contact in an
emergency involving blood or other potentially infectious materials.
An explanation of the procedure to follow if an exposure incident occurs,
including the method of reporting the incident and the medical follow-up that
will be made available.
Information on the post-exposure evaluation and follow-up that the
department is required to provide following an exposure incident.
An explanation of the signs and labels and/or color-coding required for
biohazard materials.
Information on the proper storage and disposal of biohazard materials.
Opportunity for interactive questions and answers.

Infection control trainers, directed and trained by the EMS Education, shall be
knowledgeable in all of the program elements listed above, particularly as they
relate to emergency services provided by this department.

INFECTION CONTROL SOPs
204.05
Page - 14 of 15
6/12
5.

K.

Training records shall be maintained in sufficient detail to document the program
taught and the members who attended. Records shall be updated whenever
additional or refresher training is provided.

SOP #8: HEALTH MAINTENANCE
1.

No member will be assigned to emergency response duties until an entrance
physical assessment has been performed by the Employee Health Physician or
his/her designee, and the member has been certified as fit for duty.

2.

Work restrictions for reasons of infection control may be initiated by the
Employee Health Physician.

3.

The Cincinnati Fire Department will offer all members immunization against
hepatitis B. The risks and the benefits of immunization will be explained to all
members, and consent obtained prior to immunization.

4.

A member may request serologic testing prior to hepatitis B immunization to
determine if previous immunity exists. Members may refuse immunizations, or
may submit proof of previous immunization. Members who refuse immunization
will be counseled on the occupational risks of communicable disease, and
required to sign a refusal of immunization form. Members who initially refuse
immunization may later receive immunization upon request.

5.

Any member returning to work following debilitating injury or illness or
communicable disease (occupational or non-occupational) will be cleared by the
Employee Health Physician or designee prior to resuming emergency response
duties.

6.

The Employee Health Physician will maintain records in accordance with
OSHA's CFR 29, Part 1910.1030. Member participation in the Infection Control
Program will be documented, including:
•
•
•
•

Name and SSN of member.
Immunization records.
Circumstances of exposure to communicable diseases.
Post-exposure medical evaluation, treatment, and follow-up.

7.

Infection control records will become a part of the member's personal medical file
and will be maintained for the duration of employment plus thirty years.

8.

Medical records will be maintained by the Employee Health Physician, and will
not be kept with personnel records.

INFECTION CONTROL SOPs
204.05
Page - 15 of 15
6/12

L.

9.

Members may examine their own medical records, and may request that copies be
sent to their personal physician. Release of medical records to another physician
will be made only with the signed written consent of the member.

10.

Abstracts of medical records without personal identifiers may be made for quality
assurance, compliance monitoring, or program evaluation purposes, as long as the
identity of members cannot be determined from the abstract. The first
consideration will be the confidentially of all members.

SOP #9: COMPLIANCE AND QUALITY MONITORING/PROGRAM
EVALUATION
1.

Compliance and quality monitoring: The infection Control Officer will collect
compliance and quality monitoring data including:
•
•
•

Inspections of station facilities.
Observation of on-scene activities.
Analysis of reported exposures to communicable diseases.

2.

A quarterly quality and compliance report will be made by the Infection Control
Officer to the Safety/Infection Control Committee.

3.

Program evaluation:
•

•

The Infection Control Program will be reevaluated at least annually by the
Infection Control Committee to ensure that the program is both appropriate
and effective.
In addition, the Infection Control Program will be reevaluated as needed to
reflect any significant changes in assigned tasks or procedures, in medical
knowledge related to infection control, or in regulatory matters.


=== 204.06  12 Lead EKG setup Rev -5-05 ===
ADDITIONAL
EMT-BASIC
PROTOCOLS
204.06
Page 1 of 2
Rev. 5/05
CHAPTER
SUBJECT
TOPIC

II
4
6

Operations
Emergency Medical Services
12 Lead EKG Set-up

A.

INDICATIONS
Instances in which an EMT-Basic may assist in the set up of a 12 lead EKG:
1. Chest pain (prior to administration of Nitroglycerin by paramedics).
2. Syncope.
3. Palpitations.
4. Patient exhibiting signs and symptoms of congestive heart failure, pulmonary edema,
or acute respiratory distress.
5. Patient is elderly and has past medical history including: CAD (coronary artery
disease) or smoking.
6. Patient who has suffered significant blood loss.
7. Anytime set up of a 12 Lead EKG is requested by a CFD paramedic.

B.

PHYSICAL FINDINGS:
1. Patient complains of pain in chest.
2. Patient complains of pain in the jaw, arm, neck or back (independent of an injury).
3. Patient’s skin condition is diaphoretic and/or skin color that is pale or cyanotic.
4. Patient is unable to complete sentences without taking a breath.
5. Heart rate greater than 120 beats per minute, by palpation.
6. Nausea with or without vomiting that is acute and accompanied by any of the
following: chest pain, jaw, arm, neck or back pain with no reported trauma, trouble
breathing, diaphoresis, or significant blood loss.
7. Systolic blood pressure greater than 200 or less than 100.

C.

PROCEDURE
1. Explain the process to all patients. The EMT-Basic should explain that it will be
necessary to place several electrodes directly on the chest. If the patient does not
express an understanding of the process or the benefit of 12 Lead
Electrocardiography, ask the paramedic to intervene. Remove the shirt of male
patients ONLY. Male EMT Basics may elect to have another CFD EMT/Paramedic
witness the placement of EKG electrodes on female patients. Protect the female
patient’s modesty by asking her to unhook her bra. The female patient’s bra and shirt
shall remain in place unless the patient’s condition is deemed by paramedics to
necessitate the removal of a woman’s clothing (i.e., arrhythmia that is unstable or
high index of suspicion for cardiac arrest). All personnel shall document whether any

ADDITIONAL
EMT-BASIC
PROTOCOLS
204.06
Page 2 of 2
Rev. 5/05
patient’s clothing was removed, and to whom clothing or personal effects were
transferred to upon arrival at the hospital. Anytime a woman’s breast must be
adjusted in order to properly place EKG electrodes, the EMT-Basic should use the
back of the hand to lift or move the breast out of the way.
2. Prepare the patient’s skin. Cleanse the skin as needed to remove grime, skin oils or
sweat in areas where electrodes will be placed. This is best accomplished by first,
cleansing the area with an alcohol prep, then drying the area with a towel or gauze
pad.
3. Place the patient in a comfortable position that allows all extremities to rest on a
supportive surface.
4. With the patient in standard anatomical position (seated or lying supine with palms
facing forward), place each electrode and wire in its designated position.
Electrode Placement:
Electrode Marking Reads:
RA – (Right Arm)
LA – (Left Arm)
RL – (Right Leg)
LL – (Left Leg)
V1

V2

V3
V4

V5
V6

Notes:

Proper Placement
Place on the right wrist, just above palm of hand or upper right
arm
Place on left wrist, just above palm of hand or upper left arm
Place this electrode on the lower part of the right leg, toward the
midline and just above the foot
Place this electrode on the lower part of the left leg, toward the
midline and just above the foot.
V1 should be placed in the fourth intercostal space and to the right
of patient’s sternum (remember the first rib lies beneath the
collarbone, so count 3 ribs down from there and place in the area
between 3rd and 4th ribs)
The electrode marked V2 should be placed in the fourth intercostal
space and to the left of the sternum (it should be directly across the
sternum from V1)
Position the V3 electron AFTER V4 is in place. V3 should then
be placed between V2 and V4.
V4 should be placed in the fifth intercostal space (below the 4th
rib, but above the 5th) and centered with the middle of the
collarbone on the patient’s left side.
Place V5 1”- 2” to the left and level with V4
Place V6 1” - 2” inches to the left and level with V5. The V6 lead
should lie in the mid-axillary line (mid-way point of the torso,
beneath the armpit)

ADDITIONAL
EMT-BASIC
PROTOCOLS
204.06
Page 3 of 2
Rev. 5/05
1. This protocol serves as physician authorization for EMT-Basics to assist paramedics in
setting up 12 lead EKG. This protocol meets the guidelines published in the Ohio
Administrative Code 4765-15-04 (EMT-Basic Scope of Practice).
2. The paramedic bears the ultimate responsibility for the 12 lead EKG set up by the EMTBasics. It is recommended that the EMT and the Paramedic work collectively to ensure
that the proper procedures have been followed.


=== 204.07 IV Set up Rev 5-05 ===
ADDITIONAL
EMT-BASIC
PROTOCOLS
204.07
Page 1 of 4
Rev. 5/05
CHAPTER
SUBJECT
TOPIC

II
4
7

Operations
Emergency Medical Services
Intravenous Line (IV Set-up)

A.

INDICATIONS
Instances in which an EMT-Basic may set up an Intravenous (IV) Line
1. Anytime the need for fluid replacement is anticipated.
2. Anytime the need for drug administration may be anticipated.
3. Anytime a CFD Paramedic requests IV set up.

B.

PHYSICAL FINDINGS
1. Altered mental status/unconscious.
2. Presence of skin that is cold or clammy.
3. Elevated heart rate.
4. Cardiac/traumatic arrest.
5. Evidence of significant trauma.
6. Seizures.
7. Chest Pain.
8. Shortness of Breath.
9. Diabetic Emergency.
10. Severe bleeding.
11. Anaphylaxis/Allergic Reaction.
12. Patients with a systolic blood pressure of 90 or less (or weak radial pulse).
13. As requested by a Cincinnati Fire Department Paramedic.

C.

PROCEDURE
1. Determine whether the paramedic will initiate IV therapy at the scene, or enroute to
hospital.
2. The EMT should practice universal precautions.
3. Obtain the following:
• IV fluid (500 mL or 1000 mL) of Normal Saline or 0.9% Sodium Chloride
• Macrodrip IV administration tubing labeled 10 gtt, 15gtt or 20 gtt
(drops/mL). 60gtt IV sets should be used ONLY if requested by the
paramedic.
• IV extension tubing (optional).
• Padded IV arm board and one 2’ or 4” width kling roll (optional or at request
of paramedic).
• Prepackaged IV start kit OR the following items: tourniquet, alcohol pad.

ADDITIONAL
EMT-BASIC
PROTOCOLS
204.07
Page 2 of 4
Rev. 5/05
•
•

Small gauze pad (4’x 4” or 2”x 2”).
3 to 4 pieces of 1” inch tape torn into strips approximately 2 to 3 inches in
length and optional commercial IV dressing such as Tegaderm®
4. Remove the IV solution bag from the outer packaging. The outer package should be
intact, and show no evidence that it was previously opened or otherwise tampered
with. The outer package should NOT be composed of foil- like plastic, nor should
the IV bag or package contain any red print.
5. Check the IV solution for the following:
• Correct fluid type: The correct fluid should be marked on the bag in BLACK
print as either “0.9% Sodium Chloride” or “Normal Saline.” WARNING: If
the EMT notes the presence of RED print on the IV bag the EMT should ask
the paramedic to double-check the solution. (Red print is sometimes used to
indicate the presence of medications or additives in the solution).
• Ensure that the solution is not expired. The expiration date typically appears
in the upper right hand corner of the IV bag (example: EXP 5/05”).
• Check the fluid for clarity. If the liquid appears cloudy, discolored or has
particles floating in it, discard the IV bag and obtain a new one.
6. While holding the IV solution upside down, remove the administration port covering
(plastic tab that is either blue or white in color and located next to the tan colored
rubber medication port).
7. Ensure that the roller clamp on the IV administration tubing is dialed to the lowest, or
“off” position. If an extension set will be used, attach it to the end that is opposite
from the spike. The plastic cap at the end of the IV tubing should remain in place to
protect it from being handled or otherwise contaminated.
8. Place the IV administration set spike into the administration port that was just
opened. IMPORTANT: The EMT must avoid touching the administration port and
the spike. Light manual pressure and/or a twisting motion may be required in order
to advance the spike. The EMT should advance the administration line spike into the
IV bag, until resistance is met.
9. Return the bag to the upright position. (At this time, the bag may be hung on an IV
hook, tree limb or if necessary, held by another EMS provider or bystander).
10. Squeeze the drip chamber and fill to the pre-printed line. If the drip chamber becomes
over-filled, invert the bag and squeeze the drip chamber to return excess fluid back
into the bag.
11. Completely flush the IV line. Hold the end of the IV tubing, (preferably away from
the patient and over a drain or trash can). Move the roller clip to the “open” or
upward position. It may be necessary to temporarily remove the IV tubing end cap to
allow fluid to pass through the tubing. DO NOT DISCARD THE CAP. As always,
the EMT-Basic should avoid touching or otherwise contaminating the unprotected

ADDITIONAL
EMT-BASIC
PROTOCOLS
204.07
Page 3 of 4
Rev. 5/05
end of the IV line.
12. Return the roller clamp to the “Closed” or down position and re-cap the end of the
IV tubing. This should stop the flow of solution from tubing.
13. Assemble the IV supplies listed in #2 of this protocol (i.e., tear tape as directed, place
tourniquet, alcohol prep, gauze pad and Tegaderm within easy reach of the paramedic
placing the IV line).
14. Do not re-use IV bags or supplies. If for any reason the IV bag cannot be used on the
intended patient, it must be discarded. A new IV bag and new set of IV supplies
should be used for each patient.
Notes:
1. Packaging that contains red printing or that is made from material that is silver or foillike may contain drugs or additives. EMT-Basics are prohibited from setting–up IV lines
that meet this description.
2. This protocol serves as physician authorization for EMT-Basics to assist paramedics in
setting up saline locks. This protocol meets the guidelines published in the Ohio
Administrative Code 4765-15-04 (EMT-Basic Scope of Practice).
3. Questions regarding the need for IV therapy, the process, or any other concerns that
arise before or during the IV set up, should be directed to the paramedic or paramedics
involved in patient care. General questions or concerns regarding IV set up or
administration should be forwarded to the medical director.
4. It is ESSENTIAL to flush the IV tubing. A failure to completely flush the IV tubing can
cause the development of an air embolus or even death.
5. Contamination of the IV tubing or ports can lead to severe infections (both local and
systemic) or even death.
6. If the EMT is unsure of whether an IV bag, tubing or other supply has been, grossly
contaminated, or tampered with, keep the following in mind: “When in doubt…throw it
out.”
7. EMT-Basics should assist paramedics to en sure that no one (firefighter, police officer,
health care provider, family member or bystander) is in contact with an IV bag or IV line
during defibrillation attempts.
8. The paramedic bears the ultimate responsibility for intravenous lines, set up by the EMTBasics. It is recommended that the EMT and the Paramedic work collectively to ensure
that the proper procedures have been followed.


=== 204.08  Saline Lock Set UP Rev 5-05 ===
ADDITIONAL
EMT-BASIC
PROTOCOLS
204.08
Page 1 of 4
Rev. 5/05
CHAPTER
SUBJECT
TOPIC

II
4
8

Operations
Emergency Medical Services
Saline Lock Set-up

A.

INDICATIONS
Instances in which an EMT-Basic may assist in the set up of Saline Locks:
1. Anytime the need for drug administration may be anticipated.
2. At the request of a Cincinnati Fire Department paramedic.

B.

PHYSICAL FINDINGS
1. Altered mental status/unconsciousness.
2. Seizures that have resolved.
3. Blood sugar less than 60mg/dL greater than 200mg/dL.
4. Shortness of breath. Unable to complete sentence without taking a breath.
5. Pitting edema in feet.
6. Presence of rales (crackles) upon auscultation of lungs.
7. Chest Pain.
8. As requested by a Cincinnati Fire Department paramedic.

C.

PROCEDURE
1. Determine whether the paramedic will establish the saline lock while on the scene
or enroute to hospital.
2. The EMT should practice universal precautions.
3. Obtain the following:
• Saline Lock
• 10 cc syringe with needle attached (if available)
(EMT may need to place a needle on the syringe, in this case choose a
needle that has a gauge diameter 18 or 20 and measures 1 to 1 and ½ inch
length – information should be listed on the package)
• Small bottle (10-20ml) of 0.9% sodium chloride.
• Padded IV arm board and one 2” or 4” wide cling roll (optional or at
request of paramedic).
• Prepackaged IV start kit OR the following items: tourniquet, alcohol pad,
small gauze pad (4”x 4”or 2”x 2”) 3 to 4 pieces of 1” tape torn into strips
approximately 2 to 3 inches in length and optional commercial IV dressing
such as Tegaderm® (optional).
• A few extra 4x4 gauze pads and alcohol preps may be necessary

ADDITIONAL
EMT-BASIC
PROTOCOLS
204.08
Page 2 of 4
Rev. 5/05
4. Confirm that the bottle or prefilled syringe is labeled “0.9% sodium chloride” (normal
saline). If the bottle or syringe does not have 0.9% sodium chloride on the label, or
appears to contain medication, notify the paramedic immediately. Unlike IV solutions,
MEDICATIONS OR ADDITIVES contained bottles or prefilled syringes WILL NOT
APPEAR IN RED. The EMT MUST check these carefully.
5. Check saline solution (bottle and/or prefilled syringe) for expiration date. The
expiration date usually appears as “EXP Month/Year.”
6. Bottles should be intact, and show no evidence of being opened previously or
otherwise tampered with.
Bottles should have a hard plastic cap in place and the EMT should not be able to
visualize the rubber stopper beneath the cap. If the plastic cap is in place, it means the
bottle has not been previously opened. Once it has been confirmed that the bottle was
not previously opened, the EMT may remove and discard the plastic bottle top. (By
removing the top, you are exposing the rubber stopper to contamination. Place the bottle
upright on a flat surface and don’t allow anyone or anything to make contact with the top
of the bottle).
7. Load the syringe.
Locate the 10cc syringe with the capped needle in place. Twist the needle in a clockwise
motion on the end of the syringe (this ensures that the needle is adequately secured).
Draw back on the plunger of the syringe and line the black tip with the 10ml marking on
the barrel (if the plunger is withdrawn too far and separates from the barrel, obtain a new
syringe and repeat the process). Clean the rubber stopper with alcohol prep, and allow it
to air dry. Remove the cap from the needle on the syringe and use the needle to pierce
the rubber stopper. Push the plunger all the way forward. Invert the bottle of normal
saline and maintain a hold of the bottle and syringe barrel. The syringe should
automatically fill with saline to the 10ml line. If the syringe does not adequately fill,
remove it from the bottle, hold it upright and purge the air through the end of the needle.
Again, you will need to cleanse the rubber stopper before puncturing the bottle a second
time and withdrawing more fluid.
8. The EMT may assist the paramedic in removing the saline lock from the package and
connecting the lock to the hub of the angiocath. The EMT may not administer the
normal saline into the lock.
9. IMPORTANT: The EMT must avoid contaminating the rubber port of the saline
lock, the rubber stopper on the top of the saline bottle and the needle. Contamination
occurs when any of these items is touched by an object (hand, ground, clothing, etc). If
contamination occurs, a new bottle, syringe or lock should be used.
10. Do not re-use saline locks, saline solution or syringes. Each time a syringe is used to
puncture the top of a saline bottle or the rubber end of the saline lock, the surface should
first be cleansed with an alcohol prep. If for any reason the saline lock and associated

ADDITIONAL
EMT-BASIC
PROTOCOLS
204.08
Page 3 of 4
Rev. 5/05
supplies (i.e. bottle of saline and syringe) cannot be used on the intended patient, it must
be properly discarded. A new saline lock and new set of supplies should be used for
each patient
Notes:
1. EMT-Basics are prohibited from filling syringes with any drug or solution with the
exception of normal saline. If a paramedic (regardless of rank) asks an EMT to assist by
loading or otherwise administering any medication through an IV line or saline lock, the
EMT must REFUSE on the basis of that doing so will violate the established scope of
practice. (Refusing to act beyond the established scope of practice protects both the EMT
and the Paramedic from potential legal complications, at minimum, revocation of both
providers' EMS certifications by the State of Ohio). Report anyone who attempts to be
coercive or non-compliant with this policy to the Rescue 2 Lieutenant on duty, OR the
paramedic commander OR Rescue 1.
2. This protocol serves as physician authorization for EMT-Basics to assist paramedics in
setting up saline locks. This protocol meets the guidelines published in the Ohio
Administrative Code 4765-15-04 (EMT-Basic Scope of Practice)
3. Questions regarding saline locks, IV saline lock supplies and equipment or the process of
setting up a saline lock that arise during the course of an EMS incident, should be
directed to the paramedic(s) on the scene (and involved in patient care). General
questions or concerns regarding saline locks or this procedure shall be forwarded to the
medical director.
4. Contamination of the saline bottles, needles or ports can lead to severe infections (both
local and systemic) and subsequent death of the patient
5. If the EMT is unsure of whether a saline lock, syringe, fluid or other supply has been
grossly contaminated, or tampered with, keep the following phrase in mind: “When in
doubt…throw it out.”
6. The paramedic bears the ultimate responsibility for a saline lock that was set up by an
EMT-Basic. It is recommended that the EMT and the Paramedic work collectively to
ensure that the proper procedures have been followed.


=== 204.09  Rapid Glucose Assay testing Rev 5-05 ===
ADDITIONAL
EMT-BASIC
PROTOCOLS
204.09
Page 1 of 3
Rev. 5/05
CHAPTER
SUBJECT
TOPIC

A.

II
4
9

Operations
Emergency Medical Services
Rapid Glucose Assay Testing

INDICATIONS
Instances in which an EMT-Basic is authorized to perform Rapid Glucose Assay Testing
using a Glucometer Elite® or Ascensia Elite®:
1. Altered Mental Status (confused)
2. Any seizure patient
3. Hypothermia
4. Behavioral emergencies
5. Patients with a known history of diabetes
6. Patient taking diabetic medications (insulin, glucophage, glypizide, glyburide; etc)
7. Any time a rapid blood glucose assay may improve the treatment of a patient

B. PHYSICAL FINDINGS:
1. Altered mental status without suspected trauma.
2. Combative
3. Skin cold or clammy
4. Elevated heart rate
C. PROCEDURE:
1. Gather equipment: Glucometer/Ascensia Elite®, Glucometer/Ascensia Elite® test
strip, alcohol prep pad, lancet, 2x2 gauze pad, tape or Band-Aid.
2. The EMT should observe universal precautions.
3. Select a site in which to obtain a capillary blood sample. An appropriate site would
be a finger that is well perfused with blood (finger should be pink and have normal
skin temperature).
4. Cleanse the site with alcohol prep pad, and wipe dry with gauze pad. FINGER TIP
SHOULD BE COMPLETLEY DRY BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO OBTAIN A
BLOOD SAMPLE FOR TESTING.
5. Once test strip has been placed in the machine, the EMT has 3 minutes in which to
test the blood. If the finger stick takes longer than three minutes to obtain, a new test
strip must be used.
6. Stick the patient’s finger using the lancet. A drop of blood (about half the size of a
pea or small bead) should remain on the patient’s finger. It may be necessary for the
EMT to lower the patient’s hand below his/her heart and to apply gentle squeeze or
milking motion in order to obtain a droplet of blood large enough for testing.

ADDITIONAL
EMT-BASIC
PROTOCOLS
204.09
Page 2 of 3
Rev. 5/05
7. After sticking the patient’s finger, hold the machine (with attached test strip) over the
drop of blood until the meter beeps (the beep indicates that the sample was large
enough for the monitor to test). Do not use any other source (such as a wound) to
obtain a blood sample for testing. The machine should display the blood sugar result
within 1 minute.
8. The Glucometer Elite® will provide blood sugar readings between the ranges of 20
mg/dL and 600 mg/dL . If the patient’s blood sugar reading is below 20 mg/dL the
monitor will indicate this through a message that reads “LO”. If the patient’s blood
sugar is higher than 600 mg/dl the machine will indicate this through a message that
reads “HI”
9. When possible, the EMT shall cover the puncture site with a Band-Aid.
10. Anytime this procedure is performed by a Cincinnati Fire Department EMT; he/she
shall document the following items on the patient care report
- Name of the provider who performed the finger stick(s)
- Time or times in which samples were obtained.
- Machine reading(s) for EACH finger stick.
- Equipment malfunctions should also be noted.
11. A blood glucose reading of 60mg/dL or lower, associated with any condition listed
under “Physical Findings” constitutes a hypoglycemic event. Proceed to
Altered Mental Status - Diabetic portion of the Hamilton County Protocol (EMTBasic version) for
guidelines on treatment.
12. An optimal post-glucose finger stick should yield a result of 100mg/dl or above
within ten minutes.
13. Patients on oral hypoglycemic medications (such as glypizide and glyburide) require
transport to the hospital regardless of their response to field treatment. Patients who
have recovered from hypoglycemia with the assistance of EMT-Basics or paramedics
may wish to refuse transportation to the hospital. The EMT-Basic should NOT obtain
a refusal from any patient who has been evaluated or treated for a diabetic
emergency. A Cincinnati Fire Department Paramedic must be present to complete
the diabetic refusal paperwork. In the event that a Cincinnati Fire Department
Paramedic will not be available for an undetermined period of time, the officer in
charge shall contact medical control (University 513-584-2655) for assistance. Any
direction provided by medical control shall be included in the patient care report,
along with the telemetry physician’s name or physician number.

Notes:

ADDITIONAL
EMT-BASIC
PROTOCOLS
204.09
Page 3 of 3
Rev. 5/05
1. This protocol serves as physician authorization for EMT-Basics to obtain finger stick
glucose readings. This protocol meets the guidelines published in the Ohio
Administrative Code 4765-15-04 (EMT-Basic Scope of Practice).
2. Glucometer Elite/Ascensia Elite® monitors require routine testing and maintenance.
Documentation of glucometer testing should be maintained on station for a period of no
less than 5 years. The manufacturers testing/ maintenance guidelines and a sample
check sheet are attached with this protocol.
3. EMTs shall review this protocol a regular basis.
4. The ability of an EMT to obtain blood glucose readings should NOT delay or supercede
the request for Advanced Life Support, or transportation to the Hospital.


=== 204.09  Rev 5-05 (2) ===
ADDITIONAL
EMT-BASIC
PROTOCOLS
204.09
Page 1 of 3
Rev. 5/05
CHAPTER
SUBJECT
TOPIC

A.

II
4
9

Operations
Emergency Medical Services
Rapid Glucose Assay Testing

INDICATIONS
Instances in which an EMT-Basic is authorized to perform Rapid Glucose Assay Testing
using a Glucometer Elite® or Ascensia Elite®:
1. Altered Mental Status (confused)
2. Any seizure patient
3. Hypothermia
4. Behavioral emergencies
5. Patients with a known history of diabetes
6. Patient taking diabetic medications (insulin, glucophage, glypizide, glyburide; etc)
7. Any time a rapid blood glucose assay may improve the treatment of a patient

B. PHYSICAL FINDINGS:
1. Altered mental status without suspected trauma.
2. Combative
3. Skin cold or clammy
4. Elevated heart rate
C. PROCEDURE:
1. Gather equipment: Glucometer/Ascensia Elite®, Glucometer/Ascensia Elite® test
strip, alcohol prep pad, lancet, 2x2 gauze pad, tape or Band-Aid.
2. The EMT should observe universal precautions.
3. Select a site in which to obtain a capillary blood sample. An appropriate site would
be a finger that is well perfused with blood (finger should be pink and have normal
skin temperature).
4. Cleanse the site with alcohol prep pad, and wipe dry with gauze pad. FINGER TIP
SHOULD BE COMPLETLEY DRY BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO OBTAIN A
BLOOD SAMPLE FOR TESTING.
5. Once test strip has been placed in the machine, the EMT has 3 minutes in which to
test the blood. If the finger stick takes longer than three minutes to obtain, a new test
strip must be used.
6. Stick the patient’s finger using the lancet. A drop of blood (about half the size of a
pea or small bead) should remain on the patient’s finger. It may be necessary for the
EMT to lower the patient’s hand below his/her heart and to apply gentle squeeze or
milking motion in order to obtain a droplet of blood large enough for testing.

ADDITIONAL
EMT-BASIC
PROTOCOLS
204.09
Page 2 of 3
Rev. 5/05
7. After sticking the patient’s finger, hold the machine (with attached test strip) over the
drop of blood until the meter beeps (the beep indicates that the sample was large
enough for the monitor to test). Do not use any other source (such as a wound) to
obtain a blood sample for testing. The machine should display the blood sugar result
within 1 minute.
8. The Glucometer Elite® will provide blood sugar readings between the ranges of 20
mg/dL and 600 mg/dL . If the patient’s blood sugar reading is below 20 mg/dL the
monitor will indicate this through a message that reads “LO”. If the patient’s blood
sugar is higher than 600 mg/dl the machine will indicate this through a message that
reads “HI”
9. When possible, the EMT shall cover the puncture site with a Band-Aid.
10. Anytime this procedure is performed by a Cincinnati Fire Department EMT; he/she
shall document the following items on the patient care report
- Name of the provider who performed the finger stick(s)
- Time or times in which samples were obtained.
- Machine reading(s) for EACH finger stick.
- Equipment malfunctions should also be noted.
11. A blood glucose reading of 60mg/dL or lower, associated with any condition listed
under “Physical Findings” constitutes a hypoglycemic event. Proceed to
Altered Mental Status - Diabetic portion of the Hamilton County Protocol (EMTBasic version) for
guidelines on treatment.
12. An optimal post-glucose finger stick should yield a result of 100mg/dl or above
within ten minutes.
13. Patients on oral hypoglycemic medications (such as glypizide and glyburide) require
transport to the hospital regardless of their response to field treatment. Patients who
have recovered from hypoglycemia with the assistance of EMT-Basics or paramedics
may wish to refuse transportation to the hospital. The EMT-Basic should NOT obtain
a refusal from any patient who has been evaluated or treated for a diabetic
emergency. A Cincinnati Fire Department Paramedic must be present to complete
the diabetic refusal paperwork. In the event that a Cincinnati Fire Department
Paramedic will not be available for an undetermined period of time, the officer in
charge shall contact medical control (University 513-584-2655) for assistance. Any
direction provided by medical control shall be included in the patient care report,
along with the telemetry physician’s name or physician number.

Notes:

ADDITIONAL
EMT-BASIC
PROTOCOLS
204.09
Page 3 of 3
Rev. 5/05
1. This protocol serves as physician authorization for EMT-Basics to obtain finger stick
glucose readings. This protocol meets the guidelines published in the Ohio
Administrative Code 4765-15-04 (EMT-Basic Scope of Practice).
2. Glucometer Elite/Ascensia Elite® monitors require routine testing and maintenance.
Documentation of glucometer testing should be maintained on station for a period of no
less than 5 years. The manufacturers testing/ maintenance guidelines and a sample
check sheet are attached with this protocol.
3. EMTs shall review this protocol a regular basis.
4. The ability of an EMT to obtain blood glucose readings should NOT delay or supercede
the request for Advanced Life Support, or transportation to the Hospital.


=== 204.10 Trauma Triage Protocols12-06 ===
TRAUMA TRIAGE
PROTOCOLS
204.10
Page 1 of 8
Rev. 12/06
CHAPTER
SUBJECT
TOPIC

II
4
10

Operations
Emergency Medical Services
Trauma Triage

PURPOSE
1.

To establish a standard approach and general guidelines for triage and treatment of
trauma patients.

GOALS OF TRAUMA TRIAGE
1.

Upon arrival at the scene of an incident involving trauma (including, but not limited to
MVAs, falls greater than 2x the patient’s height, shootings, stabbings, and assaults)
emergency personnel shall determine the number and nature of injuries.

2.

In the event that there are multiple injuries, the incident command system should be
invoked and triage responsibilities assigned. (Reference MCI protocol).

3.

Personnel shall rapidly assess the situation and identify the need for additional or
specialty resources (Heavy Rescue, mutual aid etc.). Requests for additional response
units shall be made as early in the incident as possible.

4.

The OIC, transportation officer or individual on scene with the highest level of
emergency medical services training shall determine whether the patient meets the
criteria for transportation to a Trauma Center. This decision shall be made in accordance
with the Academy of Medicine Protocol and the Region I Trauma Triage Protocols. A
Glasgow Coma Scale and copy of the Region I protocols are included for reference as a
part of this procedure to facilitate the decision making process.

5.

Once it has been determined that a patient has met the criteria for transportation to a
Trauma Center, personnel shall provide an explanation to the patient. As with any other
situation, this explanation must address the benefits of treatment in a Verified Trauma
Center as well as any potential risks.

6.

Likewise, all conscious adults who are alert and oriented shall express their consent for
treatment and transportation. All unconscious, disoriented or otherwise mentally
incompetent adults fitting the criteria of a “Trauma Patient” shall be transported to the
nearest Level I or Level III Trauma Center under the doctrine of implied consent.

TRAUMA TRIAGE
PROTOCOLS
204.10
Page 2 of 8
Rev. 12/06
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE ON SCENE TIME
1.

No more than ten (10) minutes shall be spent on scene of the incident to assess, treat and
package a trauma patient. Situations or incidents in which the on scene time has
exceeded the 10-minute maximum shall be considered a violation of this policy unless
details specific to that incident are noted in the patient care report.

ADULT TRAUMA CENTERS:
1.

In this area (Region I Greater Cincinnati) has two Verified Trauma Centers that may be
used interchangeably. Of these trauma centers, the facility that is closest in proximity to
the location of the incident (the call address or where the patient was found) shall be
deemed the most appropriate.
These include:
Level I - University Hospital
OR
Level III - Bethesda North

PEDIATRIC TRAUMA CENTERS:
1.

Pediatric Trauma Patients shall be transported to:
Level I - Children’s Hospital Medical Center

EXCEPTIONS:
1.

All trauma patients meeting the criteria outlined in this policy, and the Regional Trauma
Triage Guidelines shall be transported to the closest Trauma Center EXCEPT in the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.

The patient’s airway cannot be controlled by conventional means.
There is an impairment of the patient’s breathing due to injury.
The patient is exhibiting uncontrolled arterial bleeding.
There is a potential for an unstable airway.
The patient does not meet the “Trauma Patient “criteria.
The patient’s condition deteriorates to cardiac arrest.
The patient refuses to be transported to the appropriate TRAUMA center (against

TRAUMA TRIAGE
PROTOCOLS
204.10
Page 3 of 8
Rev. 12/06
EMS advice).
AIR TRANSPORTATION:
1.

Trauma Patients shall ONLY be transported by Air in the following circumstances.
There is a greater than 20 minute extrication and/or greater than 30 minute transport time.

NOTIFICATION:
1.
Notification shall be made to the receiving hospital either by cellular phone or radio as
soon as feasible to allow the hospital to alert its trauma team to assemble.
2.

It is also acceptable to request notification through the communications center.

3.

At a minimum, this notification shall include:
a.
Unit identification number and provider level
b.
Patient age
c.
The most recent set of vital signs
d.
The most recent GCS
e.
The ETA (estimated time of arrival) to the trauma center.

4.

The time and method of contact; or conversely, the reason that contact was not made,
shall be reported in the patient care report.

PATIENT CARE REPORT:
1. A patient care report shall be submitted by personnel transporting the patient. The
patient care report shall include all pertinent information regarding the incident, the
patient and the care administered by emergency medical services. Emergency medical
personnel shall also document whether a notification call was made, and provide
rationale for on scene times that exceed 10 minutes.

Region I EMS Trauma Triage Protocols
ADULT TRAUMA PATIENT

TRAUMA TRIAGE
PROTOCOLS
204.10
Page 4 of 8
Rev. 12/06
I. Evaluation of the Adult Trauma Patient - Any of these constitute a "trauma
patient"
A. PHYSIOLOGIC CRITERIA
1. Significant signs of shock accompanied by:
a. Pulse > 120 or blood pressure < 90 (geriatric patients may be in
shock with a BP >90)
2. Airway or Breathing Difficulties
a. Respiratory rate of <10 or >30
b. Intubated patient
3. Neurologic Considerations
a. Evidence of Head Injury
1. Glascow coma scale < 13 or equal to
2. Alteration in LOC during examination or thereafter; LOC >
than 5 min.
3. Failure to localize pain.
b. Suspected spinal cord injury (paralysis due to an acute injury;
sensory loss)
B. ANATOMIC CRITERIA
1. Penetrating trauma (to the head, chest or abdomen, neck and
extremities proximal to knee or elbow)
2. Injuries to the extremities where the following physical findings are
present:
a. Amputations proximal to the wrist or ankle
b. Visible crush injury
c. Fractures of two or more proximal long bones
d. Evidence of neurovascular compromise
3. Tension pneumothorax which is relieved (an unrelieved tension
pneumothorax would fit the definition of an unstable ABC)
4. Injuries to the head, neck, or torso where the following physical findings
are present:
a. Visible crush injury
b. Abdominal tenderness, distention, or seat belt sign
c. Pelvic fracture
d. Flail chest
5. Signs or symptoms of spinal cord injury.
6. Burn injury >10% TBSA and potential for other associated traumatic
injuries

TRAUMA TRIAGE
PROTOCOLS
204.10
Page 5 of 8
Rev. 12/06
C. OTHER CRITERIA/CONSIDERATIONS, WHICH ALONE DO NOT
CONSTITUTE A TRAUMA PATIENT
1. Significant Mechanisms of Injury Should Prompt a High Index of Suspicion
2. Ages>60 Should Prompt a High Index of Suspicion
II. Transportation of the Adult Trauma Patient
A. Ground Transportation Guidelines - Time Considerations
1. 30 minutes or less from a Trauma Center. TRAUMA CENTER
(excluding uncontrolled airway or traumatic CPR)
2. Greater than 30 minutes to a trauma center. nearest appropriate facility
PEDIATRIC TRAUMA PATIENT (<16 YEARS OF AGE)
I. Evaluation of the Pediatric Trauma Patient
A. PHYSIOLOGIC CRITERIA
1. Significant signs of shock (weak pulses, pallor) accompanied by:
a. Tachycardia (Table 2) or bradycardia (Table 3)
b. Hypotension (Table 4)
2. Airway/Breathing difficulties
a. Intubated patient
b. Tachypnea (see table 1)
c. Stridor
d. Hoarse voice or difficulty speaking
e. Significant grunting, retractions
f. Cyanosis or need for supplemental oxygen
3. Neurologic considerations
a. Evidence of Head Injury
1. Glasgow Coma Scale < or equal to 13
2. Alteration in LOC during examination or thereafter; LOC > than
5 min.
3. Failure to localize pain
b. Suspected Spinal Cord Injury (paralysis or alteration in sensation)
B. ANATOMIC CRITERIA
1. Penetrating trauma (to the head, chest or abdomen, neck and extremities
proximal to knee or elbow)
2. Injuries to the extremities where the following physical findings are present:
a. Amputations proximal to the wrist or ankle
b. Visible crush injury
c. Fractures of two or more proximal long bones
d. Evidence of neurovascular compromise

TRAUMA TRIAGE
PROTOCOLS
204.10
Page 6 of 8
Rev. 12/06
3. Tension pneumothorax, which is, relieved (an unrelieved tension
pneumothorax
would fit the definition of an unstable ABC).
4. Injuries to the head, neck, or torso where the following physical findings are
present:
a. Visible crush injury
b. Abdominal tenderness, distention, or seat belt sign
c. Pelvic Fracture
d. Flail Chest
5. Signs or symptoms of spinal cord injury.
6. Burn injuries> 10% TBSA and potential for other associated traumatic injuries.
Table 1: Maximum Acceptable Respiratory Rates by Age
Age
Respiratory Rate (resp/min)
<6months
50
6 months to 6 Years
40
>6 years
30
Table 2: Maximum Acceptable Heart Rates by Age
Age
Heart Rate (bpm)
<6 months
180
6 months-1 year
170
1 year-2 years
150
3-7 years
140
8-11 years
130
12-16
120
Table 3: Bradycardia
Age
Infant:
Child:
Adolescent:

Heart Rate (bpm)
80
70
60

Therapy should be reserved for the patient, who is symptomatic, as manifested by signs or
symptoms of decreased blood flow to end organs.

TRAUMA TRIAGE
PROTOCOLS
204.10
Page 7 of 8
Rev. 12/06
Table 4: Min. Acceptable Systolic Blood Pressure by Age
Age
Systolic Blood Pressure
<1-month
60 mmHg
1 month to 1-year
70 mmHg
>1 year
70+(Age in years x 2)
C. OTHER CRITERIA/CONSIDERATIONS FOR THE PEDIATRIC TRAUMA
PATIENT, WHICH ALONE DO NOT CONSTITUTE A TRAUMA PATIENT:
1. Significant Mechanism of Injury Should Prompt a High Index of Suspicion
and should be considered in the evaluation. Mechanisms particularly
dangerous for pediatric patients include:
a. Improperly restrained child in MVC (airbag injuries included)
b. ATV crashes
2. Special Situations that may require the resources of a pediatric trauma center:
a. Congenital defects
b. Chronic respiratory illness
c. Diabetes
d. Bleeding disorder or anticoagulants
e. Immunosuppressed patients (i.e., patients with cancer, organ
transplant patients, etc.)
TRANSPORTATION
II. Transportation of the Pediatric Trauma Patient:
A. Ground Transportation Guidelines - Time Considerations
1. 30 minutes or less from a Pediatric Trauma Center. Pediatric Trauma
Center (excluding uncontrolled airway or traumatic arrest)
2. Greater than 30 minutes to a Pediatric Trauma Center. Nearest appropriate
facility
Addendum to Region I EMS Trauma Triage Protocol
Exceptions to mandatory transport
A) Emergency medical service personnel shall transport a trauma victim, as defined in
section
4765.01 of the Revised Code and this chapter, directly to an adult or pediatric trauma
center
that is qualified to provide appropriate adult or pediatric care, unless one or more of the
following exceptions apply:

TRAUMA TRIAGE
PROTOCOLS
204.10
Page 8 of 8
Rev. 12/06
(1) It is medically necessary to transport the victim to another hospital for initial
assessment and stabilization before transfer to an adult or pediatric trauma center;
a) Patients should be transported to the nearest appropriate facility if
any of the following exists:
i) Airway is unstable and cannot be controlled/managed by
conventional methods
ii) Potential for unstable airway, i.e., facial/upper torso burn)
iii) Blunt trauma arrest (no pulses or respirations
(2) It is unsafe or medically inappropriate to transport the victim directly to an
adult or
pediatric trauma center due to adverse weather or ground conditions or excessive
transport time.
a) Ground Transportation
i) 30 minutes or less from a Trauma Center. TRAUMA
CENTER
(excluding uncontrolled airway or traumatic CPR)
ii) Greater than 30 minutes to a trauma center. Nearest
appropriate facility.
(3) Transporting the victim to an adult or pediatric trauma center would cause a
shortage of local emergency medical service resources;
(4) No appropriate adult or pediatric trauma center is able to receive and provide
adult or
pediatric trauma care to the trauma victim without undue delay;
(5) Before transport of a patient begins, the patient requests to be taken to a
particular hospital that is not a trauma center or, if the patient is less than eighteen
years of age or is not able to communicate, such a request is made by an adult
member of the patient's family or a legal representative of the patient.

TRAUMA TRIAGE
PROTOCOLS
204.10
Page 9 of 8
Rev. 12/06

Glasgow Coma Scale
Adult:

Child:

Infant:

Score:

Eye Opening
Spontaneous

Spontaneous

Spontaneous

4

Voice

Voice

Voice

3

Pain

Pain

Pain

2

None

None

None

1

Verbal
Oriented

Smiles, Interacts

Babbles or cries spontaneously

5

Confused

Cries but Consolable

Crying, but consolable

4

Inappropriate words

Intermittently consolable

Cries to Pain (weak cry)

3

Incomprehensible sounds

Agitated/inconsolable

Moans to Pain

2

None

None

None

1

Motor
Obeys Commands

Spontaneous Movement

Spontaneous Movement

6

Localizes Pain

Localizes Pain

Localizes Pain

5

Responds to Pain (Withdrawal)

Withdraws from Pain

Withdraws from Pain

4

Responds to Pain ( Flexion)

Abnormal Flexion

Abnormal Flexion

3

Responds to Pain (Extension)

Abnormal Extension

Abnormal Extension

2

None

None

None

1


=== 204.11 Clinical Practice Standards4-07 ===
CLINICAL PRACTICE
STANDARDS
204.11
Page 1 of 5
4/07
CHAPTER
SUBJECT
TOPIC

II
4
11

Operations
Emergency Medical Services
Clinical Practice Standards

Purpose
A. To establish a systematic procedure for the handling of emergency medical calls to
improve patient care.
B. To ensure the proper and systematic documentation of EMS calls.
Definitions
A. Patient – a patient is defined as any person who identifies him/herself as requiring
medical assistance or evaluation, or any person so identified by a third party, or any
person for whom the 911 system has been activated.
B. Intoxicated – the term intoxicated may be used to describe any person presenting
diminished physical or mental control or diminished ability to make decisions by reason
of the influence of alcohol liquor, drugs, or other substance.
C. Protocol – the term protocol as used in this document refers to the Southwestern Ohio
EMS Protocol, which includes both ALS and BLS protocols as well as Trauma Triage
Guidelines, online at:
http://www.academyofmedicine.org/webpages1/ems/eds.asp
Scope
A. This policy shall apply to all CFD personnel rendering medical care.
Policy
A. Responsibility: It is the responsibility of the member with the highest level of medical
training at the scene to guide the medical decisions regarding patient care and
transportation, in accordance with Section 204.01F of the CFD Operations Manual.
B. Assessment:
1. All subjects identified as a patient as defined above will be assessed using criteria
consistent with the provider’s level of training. This will include but is not limited to
the following:
a. Vital Signs – A complete set of Vital Signs will be assessed. This shall
include evaluating Blood Pressure, Pulse Rate, Respiratory Rate, and Pulse
Oximetry reading.
b. Mental Status – all patients will be evaluated to establish the patient’s level of
consciousness (alert and oriented to person, place, time and situation).

CLINICAL PRACTICE
STANDARDS
204.11
Page 2 of 5
4/07
Patients presenting with an altered mental status or level of consciousness
shall have their blood glucose evaluated.
c. History of present illness/injury
d. Medications – list all current medications as well as the patient’s allergies to
medications.
e. Focused assessment/physical examination as described by the standard
national EMT/Paramedic curriculum to include all pertinent positive or
pertinent negative symptoms.
C. Treatment: All patients assessed by CFD personnel will be treated as directed by the
Southwestern Ohio EMS protocol (this includes both BLS and ALS protocols). Any
deviation from these protocols shall be documented in the Patient Care Report (PCR)
narrative section to include all relevant details necessitating the deviation from protocol.
D. Patient Disposition: All patients attended by the CFD will have one of the following
dispositions:
1. Treatment and Transport by CFD unit:
a. Emergent – immediate threat to life or limb
i.
Patient shall be transported to the closest medical facility capable of
handling the emergency as defined by the Southwestern Ohio
(SWO) protocol and Trauma Triage Guidelines.
ii.
Hospital capacity status does not affect hospital choice.
b. Emergent – NO immediate threat to life or limb
i.
Patient request shall be honored except as listed in CFD Operations
Manual Section 204.01H
ii.
Hospital capacity status should be discussed with the patient prior to
patient or family departure to hospital of choice.
c. Non-Emergent – chronic or minor illness or injury.
i.
Patient request shall be honored except as listed in CFD Operations
Manual Section 204.01H
ii.
Hospital capacity status should be discussed with the patient prior to
patient or family departure to hospital of choice.
d. Special Cases:
i.
Combative Patients – If the patient presents a significant threat to
CFD staff, a police officer will accompany the patient during
transport in the ambulance/medic unit.
ii.
Toxic Ingestion – ALL patients with suspected or reported toxic
ingestion shall be transported to the Emergency Department via CFD
ambulance/medic unit.
2. Treatment and Released: only the following patients can be treated and released:

CLINICAL PRACTICE
STANDARDS
204.11
Page 3 of 5
4/07

3.
4.
5.
6.

a. Patients meeting the criteria listed in Section M406 of the SWO protocol,
Non-Transport of Insulin Dependent Patients.
b. Minor Injuries – patients with visible minor injuries that may require first aid
such as band-aids, ice packs, etc. may be directed to seek alternate methods of
transportation if they desire to visit a hospital.
c. Refusing Further Treatment – in the event a patient refuses further treatment
or transport once treatment has begun, document the treatment provided and
continue as with any other Refusal of Medical Transport. (See 6 below)
Treated and Transferred to another level of medical care (i.e. mutual aid ambulance,
Air Care, etc.)
Treated, Transported by Police – Patients treated and released with minor injuries
may be transported by police when there is no indication of toxic ingestion.
Obvious Death – body left for funeral director or coroner.
Refused Medical Transport – only patients deemed capable of making rational
decisions may be allowed to refuse transport.
a. Complete as thorough an assessment as possible – document aspects of the
assessment not permitted by the patient.
b. Have subject sign refusal for transportation.
c. List all pertinent details of assessment and circumstances in PCR.
d. The answers from the General Screening Questionnaire below will be
documented on the PCR.
Must answer “YES” to the following:

YES NO

Age greater than 18, or legal guardian present/making decisions?
Is patient alert and oriented to person, place and time?
Does the patient’s behavior appear normal to EMS provider and family?
There is NO evidence that the patient is intoxicated (as defined above)?
There must be NO signs or report of head injury?

E. Communication with the Emergency Department – notification to the receiving
hospital should be made only when it is deemed that the hospital staff will be required to
assess/treat the patient IMMEDIATELY upon arrival at the ED, except as follows:
1. Where required by protocol.
2. For cases not covered by the protocol, Medical Control should be contacted for
guidance.

CLINICAL PRACTICE
STANDARDS
204.11
Page 4 of 5
4/07
F. Documentation: The patient Care Report (PCR) is a legal document of the medical
assessment and treatment of the patient. All aspects of the patient’s medical assessment,
treatment and transportation will be documented in the PCR. Each company (including first
responders) that interacts with the patient shall complete a PCR on that patient.
1. Member completing the PCR will sign the form as a medical document.
2. Activities performed by a member joining a transport unit will be documented on the
transport unit PCR.
3. All patients will, as a minimum, have assessment criteria documented as in Section B1 above. If assessment criteria are not obtained, documentation supporting the inability
to gather an assessment will be included..
4. All records of cardiac rhythms (including heart monitor and AED tracings) will be
uploaded after each call or before the end of the shift
5. All paper PCR’s (F-33’s) shall be entered into the PCR system at quarters as soon as
possible upon return.
6. All PCR’s will be uploaded to the server before the end of the shift.
7. Documentation requirements for all first responder companies
- A PCR must be generated for ALL incidents where there is an interaction with a
patient.
8. Documentation requirements for Rescue 2
- All patient interactions (assessment/skills) performed by paramedics assigned to
the Rescue 2 on patients that are transported will be documented on the
transport company PCR
- All patient interactions (assessment/skills) performed by paramedics assigned to
Rescue 2 on patients that are not transported will be documented on the first
responder company PCR
9. Documentation requirements for transport companies
- All patient interactions (assessment/skills) will be documented on the transport
company PCR. This includes the following:
- upload all treatment and assessment data from the first responder PCR
- all interactions (assessment/skills) performed enroute to the hospital by the
transport company personnel.
G. Responsibilities at the Emergency Department
1. Provide verbal report to appropriate ED personnel
2. Provide a copy of the completed PCR.
3. Patients transported by the CFD will ONLY be delivered to the Emergency
Department.
H. Continuous Quality Improvement (CQI)

CLINICAL PRACTICE
STANDARDS
204.11
Page 5 of 5
4/07
PCR’s will be screened by the medical director’s staff for the purpose of improving the
quality of care rendered by the CFD. When requested and in accordance with GO 17,
members must respond to queries from the Medical Director or his designee by the
conclusion of that member’s next shift.


=== 204.13 Continuous Quality Improvement ===

=== 204.17 DUI Blood draws ===
DUI BLOOD DRAWS
Section 204.17
Rev. 8/08
Page 1 of 1
Chapter
Subject
Topic

II
4
17

Operations
Emergency Medical Services
DUI Blood Draws

Purpose
A. To establish rules for Fire Department Paramedics drawing blood at the
request of the Police Department in suspected cases driving under the influence.
Policy
A. Cincinnati Fire Department Paramedics may draw blood at the request of a
police officer, from a driver suspected of Operating a Vehicle Intoxicated
(OVI).
B. Cincinnati Fire Department Paramedics will not be dispatched for the sole
purpose of drawing blood for the police.
C. There shall be no delay in transport of a trauma patient, or a critical
patient for the sole purpose of drawing blood for the police. Members are
reminded that after extrication on scene time should be limited to TEN
MINUTES for trauma patients.
D. The police officer will read Administrative License Suspension form (BMV2255) to the patient. The patient may or may not agree to have their blood
drawn. If the patient refuses, no blood may be drawn, per ORC 4511.191. No
force will be used to draw blood samples per Ohio law.
E. Persons dead, unconscious, or who is in condition rendering them incapable of
refusal, shall be deemed to have consented as provided by the Ohio Revised
Code.
F. Paramedics will insure alcohol swabs are not used in conjunction with blood
samples. A police officer must witness the drawing of the blood sample and
maintain control of the evidence. The police will provide the proper gray cap
blood tubes for blood sample collection.
G. Whenever the a blood sample is provided to the police the following must be
documented on the patient care report:
1. Name of paramedic drawing blood.
2. Statement that no alcohol was used in preparation of the injection site.
3. Name and badge number of the police officer that the blood tubes were
given to.
H. When ever a police officer requests that blood be drawn, and no blood is
drawn,:
1. Rescue 2 will be contacted.
2. An F-47 Chiefs report will be submitted to Rescue 1 explaining the
details of why the blood sample was not obtained.


=== 204.19 Combative Patients ===
COMBATIVE PATIENTS
Section 204.19
Rev. 8/08
Page 1 of 3
CHAPTER
SUBJECT
TOPIC

II
4
19

Operations
Emergency Medical Services
Evaluation, Restraint, and Transport of Combative Patients

Background And Significance
A.

There have been reports in the medical literature that described the prehospital
deaths of agitated and combative individuals that occurred while under
restraint.
B.
Although most of the reported deaths occurred in police custody, there have
been deaths during transport by advanced life support (ALS) services as well.
C.
Cases similar to those described in the medical literature have also occurred in
Cincinnati.
D.
There are two common threads present prior to sudden death during transport
of agitated patients:
1. A state of “exited delirium”, which refers to qualities of irrational behavior,
aggression, violence, and paranoia in the patient. This state can result from a number of
causes including cocaine intoxication, psychiatric illness, hypoglycemia, and other
medical illnesses. During the exited delirium, the patient often becomes significantly
hyperthermic. Excited delirium increases the body’s need for oxygen by increasing the
workload and stress on the heart while at the same time the hyperactivity increases the
use of oxygen by all the muscles.
2. The second factor which contributes to death in these patients is restraint. The
term “positional asphyxia” has been used to describe the situation where the placement of
the body interferes with breathing, resulting in a lack of oxygen delivery to the blood
cells. Once the blood oxygen level falls below that needed to support life, the brain
begins to die. The deleterious positional effect may result either from interference with
the muscular or mechanical component of respiration or from obstruction of the upper
airway. These patients have a combination of high demand for oxygen coupled with a
decreased supply because of the way they are restrained. This combination is sometimes
lethal.
3. Nearly all of the patients who have died were restrained in the prone position.
Most were additionally controlled with their arms and legs bound in the “hog-tied” or
hobble restraints.
Policy
A.

Violent and delirious patients may have a variety of life-threatening medical
problems that necessitate evaluation and treatment in a hospital.
1. Sometimes gentle talking will persuade the patient to calm down, and Fire
Division personnel will be able to gain control of the patient.
2. However, the safety of the patient and the rescuers frequently demands that
the patient be forcibly restrained, so that proper medical procedures can be
implemented.
a. It is necessary to use overwhelming force to restrain patients with
minimal risk to the rescuers and patient. Therefore it is often

COMBATIVE PATIENTS
Section 204.19
Rev. 8/08
Page 2 of 3
required to wait for police assistance before attempting to restrain
agitated patients. A good rule of thumb is that four to six people are
needed to adequately restrain a patient and position the patient on his
back.
b. If the police need to restraint a patient in the prone position in order to gain
control of the patient, then the patient must be turned over onto his back immediately
after control is gained.
B.

Because of the clear relationship between restraint in the prone position and
death during transport, all patients must be transported in the supine
position (on their backs). A variety of restraint techniques are available:
1. Most times the patient may be safely restrained by securing both arms and
legs to a long backboard or the rails of the stretcher to keep the patient in
position.
2. At times it may be necessary to restrain the patient with handcuffs behind the
patient’s back.
3. A rolled up sheet may be placed loosely across the patient’s chest and secured
under both axillae to keep the patient from sitting up. This sheet must not be
so tight that it inhibits breathing.
4. A surgical mask or an oxygen mask that is connected to high flow oxygen
may be tied over the patient’s mouth and nose if necessary to prevent the
patient from spitting at the rescuers.

C.

Police officers are experts in safety restraining violent individuals. Therefore
the police officer on the scene is ultimately responsible for deciding on
appropriate restraint techniques to maximize safety of the rescuers and the
patient.

D. It is not easy to decide in the field which delirious patient has a life-threatening
medical illness and which has a psychiatric disorder. Since these patients are often complex and
may have a variety of potentially treatable medical problems, the method of transport should lean
toward ALS transport. Patients who have ANY of the following signs should be transported in a
paramedic rescue unit using ALS procedures:
1.

2.
3.
4.

Delirious mental state as demonstrated by disorientation to person or place or by
a score on the verbal component of the Glasgow Coma Scale that is less than 5,
OR
Pulse rate less than 50 or greater than 120 beats per minute, OR
Systolic blood pressure less than 90 or greater than 180 mm Hg, OR
Any other patient whom the paramedics have examined may be transported using
ALS procedures if the paramedics believe that the patient may need advanced
care.

E. Oxygen should be placed on the patient unless the pulse oximeter reading is
consistently greater than 94%. Patients transported in a rescue unit should be placed on a cardiac
monitor. A finger stick glucose level should be obtained to evaluate the possibility of

COMBATIVE PATIENTS
Section 204.19
Rev. 8/08
Page 3 of 3
hypoglycemia as a cause of the agitated behavior. The altered level of consciousness protocol
should be followed. If a patient is both violent and ill or injured, it may be necessary to have
police ride in the ambulance or rescue unit.
F. If the patient is completely oriented to person and place with an intact ability to reason
and has normal vital signs, then the patient may be transported in a basic ambulance. In general,
these patients would exhibit disorders such as painful, swollen, deformed extremities or other
medical conditions that would routinely be transported in a basic ambulance.
G. If the patient is completely oriented to person and place with an intact ability to reason
and has normal vital signs and NO other medical illnesses or injuries, and if there are symptoms
of mental illness and the patient has exhibited dangerousness toward self or others, the Fire
Division personnel may suggest that the police transport the patient.
H. If there are questions about the management of a particular patient, then the Rescue 2
Lieutenant on duty, the medical control physician, or the Medical Director should be consulted.


=== 204.21 Drug License ===
Drug License
204.21
Rev. 8/08
Page 1 of 1
Chapter
Subject
Topic

II
4
21

Operations
Emergency Medical Services
Drug License

Policy
A. All Fire Stations within the Cincinnati Fire Division have been issued a drug license
by the State of Ohio Board of Pharmacy.
B. Per State of Ohio regulations this license must be displayed in a visible location in the
office.
C. The house captain is responsible to insure that this license is in a conspicuous
location. The State of Ohio Board of Pharmacy performs unannounced inspections to
verify correct posting.
D. The license shall be hung in a frame for display. If a frame is needed contact Fire
Department Central Stores at Engine 12’s quarters.


=== 204.23 Paramedic Equipment Standardization ===
PARAMEDIC EQUIPMENT STANDARDIZATION
Section 204.23
Rev. 8/08
Page 1 of 2
Chapter
Subject
Topic

II
4
23

Operations
Emergency Medical Services

Purpose:
A. To establish a standard approach for ensuring that EMS equipment is properly
maintained, and stored in a standardized method.
B. To ensure that equipment is kept in a state of constant readiness.
C. To ensure that paramedics know the exact location of supplies in drug boxes and
rescue units.
D. To ensure that paramedics are confident that each tour is begun with the standard
equipment and medications.
E. To establish a system to let members know what the minimum levels of paramedic
equipment are.
F. To reduce supply costs to the fire department.
G. To reduce liability of the Fire Department and its members through a structured
maintenance system.
Policy
A. Standardization of drug boxes
1. Every drug box will be standardized. This standard will be followed by all
Paramedic Engine companies, and Rescue units in the layout of their drug
boxes.
2. The drug box will be stocked with the minimum quantity of supplies as set by
the fire department.
3. Companies can carry additional supplies as long as they are carried in the
standard location.
4. Engine company drug boxes will be equipped with a narcotic storage pouch
for storing issued narcotics. Rescue units will carry their narcotics in a locked
cabinet on the unit. This will be the only difference between engine company
and rescue unit drug boxes.
5. Supplies will only be carried in the locations specified in the standardized
drawing.
6. Airway and intubation supplies will be kept in a separate zipped intubation
kits and sealed. This includes cetacaine, neosynephrine and lidocaine jelly.
B. Standardization of Rescue Units
1. Every rescue unit will be standardized. All rescue units will carry supplies,
medications and equipment in the location designated in department plan.
2. Rescue units will be stocked with minimum supplies.
3. Rescue units may carry additional supplies, must be carried in standard
location.

PARAMEDIC EQUIPMENT STANDARDIZATION
Section 204.23
Rev. 8/08
Page 2 of 2

C. Inspection of Equipment
1. Paramedic Engine and Rescue units will fill out a check list every day to
ensure they are fully stocked with equipment and medications. These check
lists will be stored in a binder for one year.
2. Additional forms are available on the “ALLCFD” drive.
3. Paramedics assigned to the company/unit will check drug boxes daily. Seal
numbers will be recorded.
4. Paramedic Engine companies, and Rescue Units will be issued a laminated
standardized layout of the drug boxes and rescue units.
5. Monitors will be checked daily, by performing a self-test and discharging the
defibrillator into the test module. Test records will be kept for one year in a
separate binder.
D. Equipment Maintenance
1. All equipment will be cleaned and disinfected every Friday, and as needed.
This includes the monitor, cot, and interior of unit, backboards, reeves
stretcher, stair chair, and all other non disposable equipment.
2. Heart monitor batteries will be maintained in accordance with manufacturer
guidelines.
3. Glucometers will be checked daily to ensure the testing strips are calibrated
for the machine.
4. Preventative maintenance schedule for the rescue unit will be established by
the apparatus supervisor. PM-A maintenance does not require a change over.
PM-B will require a change over.
E. Periodic Inspections By EMS Supervisors
1. Rescue 1 and Rescue 2 will do periodic inspections to ensure compliance with
this procedure.
2. Companies are expected to have the minimum equipment on hand and stocked
in the designated spots. Paramedic Engine Companies and Rescue Units shall
be maintained the same.
3. Drug seal and daily inspection records will be checked for compliance.


=== 205.01 Rev 2-21 ===
ENVIRONMENTAL CRIMES UNIT
205.01
Page 1 of 2
Rev. 2/21
CHAPTER II

Operations

SUBJECT 1

Call Out and Investigations

TOPIC 1

Environmental Crimes Unit

A.

OBJECTIVE
1.

B.

POLICY
1.

C.

To establish guideline and procedures to be used by company officers, and chief
officers when requesting an investigation by the Environmental Crimes Unit
(ECU).

The ECU protects the City of Cincinnati from the financial responsibility
associated with remediation of hazardous materials releases, spills, or discharges.
The investigators enforce state laws which hold the owner or shipper of the
hazardous material financially responsible for the cost of remediation and
emergency response. The City of Cincinnati intends to seek restitution for funds
expended in the remediation of hazardous materials/hazardous waste responses by
city agencies. To this end the ECU has been established within the Cincinnati
Fire Department (CFD).

DUTIES OF THE INCIDENT COMMANDER (I.C.)
1.

In any situation where the CFD has responded in emergency or nonemergency
mode, a determination will be made by the incident commander as to whether a
possible or potential environmental crime has occurred at the site. Evidence of
such crime might be leaking or damaged barrels, heavy ground staining, abandon
drums of hazardous waste or indications of chemical mishandling.

2.

Should a determination be made by the incident commander that a possible
environmental crime exists; the I.C. will notify the ECU through fire dispatch.
Fire dispatch will contact ECU and advise the investigator of the fire ground
and/or phone number to contacting the I.C.

3.

After regular business hours the Incident Commander shall contact fire dispatch
which will notify the incident commander of the availability of an ECU
investigator. Any radio messages concerning ECU should use the term, “ECU or
request that ECU should respond”. Should no investigator be available and
immediate remediation is not required, the I.C. shall take all necessary

ENVIRONMENTAL CRIMES UNIT
205.01
Page 2 of 2
Rev. 2/21
information and submit all reports as usual. The I.C. shall notify the ECU office
at 357-7533 on the next business day for follow up investigation.
4.

If the original response was initiated by a report of fire, explosion, medical or
other emergency and an environmental crime has been revealed; the I.C. will
remain on the scene or will assign someone to remain on the scene until the
arrival of an ECU investigator. This will help facilitate the investigation, by
maintaining control and custody of the scene.

5.

The I.C. shall request an ECU investigator on all responses where a hazardous
material or hazardous waste has been spilled, leaked or released to the
environment in a quantity sufficient to present hazard to the environment, persons
or property. This will be a judgment call by the I.C. If in doubt, notify the ECU.

6.

The I.C. shall also request an ECU investigator for any abandon drum containing
hazardous waste discarded on City or publicly owned property. The Ohio EPA no
longer offers the Orphan Drum Program which previously assisted in the
remediation of abandon drums.

7.

It is the policy of the ECU to have two investigators at any interview/interrogation
situation. Should only one ECU investigator be available for an urgent
interview/interrogation, the investigator may request that the Fire Investigation
Unit Specialist on call respond to assist. That request will be granted unless it
would conflict with an ongoing fire investigation.


=== 205.15 EMS Reporting ===
EMS Reporting
Section 205.15
Rev. 8/08
Page 1 of 1
EMS Reporting
205.15
Page 1 of 1
Rev. 8/08
Chapter
Subject
Topic

II
4
15

Operations
Emergency Medical Services
EMS Reporting

Policy
A.

B.
C.

All Engine and Ladder Companies, and Rescue units and Ambulances
will upload their EMS notebooks to the net at least daily. More frequent
uploading is encouraged.
Form 34, will be kept in a three ring binder in the quarters of the
Rescue unit or Ambulance.
Daily inventory forms will be kept in a three ring binder in the quarters
of the Rescue unit or Ambulance. Company Officers or senior Rescue
member will ensure that proper actions are taken to locate or replace
missing or damaged equipment.


=== 206.01 CBRNE Response Rev 9-05 ===
CBRNE RESPONSE
Page 1 of 14
206.01
9/05

CHAPTER II

OPERATIONS

SUBJECT

Bio Hazard Dispatch

TOPIC

Chemical, Biological, Radiation, Nuclear, Explosive (CBRNE)
RESPONSE

This standard operating procedure will help determine the creditability of a potential threat. The
procedure is based on sound principles developed by the International Association of Fire Chiefs
(IAFC), to address potential bio-terrorism events primarily involving suspicious substances, letters,
packages, or containers.
Biological agents typically have delayed onset of symptoms that the victims experience. Most
biological agents have an incubation period which ranges from one to seven days. Final
confirmatory test results will generally be available from the Laboratory Response Network Lab
within 72 hours.
A. OBJECTIVES
To Provide a model procedure for first-arriving fire service personnel to address potential bioterrorism events primarily involving suspicious letters, packages or containers.
Protect the health and safety of the public.
Help deal with hoaxes and suspicious materials.
Developing of clear procedures for assessing and managing biological threats is imperative. World
events have placed the emergency services at the forefront of homeland security. The fire service
must be aware that terrorists, both foreign and domestic, continually test homeland security
procedures.
B. POLICIES
When dispatched for a Biohazard response (suspicious substance/package) the following criteria will
be used to decide the method of disposition and ensure protection of responders. DO NOT touch,
move or open any suspicious package until a risk assessment of the package is performed in
coordination with Hazardous Material personnel.
Dispatcher
1. Collect this information from the caller and relay to responding companies:
a. What is the threat?
b. Is it a letter, package, or device?
c. What type of facility type?
d. Does the facility have a previous history?
e. What are the characteristics of the substance?
f. What is the reason for suspicion?
g. What is the exact location of the substance inside the building or outside the
building?

CBRNE RESPONSE
Page 2 of 14
206.01
9/05
h. Are there any odors or fumes?
i. What are the signs, symptoms of occupants who came in contact with the
substance?
2. Instruct the caller with pre-arrival instructions to:
a. Cover the package with clear plastic.
b. Close door and leave the area immediately.
c. Wash their hands and then any other affected area(s).
d. Instruct caller to isolate all people suspected to have been directly exposed or
contaminated into a separate area from the other occupants.
e. Meet emergency responders outside the facility.
Fire Company
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Personnel safety is the number one priority in handling any suspected bio-terror event.
Evaluate dispatch information and take the safest approach to the scene.
Establish a staging area.
Meet the caller outside the facility.
Prevent personnel from entering the contaminated facility.
Gather information from outside the potentially contaminated facility.
Establish a perimeter and isolate the area (law enforcement members will secure the
perimeter).
8. Ask occupants to remain on the scene.
District Chief
1. Conduct a scene size-up, including checking for improvised explosive device (IED) and
consider secondary devices. If an explosive threat exists, it will take precedence over any
biological threat until rendered safe by Engine 14B. (Photographs of package and relevant
information should be documented)
2. Refer to C.F.D. suspicious package matrix
3. Complete Biohazard Risk assessment criteria form.
4. Complete Biohazard form. (Photograph of package and relevant information documented)
5. Consider additional resources.
a. Duty Chief
b. Fire WMD Unit
c. Fire ECU
d. Hazardous Material Unit
e. Hazardous Devices Unit (EOD)
f. Health Department
g. Police
h. Ohio Department of Health
i. FBI
j. Postal Inspector
k. Remedial contractor
6. Meet with facility management to:
a. Evaluate HVAC status
b. Develop list of affected occupants (facility must maintain list for 90 days)
7. Complete an incident report with the initial responding law enforcement agency, which will be
forwarded to the local FBI WMD coordinator.

CBRNE RESPONSE
Page 3 of 14
206.01
9/05
8. Assist local Health Department with patient contact information forms
Assistant Chief
1. Evaluate information provided by District Chief
a. Biohazard Risk Assessment Criteria Form
b. Bio-Hazard Response Form
c. Responder Procedure
2. Evaluate using Bio Hazard Risk Assessment Criteria and Responder Procedure: Assessment
(both attached).
3. Contact the following the resources:
a. Fire WMD Unit
b. Fire ECU
c. Police
d. Health
e. Ohio Health Department
f. FBI
g. Postal Inspector (as appropriate)
4. Confirm arrangements for transport of package to appropriate facility
Hazardous Materials Unit
1. Monitor for the following hazards:
a. Corrosives
b. Flammable /Explosive
c. Oxygen
d. Toxicity
e. Radioactive
2. Ensure that materials are safely packaged. Try to retain enough suspicious material for:
a. Laboratory analysis, if necessary.
b. Use as criminal evidence, regardless of whether the threat is ultimately determined to
be infectious, toxic or a criminal hoax.
3. Transfer custody of evidence to a law enforcement officer as soon as possible. Maintain chain of
custody by law enforcement and health department guidelines. Photographs of package should be
taken and relevant information documented.
4. Limit field safety screening to ruling out explosive devices, radiological material, corrosive
materials and volatile organic compounds. Currently, there are no definitive field tests for
identifying biological agents. Additional field-testing can mislead response efforts by providing
incorrect or incomplete results, and destroy limited materials critical for definitive laboratory
testing required to facilitate any appropriate public health and law enforcement response.

1.
2.

Hazardous Devices Unit
X-ray and render safe any sealed letter, container, or package.
Include copy of x-ray with substance when transported to lab or for evidence by law enforcement
personnel. Photographs of package should be taken and relevant information documented.

CBRNE RESPONSE
Page 4 of 14
206.01
9/05
C. SAFETY PRIORITIES
1. Do not open any letter, package or device.
2. Do not take any letter, package, or device back to quarters.
3. Do not allow any Emergency Responder to enter a contaminated atmosphere without full personal
protective equipment (PPE).
4. Beware of “Smoke Like” powder.
5. Conduct meter analysis on all suspicious letters or packages sent to L.R.N. Lab.
6. Wear protective gloves and respirator protective equipment.
7. Always Wear NIOSH-approved respiratory protection (APR) when the risk assessment indicates a
respiratory threat.
8. X-ray analysis must be conducted on all sealed letters, or packages, and copies of x-ray must
accompany to L.R.N. Lab or evidence.
D. DEFINITIONS
1. Biological threat: Any biological material capable of causing death, disease, or other biological
malfunction in a human, an animal, a plant, or another living organism; deterioration of food, water,
equipment, supplies or material of any kind, or harmful alteration of the environment. Also, an
expression of intention to use any such material for such purposes.
2. Emergency service: The industry comprised of fire, law enforcement and emergency medical
service providers who respond to an emergency; includes health department, and emergency
management.
3. First responder: An emergency worker who responds to an incident within a set amount of time.
The term is usually specific to fire, law enforcement and EMS’ immediately arriving assets. Those
arriving on scene at later intervals may be called a responder, an emergency responder, a secondary
responder, a subject matter expert or a special law enforcement assignment.
4. Hazmat responder: A trained and certified individual who is a member of a hazardous material
response team and qualified to respond to incidents involving toxic industrial chemical, chemical
warfare agents and other weapons of mass destruction. A hazmat response specialist will have
additional training to respond to specific weapons of mass destruction.
5. Explosive Ordnance Disposal (EOD): A trained and certified individual who is qualified to x-ray
and determine how to render safe explosives and weapons of mass destruction
6. Package: A letter, box, jar, suitcase or any other container that may hold a suspect material.
7. Weapons of Mass Destruction (WMD): WMDs may be any nuclear, biological, incendiary,
chemical, explosive or radiological weapon that may be used for death or destruction. For the
purpose of this document, we will be referring to as chemical biological radiation nuclear explosive
agents.

CBRNE RESPONSE
Page 5 of 14
206.01
9/05
BIOHAZARD RISK ASSESSMENT CRITERIA Form
Hi Risk Occupancies or events
1. ___________
2. ___________
3. ___________
4. ___________

…………………
…………………
………………....
…………………

5. ___________
6. ___________
7. ___________
8. ___________

…………………
…………………
…………………
…………………

9. ___________
10.___________

…………………
…………………

Abortion Clinic
Church
Court House
Government Building
(Federal, State, Local)
Media Facility
Post Office
School
Occupancy that has received any
type of threat
Local or national day of significance
Places of assembly; (I.E. sporting events, concerts,
Street festival, ECT)

Overt act with the intent to induce panic
1. __________ …………………
Note
2. __________ …………………
Phone call
3. __________ …………………
Verbal
4. __________
…………………
Envelope or container with unknown substance that appears
to have been positioned to induce panic
5. __________
…………………
Suspect deliberately disperses an unknown substance
6. __________
…………………
Return addressee (or alleged originator of item) denies
knowledge of letter, package, container, etc.
Mailed Letter, Package, or Container
1. __________ …………………
No return address
2. __________ …………………
Return address not consistent with postmark
3. __________ …………………
Excessive postage
4___________
…………………
Wires or metal protruding from letter, package, container, etc.
5___________
…………………
Unexplainable powders, liquids, stains, odors, etc.
6___________
…………………
Letter, package, container with odd shape, weight, etc.
7. __________
…………………
Unable to verify letter, package, container, etc return
addressee.
Possible Victim Exposure or Contamination
1. ___________
2. ___________
3. ___________

…………………
…………………
…………………

People on scene are ill
People on scene have legitimate fears or concerns
News reports suggest an upward spike of suspicious incidents

…………………
…………………
…………………
…………………
…………………

Powdery substance
Liquid/oily substance
Unidentifiable substance
No substance remaining due to inhalation or absorption
Oily

Substance Found
1. ___________
2. ___________
3. ___________
4. ___________
5. ___________

CBRNE RESPONSE
Page 6 of 14
206.01
9/05

BIO-HAZARD RESPONSE DATA FORM
DATE_________ TIME________ INCIDENT #_______ ADDRESS____________________

COMPLAINANT_______________ ADDRESS______________________ PHONE___________

OCCUPANCY

 RESIDENTIAL  OTHER (DESCRIBE) _____________________________

NUMBER OF OCCUPANTS AT TIME OF INCIDENT _____________ IN IMMEDIATE AREA _____
 OPENED

DESCRIPTION OF OBJECT

 UNOPENED

 LETTER  PACKAGE  OTHER CONTAINER (DESCRIBE) ___________  UNCONTAINED
LIST SUSPICIOUS ELEMENTS___________________________________________________________

IF SUBSTANCE WAS OBSERVED DESCRIBE_____________________________________________
IF APPLICABLE, LIST RETURN ADDRESS ______________________________________________

POSSIBLE EXPOSURE?  NO  YES IF SO  INHALATION  CUTANEOUS  INGESTION
 Health department forms
HOW MANY?_____________

DESCRIBE CIRCUMSTANCES _____________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________
___________
 SENT FOR TESTING

DISPOSITION

 FALSE-NO ACTION WARRANTED
 POSSIBLE HAZARD
 AC NOTIFIED

 WMD NOTIFIED

 LEFT ON SCENE

 FALSE WITH MALICIOUS INTENT
 CONFIRMED HAZARD
 ECU NOTIFIED  POLICE NOTIFIED

 HEALTH DEPT NOTIFIED  ODH NOTIFIED

 FBI NOTIFIED  USPIS NOTIFIED

ADDITIONAL REMARKS_____________________________________________________________
DISTRICT CHIEF__________________________________

CBRNE RESPONSE
Page 7 of 14
206.01
9/05

RESPONDER PROCEDURE: ASSESSMENT
1. Assess the hazard by:
a. Gathering information from the reporting party, bystanders, witnesses and any other first
responders.
b. Determining who has physically had contact with the package.
c. Conducting an initial evaluation of the package; consider using binoculars while standing a
safe distance away from the suspicious package.
2. Determine the answers to the following questions
a. Was the package accompanied by a verbal or written threat?
(See Appendix an on threat considerations)
b. Is the package open, leaking, giving off an odor or have any suspicious markings?
c. If the package is open, was any substance released from the package?
d. Is anyone who touched the package feeling ill?
e. Is the package making noise?
f. Are there any wires protruding?
3. When possible, the final hazard determination should be a coordinated effort with a hazardous
material response team and E. O.D.
IF THE ANSWER TO ALL ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS IS “NO”
1. If they are not already on the scene, law enforcement should be contacted and apprised of the
incident, and a collective determination on the removal or disposal of the package should be agreed
upon.
2. The package should be placed in a sealable plastic bag and doublebagged.
3. Anyone who touched the package should thoroughly wash hands or affected area with soap and
water. A package that is not hazardous may still be unsanitary.
4. The package will be transported to the storage trailer at the Cincinnati Health Department facility at
3845 Dooley Bypass by the District Chief. Do not take any packages to the fire station for storage!
5. If a reasonable and defendable explanation can be given as to the source of the substance, that there
is no articulated threat, and no one is ill, then no further action are necessary.
IF THE ANSWER TO ANY ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS IS “YES”
1. If not already on the scene, notify local law enforcement. Establish a unified command with the lead
emergency service agencies. Ensure all agencies (e.g., federal law enforcement, certified bomb
squad, health department, etc.) are included in the unified command structure.
2. Request special assistance (e.g., E.O.D., decontamination units, state and federal authorities, etc.) as
soon as a threat requiring their involvement is identified.
3. Control the scene.
a. Establish hot, warm, and cold zones. The size of the hazard control zones should be based
on the assessed threat. Depending on the scenario, the initial hot zone may range from the
desktop in an office to an entire building depending on the situation. Use barrier tape to
cordon off open areas. Shut down the building ventilation system if there has been a
substance release.
b. Turn off any mail processing equipment that may have handled the suspicious package.
c. Isolate those who have been exposed or potentially exposed and consider shelter-inplace. Do not evacuate the building unless an immediate threat is identified. Individuals,
including emergency service personnel, who contacted the package, must be assessed for the
need for decontamination. Only under extreme medical emergency conditions should a

CBRNE RESPONSE
Page 8 of 14
206.01
9/05
contaminated victim be transported prior to decontamination. Contaminated acutely ill or
injured victims must be placed in a “protective envelope” (e.g., Tyvek® suit) to minimize
secondary contamination of the general population and/or environment.
d. Consider location and well-being of those unexposed or “The worried well.”Non-victims
may need to be gathered together for law enforcement interviews, or to receive information
from public health or other officials to inform and allay fears.
4. Request the assistance of the Chemical Air Monitoring Team (CAM-team) to assist with hazard
assessment, sample collection, and other mitigation activities.
5. Appropriate local or state law enforcement agency will notify FBI WMD coordinator.
6. As needed, conduct a threat assessment conference call, via the FBI WMD coordinator, with the FBI
Counter-Terrorism Division’s Weapons of Mass Destruction Operations Unit (WMDOU), the FBI
Laboratory Division, Hazardous Materials Response Unit (HMRU) and appropriate federal agencies.
7. Contact Cincinnati Health Department (who should in turn notify state authorities and the Center for
Disease Control) if casualties are involved or a threat of public health exposure or environmental
contamination exists.
8. In coordination with law enforcement, notify the U.S. Postal Inspection Service, whenever it appears
that the threat was delivered through the U.S. Postal Service. Assist with ensuring that origin and
tracking information is obtained from the package (ideally, photographs of the front and back).
9. Treat the scene as a crime scene. Preserve evidence in coordination with law enforcement. If
identified as a federal crime scene, assist the FBI HMRU in identifying and collecting biological
evidence.
10. Coordinate transport of public health samples to the closest Laboratory Response Network (LRN)
facility with the FBI WMD coordinator.
11. Be prepared to perform meter analysis of the biological sample to rule out corrosives, flammable /
explosive, oxygen, toxicity, radioactive, if transported to a LRN Lab a sealed package must be xrayed
12. Identify and list the names of anyone who may have been exposed to the suspicious substance so
they may be contacted when the LRN test results are available or if there is other additional
information.
13. In coordination with the FBI, identify a single point-of-contact for follow-up.
14. Contact your PIO.

CBRNE RESPONSE
Page 9 of 14
206.01
9/05
Decontamination Guidelines for Personnel Exposed to a Suspicious Package Containing Substance or
Accompanied by a Threat
1.

Unopened, no leak or exposure
a.
Thoroughly wash hands, and then other affected area, with soap and water.
Cincinnati Health Department may be notified for further assistance.
b.

2.

Unopened, oily or granular leak, no exposure:
a.
Thoroughly wash hands, and then other affected area, with soap and water.
b. Have victims shower at home with soap and water.
c. Launder clothes separately in hot water with soap.
d. Cincinnati Health Department may be contacted for further assistance.

3. Opened, no exposure
a. Thoroughly wash hands or affected area with soap and water.
b. Cincinnati Health Department must be notified.
4. Opened, oily or granular substance present, with exposure to:
a. Hands only (minimal contact)
1) Thoroughly wash hands, then other affected area, with soap and water.
2) Change and place clothes in a sealed plastic bag.
3)
Shower at home with soap and water, shampoo hair.
4) Launder clothes separately in hot water with soap.
5) Cincinnati Health Department must be notified.
b. Hands and clothes
1) Remove clothes and seal in plastic bag onsite.
2) Gross decontamination by emergency service that is based on and justified by the hazard
assessment.
3) Consider contacting medical control and health department.
4) Leave contaminated clothes onsite for later pick-up by health department or other
appropriate agency.

Appendices
A. Identifying Suspicious Packages
B. Sample Equipment List for First Responders
C. Additional Information on Biological Weapons
D. Media Coverage

CBRNE RESPONSE
Page 10 of 14
206.01
9/05
Appendix A. Identifying Suspicious Packages
Suspicious packages should be risk assessed for articulated threats.
Examples would include:
• Actual threat message in or on the package
• Addressee in position of authority, e.g., government employee, political figure, private sector
executive
• Addressee in controversial business, e.g., Planned Parenthood, chemical industry, forestry
What kind of packages should be considered suspicious?
Some characteristics of suspicious packages and envelopes include the following:
• Inappropriate or unusual labeling
• Excessive postage
• Handwritten or poorly typed addresses
• Misspellings of common words
• Strange return address or no return address
• Incorrect titles or title without a name
• Not addressed to a specific person
• Marked with restrictions, e.g. “Personal,” “Confidential” or “Do not x-ray”
• Marked with any threatening language
• Postmarked from a city or state that does not match the return address
• Appearance
• Powdery substance felt through or appearing on the package
• Oily stains, discolorations or odor
• Lopsided or uneven envelope
• Excessive packaging material such as masking tape, string, etc.
• Other suspicious signs
• Excessive weight
• Ticking sound
• Protruding wires or aluminum foil
If a package or envelope appears suspicious, NON-EMERGENCY PERSONNEL SHOULD NOT
OPEN OUR TOUCH IT. Emergency personnel should limit direct contact with the package. Ideally,
only those with hazardous material training should proceed to handle the package when necessary.

CBRNE RESPONSE
Page 11 of 14
206.01
9/05
Appendix B: Sample Equipment List
The primary route of entry for the biological agents is inhalation. Protecting the respiratory system from
exposure is the first priority in any incident. The use of the appropriate level of respiratory protection
cannot be overstated. A properly selected, properly fitted full face respirator offers emergency service
personnel the highest level of protection.
Minimum Equipment
• Protective gloves (surgical, vinyl, etc.)
• NIOSH approved respirator
• Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA)
• Structural fire fighting ensemble
• Multi-gas detector that detects lower explosive limits
• Photo ionization detector
• Small, glass or plastic, sterile vials with leak-proof caps
• Small sterile, individually-wrapped, disposable spatula or scoop
• Sealable plastic bags
• PH paper
• M8 paper
• Radiological survey meters
• Sterile distilled water
Recommended Equipment
• NIOSH approved Air purifying respirator (APR)
• Powered air purifying respirator (PAPR)
• Dosimeters to measure individual exposure
• M9 tape
• M256A1 chemical agent detection kit

CBRNE RESPONSE
Page 12 of 14
206.01
9/05

Appendix C: Additional Information on Biological Weapons
Bio: Just One of Many Threats
Many different threats can be sent through the mail. The initial triage, or sorting and allocation of treatment
to individuals according to a system of priorities for any threat situation, must consider all hazards. A critical
element to be performed by the first responder is assessing for the presence of:
• Chemical
• Biological
• Radiation
• Nuclear
• Explosives

Biological agents:
• Bacteria
o Anthrax
o Tularemia
o Plague
o Brucellosis
o Cholera
o Q Fever
o Glanders
0 Salmonella
• Viruses
o Smallpox
o Viral hemorrhagic fevers (Ebola, Marburg, Lassa, etc.)
o Venezualen Equine Encephalitis (VEE)
• Toxins
o Ricin
o Botulinum (Botulism)
o Staphylococcal Enterotoxin B (SEB) (Food Poisoning)
o Aflatoxin

CBRNE RESPONSE
Page 13 of 14
206.01
9/05
Appendix D: Media Coverage
Bio-terror incidents will generate media interest regardless of the credibility of the threat. Be prepared to face
intense media coverage of the incident. It is imperative that the PIO’s from first responding agencies
coordinate their efforts from the outset of any potential bio-terror event. Media releases not carefully crafted
jointly by public safety, public health and law enforcement can cause public panic, high demand on public
health resources and a negative impact on the criminal investigation.
1. A public information officer (PIO) should be established to handle media inquiries.
2. Bio-terror incidents usually involve several agencies. There may be several PIOs present, each
representing the interests of his/her own agency. It is essential that PIOs use a joint information
system with information coordinated among agencies before release.

CBRNE RESPONSE
Page 14 of 14
206.01
9/05

Cincinnati Fire Department
Suspicious Substance/Package
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•

Responder Safety
Heightened Suspicion
Secondary Devices
Photograph All Packages

Potential Agent

Malicious False/Hoax

Suspicious
Substance Present
Leaking or Stained
Powder or Liquid
High Risk Facility

Threat/Criminal Activity

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Notify:
Fire – WMD
Fire – ECU
Police
Health
OH Dept of Health
FBI
.
Postal Inspector

X-Ray and Send to
ODH Lab for testing

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Isolate
Perimeter
Information
List Occupants

Notify:
Fire – WMD
Fire – ECU
Police
Health
OH Dept of Health
FBI
Postal Inspector

Police Investigation

Health Effects
Remotely Possible

X-Ray Analysis
Meter Analysis
CPD Evidence Storage

X-Ray Analysis
Meter Analysis
CHD Storage Trailer

No Credible Threat

Substance/Package is:
•
•
•
•

Not Suspicious
Not Threatening
Substance Identified
No Hazard Found

Return to Complainant
Offer to Dispose


=== 207.01 Squad Company Responses ===
SQUAD COMPANY RESPONSES
Section 207.01
Rev. 8/08
Page 1 of 3
CHAPTER
SUBJECT
TOPIC

II
1
1

Operations
Squad Company Response Procedures

Purpose
To give guidelines for responses to various emergencies by Squad 9 and Squad 14.
Dispatch:
A. Closest Squad Company Response:
1 All one alarm fire dispatches including high-rise.
2 Elevator Emergencies
3 Vehicle and Machinery Entrapments
4 Airport Emergencies
5 WMD/CBRNE/White Powder Runs
6 Vehicle into a building
7 River Emergencies (Including boat fires on the river)
B. Two Squad Company Response (Due to restrictions in the CAD system the initial Squad
Company Officer or the Incident Commander shall request the second Squad Company to
be dispatched immediately on the designated incidents.)
1. Second Alarm transmission
2. WMD/CBRNE large scale emergencies (Must be requested)
3. Confirmation of a working fire in a high rise structure or large commercial
structure. (Must be requested)
4. Technical Rescue Incidents:
1. Building Collapse
2. Trench Rescue (Must be requested)
3. Confined Space Rescue (Must be requested)
4. High Angle/Line Rescue (Must be requested)
5. Water Rescue (Including drowning in the river)
5. Hazardous Materials
6. Request of Incident Commander
7. Firefighter Mayday
8. Bio Hazard Alarm at Main Post Office
Daily Staffing:
The daily staffing of the Squad Companies will be managed by the Operations District Chiefs.
A. A minimum of four (4) [‘officially’ qualified as defined by Fire Administration] fully
trained personnel will be assigned to each company every tour. Members do not have to be
regularly assigned to the Squad Company to be considered qualified for detail purposes. During
the initial start-up phase of the Squads, a minimum of two (2) trained [‘officially’ qualified]
members will be assigned to each Squad Company every tour until sufficient number of detail
members within Operations can be trained.
B. Qualification Requirements for Detail Personnel: 40-hour Hazardous Materials
Technician and Basic Emergency Rescue Technician or CFD equivalent.
1

SQUAD COMPANY RESPONSES
Section 207.01
Rev. 8/08
Page 2 of 3
On-Scene Priorities:
A. One-Alarm Fire:
1. Report to Incident Commander for Assignment
2. If a stationary Command has not been established perform search and rescue of areas not
currently searched by other companies. Update location and progress of search to avoid
duplication of search efforts. Search efforts shall be focused above the fire.
3. Assist with deployment of fire attack lines.
4. Work with the Incident Commander to determine structural stability for overhaul
activities.
5. Shall not be assigned as the incident Rapid Assistance Team
6. Assist with overhaul operations as directed by the Incident Commander
7. Assist with placing other companies back in service.
B. Two-Alarm or Greater Fire:
1. Report to Incident Commander for assignment.
2. Second Squad Company should be utilized as a RAT Assist Team on the exterior of the
building if possible.
3. The Second Squad Company shall position the apparatus in a manner to facilitate a rapid
exit from the scene should another response become necessary. All equipment should be
procured from the first arriving Squad Company leaving the second Squad intact for
future response.
C. High Rise Fire:
First Arriving Squad:
1. Report to Command
2. Verify fire floor and report findings to Command
3. Ascend evacuation stairwell
4. Assure tenability of evacuation stairwell
5. Perform primary search on floor above the fire and report findings to command
6. Search for fire extension above the fire
A. Trash Chutes
B. Curtain Walls
C. Elevators
D. Utility Shaft
7. Report Conditions, Actions and Needs to Incident Commander
Second Arriving Squad:
1. Report to Command
2. Ascend to top floor of structure – Clear Roof
3. Search and clear the evacuation and fire attack stairwell from the top floor down to
the exit.
4. Check for smoke stratification on floors between the roof and the fire floor. Report
findings to Command.
5. Any ventilation will be coordinated with Command.
2

SQUAD COMPANY RESPONSES
Section 207.01
Rev. 8/08
Page 3 of 3

D. Vehicle/Machinery Entrapments:
1. Squad Company officer shall command the extrication until the arrival of a Chief
Officer. Upon the arrival of a Chief Officer the Squad Company Officer shall
command the rescue and the Chief Officer will be in overall command.
2. Ensure scene safety
a. Charged hose line with foam capability
b. Proper PPE
c. Traffic controlled
d. Batteries disconnected
e. Vehicle stabilized in three axis
f. Utilities secured (Overhead wires/gas lines)
g. Spills contained
3. Size up the extrication efforts of companies working on scene.
a. If current efforts are adequate the Squad will perform a support and instructional
role.
b. If conditions dictate additional equipment and/or methods the Squad Company
Officer will confer with companies already working relaying the revised
extrication plan and ensuring all understand the revised plan.
c. The Squad Company Officer has the final authority in matters regarding
extrication techniques.
E. Hazardous Materials Response:
1. Both Squad Companies will respond with the Task Force from Station 17.
2. One of the Squad Company Officers will be assigned as the Hazmat Operations
Officer under the Incident Commander.
3. Red, Yellow and Green zones shall be established.
4. A Science Officer shall be appointed to research the chemical.
5. An Entry Team shall be established.
6. A back-up entry team shall be established.
7. A formal Decon line shall be in place prior to teams entering the Red Zone.
F. Technical Rescue:
1. The on-scene Squad Company officer shall be responsible for the decisions regarding
specialized rescue size-ups, techniques and methods. Overall command of the
incident shall remain with the Incident Commander. If the Squad Company officer
determines the incident will require more trained personnel or equipment than both
Squad companies can provide a request for regional or State assets shall be made
through the Incident Commander.
2. A Rescue Command officer shall be assigned as early as possible to work directly
under the Incident Commander.
3. The Squad company Officer shall function as the Rescue Team Manager (RTM)
4. A complete plan of action shall be created with all members briefed on the plan prior
to going to work.
3


